Lycoming LTP EMM

DATE Jap 22/81
NO. Re 1
FAA APPROVED l.YCOMINGNO. LTHO1-2
GAS TURBINE ENGINE
MODELS
LTP 101-600A-1A
LTP 101-700A-1A
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
All rights reserved. No part of this work may be repro-

duced or copied in any form or by any means without
written permission of Avco Lycoming Division.
THIS PUBLICATION SUPERSEDES LYCOMING NO. 76-9 DATED 1 FEBRUARY

1976 INCLUDING ALL CHANGES FOR ENGINE MODELS LTP 101-600A-1A
AND -700A·lA. LYCOMING NO. 76-9 SHALL BE RETAINED FOR USE ON
ENGINE MODELS LTP 101-600 AND -600A.
AVCD LYCOMlNG DIVISION

STRATFORD. CONN.
1 AUGUST 1978
FAA APPROVED LYCOMINGNO. LTP 101-2
GAS TURBINE ENGINE
MODELS
LTP 101-600A-1 LTP 101-600A-1A
LTP 101-600A-1B
LTP 101-700A-1 LTP 101-700A-1A
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
© 1978, Avco Lycoming Division
All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reprà

duced or copied in any form or by any means without
written permission of Avco Lycoming Division.
APAVCD LYOOMING OIVISION

STRATFORO, CONN,
1 AUGUST 1978
A
JAVCO LYCOMING OlVISION
LTP101 Maintenance Manual
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
CHAPTER/
SECTION PAGE DATE
List of Effective Pages 1 thru 4 Aug 1/78
Contents 1 thru 2 Aug 1/78
1-00-00 1 thru 4 Aug 1/78
70-00-00 1 thru 62 Aug 1/78
71-00-00 1 thru 32 Aug 1/78
72-00-00 1 thru 62 Aug 1/78
72-20-00 1 thru 6 Aug 1/78
72-30-00 1 thru 12 Aug 1/78
72-40-00 1 thru 8 Aug 1/78
72-50-00 1 thru 12 Aug 1/78
72-60-00 1 thru 12 Aug 1/78
73-00-00 1 thru 18 Aug 1/78
74-00-00 1 thru 12 Aug 1/78
75-00-00 1 thru 16 Aug 1/78
77-00-00 1 thru 14 Aug 1/78
79-00-00 1 thru 14 Aug 1/78
1
AVCO L.YCOMING 01VISION
RECORD OF MANUAL REVISIONS
REV ISSUE DATE REV ISSUE DATE REV ISSUE DATE

NO. DATE INSERTED BY NO. DATE INSERTED BY NO. DATE INSERTED BY
2 © 1978, Avco Lycorning Division

e me
*
CûlCO LYCOMING OlVIS10N
LTa10 BOm±=L 1
Ê..TP 501- Z.. TVku.)7. MAUt/AL..
TŒCOltD OF MANUAL CIIANCE NOTICES
..
DATE DATE DATE INCOllPORATED IN' O

NO. CITAI'TER/SECTION ISSUED INSERTED BY REMOVED IlY MANUAL I3Y CIIC. NO.
7 2.20 <D
/¡ -
ÎÛ p- I 3 '/37 U† ')C
gi /, fyd
~7
"~
|} g
72.-o¤-
. / /
‡, i y // 17
. 22-- 0 0 "
p. 7 '74
'
|z
°°
I3
.°,
i /
ea .
o
/C c/
I7
IS
32
CD DO
00 07
.dálcO LYCOMING OlVISION
METO'I Øvedwdkasmal
7flo!" L Amm. 1AwAL.
1RECORD OF MANUAL CHANCE NOTICES

e
MCN DATE DATE DATE INCORPORATED INTO

NO. CIIAPTER/SECTION ISSUED INSERTED BY REMOYED BY MANUAL BY CIIG. NO
//79
'je
CO
P- I
no -oò
kJß-
00-00
-3 2 C yp
. L
e
co:tav C.O LYOOMING OMSION .
Liem±- :I±+rmen
. grP Jo in as. TIMuna. ·
fŒCORD OF MANUAL CIIANCE NOTICES
MCN DATE DATE DATE INCORPORATED INTO

NO CIIAPTEl /SECTION ISSUED INSEitTED BY llEMOVED 13Y MANUAL UY CIlG. No.
20
LL
71
7 76 C
·LL/
3A;
.ro-Do
-cc
e . Ca
?Z'u/CO LYOOMING OlVlSIOlNI
ownr um
. i P /0/ -
2 rod 71-a- L
lŒCORD OF MANUAL CHANCE NOTICES
DATE DATE DATE INCORPORATED INTO

CO.PT USECT ON ISSUED INSERTED BY REMOVED BY MANUAL UY CIIC. NO.
2/ 2/n we
{)
..
L
o
ASIWCO LYCOMING OlVISION
DATE Jan 22|81 STRATPORC. CONNECTICUT
NO. 80
MANUAL CHANGE NOTICE
TKIS CHANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
INSERT THIS PAGE Facing page 3/4
On page 3/4, List of Service Bulletins paragraph is revised as follows:
LIST OF SERVICE BULLETINS. Following is a numerical list of service bul-

letins with their revision number, issue date, and, if a change to the
manual was necessary, dae manual revision date that the change was incor-
porated. If no change to the manual was necessary, "no effect" will be in-
dicated in lieu of a manual revision date.
Service Bulletin Manual Revision

Number Issue Date Date
101A-72-0001 Revision No. 2 30 Sept, 80 No Effect
101A-72-0002 Revision No. 2 9 Jul, 80 No Effect
101A-72-0003 31 Aug, 78 No Effect
101A-75-0005 Revision No. 1 30 Apr, 80 No Effect
101A-73-0006 15 May, 80 No Effect
101A-79-0007 Revision No. 1 15 Jun, 79 No Effect
101A-72-0009 30 Nov, 79 No Effect
101A-72-0012 Revision No. 1 29 Aug, 80 No Effect
101A-72-0013 15 Oct, 79 No Effect
101A-72-0014 21 Dec, 79 No Effect
The technical aspects of this MCN were approved by FAA per Avco Lycom'Ì¾g"UËí.
Sheet 1 of 1
AVCC LYCOMING OIVISION
LIST OF SERVICE BULLETINS. Following is a nu- "no effect" will be indicated in lieu of a manual revi-
merical list of service bulletins with their revision num- sion date.
ber, issue date, and, if a change to the manual was nec-
essary, the manual revision date that the change was Service bulletins apply to LTP101-600A-1, 600A-1A,
incorporated. If no change to the manual was necessary and 600A-1B engine models.
Service Bulletin Manual Revision

Number Issue Date Date
101A-72-0001 15 Nov., 77 No Effect
101A-72-0002 15 Dec., 77 No Effect
© 1978, Avco Lycoming Division 3/4

JAVCO LYCOMING OIVISION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
Subject Number ,
Title
1-00-00 Introduction
70-00-00 Standard Practices, Time and Cycle Coding
71-00-00 Power Plant
72-00-00 Engine, Consumable Materials
72-20-00 Air Inlet Section
72-30-00 Compressor Section
72-40-00 Combustion Section
72-50-00 Turbine Section
72-60-00 Accessory Drives/Reduction Gear Section
73-00-00 Fuel System
74-00-00 Ignition System
75-00-00 Air System
77-00-00 Indicating Systems
79-00-00 Lubrication System
Contents

AVCC LYCOMING OlVISION
INTRODUCTION
Chapter/Section
Paragraph Subject Page
Number Title Number . Number
1. ScopeofManual ............ . . .........

1-00-00
2. UseofManual ................ . . . .......
1-00-00
3. Notes, Cautions, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-00-00
4. LogbookUse ........... . ... . ... . .......
1-00-00
1-00-00

JAVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
starrPCMO, C©NNECTICI.if
DATE Jan 22Á81
NO . $$
THIS CHANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
INSERT THIS PAGE Facing page 3, 1-00-00
On page 3, paragraph 1 is revised as follows:
1. SCOPE OF MANUAL.
This manual describes in detail the operations necessary for complete

maintenance of Avco Lycoming LTP 101-600A-1A and -700A-1A Engines.
The technical aspects of this McN were approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of 1
AVCO LYCOMING OIVISION
INTRODUCTION
1. SCOPE OF MANUAL. Section 72-00-00 covers maintenance on complete engines,

subsequent sections and chapters cover maintenance on
This manual describes in detail the operations necessary subassemblies, components, and accessories that make up
'
for complete maintenance of Avco Lycoming LTP101- the engine. Where applicable, description and operation,
600A-1, 600A-1A, and 600A-1B, 700A-1 and 700A-lA disassembly, cleaning, inspection, repair, assembly, and
Engines. testing of each item is covered. Special Tools required
for maintenance are listed. Specific instructions are given
2. USE OF MANUAL. in detail sections, while general procedures are covered
in Section 70-00-00.
NOTICE
Manual content covers all the maintenance procedures
FAA Regulations prohibit the flying currently approved by Avco Lycoming. However, the
of any aircraft unless it has been de- manufacturer has a continuing program to develop addi-
termined to be in an airworthy con- tional repair procedures, refine assembly and test techni-
dition. The operator, owner, or any ques, etc. which will be issued as revisions or Manual
other person who is charged with the Change Notices (MCN) and considered a part of the
responsibility for ascertaining that an Maintenance Manual. Significant modifications and cer-
aircraft is airworthy, must have and tain requirements are covered by issuance of Service
use the most recent technical informa- Bulletins, which take precedance over and supplement
tion. This document, at the time of instructions in this Maintenance Manual.
its initial delivery, is current and up-
to-date, and the considerations of 3. NOTES, CAUTIONS, AND WARNINGS.
safety, legality, and economy demand
that it be kept current and up-to-date. Notes, cautions, and warnings, found throughout this
If any clarification is required, please manual, precede the text to which each applies. Condi-
address questions to: tions for use are as follows:
Product Support Department NOTE

Avco Lycoming Division
550 South Main Street To highlight essential procedures, condi-
Stratford, Connecticut 06497 tions, information, etc.
Attention: Manager of General
Aviation Projects CAUTION
This manual is to be used in conjunction with: TO HIGHLIGHT PROCEDURES,

PRACTICES, ETC., WHICH IF NOT
A. Illustrated Parts Catalog, Lycoming No. LTP101-4. STRICTLY OBSERVED, WILL RE-
SULT IN DAMAGE TO, OR DE-
B. Applicable manuals covering installation and STRUCTION OF EQUIPMENT.
maintenance of kits.
WARNING
C. Applicable airframe manufacturers flight and
maintenance manuals. TO HIGHLIGHT PROCEDURES,
PRACTICES, ETC., WHICH WOULD
Section 71-00-00 describes complete engines and systems RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY,
and provides instructions and requirements for installa- OR LOSS OF LIFE, IF NOT COR-
tion, runup and corrosion control. RECTLY FOLLOWED.
1-00-00
3
AVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
4. LOGBOOKUSE. propriate logbook sections. Instructions for using the

logbook are located on its first page. Ensure operating
A logbook for each engine/module is packaged with time, and operating cycles accumulated on part replaced,
each engine/module and is issued to provide a document are entered in appropriate block and returned with any
for recording maintenance actions, operating time and equipment sent for repair or overhaul. Missing informa-
cycles, and to provide immediate summary of operating tion on parts that are returned for overhaul, could pos-
history. At the completion of engine/module repair, sibly result in part being scrapped.
entries recording these actions must be made in the ap-
1-00.00
4 © 1978, Avco Lycoming Division

AVCO LYCOMING OIVIS10N
STANDARD PRACTICES AND TIME AND CYCLE CODING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
Number Title Number Number
1. Standard Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 3
2. DefinitionofTerms .......... . ........ ........
70-00-00 3
3. Lockwiring ............... ... .. . ........
70-00-00 3
4. Marking High Temperature Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 3
5. Identification of Metal Particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 3
6. Use of Penetrating Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 9
7. Use of Antiseize Compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 9
8. Lubrication of Packings and O-Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 9
9. General Disassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 9
10. General Reassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 10
11. Bearing Removal and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 10
12. MainshaftSealData ........... .. ... ........
70-00-00 11
13. Standard Torque Procedures and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 13
14. Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 18
15. DryCleaningSolvent ..............................
70-00-00 25
16. Removing Fingerprints from Machined Surfaces After Cleaning . . . . .
70-00-00 25
17. Cleaning of Gears and Splined Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 25
18. Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 26
19. Dye-Penetrant Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 26
20. Seal Journal Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 26
21. Inspection of Gears and Splined Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 26
22. Inspection of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 27
23. BlendRepair ........... . . .............
70-00-00 27
24. Fusion-Weld (TIG) Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 33
25. SilverBrazeRepair ..................... ........
70-00-00 43
26. Thread Repair and Screw-Thread Inserts (Helical Coils) . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 44
27. Replacement of Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 44
28. Repair of Seal Journals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 45
29. Repair of Gears and Splined Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 45
30. Thread Repair and Screw-Thread Inserts (Rosan Inserts) . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 45
31, Touchup Procedure for Damaged Black Oxide Coating . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 60
32. Chemical Film Coating for Aluminum and Alurninum Alloys
(Alodine, Nonimmersible Process) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 61
33, Torch-Braze Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 61
34, Time and Cycle Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 62
70-00-00
1
AVCD LYCOlvifNG OlVISION
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Chapter/Section
Figure Subject Page
1. LockwiringProcedure ...............................
70-00-00 7
2. Lockwiring Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 8
3. Carbon Face Chipping and Scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 12
4. Application of Torque Wrench Extension Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 13
5. Stepped and Straight Stud Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 17
6. GearandSplineDamage ..............................
70-00-00 30
7. Measuring Spline Wear (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 33
8. Bearing Orientation Terminology (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 34
9. BearingDamage ..................................
70-00-00 35
10. Cutaway of Engine to Show Location of Mainshaft Bearing Positions . .
70-00-00 42
11. Installation and Removal of Ring Locked Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 46
12. Installation and Removal of Slimsert Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 51
13. Installation and Removal of Ring Locked Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 54
LIST OF TABLES
Chapter/Section
Table Subject Page
1. DefinitionofTerms ................................
70-00-00 4
2. Recommended Torque Wrench Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 13
3. StandardTorqueValues .............................
70-00-00 15
4. Visual Inspection of Gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 27
5. Gears and Splined Parts Damage - Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 28
6. Bearing Visual Inspection, Damage, and Probable Causes . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 37
7. Detail Bearing Inspection Limits (Mainshaft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 40
8. Ring Locked Inserts, Lockrings, and Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 47
9. Slimsert Inserts and Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 52
10. Ring Locked Studs, Lockrings, and Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-00-00 55
11. TimeandCycleCode ...............................
70-00-00 62
70-00-00

STANDARD PRACTICES AND TIME AND CYCLE CODING
1. STANDARD PRACTICES. Marking ink (Marco No. S1141 Black).
This section provides recommended standard practices Marking pencil (Marks-A-Lot Pencil, Red, Green,
'
applicable to the cleaning, inspection, and repair of or Yellow).
LTP101 engines, manufactured by Avco Lycoming Divi-
sion, Stratford, Connecticut. Marker, Opco (Blue).
2. DEFINITION OF TERMS. Refer to table 1 for de- 5. IDENTIFICATION OF METAL PARTICLES. Proceed
finition of terms used to identify conditions sometimes as follows:
found during inspection of engine parts.
WARNING
3. LOCKWIRING. Proceed as follows:
CHEMICALS USED IN FOLLOWING
NOTE TESTS ARE HAZARDOUS AND RE-
QUIRE SPECIAL HANDLING. SOLID
Lockwiring is a procedure used for AMMONIUM BIFLUORIDE IS
securing two or more parts with CRYSTALLINE AND CAN BE CON-
wire that is installed in such a man- VENIENTLY STORED IN A DRY
ner that any tendency for such PLACE AND USED AS NEEDED.
parts to loosen will initiate counter-
active tightening of the wire. A. When unidentified particles of metal are found,
they are likely to be steel, aluminum, magnesium silver,
A. Wire shall be 0.020 inch in diameter unless other- or bronze. In some cases, the type of metal may be
wise specified. determined by its color and hardness. However, when
particles cannot be positively identified by visual inspec-
B. Maximum span between tension points shall be 6 tion and knowledge of the exact character of the metal
inches unless otherwise specified. is desired, a few simple tests will suffice. The following
equipment and chemicals are required for these tests:
C. The wire shall be kept taut while twisting. Cau-
tion must be exercised to keep the wire tight without WARNING
overstressing. The number of twists per inch shall be
approximately eight. Nicks, kinks, and other mutilations USE EXTREME CARE WHEN HAND-
are not acceptable. To avoid abrasions from pliers, grasp LING ACIDS. CHEMICALS USED IN
the wire end or at a point that will not be twisted. FOLLOWING TESTS ARE HAZARD-
OUS AND REQUIRE SPECIAL HAND-
D. Lockwire must be tight after installation to pre- LING. SOLID AMMONIUM BIFLUOR-
vent failure from rubbing or vibration. IDE IS CRYSTALLINE AND CAN BE
CONVENIENTLY STORED IN A DRY
E. Lockwire ends shall be cut off at least three com- PLACE.
plete twists from last tension point; then turned in to
prevent snagging. (1) A source of open flame.
F. Lockwiring procedures and applications are shown (2) Permanent magnet.

in 70-00-00, figures 1 and 2.
(3) Ammonium nitrate (10%).
4. MARKING HIGH TEMPERATURE MATERIALS.
When marking on materials subject to high temperatures, (4) Electric soldering iron.
only those marking materials listed as follows, or their
equivalent, shall be used. (5) Hydrochloric acid.
Marking pencil (Yellow Colorbrite No. 2107, 2127, (6) Concentrated nitric acid (O-N-350) (50%
or No. 4127). by volume).
70-00-00
3
AVCO LYCOMING OlVISION
Table 1. Definition of Terms
Term Definition Probable Cause
Abrasion Roughened surface, varying from Abrasive material hitting surface

*
light to severe
Bend Distortion in a part (differs from Exposure to heat or excessive force

local change in conformation)
Blister Raised portion of a surface separ- Poor original bond or excessive heat or
ated from the base. Generally pressure
found on surface-treated parts,
such as plated or painted surfaces
Break Separation of a part Severe force, pressure, or overload
Buckling Large-scale deformation of part Pressure or impact with a foreign object, un-
contour usual structural pressures, excessive localized
heating, or any combination of these causes
Burning Melting or loss of material Excessive heat
Burnishing The smoothing of a metal surface Rubbing

by mechanical action, but without
loss of material. Surface discolor-
ation is sometimes present around
the outer edges of the burnished
area
NOTE
Normal burnishing from

operational service is not
detrimental if coverage ap-
proximates the carrying load
and if there is no evidence
of burns.
Burr A rough edge or sharp projection Excessive wear or poor machining
Chipping Breaking away of small metallic Heavy impact of foreign object

particles
Corrosion Surface chemical action that Improper corrosion-preventive procedures and

results in surface discoloration, a excessive moisture
layer of oxide, or in the advanced
stages, removal of surface metal
Corrosion Irregular surface depressions having Corrosion substance adhering to exposed sur-
Pitting ragged edges due to metal removal faces
Crack A break in material Severe stress from overloading or shock
70-00-00

JAVCC3 LYCOMING OIVISiON
Table 1. Definition of Terms -

Continued
Term Definition Probable Cause
Crazing Minute cracking which tends to Uneven cooling or thermal shock

run in all directions. It is often
noticed on coated surfaces
Dent A small, smooth depression A sharp blow or excessive pressure
Distortion A change from original shape Exposure to severe heat
Erosion Wearing away of metal and/or Hot gases, corrosive liquid, or grit
surface coating
Fatigue Relatively deep irregular surface Advanced corrosion condition or fatigue

Pitting cavities resulting from the breaking generated by high-stress conditions
away of portions of the surface
Flaking Loose particles of surface metal Imperfect bond or severe load

surface covering
Fracture Separation of a part Severe force, pressure, or overload
Fretting Discoloration of contacting parts Movement between two contacting surfaces

resulting from the removal of
original surface material
Frosting Minute indentations within a local- Generally a wear-in process

ized area
Gouging Removal of surface metal typified Protruding object, misalignment

by rough and deep depressions
Heat Discoloring Characterized by a discoloring film. High-temperature operation

Color varies from straw, tan, and
light brown to red-purple, purple
and blue
Inclusion Foreign matter enclosed in metal Occurs during manufacture of the metal
Indenting Smooth surface depressions. Loose material flattened by rolling action will
Evidenced by metal displacement, create smootlt, shallow indents
not metal removal
Lack of Braze Interruption (air picket) in joint or Improper braze-repair

fillet cross-section braze material
Metallization Molten metal coating of a part Molten particles sprayed through the engine
Nick A sharp-bottomed depression that Impingement of foreign object on surface

may have rough outer edges
70-00-00
5
Table 1. Definition of Terms -

Continued
s Definition Probable Cause
Peening Flattening or displacement of metal Repeated blows. A surface may be peened by

continuous impact of foreign objects or loose
parts
Pickup Transfer of one material into Insufficient lubrication, unbroken edges of

another press-fitted parts, and seizure of rotating parts
during operation
Pitting Small indentations in a surface; Chemical pitting. Oxidation of surface or

usually smooth-bottomed electrolytic action
Mechanical pitting. Chipping of surfaces caused

by improper clearances and overloading, and
by pressure of foreign material
Scoring Deep scratches following parts Breakdown of localized lubrication between

path of travel sliding surfaces of foreign material
Scratch A very shallow furrow or irregularity; Movement of a sharp object across the surface
usually longer than wide
Stress Failure Metal failure Compression, tension, shear, torsion, or shock
Compression. Action of two opposed forces

that tend to squeeze a part
Tension. Action of two directly opposed forces

that tend to stretch a part.
Shear. Action of two parallel forces acting in

opposite directions.
Torsion. Action of two opposed forces around

a common axis
Shock. Instantaneous application of stress
Stripped Thread Nut, stud, bolt, or screw damaged Improper installation or mismatching thread
by tearing away part of thread size
form
Sulfidation Hot corrosion attack on turbine Sea salt in injested air

section base metals
Tear Parting of parent material Excess tension, created by an external force
Unbalance A condition that usually results Unequal distribution of mass about a rotating
in vibration axis
Void A continuous lack of braze material Improper repair

through a braze joint cross-section
70-00-00

1. LOCKWlRE HOLES PARALLEL 2. INSERTING WIRE 3. BENDING WIRE AROUND BOLT
6. BENDING WIRE AROUND BOLT
4. TWISTING WIRE
5. PULLING WIRE
7. TWISTING WIRE 8. BENDING TWISTED WIRE 9. CUTTING EXCESS WIRE
XA-1012-248
Figure 1. Lockwiring Procedure
70-00-00
7
AVCO LYCOMtNG OlVISION
LTPIO1 Maintenance Manual
(3) Aluminum. When a particle of aluminum is

placed in hydrochloric acid (50 percent by volume), it
will fizz with rapid emission of gas bubbles and gradu-
ally disintegrate to form a black residue (aluminum
chloride). Silver and bronze do not noticeably react
with hydrochloric acid.
(4) Aluminum paint. Use the following proce-

dure to determine whether or not material is aluminum
silicone paint, aluminum chips or silver particles.
(a) Make a sodium hydroxide solution by

adding one sodium hydroxide pellet to 3 cubic centi-
X A-1 012-249
meters of water.
Figure 2. Lockwiring Applications
(b) Place several drops of this solution in
the watch glass and drop in the suspected particles.
(7) Sodium hydroxide pellets.
1 If particles are aluminum silicone
paint, there will be a mild reaction in the form of gas
(8) Watch glass.
bubbles and some visible gas as particles change to so-
(9) White porcelain spot plate. dium aluminate.
(10) Ammonium bifluoride crystals. 2 If particles are aluminum chips, re-

action will be much more active with many more gas
(11) Concentrated sulfuric acid (0-S-809) (5 to bubbles forming and more visible gas.
10%).
3 If particles are silver, there will be
(12) Hydrogen peroxide (3 to 10%). no reaction.
(13) Concentrated phosphoric acid (No. 131). (5) Silver. When a silver particle is placed in ni-
tric acid (O-N-350) it reacts rather slowly, producing
B. The following test procedures are recommended a whitish fog in the acid.
for determining the character of unknown metal parti-
cles. For best results, follow steps as outlined: (6) Bronze. When a bronze (or copper) particle
is placed in nitric acid, a bright green cloud is produced.
(1) Steel. Particles can be isolated by means of
the permanent magnet. Steel or iron is attracted by (7) Titanium. Place the piece or pieces of metal
magnet. to be identified on the white porcelain spot plate. A
piece of titanium or titanium bearing metal should be
WARNING placed on another spot plate to observe and verify re-
sults obtained. Proceed as follows:
IN FOLLOWING STEP, NEVER AT-
TEMPT TO BURN MORE THAN A (a) Add several crystals of ammonium bi-
FEW PARTICLES OF METAL SUS- fluoride and 5 to 10 drops of water to the metal parti-
PECTED TO BE MAGNESIUM. MAG- cles. (2 to 3 drops of a 5 to 10 percent solution of
NESIUM POWDER OR DUST IS hydrofluoric acid can be used instead.)
EXPLOSIVE.
(b) Let stand 20 to 30 minutes, or until
(2) Magnesium. A simple test for these particles solution becomes slightly discolored.
is burning over an open flame. Magnesium will burn
with a bright white flash. (c) Add 2 to 3 drops of 1:1 sulfuric acid
(1 part water to 1 part concentrated acid).
70-00-00

AVCD LYCOtVtlNG OlVISION
(d) Let stand 20 to 30 minutes, or until 8. LUBRICATION OF PACKINGS AND 0-RINGS.

solution becomes more discolored. Proceed as follows:
(e) Add 3 to 4 drops of 3 to 10 percent A. All gaskets, preformed packings, and O-rings re-
hydrogen peroxide. Solution must not be too old. moved during disassembly, shall be replaced with new,
serviceable items.
(f) If titanium is present, a yellowish color
will develop. This yellow color will become progressively CAUTION
darker with time, if allowed to set.
DO NOT LUBRICATE CARBON
(g) Add 2 to 3 drops of concentrated SEALS. TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO
phosphoric acid (No. 131) and stir to discharge any LIP SEALS DURING DRY RUNNING
yellow color due to possible presence of iron. Any light PERIODS OR INITIAL STARTS, DIP
yellow or orange coloration indicates presence of titan- ALL LIP SEALS IN APPROVED
ium. ENGINE LUBRICATING OIL BEFORE
INSTALLATION.
6. USE OF PENETRATING OILS. Proceed as follows:
B. Lubricate packings used in the fuel system with
A. Apply penetrating oil (VV-P-216) as required, to petrolatum (V-V-P-236) to facilitate installation.
assist in removal of parts (especially parts exposed to
high temperature) during disassembly. C. Lubricate packings used in the pneumatic system
with grease (MIL-G-4343) to facilitate installation.
B. On parts to be reinstalled, remove all traces of
penetrating oil with dry cleaning solvent. D. Lubricate packings used in the oil system with
shortening (EE-S-321).
7. USE OF ANTISEIZE COMPOUNDS.Proceed as fol-
lows: 9. GENERAL DISASSEMBLYPROCEDURES. Proceed
as follows:
A. To facilitate subsequent disassembly, apply anti-
seize compound to all threaded parts attached to the NOTE
hot section except fuel fittings and locations where
another compound is specified. . The following procedures are practices
that should be adhered to during
NOTE disassembly operations.
When using antiseize compound on A. Check and record gear pattern and backlash, when
igniter plugs or igniter plug connec- apþ1icable.
tors, use compound sparingly and
ensure that compound does not B. Check thickness and tag shims, when applicable,
contact insulation material.
WARNING
If antiseize compound is required
in assembly of parts which are NEVER USE A LEAD (GRAPHITE)
bathed by the lubrication system, PENCIL TO MARK HOT END
all excess compound must be PARTS. USE ONLY APPROVED
wiped from threads and mating MARKERS (YELLOW COLORBRITE
surfaces. NO. 2107, 2127 or 4127).
B. Two approved antiseize compounds are: Molykote C. Before removal or disassembly, index all parts for
Antiseize compound and Ease-Off 990. Equivalent may reassembly in proper positions.
be used.
70-00-00
9
D. Record and tag defective parts. Record reason for C. Lubricate packings, lip seals, and O-rings with pro-
rejection (excluding parts that are normally replaced, per lubricant for system involved. (Refer to paragraph 8.)
such as gaskets, packings, etc.).
D. When seals, packings, cotter pins, and lockwashers
E. When disconnecting electrical connectors or hose are involved in reassembly, use new items.
'
and tube fittings, remove ties, clamps, or brackets, as
required, to gain slack and to avoid damage to connec- E. Apply Molykote antiseize thread compound to
tors and fittings. threaded hot end parts. (Refer to paragraph 7.)
F. Protect all hoses, fittings, and ports with clean F. Use either Plastilube Moly No. 3, or ML7 plus 2
caps or plugs. to lubricate accessory drive splines which are not lubri-
cated by engine oil.
G. Ensure that all electrical power is off and system
air, fuel, and oil pressures are zero. G. Depreservation of Bearings. Prior to installation of
bearings, depreservation shall be accomplished in a suit-
H. Disconnect ignition unit input connector before able tank as follows:
disconnecting igniter plugs. Ground igniter plug lead
immediately after removal. NOTE
I. Use penetrating oil (VV-P-216) when disassembling Tank shall have a false bottom for
hot end parts. (Refer to paragraph 6.) sludge separation and be equipped with
a filtration system.
10. GENERAL REASSEMBLYPROCEDURES. Proceed
as follows: (1) Static-soak bearings for a minimum of 15
minutes in dry cleaning solvent (P-D-680). If solvent
CAUTION does not remove preservative, use a hot-oil soak with
77°
approved engine lubricating oil heated to to 88°C
(171°
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS SHALL to 190°F).
BE ADHERED TO DURING RE-
ASSEMBLY TO ENSURE THAT (2) Rinse bearings in dry cleaning solvent (P-D-
ALL PARTS HAVE BEEN PROPERLY 680). Control rotation of bearing to ensure removal of
INSTALLED AS INDEXED AT RE- oil preservative. Rotate bearings by hand only. Do not
MOVAL AND NECESSARY TOLER- spin dry.
ANCE CHECKS PERFORMED.
(3) Dip bearings in approved engine lubricating
DO NOT USE CADMIUM PLATED oil.
TOOLS FOR ANY OF THE ASSEM-
BLY PROCEDURES IN THIS 11. BEARING REMOVAL AND HANDLING. Proceed
MANUAL. CADMIUM PLATING HAS as follows:
A TENDENCY TO CHIP. IF THESE
CHIPS ENTER THE ENGINE THEY A. Cleaning of Bearings Prior to Removal. This shall
WILL CONTAMINATETHE LUBRI- be limited to carefully wiping foreign material away
CATION SYSTEM AND CAUSE from the bearing faces with clean lint-free wipers. If
MAGNESIUM PARTS TO DETER- such cleaning is not accomplished, metal chips or other
IORATE. abrasives may be forced into the bearings during the
removal operation.
A. Remove corrosion preventive compounds from
parts which are bathed by the engine lubrication sys-
tem.
B. If no torque value is called out in assembly pro-

cedure, use standard torque for item, based on material,
part, and thread size. (Refer to paragraph 13.)
70-00-00

..dPAVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
DATE Oct 26/81 STRATFORO, CONN,
no. 104
TRIS CHÄNGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual

On page 11, paragraph 11, CAUTION preceding step B. is revised as follows:
CAUTION
IN FOLIDWING STEP, WHENREMOVING A BEARING, EXER-

CISE CARE TO ROTATE THE BEARING ONLY AS NECESSARY
SINCE SUCH ROTATION WILL TEND TO GRIND DIRT OR
GRIT INTO THE ROLLING ELEMENTS AND RACEWAYS.
NEVER SP IN A BEARING BEFORE IT HAS BEEN THOROUGH-
LY CLEANED. PRESS OR PULL ON THE RACE HAVING THE
INTERFERENCE FIT. IF PRESSURE IS APPLIED AGAINST
THE WRONGRACE OR AGAINST THE ROLLING ELEMENTS OR
RETAINER, DAMAGE IN THE FORM OF BRINELLING, BEND-
ING, OR FRACTURE MAY RESULT. BEARINGS WHICH, DUE
TO DESIGN OF INSTALLATION, MUST BE PULLED USING
THE FREE (WRONG) RACE, ROLLING ELEMENTS, OR RE-
TAINER, MUST NOT BE REUSED IF REMOVED.
The technical aspects of this MCN were approved by FAA per Arco Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of 1
AJAVCD LYCOMING OlVISION
CAUTION (1) Dip bearings in dry cleaning solvent (P-D-

680) for several seconds to remove as much oil and
IN FOLLOWING STEP, WHEN RE- contamination as possible.
MOVING A BEARING, EXERCISE
CARE TO ROTATE THE BEARING (2) Bench drain bearings to remove excess sol-
ONLY AS NECESSARY SINCE SUCH vent; then immerse in corrosion preventive compound
ROTATION WILL TEND TO GRIND (MIL-C-ll796).
DIRT OR GRIT INTO THE ROLLING
ELEMENTS AND RACEWAYS. NEV- (3) Wrap bearings individually in barrier material
ER SPIN A BEARING BEFORE IT (MIL-B-121).
HAS BEEN THOROUGHLY CLEAN-
ED. PRESS OR PULL ON THE RACE 12. MAINSHAFT SEAL DATA. Proceed as follows:
HAVING THE INTERFERENCE FIT.
IF PRESSURE IS APPLIED AGAINST A. General.
THE WRONG RACE OR AGAINST
THE ROLLING ELEMENTS OR RE- (1) All new mainshaft carbon element seals shall
TAINER, DAMAGE IN THE FORM be handled with extreme caution and stored in their
OF BRINELLING, BENDING, OR original carton, or equivalent, until time for use.
FRACTURE MAY RESULT.
(2) Carbon element mainshaft seals should not be
B. Bearing Removal. Refer to Disassembly Sections lubricated for storage or prior to installation in engine.
of this manual for specific removal instructions. In
general, an arbor press, bearing puller, or similar equip- (3) Replace all defective seals.
ment, which applies a firm, steady pressure to the bear-
ing, is recommended. If a drift must be used, employ a B. Handling of seal.
soft metal drift and leather or plastic hammer. Be care-
ful that bearing is not canted. (1) Upon removal from engine, identify and tag
each seal with a nonmetallic fastener to prevent damage
C. Bearing Record. When removing failed bearings, to carbon elements. The following information should
use care to preserve any evidence of why failure occurred be included on each tag:
sirice this information may be used to isolate the cause
of failure. Never mix bearing components. It is recom- (a) Engine/Module serial number or identi-
mended that each bearing be tagged showing the posi- fication.
tion and the serial number of the engine/module from
which it was removed. Tags may be made of cardboard (b) Total operating time.
or soft metal with fasteners made of nylon,
(c) Seal part number and serial number.
D. Limited Storage. Proceed as follows:
CAUTION
CAUTION
DO NOT LUBRICATE OR PRESERVE
ALL BEARINGS MUST BE GIVEN SEALS WITH OIL.
THE CARE AND ATTENTION OUT-
LINED IN THE FOLLOWING PRO- (2) Seals should be stored in sealed polyethylene
CEDURES TO PRECLUDE UNNEC- bags (MIL-P-24466) in partitioned containers.
ESSARY CORROSION OR MIS-
HANDLING. (3) Inspect seals in a clean well-lighted area, free
from dust and other contaminants.
DO NOT PRESSURE-SPRAY OR
PRESSURE-DRY A BEARING THAT C. Inspection of carbon seals. Visually inspect intact
IS UNDERGOING A PARTIAL seal assemblies to determine general condition. Decide
CLEANING. CHANGE SOLVENT which of the following categories describes the condition
FREQUENTLY TO AVOID RECON- of the seal, and treat it accordingly.
TAMINATION OF BEARINGS.
70-00-00
11
(1) Seals are acceptable for reuse if within limits ABOUT THE MAGNITUDE OF A
as follows: SCRATCH, THE CARBON ELEMENT
SHALL BE REPLACED. WHEN USING
(a) Seals with little or no coke deposits on AN INSPECTION PROBE, ENSURE
the seal housing or carbon element. THAT IT IS LIGHTLY PASSED OVER
THE SCRATCH FOR DETECTION. DO
(b) Seals without visual defects on housing, NOT CAUSE CARBON ELEMENT TO
end plate, or carbon elements. MOVE WHEN USING PROBE. DO NOT
EXERT UNDUE FORCE ON THE CAR-
1_ Seal housing/end plate defect limits BON ELEMENT WHEN INSPECTING.
are as follows: LAPPING OF SEAL CARBON RINGS
IS NOT ALLOWED.
a Grooves on outside diameter are
acceptable up to 0.005 inch deep. c Scratched carbon element. Light
axial or circumferential scratches, as observed after seal
b Damage on inside diameter. None cleaning are acceptable, provided that they cannot be
allowed. detected with a 0.020 inch radius probe.
c Damage to housing/end plate is CAUTION

acceptable provided seal housing is not deformed.
WHEN DEPRESSING THE CARBONS,
2 Carbon element defect limits are as CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO AVOID
follows: DAMAGE OF THE ELEMENT OR
SUPPORTING COMPONENTS.COKE
a Broken carbon element. None al-
¯
AND/OR VARNISH MAY CAUSE
lowed. CARBON BUILDUP WHICH MAY
SCRATCH OR DAMAGE SEALING
b_ Minor chipping at carbon circum- FACES. EXCESSIVE FORCE OR
ferential edges, as observed after seal cleaning, is accept- CARELESSNESSMAY CAUSE
able if individual nicks or chips do not exceed 0.010 DAMAGE TO SEAL WHICH CANNOT
inch in width and 0.025 inch in length. Total length of BE DETECTED UNLESS THE SEAL
all chips shall not exceed 0.25 inch measured circum- IS COMPLETELY DISASSEMBLED.
ferentially on each side. Chips shall not be opposite one
another. (Refer to figure 3.) d Excessive coke on carbon element.
None allowed.
CAUTION
(c) Seals with carbon assemblies that have
SCRATCHES CAN LEAD TO CARBON unrestrained radial movement when lightly depressed and
CRUMBLING,CRACKING, OR CHIP- released to their original position.
PING. WHERE THERE IS DOUBT
(2) Replace seals if not within limits
CHIPPING CARBON RING- OBSERVED

1. MAX CHIP5 0.010 INCH IN SEAL
WIDTH BY 0.025 INCH y
ui
LENGTH SCRATCHES
2. CHIPS NOT TO BE ACCEPTABLE IF CANNOT
ON OPPO5|TE EDGES BE DETECTED WITH A 0.020
3. TOTAL LENGTH OF INCH PROBE.
OF ALL CHIP5 NOT
TO EXCEED 0.25 INCH
CARBON FACE ( ID)
XA-1012-250
Figure 3. Carbon Face Chipping and Scratches
70-00-00

JAvco LYCOMING DIVISION
STRATFORC, CONNŒCTICUT
DATE Jul 17/81
NO. 100
THIS CHANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintedance Manual
On page 12, paragraph 12, NOTE following step C. (1) (b) 2 a is added as
follows:
MOTE
The No. 2 bearing seal (Refer to 72-00-00, 3, figure

14) may have a crack in the carbon element at the
pin locati,on. This condition is acceptable and shall
not be cause for seal rejection.
The technical aspects of this MUNwere approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of I
APAVCO LYCOlVIING DIVISION
STRATFORO. CONN,
DATE Dec 22/81
NO. 106
INSERT TBIS PAGE Preceding page 13, 70-00-00
On page 13, paragraph 13, step D. and Figure 4. is revised as follows:
D. Torque extensions
wrench and adapters. Extensions or adapters
may be used with any torque wrench. Because extensions or adapters change
the length of the torque arm for which the scale is calibrated, torque
applied at the end of extension or adapter is not correctly indicated on
the scale and must be calculated. When using extensions or adapters, apply
the manual torque at the calculated arm length at the center of the
handle. When substituting values in formulas, use inch units to obtain an
answer in pound-inches, and foot units to obtain an answer in pound-feet.
To determine the indicated torque, using extensions or adapters, use the
formula shown in figure 4.
The technical aspects of this MON were approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Dec 22 781
No. 106
R= T- ( L )
( L+ E )
WHERE R = READING ON TORQUE WRENCH SCALE

APPLIED TORQUE OR ACTUAL TOROUE
L =
EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF WRENCH LEVER ARM
Il= EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF EXTENSION
+( (+(
NOTE: WITH ADAPTER IN THIS POSITION,

FORMULABECOMESR=T
XA-1045-192
Figure 4. Application of Torque Wrench Extension Formula
Sheet 2 of 2
AVCD LYCOMING OMSION
13. STANDARD TORQUE PROCEDURES AND VAL- D. Torque wrench extensions and adapters. Extensions
UES. Proceedas follows: or adapters may be used with any torque wrench. Be-
cause extensions or adapters change the length of the
A. Following are standard torque tables, figures, and torque arm for which the scale is calibrated, torque ap-
instructions for use of torque wrenches. plied at the end of extension or adapter is not correctly
indicated on the scale and must be calculated. When
B. Torque wrench calibration. Torque wrenches must using extensions or adapters, apply the manual torque
be calibrated frequently by using weights and a meas- at the calculated arm length at the center of the handle.
ured lever arm. Inaccurate readings may occur because When substituting values in formulas, use inch units to
of abuse or constant use. Do not check one wrench obtain an answer in pound-inches, and foot units to
against another, obtain an answer in pound-feet. The centerline of the
wrench and the wrench extension or adapter shall align
C. Recommended torque wrench sizes. Table 2 lists as shown in figure 4. To determine the indicated
recommended torque wrench sizes. torque, using extensions or adapters, use the formula
shown in figure 4.
Table 2. Recommended Torque Wrench Sizes
E. Procedure for applying torque. Clean parts to be
Required Torque Torque Wrench tightened in dry cleaning solvent (P-D-680). Unless
otherwise instructed, do not lubricate parts. Torque
0 to 25 Pound-Inches 30 Pound-Inches should be applied slowly and evenly until the specified
25 to 140 Pound-Inches 150 Pound-Inches torque value is reached, then held at this value until
the nut, bolt, or screw has stopped turning,
140 to 550 Pound-Inches 600 Pound-Inches
30 to 140 Pound-Feet 150 Pound-Feet F. When applying torques, proceed in steps of gradu-
ally increasing tension. Tighten the bolts, screws, or
140 to 240 Pound-Feet 250 Pound-Feet
nuts in a staggered sequence until the part is firmly
240 to 1000 Pound-Feet 1000 Pound-Feet seated; then apply a gradual increase in torque on each
part until the specified torque value is reached.
WRENCH
EXTENSION
Li L
L+L
l = lod cated torque on wo ..h.
L = Length of torque wrench (wrench hoed to
L1 = L yh of . . .n or adopter ( center to
conter disc inches.
XA-1012·252
Figure 4. Application of Torque Wrench Extension Formula
70-00-00
13
AVCD LYCOMING OIVISION
G. When lockwiring holes or cotter pin holes are to values for stepped and straight studs are shown in fig-
be aligned, the following torque procedure is recom- ure 5.
mended.
NOTE
(1) First, tighten part to minimum torque value.
When no special torque values are
(2) If holes do not align, continue to tighten given in an assembly and/or instal-
the part until holes do align, but do not exceed maxi- lation procedure, standard torque
mum torque value specified for the operation. values shall apply. All torque values
are in pound-inches. Threads shall be
(3) If holes still do not align, select another part clean and undamaged.
and repeat steps (1) and (2).
I. Special torque values. Special torque values are in-
H. Standard torque values. Standard torque values for cluded in assembly and installation instructions for the
general application are listed in table 3. Standard torque particular part or assembly.
70-00-00

14
Table 3. Standard Torque Values

standardsteel screws,Bolts, and Nuts (Pound-luches)
Slotted-Head Hexagon-Head
Thæad Size Screws Bolts and Nuts
2-56 2-3 -
348 3-4 -
440 5-6 -
540 6-7 -
6-32 7-9 -
8-32 10-32 -
10-32 18-20 40-45

7/32-24 22-25 65-70
1/4-28 30-35 70-95 -
5/16-24 40-45 120-165

3/8-24 55-60 250-325
7/16-20 80-90 400475
1/2-20 or -13
100-110 500-700
9/16-18 -
750-1000
5/8-18 -
1000-1400
Steel Taper-Thread Fittings and Plugs (Pound-Inches)
In Magnesium or
Size In Steel Case Aluminum Case
1/16-27 35-40 10-15
1/8-27 75-125 3040
1/4-18 200-250 70-85
3/8-18 300-375 95-110
1/2-14 400-500 140-160
3/4-14 500-600 175-200
1-11-1/2 600-700 230-260
Tube and Hose End Fittings ('B' Nuts)
Flared Tubing Nuts Hose End Fittings

Dash Tubing Aluminum-Alloy Steel Tubing Steel
No. OD Tubing
Ref. Inches Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
-3
3/16 - -
90 100 70 100
4 1/4 40 65 135 150 70 120
-5
5/16 60 80 180 200 85 180
-6
3/8 75 125 270 300 100 250
70-00-00
15
AVCD LYCOMING 01VISION
Table 3. Standard Torque Values -

Continued
Tube and Hose End Fittings ('B' Nuts) -
Continued
Flared Tubing Nuts Hose End Fittings

Dash Tubing Alurninum-Alloy Steel Tubing Steel
No. OD Tubing
Ref. Inches Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
-8
1/2 150 250 450 500 210 420
-10
5/8 200 350 650 700 300 480
-12
3/4 300 500 900 1000 500 850
-16
1 500 700 1200 1400 700 1150

-20
1-1/4 600 900 - -- -
-24
1-1/2 600 900 -- -- -- -
Jamb Nuts For Bulkhead Fittings
Tubing Outside Diameter Thread Size Torque (Pound-Inches)

1/8 5/16-24 35-50
3/16 3/8-24 65-80
1/4 7/16-20 85-105
5/16 1/2-20 105-125
3/8 9/16-18 120-150
1/2 3/4-16 240-280
5/8 7/8-14 320-380
3/4 1-1/16-12 500-600
1 1-5/16-12 780-880
1-1/8 1-5/8-12 960-1200
1-1/2 1-7/8-12 1200-1440
Jamb Nuts, Bolts, and Fittings Used With Gaskets (Pound-Inches)
Nuts (MS9099, MS9100, MS9200, MS9201)

Plug (MS9015) Union (AN915)
Bolt Universal (Banjo) Fitting
-
Tubing Outside Diameter Thread Size (AN774 and AN775)
1/8 5/16-24 45-50

3/16 3/8-24 60-70
1/4 7/16-20 90-100
5/16 1/2-10 120-130
3/8 9/16-18 150-160
1/2 3/4-16 275-300
5/8 7/8-14 375400
3/4 1-1/16-12 550-600
1 1-5/16-12 800-900
1-1/8 1-5/8-12 900-1000
1-1/2 1-7/8-12 900-1000
70-00-00
16
A TO'70 A.-- T, ---L- TV--'-o
T3]PES X APHJ Y ARE

DRIVEN FROM NUT EFR).
TYPE Z IS DRIVEN FROM
FLAT ON STUD. STUDS
TYPEX TYPE Y TYPE Z
STEPPED STUD TOROUE VALUES

(POUND-INCHES)
THREAD SIZE
NUT END STUD END TYPE X TYPE Y TYPE Z
10-32 1 4-20 20to 50
1/4-28 5 16-18 50to 110 50 to 75 50 to 165
5/16-24 3 8-16 100to 240 100 to 160 100 to 350
3 8-24 7/16-14 175to 475 175 to 325 175 to 600
7/16-20 1/2-13 250to 725 250 to 525 250 to 1000
1 2-20 9/16-12 400 to 1150 400 to 850 400 to 1500
9 16-18 5/8-11 600 to 1650 600 to 1150 600 to 2100
5 8-18 11/16-11 900 to 2400 900 to 1700 900 to 3100
STRAIGHT STUD TORQUE VALUES
(POUND-fšCHES)
THREAD SIZE
NUT END STUD END T30PE X TYPE Y TYPE Z
4-48 4-40 3 to 7
6-40 6-32 8 to 14
8-36 8-32 18 to 25
10-32 10-24 25 to 35
1/4-28 1/4-20 50 to 95 50 to 95 50 to 105
5/16-24 5/16-18 100 to 225 100 to 225 100 to 250
3/8-24 3/8-16 175 to 375 175 to 375 175 to 400
7/16-20 7/16-14 250 to 650 250 to 400 250 to 700
1/2-20 1/2-13 400 to 1000 400 to 700 400 to 1100
9/16-18 9/16-12 600 to 1450 500 to 1050 600 to 1600
5/8-18 5/8-11 900 to 2000 700 to 1400 900 to 2200
×A-1012-253
Figure 5. Stepped and Straight Stud Torque Values
70-00-00
17
AVCO LYOOMING OlVISION
14. CONVERSION FACTORS. In using conversion fac- performed in lieu of multiplication by using the recipro-
tors, it is possible to perform division as well as the cal of any indicated multiplier as divisor. For example,
multiplication process shown here. Division may be para- to convert from centimeters to inches by division, refer
ticularly advantageous where more than the significant to the table headed "To Convert From Inches" and use
figures published here are required. Division may be the factor listed as "centimeters" (2.54) as divisor.
Un#s of Length Units of Mass
To Convert from To Convert from

Centimeters Grams
To Multiply by To Multiply by
Inches ......................0.3937 Grains .......... ...........15.43
Feet .......... ............0.03281

AvoirdupoisDrams ..............0.564
Yards ......................0.01094 AvoirdupoisOunces..............0.03527

Meters ......... .,.........0.01 TroyPounds ........ .........0.03215
Troy Pounds ..................0.002679
To Convert from Avoirdupois Pounds . . . . . . . . . . .

.0.002205
Meters Milligrams ....................l,000
Kilograms ....................0.001
To Multiply by
Inches............ ..........39.37 To Convert from

Feet ........... ............3.281 Grains
Yards........................1.094
Miles..................... ...0.0006214 To Multiply by
Millimeters....................1000 Avoirdupois Drams ..............0.03657
Centimeters....................100 AvoirdupoisOunces..............0.002286
Kilometers ....................0.001 Troy Ounces ..................0.002083
Troy Pounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0001736
To Convert from Avoirdupois Pounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0001429

Inches Milligrams ....................64.7989
Grams ........ ..........0.06480
To Multiply by Kilograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.00006480
Feet ........... ..........0.08333
Yards........................0.02778 To Convertfom
Centimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.54 Avoirdupois Ounces
Meters .......... ...........0.0254
To Multiply by
To Convertfrom Grains ........... ..........437.5
Feet Avoirdupois Drams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Troy Ounces ..................0.9115
To Multiply by Troy Pounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.07595
Inches .......................12 AvoirdupoisPounds..............0.0625

Yards........... ............0.333 Grams ........ ..........28.350
Miles........................0.0001894 Kilograms ........

...........0.02835
Centimeters ..................30.48
Meters .......... ...........0.3048
Kilometers....................0.000305
70-00-00
..d'AVCC L.YCOMING 01VISION
Units of Mass -
Continued Units of Grpacity, or Volume,
Liquid Measure
To Convert from
Avoirdupois Pounds To Convert from
Milliliters
To Multiply by
To Mrdtiply by
Grains ........ . ...........7,000
AvoirdupoisDrams ..............256 Minims ......................16.2307
Avoirdupois Ounces .............16 LiquidOunces ................0.03381
Troy Ounces ..................14.583 Cills ........................0.008453
Troy Pounds ..................l.2153 Liquid Pints ....,.............0.002113
Grams ......................453.592
Liquid Quarts . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 0.001057
Kilograms ....................04536 Gallons ......................0.001264
ShortHundredweights............0.01 CubicInches ..................0.06102
ShortTons....................0.0005 Liters ......................0.001
LongTons....................0.0004464
Metric Tons ..................0.0004536
To Convertfrom
Liquid Ounces
To Convert fn>m To Multiply by

Troy Ounces
Minims ......................480
To Multiplyby Gills ........................0.25
Liquid Pints ..................0.0625
Grains ......................480 LiquidQuarts..................0.03125

Avoirdupois Drams ..............l7.5543 Gallons ......................0.007812
Avoirdupois Ounces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.0971

Troy Pounds ..................0.08333 CubicInches ..................1.8047
Avoirdupois Pounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.06857 Cubic Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.001044

Grams ......................31.1035 Milliliters ....................29.5735
Liters.........................0.02957
To Convert from To Convert from

Troy Pounds Liquid Pints
To Multiply by To Multiply by
Grains ......................5,760 Minims ......................7,680
AvoirdupoisDrams ..............210.6514 LiquidOunces..................16

AvoirdupoisOunces..............13.1657 Gills .......... . . .........4
TroyOunces ..................12 LiquidQuarts..................0.5

AvoirdupoisPounds..............0.8229 Gallons ................,.....0.125
Grams .......... ...........373.2417
CubicInches ..................28.875
CubicFeet......... ..........0.01671
Milliliters ....................473.1765
Liters ......................0.4732
70-00-00
19
AVCD LYCOMING OlVISION
LTPIOl Maintenance Manual

Units of Capacity, or Volume, Units of Area
Liquid Measure -
Continued
To Convert from
To Convert from . Square Centimeters
Cubic Inches
To Multiply by
To Multiply by
Square Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1551
Minims ................. 265.9740 SquareFeet .............. 0.001076
Liquid Ounces . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5541 Square Yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0001196
Gills ........ ......... 0.1385 Square Meters ............. 0.0001
LiquidPints .............. 0.03463
Liquid Quarts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.01732
Gallons ................. 0.004329
To Convert from
Cubic Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0005787 Square Meters
Milliliters ................ 16.3871
Liters .................. 0.01639 To Multiplyby
Cubic Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.00001639
Cubic Yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.00002143 Square Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,550.003
SquareFeet .............. 10.7639
Square Yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19599
To Convert from Acres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0002471
Liquiid Quarts Square Centimeters . . . . . . . . . . 10,000
Hectacres................ 0.0001
To Multiply by
Minims ................. 15,360 ToConvertfrom

Liquid Ounces . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Square Inches
Gills................... 8
Liquid Pints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 To Multiply by
Gallons ................. 0.25
SquareFeet .............. 0.006944
Cubic Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57.75 Square Yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0007716
Cubic Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.003421 Square Centimeters . . . . . . . . . . 6.45 16
Milliliters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946.3529 Square Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0006452
Liters ........ ......... 0.9464
To Convert from
Gallons To Convert from
Squaæ Feet
To Multiply by
To Multiply by
Minims ................. 61,440
Liquid Ounces . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Square Inches . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 144
Gills ......... ........ 32 SquareYards ............. 0.1111
LiquidPints .............. 8 Acres .................. 0.00002296
Liquid Quarts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Square Centimeters . . . . . . . . . . 929.0304
Cubic Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Square Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.09290
Cubic Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1337

Milliliters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,785.4118
Liters ....... ......... 3.7854
Cubic Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.003785
CubicYards .............. 0.004951
70-00-00

AVCD LYCOMtNG OIVISION
Units of Temperature Units of Torque
F =
( --
) C + 32 To Convert
5
C = 5/9 (F-32) Unit Multiply by Equivalent Unit
°F + 459.69
R =
°C + lb. in. I152.128 gram em

K = 273.16
lb. ft. 13,826 gram cm
lb. ft. 0.1383 Kp Meter*
oz. in. 72.008 gram em
oz. in. 0.005208 lb. ft.
*Kilopond -
now used in lieu of Kg or Kilogram force.
Fmcrional Inches into Millimeters
Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters
1/64 0.3969 33/64 13.0969

1/32 0.7937 17/32 13.4937
3/64 1.1906 35 /64 13.8906
1/16 1.5875 9/16 14.2875
5/64 1.9844 37/64 14.6844
3/32 2.3812 19/32 15.0812
7/64 2.7781 39/64 15.4781
1/8 3.1750 5/8 15.8750
9/64 3.5719 41/64 16.2719
5/32 3.9687 21/32 16.6687
11/64 4.3656 43/64 17.0656
3/16 4.7625 11/16 17.4625
13/64 5.1594 45/64 17.8594
7/32 5.5562 23/32 18.2562
15/64 5.9531 47/64 18.6531
1/4 6.3500 3/4 19.0500
17/64 6.7469 49/64 19.4469
9/32 7.1437 25/32 19.8437
19/64 7.5406 51/64 20.2406
5/16 7.9375 13/16 20.6375
21/64 8.3344 53/64 21.0344
11/32 8.7312 27/32 21.4312
23/64 9.1281 55/64 21.828 1
3/8 9.5250 7/8 22.2250
25/64 9.9219 57/64 22.6219
13/32 10.3187 29/32 23.0187
27/64 10.7156 59/64 23.4156
7/16 11.1125 15/16 23.8125
29/64 11.5094 61/64 24.2094
15/32 11.9062 31/32 24.6062
31/64 12.3031 63.64 25.0031
1/2 12.7000 1. 25.4001
70-00-00
21
JAVCO LYCOMING OIVIS10N
Milkmeters into Inches
Milli. Milli- Milli- Milli. Milli-

meters Inches meters Inches meters Inches meters Inches meters Inches
0.01 0.0004 0.21 0.0083 0.41 0.0161 0.61 0.0240 0.81 0.0319
0.02 0.0008 0.22 0.0087 0.42 0.0165 0.62 0.0244 0.82 0.0323
0.03 0.0012 0.23 0.0091 0.43 0.0169 0.63 0.0248 0.83 0.0327
0.04 0.0016 0.24 0.0094 0.44 0.0173 0.64 0.0252 0.84 0.0331
0.05 0.0020 0.25 0.0098 0.45 0.0177 0.65 0.0256 0.85 0.0335
0.06 0.0024 0.26 0.0102 0.46 0.0181 0.66 0.0260 0.86 0.0339
0.07 0.0028 0.27 0.0106 0.47 0.0185 0.67 0.0264 0.87 0.0343
0.08 0.0031 0.28 0.0110 0.48 0.0189 0.68 0.0268 0.88 0.0346
0.09 0.0035 0.29 0.0114 0.49 0.0193 0.69 0.0272 0.89 0.0350
0.10 0.0039 0.30 0.0118 0.50 0.0197 0.70 0.0276 0.90 0.0354
0.11 0.0043 0.31 0.0122 0.51 0.0201 0.71 0.0280 0.91 0.0358
0.12 0.0047 0.32 0.0126 0.52 0.0205 0.72 0.0283 0.92 0.0362
0.13 0.0051 0.33 0.0130 0.53 0.0209 0.73 0.0287 0.93 0.0366
0.14 0.0055 0.34 0.0134 0.54 0.0213 0.74 0.0291 0.94 0.0370
0.15 0.0059 0.35 0,0138 0.55 0.0217 0.75 0.0295 0.95 0.0374
0.16 0.0063 0.36 0.0142. 0.56 0.0220 0.76 0.0299 0.96 0.0378
0.17 0.0067 0.37 0.0146 0.57 0.0224 0,77 0.0303 0.97 0.0382
0.18 0.0071 0.38 0.0150 0.58 0.0228 0.78 0.0307 0.98 0.0386
0.19 0.0075 0.39 0.0154 0.59 0.0232 0.79 0.0311 0.99 0.0390
0.20 0.0079 0.40 0.0157 0.60 0.0236 0.80 0.0315 1.00 0.0394
Inches to Millimeters
Milli- Milli. Milli- Milli- Milli-

Inches meters Inches meters Inches meters Inches meters Inches meters
0.001 0.025 0.140 3.56 0.360 9.14 0.580 14.73 0.800 20.32
0.002 0.051 0.150 3.81 0.370 9.40 0.590 14.99 0.810 20.57
0.003 0.076 0.160 4.06 0.380 9.65 0.600 15.24 0.820 20.83
0.004 0.102 0.170 4.32 0.390 9.91 0.610 15.49 0.830 21.08
0.005 0.127 0.180 4.57 0.400 10.16 0.620 15.75 0.840 21.34
0.006 0.152 0.190 4.83 0.410 10.41 0.630 16.00 0.850 21.59
0.007 0.178 0.200 5.08 0.420 10.67 0.640 16.26 0.860 21.84
0.008 0.203 0.210 5.33 0.430 10.92 0.650 16.51 0.870 22.10
0.009 0.229 0.220 5.59 0.440 11.18 0.660 16.76 0.880 22.35
0.010 0.254 0.230 5.84 0.450 11.43 0.670 17.02 0.890 22.61
0.020 0.508 0.240 6.10 0.460 11.68 0.680 17.27 0.900 22.86
0.030 0.762 0.250 6.35 0.470 11.94 0.690 17.53 0.910 23.11
0.040 1.016 0.260 6.60 0.480 12.19 0.700 17.78 0.920 23.37
0.050 1.270 0.270 6.86 0.490 12.45 0.710 18.03 0.930 23.62
0.060 1.524 0.280 7.11 0.500 12.70 0.720 18.29 0.940 23.88
0.070 1.778 0.290 7.37 0.510 12.95 0.730 18.54 0.950 24.13
0.080 2.032 0.300 7.62 0.520 13.21 0.740 18.80 0.960 24.38
0.090 2.286 0.310 7.87 0.530 13.46 0.750 19.05 0.970 24.64
0.100 2.540 0.320 8.13 0.540 13.72 0.760 19.30 0.980 24.89
0.110 2.794 0.330 8.38 0.550 13.97 0.770 19.56 0.990 25.15
0.120 3.048 0.340 8.64 0.560 14.22 0.780 19.81 1.000 25.40
0.130 3.302 0.350 8.89 0.570 14.48 0.790 20.07 ..
Example: Find 0.856 inch in millimeters; 0.850 inch-21.59 millimeters; 0.006 inch-0.152
millimeter.Hence 21.59 + 0.152 21.742 millimeters
=
0.856 inch.
=
70-00-00

Cu§ic Inches nto Cubic Centimeter.

CUBIC0123456789
INCHES Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic
Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm.
0 . . . . 16.38 32.77 49.16 65.55 81.93 98.32 114.71 131.09 147.48

10 163.87 180.26 196.64 213.03 229.41 245.80 262.19 278.58 294.88 311.35
20 327.73 344.12 360.50 376.89 393.27 409.66 426.05 442.44 458.74 475.21
30 491.60 507.99 524.37 540.76 557.14 573.53 589.92 606.31 622.61 639.08
40 655.46 671.85 688.23 704.52 721.00 737.39 757.78 770.17 786.47 802.94
50 819.33 835.72 851.10 868.49 884.87 901.26 917.65 934.04 950.34 966.81
60 983.20 999.59 1016.0 1032.4 1048.7 1065.1 1081.5 1097.9 1114.2 1130.7
70 1147.1 1163.5 1179.9 1196.3 1212.6 1229.0 1245.4 1261.8 1278.1 1294.6
80 1310.9 1327.3 1343.7 1360.1 1376.4 1392.8 1409.2 1425.6 1441.9 1458.4
90 1474.8 1491.2 1507.6 1524.0 1540.3 1556.7 1573.1 1589.5 1605.8 1622.3
100 1638.7 1655.1 1671.5 1687.9 1704.2 1720.6 1737.0 1753.4 1769.7 1786.2
Cubic Centimeters into Cubic Inches
CUBIC01234.56789
CM. Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic
Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches
0 . . . . 0.0610 0.1221 0.1831 0.2441 0.3051 0.3661 0.4272 0.4882 0.5492

10 0.6102 0.6712 0.7323 0.7933 0.8543 0.9153 0.9763 0.0374 0.0984 1.1594
20 1.2205 1.2815 1.3426 1.4036 1.4646 1.5256 1.5866 1.6477 1.7087 1.7697
30 1.8308 1.8918 1.9529 2.0139 2.0749 2.1859 2.1969 2.2580 2.3190 2.3800
40 2.4410 2.5020 2.5631 2.6241 2.6851 2.7461 2.8071 2.8682 2.9292 2.9902
50 3.0513 3.1123 3.1734 3.2344 3.2954 3.3564 3.4174 3.4785 3.5395 3.6005
60 3.6615 3.7225 3.7836 3.8446 3.9056 3.9666 4.0276 4.0887 4.1497 4.2107
70 4.2718 4.3328 4.3939 4.4549 4.5159 4.5769 4.6379 4.6990 4.7600 4.8210
80 4.8820 4.9430 5.0041 5.0651 5.1261 5.1871 5.2481 5.3092 5.3702 5.4312
90 5.4923 5.5533 5.6144 5.6754 5.7364 5.7974 5.8584 5.9195 5.9805 6.0415
100 6.1025 6.1635 6.2246 6.2856 6.3466 6.4076 6.4686 6.5297 6.5907 6.6517
70-00-00
23
Pounds Per Square Inch into Kilograms per Squaæ Centimeter
Pounds O I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
per Kg.per Kg.per Kg.per Kg.per Kg.per Kg.per Kg.per Kg.per Kg.per Kg.per
Squam Sq. Sq. Sq. Sq. Sq. Sq. Sq. Sq. Sq. Sq.
Inch Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm. Cm.
0 .... 0.0703 0.1406 0.2109 0.2812 0.3515 0.4218 0.4921 0.5625 0.6328
10 0.7031 0.7734 0.8437 0.9140 0.9843 1.0546 1.1249 1.1952 1.2655 1.3358
20 1.4062 1.4765 1.5468 1.6171 1.6874 1.7577 1.8280 1.8983 1.9686 2.0389
30 2.1092 2.1795 2.2498 2.3202 23905 2.4608 2.5311 2.6014 2.6717 2.7420
40 2.8123 2.8826 2.9529 3.0232 3.0935 3.1639 3.2342 3.3045 3.3748 3.4451
50 3.5154 3.5857 3.6560 3.7263 3.7966 3.8669 3.9372 4.0075 4.0779 4.1482
60 4.2185 4.2888 4.3591 4.4294 4.4997 4.5700 4.6403 4.7106 4.7809 4.8512
70 4.9216 4.9919 5.0622 5.1325 5.2028 5.2731 5.3434 5.4137 5.4840 5.5543
80 5.6246 5.6949 5.7652 5.8356 5.9059 5.9762 6.0465 6.1168 6.1871 6.2574
90 6.3277 6.3980 6.4683 6.5386 6.6089 6.6793 6.7496 6.8199 6.8902 6.9605
100 7.0308 7.1011 7.1714 7.2417 7.3120 7.3823 7.4526 7.5229 7.5933 7.6636
Kilograms per Square Centimeter into Pounds per Square Inch
Kilo-0123456789
grams Lbs. Lbs. Lbs. Lbs. Lbs. Lbs. Lbs. Lhs. Lbs. Lbs.
per per per per per per per per per per per
Sq.Cm. Sq.In. Sq. In. Sq. In. Sq. In. Sq. In. Sq. In. Sq. In. Sq. In. Sq. In. Sq. In.
0 . . . . 14.22 28.45 42.67 56.89 71.12 85.34 99.56 113.78 128.01

10 142.23 156.43 170.68 184.90 199.12 213.35 227.57 241.79 256.02 270.24
20 284.46 298.69 312.91 327.13 341.36 355.58 369.80 384.03 398.25 412.47
30 426.70 440.92 455.14 469.36 483.59 497.81 512.03 526,26 540.48 554.70
40 568.93 583.15 597.37 611.60 625.82 640.04 654.27 668.49 682.71 696.94
50 711.16 725.38 739.61 753.83 768.05 782.28 796.50 810.72 824.94 839.17
60 853.39 867.61 881.84 896.06 910.28 924.51 938.73 952.95 967.18 981.40
70 995.62 1009.8 1024.1 1038.3 1052.5 1066.7 1081.0 1095.2 1109.4 1123.6
80 1137.8 1152.1 1166.3 1180.5 1194.7 1209.0 1223.2 1237.4 1251.6 1265.9
90 1280.1 1294.3 1308.5 1322.7 1337.0 1351.2 1365.4 1379.6 1393.9 1408.1
100 1422.3 1436.5 1450.8 1465.0 1479.2 1493.4 1507.7 1521.9 1536.1 1550.3
70-00-00
A7AVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
sT1:MTPONO. CONNECTICUT DATE Jun 12|81
NO. ÛËRev
INSERT THIS PAGE Preceding page 25, 70-00-00
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 61 dated Sep 24/80. Please remove and discard MCN
No, 61.
On page 25, paragraph 14A. is added as follows:
14A. VAPOR DEGREASING. Proceed as follows:
CAUTION
THE FOLLOWING PROCESS MAY BE USED ON PAINTED METAL

PARTS. TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO PAINTED SURFACES, ENSURE
THAT THE IMMERSION PERIOD DOES NOT EXCEED 20 SECONDS.
DO NOT USE VAPOR-DEGREASING METHOD OR CHLORINATED

HYDROCARBONSFOR CLEANING TITANIUM. WHENCLEANING
TITANIUM USE METHYL-ETHYL-KETONE (TT-M-261).
A. Vapor-degreasing with trichloroethane (0-T-620) or

perchloroethylene (0-T-236) will remove oil, grease, and sludge. The hot
vapor condenses on metal surfaces, liquefies, and carries away oil,
grease, and sludge. Parts may be flushed while suspended in the vapor.
B. Vapor-degrease parts as follows:
(1) Fill degreaser with trichlorothane or perchloroethylene to

approximately 4 inches above heating coils.
(2) Heat-to operating temperature of 87oc (189°F) for

trichloroethane orsl21°C (250°F) for perchloroethylene.
CÄUTION
IN- FOLLOWING STEP (3), DO NOT USE INSULATED BASKET

UNLESS INSULATION MATERIAL IS RESISTANT TO DEGREASER
SOLVENT.
(3) Place parts in basket and lower basket into degreaser tank
at rate of 10 feet per minute, allowing vapors to condense.
The technical aspects of this MCN were approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Jun 12/81
NO 61 Rev 1
(4) Allow parts to remain in vapor until they are same

temperature as vapor. When vapor ceases to condense on parts, direct spray
from nozzle at parts, while holding top of nozzle below vapor level.
NOTE
For maximum cleaning, do not remove parts from solvent

vapor until they have reached temperature of the vapor.
Parts removed from vapor zone will dry immediately due
to heat of metal and volatility of solvent.
(5) Raise basket of parts at maximum rate of 10 feet per

minute. Allow parts to drain and dry completely while holding basket above
vapor level.
CAUTION
PARTS THAT HAVE BEEN VAPOR-DEGREASED ARE HIGHLY SUS-

CEPTIBLE TO CORROSION, EVEN IN A MODERATELYDRY TEM-
PERATURE. WHEN PARTS ARE NOT TO BE IMMEDIATELY PRO-
CESSED FURTHER, TREAT WITH CORROSION PREVENTIVE
(MIL-C-6529).
(6) If further degreasing is required, cool parts to room

temperature and repeat above procedure.
Also, paragraph 15, NOTE preceding step A. is added as follows:
NOTE
During engine/module disassembly certain detail parts

were temporarily marked with a yellow pencil to faci-
litate reassemble. Ensure, during cleaning process,
temporary markings are not removed.
Sheet 2 of 2
AVCC LYCOM1NG DIVISION
LTPl01 Maintenance Manual
15. DRY CLEANING SOLVENT. Proceed as follows: (2) Remove parts from fingerprint remover. Rinse
with dry cleaning solvent (P-D-680).
A. All metal parts shall be cleaned with dry cleaning
solvent (P-D-680). Dry cleaning is suitable for removal WARNING
of heavy deposits of oil and grease from most parts,
including flexible hoses. PROLONGED CONTACT WITH
SYNTHETIC LUBRICATING OIL
WARNING MAY CAUSE A SKIN RASH.
THOSE AREAS OF SKIN AND
AVOID PROLONGED INHALATION CLOTHING THAT COME IN CON-
OF SOLVENT VAPORS. WEAR TACT WITH LUBRICATING OIL
RUBBER GLOVES AND USE HAND SHOULD BE THOROUGHLY
CREAM TO PREVENT CONTACT WASHED IMMEDIATELY. SATUR-
WITH SKIN. DO NOT HEAT ATED CLOTHING SHOULD BE
SOLUTION. REMOVED IMMEDIATELY. AREAS
IN WHICH LUBRICATING OIL IS
B. Dry clean parts as follows: USED SHOULD BE ADEQUATELY
VENTILATED TO KEEP MIST
(1) Immerse parts in tank containing solvent. AND FUMES TO A MINIMUM.
Scrub with fiber brush.
CAUTION
NOTE
LUBRICATING OIL MAY SOFT-
Parts may be cleaned in a spray EN PAINT UPON CONTACT. IF
booth with atomized dry cleaning LUBRICATING OIL IS SPILLED
solvent under air pressure of 60 ON PAINTED SURFACES, THESE
to 90 psig. Spray and scrub parts SURFACES SHOULD BE THOR-
in the booth. Spray second time OUGHLY WASHED.
to remove residue loosened by
scrubbing. (3) If parts are not to be reassembled within a
short period of time, coat parts, except oil system com-
(2) Dry parts, using moisture-free, compressed ponents with corrosion-preventive oil (MIL-C-8188) and
air. coat oil system components with approved engine lub-
ricating oil.
(3) Close tank cover when not in use.
17. CLEANING OF GEARS AND SPLINED PARTS.
16. REMOVING FINGERPRINTS FROM MACHINED Proceed as follows:
SURFACES AFTER CLEANING. Proceed as follows:
A. When cleaning gears and splines, ensure that root
A. Fingerprints shall be removed from all machined areas are completely free of any foreign matter. For-
surfaces to prevent corrosion. eign matter has a tendency to lodge between internal
and external splines and teeth of gears.
B. Remove fingerprints from parts as follows:
B. Clean gears and splines as follows:
Immerse cleaned parts in corrosion-preventive
(1)
(MIL-C-15074) and agitate solution for minimum of 2 CAUTION
minutes.
TO PREVENT CONTAMINATION
CAUTION AFTER CLEANING, HANDLE
PARTS AS LITTLE AS POSSIBLE.
IN FOLLOWING STEP, WHEN RE-
MOVING PARTS FROM FINGER-
PRINT REMOVER, DO NOT TOUCH
THE MACHINED SURFACES.
70-00-00
25
NOTE (3) Apply penetrant inspection material by im-

mersion, spraying, or brushing to completely cover all
In following step, remove light rust surfaces to be inspected.
and other deposits by scrubbing
vigorously with a bristle brush while (4) Allow penetrant to remain on surface for
part is immersed in solvent. approximately 8 minutes; then wipe with clean, lint-
free cloth. Repeat preceding step (3) if necessary.
(1) Visually inspect each gear or splined part to
determine degree of cleaning required; then clean part (5) Apply developer, (MIL-I-25135) by brushing
by dry cleaning solvent method. (Refer to paragraph or spraying thin, even coating over surfaces involved.
15.)
(6) Allow approximately 4 minutes for developer
(2) Dry each part after cleaning, using compres- to dry to a thin layer before inspection.
sed air (25 psig maximum). If parts are not to be used
immediately (within 24 hours), protect parts with ap- (7) Parts shall be inspected under ordinary white
proved engine lubricating oil. light. Any indication of defects shall be cause for rejec-
tion or rework of part.
18. VISUAL INSPECTION. Proceed as follows:
(8) Swab part clean using dry cleaning solvent
A. A thorough visual inspection of the engine and (P-D-680).
engine parts is important to ensure engine life and
maximum performance. Such inspections should be per- 20. SEAL JOURNAL INSPECTION. Proceed as fol-
formed in an area that is free of dust and dirt. lows:
B. The engine and parts should be visually checked A. During disassembly of engine or components, rela-
for: loose or missing parts, cracks, distortion, wear, ero- tive journals should be inspected for various possible de-
sion, corrosion, damage to surface coating, nicks, dents, fects.
and burned areas.
B. Inspect seal journals as follows:
C. Defective parts should bear tags identifying the
necessary repair (or replacement recommendation if be- (1) Inspect for cracks or axial scoring. Neither
yond defect limits). is allowed.
D. Although many defects are discovered by naked- (2)Inspect for circumferential tracing. Remove
eye observance, some require dimensional use of micro- tracking as outlined in paragraph 28.
meters or special gages.
(3) Inspect for residual coke, varnish, carbon,
19. DYE-PENETRANT INSPECTION. Proceed as etc. Such deposits must be removed. (Refer to para-
follows: graph 28.)
A. The dye-penetrant inspection method detects sur- 21. INSPECTION OF GEARS AND SPLINED PARTS.
face discontinuities such as cracks, laps, cold shuts, and Proceed as follows:
porosity in ferrous and nonferrous materials.
A. Gears and splined parts shall be visuall inspected
B. Perform dye-penetrant inspection in accordance for those conditions listed and defined in tables 4 and
with AMS2646 and the following instructions: 5 and illustrated in figure 6.
(1) Swab part clean using dry cleaning solvent B. Perform visual inspection of gears as follows:
(P-D-680).
(1) Using a six-power magnification, inspect each
(2) Apply remover (MIL-I-25135) and wipe with gear for conditions listed in table 4. If gear is unaccept-
clean lint-free cloth. Air-dry, able, replace gear.
70-00-00
26
c
scTicQ
4 DATE b 3
THIS CHANGE APPLIES T LTP 01-2 Maintenance Manúal

dNSERT THgS 2 0 00 00
Oti page 2 aph s ad d as fg11o sk
19A. FLU0R N. P eed ai fil s
1 ËËescent e ant s ti a meÃhd nspecting goil

ferrous materiaig ia d sh ts orgsit nd othjp de
feet h ggu fac o
NOTE
e
hen uegng fluorescept atierials the detection for
of iina
pejf cti s usp t rs $6Â11 ot Ñ¾ar 1 sÈes equiþped
it lih nii iÃnies t t dariën én egposed
1þavio I t it r sånli ght
B (gfŠkä oids¾antypynetigint umgeeti2 19 dúo ance it¼ álä

2645 and th¾ fEil g inskriict usó
ÄRN$G
GLOggEN E
PENETRANT INSPECTION; AS OIL REMAINING ON THE SKIN
MAgCgUSE SKIN INFLAMMATION PRESENCE OF PENETRATING
OIL ON TKE SgIN CAN BE DETECTERUNDER ULTRAVIOLET
4 IGgT VELON WDKR18 HA E IN
HALED BUT HEAVY CONCERTRATIONS CAN EF ANNOYING
CÃUTION .
IN ANY INS CTION PROCESS THE FENETRANT EMJESIFIER

D DEVELOPER SHALI BE FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURING
spunce
liãáing bef fgu e(Ë¼t-penetkant1 ppi ati n le n
kurfac of tihe art t ha inspeëþad foreign aþ¾iál greage, vy
oily rusty tig a revynt penggy ion int i rfain f av
tight, easuit aise nai itûÑ Re il gië d sga
a a fibar na dr leging s i it D-680 $6 6t pBli sh sú
f aces ggine a og then b e e result poor indi
cations
She
DATE Feb 3/81
NO. 89
D. Post-enulsificationfluorescent-penetrant inspection procedure

(Group Perform
V). this inspection procedure on all applicable parts, with
the exception of the compressor rotor blades and compressor vanes, centri-
fugal compressor impeller assembly, and the first and second stage turbine
rotor b.lades. Proceed as follows:
(1) Immerse, spray, or brush all surfaces of the part being

inspected with fluorescent-penetrant liquid.
NOTE
When greater sensitivity is desired, heat parts to 66°

to 82 C (150° to 180°F) before applying fluorescent-
penetrant liquid and prior to ultraviolet (black) light
inspection.
(2) Allow 15 to 30 minutes for fluorescent-penetrant to enter

defect.
(3) Immerse, spray, or brush all surfaces of part with fluores-

cent-penetrant emulsifier.
(4) Allow sufficient time (3 minutes minimum) for emulsifica-

tion of excess fluorescent-penetrant liquid.
e' . (5) Remove fluorescent-penetrant liquid from surface of the

part by washing with warm 43° to 54°C (110° to 130°F) water. After
washing, place part under ultraviolet (black) light, and check to ensure
thafexcessive fluorescent-penetrant liquid has been removed.
NOTE
In following step, avoid prolonged periods of drying

which would result in evaporation of penetrant within
a discontinuity.
(6) Dry part using hot air at 60° to 82°C (140° to

180°F) until completely dry.
(7) Apply fluorescent-penetrant dry developer powder (Group V)

to part by dusting or by powder-box immersion.
(8) Allow approximately 15 minutes for indications to develop.
(9) Remove excess developer from part with clean, low-pressure

air blast (20 psi maximum).
Sheet 2 of 5
DATE Feb 3/81
NO. 89
(10) Examine part in a darkened enclosure under ultraviolet

(black) light. If cracks or other defects are found, mark defect and tag
part stating discrepancy.
(11) Remove dry developer powder from part by washing with warm
water. After washing, place part under ultraviolet (black) light and check
to ensure complete removal of powder.
E. Special post-emulsification fluorescent-penetrant inspection

procedure (Group VI). Pežform this inspection procedure on the £ollowing
parts: compressor rotor blades and compressor vanes, centrifugal compres-
sor impeller assembly, and first and second stage turbine rotor blades.
Proceed as follows:
(1) Immerse, spray, or brush all surfaces of the part with

fluorescent-penetrant liquid (Group VI).
CAUTION
WHEN GREATER SENSITIVITY IS DESIRED, HEAT PARTS TO

66° TO 82°C (150° TO 180°F), BEFORE APPLY-
ING FLUORESCENT-PENETRANT LIQUID AND BEFORE THE
ULTRAVIOLET (BLACK) LIGHT INSPECTION.
(2) Allow 15 to 30 minutes for fluorescent-penetrant liquid to

enter any defect.
(3) Immerse, spray, or brush all surfaces of part with fluores-

cent-penetrant liquid emulsifier.
(4) Allow sufficient time (3 minutes minimum) for emulsifica-

tion of excess fluorescent-penetrant liquid.
(5) Remove fluorescent-penetrant liquid from surface of part by

washing with warm 43° to 54 C (110° to 130 F) water-,-After wash-
ing, place part under ultraviolet (black) light and check to ensure that
excessive fluorescent-penetrant liquid has been removed.
NOTE
In following step, avoid prolonged periods of drying

which would result in evaporation of penetrant within
a discontinuity.
(6) Dry part using hot air at 60° to 82°C (140° to

Sheet 3 of 5
DATE Feb 3/81
NO. 89
(7)Apply fluorescent-penetrant dry-developer powder (Group VI)

to part by dusting or by powder-box immersion.
(8) Allow approximately 15 minutes for indications to develop.

air blast (20 psi) maximum.
(10) Examine part in darkened enclosure under ultraviolet

(black) light. If cracks or other defects are found, mark defect and tag
part, stating discrepancy. Repair can be made if defect is within speci-
fied acceptance limits for repair.
(11) Remove dry-developer powder from part by washing with warm

water. After washing, place part under ultraviolet (black) light and check
to ensure complete removal of powder.
F. Water washable fluorescent-penetrant inspection procedure.
(1) Clean applicable parts.
(2) Spray, or brush all

immerse, part surfaces with fluores-
cent-penetrant solution. Parts requiring Group VI sensitivity will be im-
mersed in penetrant (P134, Tracer Tech, Division of Shannon Industries,
Los Angeles, California). Parts requiring high side of Group V and low
side of Group VI sensitivity, will be immersed in penetrant (ZLl73, Magna-
flux Corp., New York, N.Y.). All other parts requiring fluores-
cent-penetrant inspection will be immersed in penetrant (P133, Tracer
Tech, Division of Shannon Industries, Los Angeles, California).
CAUTION
IF PART IS IMMERSED IN PENETRANT WHILEÍOT, DELAY RE-

MOVALFOR DRAINING UNTIL PART COOLS TO PENETRANT TEM-
PERATURE:
(3) Allow penetrant to remain on part for 20 minutes minimma.
(4) Remove excess fluorescent-penetrant material by spray wash-

ing the part with water (temperature not to exceed 32°C (90°F). In-
spect washed part under ultraviolet (black) light to ensure removal of
excess penetrant.
(5) Dry part using hot air at 60° to 82°C (140o to

Sheet 4 of 5
DATE Feb 3/81
NO. 89 -
NOTE
Avoid prolonged periods of drying which would result in

evaporation of penetrant within discontinuity.
(6) Apply fluorescent-penetrant developer by placing part in

developer fogging chamber. Parts immersed in penetrant (P133 or P134,
Tracer Tech, Division of Shannon Industries, Los Angeles, California) in
preceding step (2), shall have developer (D493A Tracer Tech, Division of
Shannon Industries, Los Angeles, California) applied. Parts immersed in
penetrant (ZL17B, Magnaflux Corp., New York, N.Y.) shall have developer
(ZP4, Magnaflux Corp., New York, N.Y.) applied. Developer dwell time shall
have no less than 15 minutes nor more than 60 minutes.

air blast (20 psi maximum).
(8) Examine part in a darkened enclosure under ultraviolet

(black) light. If cracks or other defects are found, mark area of defect
and tag parts, stating discrepancy.
Sheet ji of ji
Table 4. Visual Inspection of Gears (d) Using dial indicator as indicated in fig-
ure 7, measure splines (internal and external). Move dial
Condition Limits indicator parallel to spline (in a lead direction).
Corrosion Any rust corrosion noted after clean- (e) Wear and/or fretting corrosion maxi-
ing is unacceptable mum depth shall not exceed 0.007 inch on external
spline teeth and 0.005 inch on internal spline teeth. If
Cracks Unacceptable limits are exceeded, replace splined parts.
End Loading Light end wear is acceptable. All pitt- CAUTION

ing or spalling due to end loading is
unacceptable IN FOLLOWING STEP, TO PREVENT
DAMAGE, CARE MUST BE TAKEN
Frosting Light frosting is acceptable. Any other TO PREVENT METAL-TO-METALCON-
condition of frosting is unacceptable TACT OF GEARS.
Pitting Initial and light pitting is acceptable. 22. INSPECTION OF BEARINGS. Proceed as follows:
Any other condition of pitting is
unacceptable NOTE
Scoring Light scoring is acceptable. Any other Refer to figure 8 for bearing, orienta-
condition of scoring is unacceptable tion, terminology, and typical features.
Spalling Unacceptable A. Using a 10-power magnifying glass, visually in-

spect all mainshaft bearings for damage identified in
Wear and Heavy and irregular wear is unaccept- figure 9 in accordance with tables 6 and 7. (Refer to
Fretting able. Light wear or fretting corrosion Figure 10 for location of mainshaft bearings.)
Corrosion is acceptable within the limits of step
B. (5) (e). NOTE
(2) Inspect gear teeth for nicks, burrs, scratches, When heat discoloration is detected
and chipping edges. None acceptable without repair. on any bearing, reject bearing.
(Refer to paragraph 29.)
B. All other position bearings, not identified in figure
(3) Inspect all gears for discoloration due to 10, are deemed nonmainshaft bearings and the degree of
overheating. Only light straw coloration is acceptable. inspection may vary accordingly. Because of economic
If color is blue or purple, gear must be rejected. considerations, if a bearing is removed from its respec-
tive shaft, the bearing shall be replaced. The minimum
(4) Using a four-power magnification, inspect requirement for reuse of all small accessory and non-
each internal and external spline area for wear and mainshaft bearings is a brief visual inspection for obvious
fretting corrosion. defects and a manual rotation test. Bearings with rough
or intermittent sounds should be rejected.
(5) Inspect splines for wear (steps) or fretting
corrosion depth as follows: NOTE
(a) Place part in V-block. Use of magnification is not required.
(b) Lubricate journals so parts may rotate 23. BLEND REPAIR. Proceed as follows:
easily.
A. Blend repair is a method for repairing parts affect-
(c) Secure part to prevent axial movement. ed by minor nicks, burrs, or scratches.
70-00-00
27
Table 5. Gears and Splined Parts Damage -

Definitions
Gear Damage Description Probable Cause
Burrs A rough edge or sharp projection Excessive wear
Corrosion Discoloration of gear or spline surfaces. Exposure to corroding elements

Surface chemical action that results in
surface discoloration, a layer of oxide,
or in advanced stages removal of sur-
face metal. Another form of wear on
spline teeth is described under a sub-
sequent classification. (Refer to Wear,
Fretting Corrosion)
NOTE
Rust is a form of corrosion.

A more advanced form of
corrosion will result in pitting.
Cracking Partial separtion of metal resulting Severe stress from overloading or shock;
from residual stresses a possible extension of a scratch. Im-
proper grinding or heat-treating tech-
nique
NOTE
Chipping and flaking represent

various forms of cracking.
End of Loading Defect on face of gear tooth near end Axial misalignment with mating gear
of tooth
Frosting An initial state of scoring caused by Generally caused by wearing-in process

minute particles of metal transferring
and welding to metal teeth surfaces,
giving a frosted appearance.
Overheating Discoloration and a loss of hardness Results from the high temperature pro-
duced by excessive friction caused by
overload, overspeed, lack of backlash,
or faulty lubrication
Pitting Initial pitting is a type of surface The wearing-in process that occurs at
pitting that usually occurs in a narrow the beginning of an operation and con-
band just below or at the pitchline. Such tinues only until the overstressed local
pitting is not serious, since it is self- high areas of the surface have been
corrective and nonprogressive. reduced to provide a sufficient area of
contact to carry the load without
further impairment
70-00-00
28 <a 1978 Aven T.venmino nivision

AVCD LYCOMtNG OIVISION
Table 5. Gears and Splined Parts Damage -

Definitions ----
Continued
Gear Damag Description Probable Cause
Pitting (Cont) Destructive pitting usually starts below Chemical pitting: Oxidation of surface
the pitchline, progressing increasingly in by electrolytic action
number and size of pits until smooth-
ness of operation is impaired. The pitting . Mechanical pitting: Chipping of loading
will progress until the tooth shape is surfaces caused by improper clearances,
destroyed. These pits constitute stress overloading, and by pressure of foreign
risers which may lead to failure by material
fatigue breakage. Large pits, formed by
joining of smaller pits, are due to failure
of material between them, constituting
a form of spalling
Scoring A form of wear characterized by scratches, Removal of metal from tooth surfaces
scuffing, and dragged or furrowed appear- caused by tearing out of small contact-
ance with markings in the direction of ing particles that have welded together
sliding. Generally occurs at or near tip of as a result of metal-to-metal contact
the tooth
Spalling Sporadic fatigue failure, characterized by large Originates with a surface or subsurface
particles or chips that spall or flake out of defect from excessive internal stresses
tooth surfaces, usually along the flank area due to heat-treatment, or from over-
and near the ends. These cavities are larger, loads
deeper, and have a cleaner break than pits,
although the distinction is primarily of
degree
Wear A loss of material from contacting surfaces Contacting surfaces abrading one
of gear teeth. Normal wear is the slow loss another
of material from contacting surfaces. The
degree of wear is dependent on such factors
as gear rpm, load, lubricating, and align-
ment. Normally the surface protective coat-
ing will be removed, leaving a polished ,
finish. Normal or moderate wear is usually

seen as a pronounced pattern, possible with
a band in the center
Wear, Fretting A form of wear noted on spline teeth. This Relative motion between spline connec-
Corrosion wear is characterized by the removal of par- tions and/or lack of continual oil flow.
ticles and subsequent formation of oxides The formation of oxides from fretting
(rust-colored powder or paste) corrosion are often abrasive and increase
in wear
Wear, Pitting or See definitions for Wear, Pitting, Spalling Localized overloading and/or misalign-
Spalling Due to ment
NOTE
Light end-wear may or may not

correct itself.
70-00-00
29
ARVCO LYCOMING OlVISION
HEAVY FRO
MEDIUM PITTING
MEOtUM SCORING MEDIUM FROSTING
UGHT PITTING
XR 1012-254
Figure 6. Gear and Spline Damage (Sheet 1 of 3)
70-00-00

AVCC3 LYCOMING OMSION
XR 1012-255
70-00-00
31
XR-1012-256
70-00-00
32 © 1978, Avco Lycomine Division

WEAR NOT TO EXCEED

/ LlMIT5 GIVEN
DIAL
INDICATOR
TYPICAL SPLINE
SHOWING WORN
AREAS
TOOTH MUST BE
PARALLEL WITH
- SURFACE
ZERO DIAL INDICATOR

ON UNWORNAREA
OF SPLINE
WORNAREA
×A-1012-257
Figure 7. Measuring Spline Wear (Typical)
B. Blend-repair such defects as follows: (1) Swab part clean using dry cleaning solvent
(P-D-680).
(1) Repair, using small diesinker-type file and
India or carborundum stone. Use crocus cloth (P-C-458) (2) Using carbide burr, rout each imperfection
for final polishing· to expose clean, sound base metal. Minimize routing to
lessen possibility of breaking through parent
metal. If
(2) Blend all repairs and finish smoothly. Lines, unavoidable, routing a minimum of parent metal is per-
scratches, or sharp edges that might cause concentration missible.
of stress are not permitted.
(3) Reinspect part to ensure complete removal

(3) Do not use power tools to blend repair. of imperfection.
(4) No repairs are permitted on working surface (4) Using stainless steel wire brush, remove all
of gears. surface treatment from local area to be welded.
(5) Blend repair of coated turbine nozzle vanes (5) Thoroughly clean chips, scale, dirt, oil, and
and rotor blades shall consist of removing any project- other foreign material, detrimental to proper welding,
ing material only. Further blending will damage coating. from all areas to be welded. Do not sand-blast or steel-
grin-blast parts to be welded.
24. FUSHION-WELD (TIG) REPAIR. Proceed as follows:
(6) Back up area to be repaired with copper or
A. Fusion weld repair shall be performed in accord- inert gas, and reweld, using tungsten inert-gas process,
ance with the following instructions: with filler material specified in repair procedure.
70-00-00
33
JAVCD L.YCOMING OIV1SION
WIDTH
CORNER RADIUS
OUTER RING
SHOULDERS
INNER RING
CORNER
RADIUS
BORE INNER RING

OUTSIDE BALL RACEWAY
DIAMETER
RETAINER (CAGE)
BALL
LRR NEWAY
FACE A
BALL BE ARI NG
WIDTH
O.D. CORNER
OUTER RING
ROLLER
INNER RING
INNER RING
ROLLER RACEWAY
OUTSIDE BORE CORNER

DIAMETER BORE
SHOULDERS
RETAINER ( CAGE)
FACE OUTER RING

ROLLER RACEWAY
STRAIGHT ROLLER BEARING XA-1012-259
Figure 8. Bearing Orientation Terminology (Typical)
70-00-00
34
AVCO LYCOMING OIVlSION
LTP10 I Maintenance Manual
N TlONSDOF
FALSE BRINELLING
BANDiNG .
FRETTING
FATIGUE PlTTING
GROOVING XR-TO12-284
CALLING
Figure 9. Bearing Damage{Sheet 1 of 2)
70-00-00
35
AVCO L.YCOMING OIVISiON
NDENTING
NOWEAR END EAR +-
SCORING
ROLLE.REND WEAR XR-1012-261
Figure 9. Bearing Damage (Sheet 2 of 2)
70-00-00
36 11 fi I II Artitrity D9tric9rrn
Table 6. Bearing Visual Inspection, Damage, and Probable Causes
Condition or
Damage Description Probable Cause
Banding Typified by parallel bands of discolora- Result of oil, varnish, or oxide film formation
tion. Occurs on bearing component part on bearing surfaces. Generally caused by high-
rolling contact surfaces. Original surface temperature bearing operation
is not broken
Brinelling, False Occurs only at rolling contact surfaces Result of continuous nonrotational shaft os-
of bearing rings. It is a specialized form cillation. Vibration caused by engine trans-
of fretting. Recognized by presence of portation may cause false brinelling. Direct
a series of surface blemishes in loaded causes are varied, but the result will appear
side of ring at each ball or roller posi- as wear at point of contact. Does not occur
tion. Indentations are usually polished when bearing is in operation
or satin finished in appearance. Due to
very slight rotational movement, inden-
tation will frequently be flatter than
the roller or ball curvature
Brinelling, True Occurs at rolling contact surfaces of Result of high shock loads, leaving a perman-
bearing rings. Recognized by presence ent impression of roller or ball in the ring
of shallow, smooth indentations in ring contact surface. Usually occurs from shock
at each ball or roller position on loaded loads when bearing is stationary
side of bearing. Since original surface
material has not been removed, indenta-
tions have the same surface appearance
as surrounding surface area. Indention
contour is the same as the roller or ball
curvature
Corrosion Chemical discoloration of bearing sur- Result of any adverse chemical action due to
Discoloration faces without removal of surface metal; water, acid, lubricant, or a corrosive atmos-
recognized by red or black colored phere, and generally caused by improper pre-
clusters (not to be confused with pitting servation procedures or lack of precaution
corrosion which is actual metal removal). during installation, removal, inspection, or
If not arrested, discoloration corrosion storage
will advance to corrosion pitting
Corrosion Irregular surface depressions appearing Result of any adverse chemical action due to
Pitting in clusters and having ragged edges due water, acid, lubricant, or a corrosive atmos-
to metal removal. Corrosion discolora- phere
tion is an early form of corrosion pitting.
(Pitting should not be confused with in-
denting.)
70-00-00
37
APAVCD L.YCOMING OlVISION
Table 6. Bearing Visual Inspection, Damage, and Probable Causes -

Continued
Condition or
Fretting Recognized by discoloration of nonactive Result of slight movement between two con-
contacting parts, rust deposit between sur- tacting surfaces resulting in removal of ori-
faces, and removal of original surface ma- ginal surface material. May be caused by os-
terial. Occurs only between contacting sur- cillating vibration or loose mounting fits.
faces with slight relative motion. (It will Rust on surfaces can act as a lapping com-
not occur between rolling contact mem- pound, further advancing fretting
bers.) Examples of these surfaces are:
inner ring and shaft, outer ring and hous-
ing, faces of rings, and retainer faces.
Fretting will reduce fit between surfaces,
causing looseness and rotation, resulting
in a polished contact surface
Frosting Recognized by many minute indentations Generally a wearing-in process, and is consid-
within localized areas on bearing rings. ered as an early stage of superficial pitting
Usually frosting cannot be measured or scoring
Galling Recognized by presence of metal from Result of localized breakdown of lubrication

one part remaining attached to another. causing friction, intense heat, and part fusion.
Occurs at poorly lubricating surfaces Continued use will tend to break weld, leaving
that are in sliding contact portions of metal from seized parts attached
to one or both parts. Galling of separator or
retainer may be detected by removal of
metal from the separator and its deposit on
the roller, ball, or ring
Grooving Found on rolling contact surface of ball Results from overload, lubrication breakdown,
or roller bearings. Recognized by presence and skidding
of depressions in elements of rolling con-
tact surfaces
Heat Discolora- Presence of discolored areas, ranging from Result of high-temperature operation or lu-
tion Staining, straw color to dark brown (varnishing) to brication breakdown with or without high-
Varnishing light brown, red-purple, purple, blue, and temperature operation
blue-gray (heat)
Indenting Characterized by smooth-bottomed ran- Result of dirt or foreign particles flattened

dom surface depressions occuring on roll- into bearing surface by rolling action or im-
ing surfaces and ball paths, as evidenced proper mounting procedure
by metal displacement but not metal re-
moval
Nicking Sharp, well-deformed indentations occur- Result of bearing components striking one
ring on any bearing surface struck by sharp another or being struck by sharp object.
objects. Nicks displace but do not remove Nicks are not result of bearing operation
material. A ridge is formed by displaced
material next to nick
70-00-00
JAVCD LYCOMING OlVISJON
Table 6. Bearing Visual Inspection, Damage, and Probable Causes -

Continued
Condition or
Eting, Irregular surface depressions caused by Result of isolated metal removal caused by
Fatigue stress concentration at roller contact slippage, lack of lubrication, wear, or eccen-
areas. Fatigue pitting is characterized tric mounting. Fatigue pitting concentrated
by metal removal, flaking, or cracking at ends of rollers or roller pathway is evi-
dence of misalignment
Retainer Cracking of retainer, particularly in ball/ Breakdown in lubrication, material fatigue,

Damage roller pocket areas and tangs. Excessive roller skidding, or skewing
wear of retainer lands and pocket areas
through silver plating into retainer base
metal
Roller End Occurs on random rollers on one or both Misalignment or skewing of the roller within
Wear ends. Condition may vary from a slight, the bearing
concentric, or deep concentric pattern to
an eccentric pattern. Roller end wear is
best observed by comparing one roller
end to another
Scoring Recognized by presence of parallel or . Result of localized lubrication breakdown be-

concentric grooves penetrating original tween sliding surfaces. Also caused by depo-
surface. Occurs at bearing component sits of hard particles resulting from lubricant .
surface in sliding contact with scored breakdown or presence of foreign particles.

surfaces Axial scoring may occur during assembly and
disassembly when bearing is stationary
Circumferential scoring occurs during bearing

operation
Scuffs and Scuffs and worn spots usually occurring May appear in any area. Size and density of
Scratches as dull patches; scratches are marks that condition increases with handling arid use
may appear in any form or size
Seizing Advanced stages of galling. Recognized Result of localized breakdown of lubrications,

by welding of one bearing component causing friction, intense heat, and part fusion
to another, preventing rotation
Wear Rubbing away of surface by mechanical Results of abrasive substances contacting roll-
action that occurs on all rolling or con- ing surfaces, and acting as a lapping compound
tact surfaces. May be indicated by wavy Gummed or insufficient lubricant, vibration in
path, slight discoloration, dull or shiny presence of abrasive particles, or movement
tracks, very finely pitted dull surface on caused by loose mounting. Excessive wear inay
roller path, and internal bearing bore also be caused by varying off-square conditions
looseness. Inspection can reveal any one of inner and outer ring, pressure on bearing
or a combination of these conditions, retainer, and roller skewing.
which, if excessive, may be easily de-
tected by internal looseness as well as
excessive mounting fit looseness
70-00-00
39
Table 7. Detail Bearing Inspection Limits (Mainshaft)
Condition or
Damage Limits
Banding Acceptable
Brinelling, False Acceptable
Brinelling, True Noticeable depressions unacceptable. Minor ring brinelling, so slight that
it only can be detected in reflected light, will not be cause for rejection
Corrosion Discoloration, Corrosion effectively removed by standard cleaning methods is accept-

Corrosion Pitting able. Remaining isolated pitting on active surfaces is acceptable, pro-
vided:
a. It cannot be felt with a 0.020 inch radius probe.
b. No more than three visually evident individual pits exist in any 1/4
inch diameter area
Fretting Acceptable, provided rings do not have fretting on more than 20 percent
of their inactive areas. (Refer to Note 1 and limits for Wear damage.)
Fretting on ring faces may be removed by minor lapping rework, pro-
vided rings meet dimensional requirements
Frosting Acceptable, provided it cannot be felt with a 0.040 inch radius bearing
probe
Galling Not acceptable
Grooving Not acceptable .
Heat Discoloration, Varnishing is acceptable, provided any heavy varnish films can be re-
Staining, Varnishing moved by standard cleaning. Staining is acceptable, provided stain is not
caused by acid etch as observed after standard cleaning. Heat discolora-
tion: Bearings discolpred straw or brown color are acceptable. Bearings
discolored red-purple, purple, or blue are acceptable, provided hardness
inspection at three locations on both inner and outer ring faces is within
limits. (When there is any doubt as to a tempered-discoloration condi-
tion, replace bearing.)
Indenting Isolated indenting acceptable, provided it cannot be felt with a 0.040

inch radius bearing probe
Nicking Small isolated nicks with no projections are acceptable on active surfaces
if they cannot be felt with a 0.040 inch radius bearing probe. Minor
nicks on inactive surfaces are acceptable. (Refer to Note 1.)
70-00-00
JAVCD LYCOMING OIVISION
Table 7. Detail Bearing Inspection Limits (Mainshaft) -

Continued
Condition or
Damage Limits
Pitting, Fatigue Not acceptable
Retainer Damage a. Any cracking is unacceptable
b. Overheating, as evidenced by melting or flowing of silver plate, is

unacceptable
c. Wear of ball pocket and/or land-riding surfaces exposing any base

metal up to 1/16 inch measured in any direction (not depth) is
acceptable. Wear beyond this limit is unacceptable
Roller End Wear Rollers which show a slight bumishing or concentric polishing (no depth)
are acceptable. (Inspect both ends.) Eccentric roller end wear is unac-
ceptable. Rollers showing a deep wear pattern, whether concentric or
eccentric, are unacceptable
Scoring Isolated axial scoring acceptable, provided it cannot be felt with a 0.040
inch radius bearing probe. (Refer to limits for Wear Damage.)
Scuffs and Scratches Acceptable, provided they cannot be felt with a 0.040 inch radius bear-
ing probe. A maximum of two scratches per sequare inch of active sur-
face is allowed. (Refer to Note I.)
Seizing Not acceptable
Wear Determined by inspection of radial internal clearance and other dimen-

sional inspection requirements
NOTE
Minor scoring, fretting, or wear of the outer ring OD may

result from spinning or movement of the bearing in its
housing. This ring OD wear is acceptable, provided OD
measurements taken at various locations (and in the wear
area) are within limits.
Note 1. Active Bearing Surfaces are:

Inner and outer ring raceways
Retainer pockets and lands and ring riding lands
Rolling elements
Inactive Bearing Surfaces are:

Ring ID/OD and faces
Retainer faces
70-00-00
41
NO. 37 NO. 36 NO. 7
NO. 39
XA-1053-133
Figure 10. Cutaway of Engine to Show Location of Mainshaft Bearing Positions

JAVCO L.YCOMING OlVISION
(7) If specified in detailed repair procedure, pre- 25. SILVER BRAZE REPAIR. Proceed as follows:
27°C
heat part maintaining a variance of plus or minus
(plus or minus 50°F) during welding operation. A. Procedures for silver braze repair shall be in ac-
cordance with the torch technique and the following
(8)If postheat is specified, maintain preheat instructions.
temperature and postheat each area immediately after
weld repair, as specified in repair procedure, maintain- NOTE
14°C (plus
ing a temperature variance of plus or minus
of minus 25°F). Bearing fixtures shall be capable of
maintaining proper braze clearance, have
(9) Blend weld repair and any burn-through with dimensional stability, and have com-
surrounding parent metal to minimize stress concentra- patible coefficients of expansion with
tions. parts being joined.
B. Inspect repaired parts as specified in the detail in- B. Prepare the brazing as fonows:
spection paragraphs and in accordance with the follow-
ing criteria: NOTE
(1) Weld beads shall be smooth and free from Any combination of the following
irregularities in accordance with aircraft quality welding cleaning methods, which effectively
practices and shall blend into base metal in smooth, removes all dirt, grease, paint, scale,
gradual curves. or foreign matter from the part to be
brazed, may be used.
(2) Overlapping and lack of fusion of the weld
beads are not acceptable. (1) Clean parts, using appropriate chemical solu-
tions where applicable, as outlined in detailed procedures.
(3) Penetration of butt welds shall be 100 per-
cent unless otherwise specified. (2) Use silicon-carbide-impregnated cloth wheel
or an austenitic stainless steel wire brush to polish mat-
(4) Penetration (under bead) of a butt weld ing surfaces.
should not exceed one-third the thickness of the thin-
ner base material and penetration excess shall be re- (3) Swab part clean with dry cleaning solvent
moved if it causes interference when parts are assembled (P-D-680).
and mated.
(4) Inspect parts to ensure all areas to be brazed
(5) Perform dye-penetrant inspection for cracks. are thoroughly clean.
Cracks are not acceptable.
(S) Use lint-free cloth to apply acetone (O-A-51)
NOTE to all areas to be brazed.
In following step, D equals the largest C. Perform brazing procedure as follows:

dimension of the defect. T equals
the thickness of the thinnest base (1) If required, use flux on surfaces to be brazed.
material joined.
CAUTION
(6) Surface porosity is acceptable provided its
size is less than T/3 (one-third the material thickness) IN FOLLOWING STEP, ALL CLAMPS
but no greater than 0.080 inch and the minimum spac- OR FIXTURES IN THE IMMEDIATE
ing between the porosities is 3D. There shall be no VICINITY OF THE SURFACES TO
more than three indications of maximum size, or equiva- BE BRAZED SHALL BE FREE OF OIL,
leng, per linear inch. GREASE, PAINT, SCALE, OR OTHER
FOREIGN MATERIALS.
70-00-00
43
JAVCD L.YCOMING OIVISION
NOTE (5) Surfaces of parts shall be free of excessive

brazing material.
Fluxes shall be used, as required to
promote fluidity of the filler metal. (6) If a pressure test is specified, leakage shall
They shall be capable of dissolving not exceed allowable limits.
any oxides and prevent additional
oxidation of the filler metal and 26. THREAD REPAIR AND SCREW-THREADINSERTS
base material during heating. Fluxes (HELICAL COILS). Proceed as follows:
may be applied in the form of
powder, paste, vapor gas, or coat- NOTE
ing on the filler material.
For sizes and methods of installation
(2) Parts to be joined shall be assembled so that of screw-thread inserts, refer to insert
the clearances between mating surfaces are within the manufacturer's instructions. Screw-
tolerances specified in the detailed repair procedures. thread inserts (manufactured by Heli-
The assembly shall be supported so that proper align- Coil Corporation, Danbury, Conn.),
ment of parts is maintained. or equivalent, may be used.
NOTE A. Inspect studs, threaded inserts, and all internal

threads for damage or crossed threads.
Unless otherwise specified, the opti-
mum gap between mating surfaces B. If damage is noted, repair as follows:
shall be 0.001 to 0.005.
(1) Using suitable chasing tool, tap, or die, chase
(3) For torch brazing, parts shall be preheated damaged thread.
with a neutral or slightly reduced flame to bring the
entire joint uniformly to the flow temperature of the (2) If damage is too great, the threads may re-
filler material, but no higher than necessary to produce quire a screw-thread insert (helical coil).
a satisfactory joint. Localized overheating and sealing
should be avoided. The filler material shall be introduced (3) Broken or loose studs in a tapped hole may
at one edge of the joint, or in a groove provided for the be repaired by using an oversized stud or a screw-thread
purpose in one of the mating surfaces, and shall flow by insert (helical coil).
capillary action to fill the braze area.
27. REPLACEMENTOF STUDS. Proceed as follows:
(4) Residual flux shall be removed from all sur-
82°C (180°F)
faces by rinsing parts in water at after A. Studs, due to their general exposure, are very sus-
completion of brazing operations. ceptible to thread damage.
D. Heat treatment shall be as specified in repair pro- B. Replace damaged studs as follows:
cedures.
(1) Replace studs that are stretched, loose, or
E. Inspect silver braze repaired parts as follows: have damaged threads with oversize studs.
(1) Visually inspect for continuity of braze. (2) Whenever an oversize stud requires replace-
ment, replace with the next oversize. Sizes are stamped
(2) Ninety-percent fillet is required on the side on the ends of oversize studs.
of braze application.
(3) Where the threads of the stud hole have be-
(3) No cracks are allowed in adjacent base metal. come damaged or stripped, it is possible, if there is suf-
ficient material around the hole, to drill and retap the
(4) Surface porosity is acceptable. hole for a special stepped stud.
70-00-00

AMWCC LYCOMING OlVISION
DATE F eb 3 /8 1 eTRATPCAD, CONNECTICUT
NO. 85
THIS CHANGEAPPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
30. THREAD REPAIR AND SCREW-THREAD INSERTS (ROSAN INSERTS). Installation

of a Rosan fastener at a location where one was not originally installed
may be accomplished only when specified in detail repair paragraph (refer
to steps A, B, C, and C1). Existing fasteners may be replaced when
damaged (refer to steps D, E, F, and G).
Sheet 1 of 1
JAVCC LYCOMING OlVISION
(4) When installing an oversize stud in a bottom- to prevent chips from entering the en-
less stud hole, make sure that anchor end of stud does gine. (Coat tip of drill and tap with
not project beyond bottom end of hole so as to cause petrolatum, (V-V-P-236), tap all open-
interference with other parts. If necessary, file off anchor ings, and/or pressurize the component.)
end enough to ensure against such interference and re-
identify stud with proper oversize mark. (1) Determine thread size and part number of
insert to be installed.
(5) When installing a stud that incorporates a
cotter pin or a lockwire hole, the projection length (2) Select step drill of appropriate size and drill
should be measured from the bottom of the stud hole. out hole.
(6) See the specific repair applicable to the studs (3) Select tap of appropriate size and tap hole.
being replaced.
(4) Clean hole and use a standard Class 3 tap
(7) For correct stud driving torque, refer to to complete hole preparation. Flush hole with methyl-
preceding paragraph 13. Torques given are based on en- ethyl-ketone (TT-M-261).
gine oil as thread lubricant. If torque required to drive
a stud to correct projection length should not come up (5) Coat magnesium threads with zine chromate
to minimum or should exceed maximum, select another primer (T-T-P-645).
stud.
(6) Select insert and lockring. Using applicable
28. REPAIR OF SEAL JOURNALS. Minor repair of wrench, install insert so that top of serrated flange is
seal journals may be accomplished as follows: Circum- 0.010 to 0.020 inch below surface.
ferential tracking and residual deposits shall be removed
by lightly polishing journal in a circumferential direction (7) Position lockring over insert (undercut size
with crocus cloth (P-C-458). Only those deposits that down). Using applicable drive tool, install lockring.
project above surfaces of journal need be removed.
Carbon deposits imbedded below journal surface are ac- B. Installation of Slimsert Inserts. (Refer to figure 12.)
ceptable. Place journal on a lathe during polishing. Slimsert inserts may be installed at a location where one
was not originally installed only when specified in de-
29. REPAIR OF GEARS AND SPLINED PARTS. tail repair paragraph.
Minor nicks, burrs, and scratches on other than work-
ing surfaces of gears or splined parts may be repaired NOTE
by blend repairing. (Refer to paragraph 23.)
Inserts and tools required are listed in
30. THREAD REPAIR AND SCREW-THREAD IN- table 9. If component is installed on
SERTS (ROSAN INSERTS). Installation of a Rosan the engine, care shall be taken to pre-
fastener at a location where one was not originally in- vent chips from entering the engine.
stalled may be accomplished only when specified in de- (Coat tip of drill and tap with petrola-
tail repair paragraph (refer to steps A, B, and C). Exist- tum (V-V-P-236), tape all openings,
ing fasteners may be replaced when damaged (refer to and/or pressurize the component.)
steps D, E, and F).
(1) Determine slimsert size and style (with or
A. Installation of Ring Locked Inserts. (Refer to fig- without internal thread lock).
ure 11.) Ring locked inserts may be installed at a lo-
cation where one was not originally installed only when (2) If necessary, remove damaged helical wire-
specified in detail repair paragraph, type insert with pliers or similar tool.
NOTE (3) Select step drill of appropriate size and drill

out hole.
Inserts, lockrings, and tools required are
listed in table 8. If component is in- (4) Select tap of appropriate size and tap hole.
stalled on the engine, care shall be taken
70-00-00
45
AVCD L.YCOMING OIVISION
.010
SPECIFY THIS
DIMENSION
SEE NOTE 3 INSTALLATION
INSERT
.010
LOCK I, PREPARE HOLE IN PARENT MATERIALPER APPLICABLEINSERT DATA
SEE NOTE 4 RING SHEET TABULATION. TAP DRILL AND COUNTERBORE MUSTBE
CONCENTRIC W1THIN T,l.R.
.003
2. WHEN PARENT MATERIALSURFACEIS NOT F T OR 15 NOT

NORMAL TO AXIS OF HOLE, PROVIDE A SPOTFACE FOR
PROPER LOCK RING ENTRY,
3. WITH APPLICABLE WRENCH, INSTALL INSERT TO DEPTH SHOWN.

NOTE: LOCATION OF FLANGE IS IMPORTANT SO THAT THE LOCK
R1NG DRIVE TOOL WILL NOT MAKE CONTACT WITH SURFACE "A".
ANY IMPACT OR PRESSURE ON THIS SURFACEMAY CAUSE DAMAGE
TO THREADS IN PARENT MATERIAL, RESULTING IN A LOOSE FIT.
s. WITH APPLICA6LEDRIVETOOL INSTALL LOCK RING TO DEPTH SHOWN.
RËMOVAL DRILL
REMOVAL
1. CLAMP PART FROM WHICH INSERT IS TO BE REMOVED SECURELY TO

DRILL PRESS TABLE. ALIGN $P1NDLE WITH HOLE IN PART.
2. SECURE REMOvAL DRILL IN CHUCK AND SET SPINDLE SPEED AT 300

TO 700 RPM,
3. DRILL THRU LOCK RING AND NECK OF INSERT TO DESTROY SERRATION

INTERLOCK. DO NOT DRILL BEYOND THE DEPTH OF THE COUNTERSORE
IN THE PARENT MATERIAL
s. WHEN REMOVING HYDRAULlCRING LOCKED INSERTS, DRiLL ONLY THRU

SERRATED FLANGE OF INSERT. DO NOT ORILL THRU SECOND FLANGE.
SEE PS10026 FOR DEPTH.
SCREW EXTRACTOR-
5. OR1VE SQUARESCREW EXTRACTOR INTO lNSERT AND APPLY REMOVAL

LOCK RING TORQUE. WHEN INSERT THREADFLANKS BEAR AGAINST LOWER SURFACE
OF LOCK RING, CONTINUED REMOVAL TORQUE WILL CAUSE THE LOCK
RING TO SE JACKED OUT. INSERT REMOVAL MAY THUS BE COMPLETED.
INSERT
6. IF LOCK RING HAS BEEN DRILLED COMPLETELY THROUGH AND FAILS
TO LIFT OUT WITH INSERT, THEREMAINING PORTION MAY BE
COLLAPSED WITH A PUNCH AND REMOVED.
NOTES: 1. FOR INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL DRILL PART NUMBERS,REFER TO THE DATA SHEETS IN THIS SECTION.
2. REPLACEMENT OF ROSA'N IN$ERTS AND LOCK RINGS IS MADE WITH SAME SIZE PARTSAS THOSEREMOVED
AND IN SAME MANNER AS ORIGINALLY INSTALLED, ROTATENEW LOCK RING IF NECESSARY, BEFORE
DRIV1NG, TO A POSITION IN WHICH THE EXTERNAL SERRATIONSARE ALIGNED WifH THOSE IN
PARENT MATERIAL.
XA-101 342
Figure 11. Installation and Removal of Ring Locked Inserts
70-00-00

AVCO L.YCOMING OlVISION
Table 8. Ring Locked Inserts, Lockrings, and Special Tools (Sheet 1 of 4)
INTERNAL THREADLOCK
LOCKRING INSERT
(REF)
COARSE INTERNAL AND COARSE EXTERNALTHREADS
INSERT LOCKRING AVAIL-
INTERNAL EXTERNAL T L K H
PART PART THREAD THREAD
MILITY
DIA
NUMBER N SnER
UNJC-3B (SEE NOTE)
RDJl02SB-4 RLlóSB-5 .1120-40 .190-24

.15 .25 .040 .113
RDJ103SB-5 RL18SB-6 .1380-32 .216-24

.19 .31 .040 .140 A A
RDJl045B-6 RL2ISB-6 .\640-32 .250-20
.25 .38 .047 .166 A A
RDJ10SSB-7 RL24SB-7 .1900-24 .3125-18
.29 .44 .062 .196 A A
RDJl06SB-8 RL28SB-8 .2500-20 .375-16
.33 .50 .000 .257 A A
RADJi0758-9 RL33SB-9 .3125-18 .500-13
.36 .56 .095
.323 A A
RDJ108SB-10 RL3858-9 .3750-16 .5625-12
.42 .62 ,100 .386 A A
RDJ1095B-11 RL47SB-10 .4375-14 .625-11
.46 .69 .100 .453
A &
RDJ110SB-12 RL56SB-11 .5000-13 .750-10
.49 .75 .109 .516 A -
a
(a) LETTER "J" DENOTE5 INCREASED MINOR DIAMETER PER MIL-5-8879THREADS.

(b) SEE MATERIAL CODE FOR INSERTS FABRICATED
FROM OTHER MATERIALS.
I. MATER1AL CODE: 5B =
Clll7CARBON STEEL, NON HEAT TREATED
SM =
303 CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL
THESE PARTS ARE AVA1LABLE IN OTHER MATERIALS; REFER TO PSl0017 FOR MATER1AL CODE (SEE INDEX).
2. FINISH: CARBOþi STEELCADMlUM PLATE PER QQ-P-416, TYPEIL, CLASS 3

CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL PASSIVATE
3. THREADS: THE EXTERNAL THREAD HAS A SPECIAL PITCH DIAMETER WHICH MATES WITH A NATIONAL CLA55 3TAPPED HOLE.
4. DESIGN DATA: INSERT LENGTH5 SHOWN ARE BASED ON 1NSTALLATION IN 2024-T4 ALUMINUM AND IN SUCH MATERIALS WILL
ACCOMMODATETENSION LOADS UP TO THE STRENGTH OF A MATING BOLT HEAT TREATED TO 145,000 PS1. IF
THIS DESIGN IS REQUIRED IN PARENT MATERIALSOF LOWER MECHANICAL PROPERTIES, LONGER LENGTHSSHOULD
BE SPECIFIED. MATING BOLTSSHOULD HAVEA THREAD ENGAGEMENT OF l 1/2 DIAMETERS OR IF INSERT HAS A
THREAD LOCK, THE BOLT SHOULD EXTEND THROUGH THE INSERT 2PITCHES INCLUDING CHAMFER.
5. DIMEN5IONS: DIMENSIONS IN INCHES; TOLERANCES UNLESS NOTED, DEC. .XX =Í.015, .XXX -
I .005.
6. INSTALLATION: INSERTSINSTALLED PER PS10006 (SEE INDEX)
7. PART NUMBERS: THEPART NUMBER CONSISTS OF THE "RDJ" NUMBER PLUS THE DASH NUMBERS
(OMIT LETTER "J" FOR MIL-5-7742 INTERNAL THREADS)EXAMPLE:
RDJ 106 SS BL -
ROSAN INSERT, CgORED INTERNAL THREAD LOCK (LEAVE

BLANK 1N LIEUOF L FOR NON-LOCK)
MIL-S-8879 INTERNAL THREAD
--OVERALL LENGTH CODE IN I/16 INCH INCREMENTS
SERIESNUMBER (INTERNAL AND- LENGTHS AS SHOWN IN TABLE ARE STANDARD
EXTERNAL THREAD COMB1NATION)
-MATERIAL CODE (STEEL,CARBON, COMP C1117)
8. AVAILABILITY CODE: A STANDARD PARTS NORMALLY STOCKED

A STANDARD PARTS TOOLED- -
NOT NORMALLY STOCKED
TAP THREAD 4NAT L LAS5 3 HOLE PREPARATION
INSERT TAP A TAP

DRILL
C'BORE DIA
PART C'BORE MIN FULL THREAD Z
C(FOR STANDARD NUMBER -000
DEPTH THREAD NATIONAL
(REF) 030
CATALOG SIZES) CLASS 3
ALUM MAG
- --- RDJl02SB-4 25(.149) .250 .258 .094 .285

10-24 NC
RDJ1035B-5 16(.177) .281 .291 .109 .345
12-24 NC
RDJ104SB-6 7(.201) .328 .337 .109 .415
.250-20
NC
RDJ10SSB-7 F(.257) ,3125-18
NC
.375 .381 .141 ,475
U
RDJl0658-8 5/16(.312) .437 .448 .156 .535
.375-16
NC
RADJ1075B-9 27/64(.422) .515 .526 .172 .595

.500-13 NC
TAP DRILL RDJTOBSB-10 31/64(.484) .593 .601 .172 .655
.5625-12
NC
TAP DRILL AND C BORE DIA MUST BE RDJTO95B-il 17/32(,531) .734 .747 .218 .725
.625-11 NC
CONCENTRIC WITHIN RDJ110SB-72 41/64(.641) NC U
T.I.R.
.003
.875 .888 .203 .785
.750-10
XA-1012 343
70-00-00
47
JAVCD LYCOMING OIVISJON
i STEP DRILL TAP WRENCH DRIVE TOOL

(STANDARD)
E INSERT
LOCKRIMO
STEP I STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 REMOVAL

STEP DRILLPART NUMBER TAP WRENCH DRIVE REMOVAL
INSERT DASIC LOCKRING BASIC
NDAL RTER PARTRENnUMBER PART(R MBER LEL
PARENT MATER1AL NA N
CLASS 3 NUMBER (REF)
ALUMINUM MAGNESIUM
Ci:Wilill-Williml3W I us-ilm--maisuuss
RCD-C 16-149 RCAD-C 16-149 .190-24
NC Rll02-W RDJl02( )-4 Rl02-D RLló( )-5 7/32
RCD-C 18-177 RCAD-C 18-177 .216-24
NC R1103-W RDJl03( )-5 RIO3-D RLl8( )-6 1/4
RCD-C 21-201 RCAD-C 21-201 .250-20
NC Rl104-W RDJl04( )-6 RIO4-D RL21( )-6 19/64
RCD-C 24-257 RCAD-C 24-257 .3125-18
NC R1105-W RDJl0S( )-7 RIOS-D RL24( )-7 F
RCD-C 28-312 RCAD-C 28-312 .375-16
NC R1106-W RDJl06( }-8 RIO6-D RL28( }-8 5/16
RCD-C 33-422 RCAD-C 33-422 NC

,500-13 Rll07X-W RADJl07( }-9 RA107-D RL33( )-9 V
RCD-C38-484 RCAD-C38-484 .5625-12NC Ril08-W RDJl08{ )-10 R108-D RL38{ )-9 29/64
RCD-C47-531 RCAD-C47-531 .625-11NC RlllO-W RDJ109( )-11 R109-D RL47( )-10 9/16
RCD-C56-641 RCAD-C56-641 0NC
.750
Rilll-W R Jl10{ )-12 Rl10-D R56( )-11 11/16
*REFER TOPS10006(SEE INDEX)

THRU HOLE FOR REMOVALINSTRUCTIONS
APPLICATION
EOUIVALENT
OR IN LIEU
or
STEP I STEPS 2,3 AND 4
ABOVE SAME AS ABOVE
I
I
I
BLIND HOLE
c'BORE TOOL NUMBER MIN DRILLDEPTH
APPLICATION T^,
DRILL PARENT MATERIAL PLUG BOTTOM
(REF)
TAP TAP
ALUMINUM MAGNESIUM
25(.149) RC-C 16-149 RCA-C 16-149 .472 .389
16{.177) RC-C 18-177 RCA-C 18-177 .532 .449
7(.201) RC-C 21-201 RCA-C 21-201 .640 .540
F(.257) RC-C 24-257 RCA-C 24-257 .725 .614
5/16{.312) RC-C 28-312 RCA-C 28-312

BOTTOMING .816 .691
PLUG TAP TAP

RC-C 33-422 RCA-C 33-422
MIN DRILL 27/64{.422)
MIN DRILL
.941 .787
31/64(.484) RC-C 38-484 RCA-C 38-484 1.030

DEPTH DEPTH RC-C RCA-C 47-531
.863
17/32{.531) 47-531 1.134 .952
41/64(.641) RC-C 56-641 RCA-C 56-641 1.235 1.035
NOTE: MINIMUM DRILLDEPTHSARE BASED

ON STANDARDMACHINING PRACTICES.
X A-1012-144
70-00-00
48 © 1978. Avco Lvcomino Divi<inn

AVCD LYCOMING 01VISiON
INTERNAL THREADLOCK
LOCKRING INSERT
(REF)
FINE INTERNAL AND COARSEEXTERNALTHREADS
INSERT LOCKRING AVAIL-
INTERNAL EXTERNAL
PART PART T L K H ABILITY
THREAD THREAD
NUMBER NUMBER DIA NOTE 1 &8
UNJF-3B (5EE NOTE)
(a) (b) (REF) SB SM
RDJ202SB-4 RLl6SB-5 ,1120-48 .190-24
.15 .25 .040 .113
& A
RDJ203SB-5 RLISSB-6 .1380-40 .216-24
.19 .31 .040 .140 A &
RDJ204SB-6 RL2]SB-6 .1640-36 .250-20
.25 .38 ,047 .166 A A
RDJ20558-7 RL2458-7 .1900-32 .3125-18
.29 .44 .062 .196 A A
RDJ20658-8 RL28SB-8 .2500-28 .375-16
.33 .50 .080 .257 A A
RADJ20758-9 RL335B-9 .3125-24 .500-13

.36 .56 .095 .323 A a
RDJ208SB-10 RL3858-9 .3750-24 .5625-12
.42 .62 .100 .386 A A
RDJ2095B-11 RL4758-10 .4375-20 .625-11
.46 .69 .100 .453 A A
ROJ2105B-l2 RL5658-11 .5000-20 .750-10
.49 .75 .109 .516 A &
(a) LETTER "J" DENOTES INCREASED M1NOR DIAMETER PER MIL-S-8879 THREADS.
(b) SEEMATERIAL CODE FOR INSERTSFABRICATED

FROM OTHER MATERIALS.
1. MATERIAL CODE : SB =
C1117CARSON STEEL, NON HEAT TREATED
SM =
303CORROSION RESISTANTSTEEL
THESEPARTS ARE AVAILABLE IN OTHER MATER1ALS:REFER TO PS10017 FOR MATERIAL CODE (SEEINDEX).
2. FINISH: CARBON STEEL CADMIUM PLATE PER QQ-P-416, TYPEII, CLASS 3

CORROSION RESISTANTSTEEL PASSIVATE
3. THREADS: THE EXTERNAL THREAD HAS A SPECIAL PITCH DIAMETER WHICH MATESWITH A NATIONAL CLASS 3 TAPPEDHOLE,
4. DESIGN DATA: INSERT LENGTHS SHOWN ARE BASEDON INSTALLATION ALUMINUM AND IN SUCH MATERIALS WILL IN2024-T4
ACCOMMODATETENSION LOADS UP TO THE STRENGTH OF A MATING BOLT HEAT TREATED TO 145,000 PSI. IF
THIS DESIGN IS REQUIRED 1N PARENT MATERIALS OF LOWER MECHANICALPROPERTIES,LONGER LENGTHS SHOULD
BE SPECIFIED. MATlNG BOLTS SHOULD HAVE A THREAD ENGAGEMENT OF l 1/2 DIAMETERSOR IF INSERT HAS A
THREAD LOCK, THE BOLT SHOULD EXTEND THROUGH THE INSERT 2PITCHE5 INCLUDING CHAMFER.
5. DIMENSIONS: D1MENSIONS IN INCHES; TOLERANCESUNLESS NOTED, DEC. .XX = Ì .015, .XXX =

Î .005.
6. INSTALLATION: INSERTSINSTALLED PER PS10006 (SEE INDEX).
7. PART NUMBERS: THE PART NUMBER CONSISTS OF THE "RDJ" NUMBER PLUSTHE DASH NUMBERS
(OMIT LETTER "J" FOR MIL-S-7742 INTERNAL THREADS) EXAMPLE:
RDJ 206 SB -
8L
ROSAN INSERT, CBORED
INTERNAL THREAD LOCK (LEAVE
MIL-S-8879 INTERNAL THREAD BLANK 1N LIEU OF L FOR NON-LOCK)
SERIESNUMBER (INTERNAL AND ---OVERALL LENGTH CODE IN 1/16 INCH 1NCREMENTS

EXTERNAL THREADCOMBINATION) LENGTHS AS SHOWN IN TABLEARE STANDARD
MATERIAL CODE (5TEEL, CARBON, COMP C1117) -
8. AVAILABILITY CODE: A STANDARD PARTSNORMALLY STOCKED

A STANDARD PARTS TOOLED NOT NORMALLY STOCKED
- -
TAP THREADNATIONAL CLASS 3

HOLE PREPARATION
A B C
INSERT TAP C BORE DIA C'BORE MIN FULL TAP
PART DRILL +.003
DEPTH THREAD THREAD
NUMBER (REF) -- +.030 NATIONAL
C (FOR STANDARD
CATALOG SIZES)
ALUM MAG -.000 CLASS 3 o
RDJ20258-4 25(.149) .250 .258
.094 .285 10-24 NC
RDJ203SB-5 16(.177) .281 .291 .109 .345
12-24NC
RDJ204SB-6 7(.201) .328 .337 .109 .415
.250-20
NC
¯>
RDJ20SSB-7 F(.257) .375 .381 .141 .475 .3125-18

NC e
RDJ2065B-8 5/16(.312) .437 .448 .156 .535
..375-16
NC o
RADJ2075B-9 27/64(.422) .515 .526 .172 .595 .500-13

NC ,
• TAP DRILL( RDJ208SB-10 31/64(,484) .593 .601 .172 .655

.5625-12
NC
(TAP DRILL AND CBORE DIA MUST BE RDJ20958-ll NC
RDJ210SB-12
17/32(.531) .734 .747 .218 .725
.625-11
Q
CONCENTRIC WITHIN TIR .003 41/64(.641) .975 .888 .203 .785
.750-10
NC
XA-1012-345
70-00-00
AO
AVCD L.YCOMING OlVISION
STEP DRILL TAP WRENCH DRIVE TOOL
INSERT
I
IUl|g LOCKRING
STEP i STEP t BTEP 3 STEP 4 REMOVAL

STEP ORILLPART NUMIER TAP WRENCH INSERTBASIC REMOVAL
LOCKRING BASIC
PART MBER PART MBER
PARENT MATERIAL M ONAL
CLASS 3 NUMBER (REF)
ALUMINUM MAGNES1UM 4
.m........ i..........-
RCD-C 16-149 RCAD-C 16-149 .190-24
NC Ril024 RDJ202( )-4 RIO24 RLl6( )-5 7/32
RCD-C 18-177 RCAD-C 18-177 .214-24 NC al1034 RDJ203( )-5 RIO34 RL18( )-4 1/4
RCD-C21-201 RCAD-C 21-201 .280-20
NC Ril044 RDJ204( )4 RIO4-D EL21( )4 19/64
RCD-C 24-257 RCAD-C 24-257 .3125-18 NC E1105-W RDJ205( )-7 5205-0 RL24( )-7 F
RCD-CM-312 RCAD-C 28-312 .378-16 NC R11064 RDJ206( )4 R206-D RL2B( )4 5/Ib
RCD-C33-422 RCAD-C 33-422 .500-13 NC RIIO7X-W RADJ207( )4 RA207-D RL33( )4 V

RCD-C 38-484 RCAD·C 38-404 .5625•12 NC Ril084 RDJ208( )-10 R2004 RL38( )-9 29/64
RCD-C 47-531 RCAD-C 47431 .625-11 NC #11104 ROJ209( )-11 R2094 RL47( )-IO 9/16
RCD-C 56-641 RCAD-C 36441 .750-10 NC R11114 RDJ210( )-12 R210-D RL56( )-11 11/16
* REFERTO PSIO006 (SEEINDEX)

THRU HOLE FOR REMOVALINSTRUCTIONS
APPLICATION
EQUIVALENT
OR IM LIEU
OF
\ STEP f STEP$ 2, 3 ANO 4
SAME AS ABOVE
BLIND HOLE
APPLICATION c soRE TOOL NUMBER MIN DRILLDEPTH
TAP ------ -
DRILL PARENTMATERIAL PLUG BOTTOM

(REF) TAP TAP
-
ALUMINUM MAGNESiUM
uummmmme mmmmm -
2 .1
RC-C 16-149 RCA-C 16-149 .473 .389
•
-
_ 1 .1 RC•C 18-177
RC-C 21-201
RCA-C 18-177
RCA-C 21-201
.533 .449
7(.201) .640 .540
F(.257) RC-C 24-257 RCA-C 24-257 .725 .614
BOTTOMING 5/16(.312) RC-C 20-312 RCA-C 28-312 .816 .691
PLUG TAP TAP

MIN CRILL MIN DRILL 27/64(.422) RC-C 33-422 RCA-C 33-422 .941 .787
DEPTH DEFTH 31/64(.484) RC-C 38-484 RCA-C 38-484 1.030 .863
17Wl2(.531) RC-C 47-531 RCA-C 47-531 1.134 .952
41/64(.641) RC-C 56441 RCA-C 56-641 1.235 1.035

NOTE: MINIMUM DRILLDEPTHSARE BASED
ON STANDARDMACHINING PRACTICES.
ummmii -
XA-1012-346
70-00-00

AVCC3 L.YCOMING OlVISION
WRENCHING
OPERATION OPERATION
SWAGING
NO INTERNAL LOCK INTERNAL LOCK ' ig SAME FOR BOTH 4 AND

6 PCINT DRIVE.
4 PCINT DRIVE 6 POINT DRlVE
IWDICATED, OTHER:JiñE
,LL HOLEPREPARATIONS,
PERATIONS AND TOOLS
SAME A3 6 POINT DRIVE. SWAGE TOOL
SR( )S-A
DRVE
FOR SROS6, 110,110L,

142,142L,162 & 162L
PARTS, INSTALL .010-
.020 BELOW SURFACE OF

PARENT MATERIAL. ALL
OTHER PARTSTO BE 1N- RHEN SHOULDER OF SMGE TOOL--
STALLED .015-.025 BE- . BOTTOMS ON SURFACEOF PARENT
LOW SURFACEOF PARENT MATERIAL FULL SWAGEAND LCCK
MATERlAL.tSEE NOTE 4) SETTING (S ACCOMPLISHED.
BL]ND HOLE THRUHOLE

INSTALL/,T10N 1NSTAgl/Tl0N
PREPARATION
HOLE
PARENT SURFACE
MIN, FULL MIN. FULL

TED. DEPTH • THD. DEPTH •
DRI LL DRI LL
DE TH DEPW
MIN• Í 1-1/2 PITCH MIN,
3-1/2 PITCH | IMP, THD, y
IMP. THD.
1 Pl TCH
CLEARANCE
PITCH
1
CLEARANCE *
MAX. PART LENGTH PLUS MX.
INSTALLATION DEPTH.
(MIN. FULL THD. & DRILL DEPTH TABULATEDON PAGE 10.03.1)
NOTES:
1, STANDARD TAPS, 1N FRACTIONAL SIZES INDICATED, ARE USED TO TAP ALL HOLES.
(THREADIS MODIFIED BY OVERSIZE TAP DRILL)
2. SWAGE TOOL OPERATION REQUIREDTO ACHIEVE POSITIVE EXTERNALLOCK.
3. TO INSURE THE ACHIEVEMENJ

OF THE DESIGN CAPABLLlTIESOF THE SLIMíERT
INSERT, THE USAGE OF ROSAN STANDARD TOOLS IS MANDATORY, 1.E. DRIVEWitENCH
SR( )W-A OR SR( )W4-A AND SWAGE TOOL SR( )S-A. SEE SECTION 7 FOR TOOL ILLUSTRATIONS.
4. THESEINSERTS ARE PRIMARILYFOR INSTALLATIÇN INTO ALUMINUM AND MAGNESIUM.

FOR USE IN OTHER MATERIALS,CONSULT ROSAN ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT.
5. METHOD OF REMOVAL: USING REMOVAL TOOL SR()R, C'BORE TO DEPTH "C" DIMENSION.
BACK OUT 1NSERTWITH DRIVEWRENCH, CLEAN QUT HOL£ AND
INSTALL NEW IN$ERT.
ALTERNATEMETHOD: USE DRILL51ZE INDICATED IN REMOVAL DRILLCOLUMN. DRILL
TO "C" DIMENSION PLUS REMOVEREMAINING PORTION
.025.
OF SERRATIOM AND FOLLOW PROCEDUREAS STATEDABOVE.
6. POWER TOOLING: PONER WRENCH AND SWAGE TOOLS ARE AVAILABLETO FACILITATE
""
HIGH PRODUCTION RATE REQUIREMENTS, SEE SECTION 7 FOR TOOL 6
ILLUSTRATIONS.
X A-101, -347
Figure 12. Installation and Removal of Slimsert Inserts
70-00-00
51
JAVCO LYCOMING OMSION
Table 9. Slimsert Inserts and Special Tools
HOLEPREPARATION D/.TA AND TOOLS REQ'3

TAP TAP C'BORE C PLUG TAP BOTTOMINGTAP ·)[-
DR L B 0 C. E SW E REMOVALLREMO L
NU ER D
.113 6-40UNF .1285
SR 086 (#33) T MOD. .138 .040 .273 .160 .223 .160 SR 08D SROBW4-A SROSS-A ---"
(#30)
U#8-32
,164 .052 .361 .220 .298 .220 SR 110 SR lis-A SR 11R 5 2)
#1 32
.381 .240 .318 .240 SR 14D SR 145-A BR 14R
.065
.187
A
SR 162L 191 ¥12-28 SR sw-A .205
SR 16D SR 165-A SR 16R (49)

SR 162 (yll) UNF
.216 .065 .441 .280 .369 .280
SR 192L SR)?N-A
SR 192 .221
1/4-28 5RI9W4-A .234
UNF SR 190 5R 195-A SR 19R (15/64)

SR 19dL (#2) .250 .082 .486 .325 .414 .325
SRl?N-A
Skl9ws-A
SR 194
SR 258L SR25W-A
SR 258 .281
5/16-24 SR2SW4-A .296
SR 250 SR 255-A SR 25R (19/64)

SR 250L (9/32) UNF .312 .082 .602 .415 .519 .415
SR25W-A
SR25w4-A
SR 314L SR31W-A
SR 314 .343
3/8-24 SR31ws-A .359
(11/32) UNF .375 .082 .693 .505 .609 .505 SR 31D SR 315-A SR 31R (23/64)
SR 318L SR3tw-A
SR 318 SR31W4-A
SR 374L SR37W-A
SR 374 .404 1/16-20 SR37W4-A .421
SR 37D SR 375-A SR 37R (27/64)

6 (Y) UNF .437 ,113 .820 .595 .720 .595
SR37W-A
5R 376 SR37W4-A
SR 430L SR43W-A
SR 430 .468 1/2-20 SR43W4-A ,484
SR 43D SR 435-A SR 43R (31/64)

.
SR 434L (15/32) UNF .500 .113 .920 .695 .820 .695
SR43W4-A
SR 434
SR SOOL SRSON-A
9/16-24 SR5fu4-A .546
SR 500 .531
SRSOS-A
(17/32) UNEF •562 .113 .973 .785 .889 .785 SR SOD SR SOR (35/64)
SR 503L SR50N-A
SRSow4-A
SR 503
SR 568L 5R56W-A
5 11/16-12 SRS65-A
.687 .150 1.248 .873 1.081 .873 SR 56D SR 56R 4
L
SRS6W4-A
SR 562
SR 628L SR62W-A
SR 629 .703 3/4-16 SRó2H4-A SR 628R .734
(45/64) UNF .156 1.248 1.123 SR 62D SR625-A (47/64)

SR 621L
.750 .967 .967
SR62W-A
SR 621R
SR 621 SR62W4-A
SR 756L SR75W-A
7/8-20 SR75W4-A 5R 7562
SR 756 .844 _ggg
1.380 1.155 1.280 1.155 SR 75D SR755-A LSS/64)

SR 750L (27/32) UNEF .875 .156
SR75W-A
SR 7¾
SR 750 SR75W4-A
SR( \W-A AND SR( )W4-A SUPERSEDESAND OBSOLETES SR( )W AND SR( )WA
# SR( )S-A SUPERSEDESSR( )5
DIMENSJONS iN INCHES. TOLERANCE$UNLESS NOTED: DECMAl XX = ± .015, .XXX = = .005
X A-101 1-34E
70-00-00
52 © 1978, Avco Lycorning Division

DRE eb 3 NS Ú
88
TB S CHANGE IES LT OREM tena ce Ma al

NŠER ngþgge 00 0
e lia ofgggt gLe s k

e installed t a 1 tión whe one wa n ofiginally installed only
when i a ligepai anaggphi
1 I t 1 tË into nogfegogs mat:eif ain r ed a fail
NOTE
St as locki ng anit tioals ui ed at ligt ed

in t L 10A I ompon¢nt i if tal ed oii tihe
t
e 44
engine.
age o
Coat tisp of d 1 arid ta
Nú¾
e teri
h la úd 23 tap¾ 1 fili
<io ao n
ta114<1
pd pp p d I t
ho e
ed
depth
d S 1 tt a of appropriate i e and tp hole
WÂÊNI C
FRFORM CLEANING OPERATION IN ELL VENTILATED

ozo 01 NGE IËRI F 5ES .
s t
DATE Feb 3/81
NO. 86
(g) By hand, Lastall the stud to the proper depth ensuring

that the lockring is in contact with the surface of the material.
(h) Using applicable drive tool (Refer to Figure 14),

drive the lockring into the counterbore until it is located 0.000 to 0.010
inch below the parent material.
(2) Installation into ferrous materials. Proceed as follows:
NOTE
In following procedure, ensure that concentricity

is maintained between the tapped hole and broached
serrations.
(a) Drill a controlled minor diameter in the parent mater-

ial.
(b) Counterbore the hole to the depth and diameter re-

quired. .
(c) Using the applicable broach tool, insert the pilot of

the tool into
the drilled hole with sufficient force applied to the top of
the mandrel to allow the cutter to broach into the counterbore. When the
external shoulder of the mandrel contacts the internal shoulder in the
body, broaching is complete. If cutter sticks in counterbore, nut may be
turned to extract cutter. (Do not wobble cutter to remove; this will re-
sult in a broken cutter.) Broach the serrations to depth required,
(d) Select tap of appropriate size and tap hole.
(e) Flush hole with methyl-ethyl-ketone (TT-M-261).
(f) Coat threaded hole with zinc chromate primer

(TT-P-645). .
NOTE
In following step, insert a 0.002 inch shim or

equivalent between the lockring and the broached
surface to prevent the lockring from prematurely
dropping into the boss serrations.
(g) Turn the stud into the threaded hole until the top of
the lockring has stopped against the upper part of the stud serrations and
the lower points of the lockring serrations rest on the shim surface.
Sheet 2 of 3
DATE Feb 3/81
NO. 86
(h) Remove the shim. If the lockring's external serrations

match the serrations in the counterbore, drive the lockring using the pro-
per size drive tool. (Refer to Figure 14.) If the serrations do not match,
turn the stud clockwise until they do and then drive the lockring using
the proper size drive tool. (Refer to Figure 14.)
Sheet 3 of 3
A7AVCD L.YCOMING OlVISION
WARNING (5) Coat magnesium threads with zinc chromate

primer (T-T-P-645).
PERFORM CLEANING OPERATION
IN WELL VENTILATED AREA. AVOID (6)Select stud and lockring. Engage applicable
PROLONGED INHALING OF FUMES. wrench serrated flange of stud and install stud.
with
The protruding stud length shall be 1.03 inches, and
(5) Flush hole with methyl-ethyl-ketone (T-T- top of serrated flange 0.010 to 0.020 inch below sur-
M-261). Coat magnesium threads with zine chromate face.
primer (T-T-P-645).
(7) Position lockring over the stud (undercut side
(6) Select slimsert insert. Using appropriate drive down). Using applicable drive tool, install new lockring
wrench, install insert. When shoulder of wrench meets on stud,
surface of parent material, the insert is installed to pro-
per depth. D. Replacement of Ring Locked Inserts.
(7) Place appropriate swage tool in the insert NOTE

and apply downward force. When shoulder of swage
tool bottoms on surface of parent material, full swage Special tools required are listed in table
and lock setting is accomplished. 8. If component is installed on the en-
gine, care shall be taken to prevent
C. Installation of Ring Locked Studs. (Refer to fig- chips from entering the engine. (Coat
ure 13.) Ring locked studs may be installed at a loca- tip of drill with petrolatum (V-V-P-236),
tion where one was not originally installed only when tape all openings, and/or pressurize the
specified in detail repair paragraph. component).
NOTE (1) Align drill press spindle with insert to be

removed.
Studs, lockrings, and tools required are
listed in table 10. If component is in- (2) Install appropriate drill in chuck.
stalled on the engine, care shall be taken
to prevent chips from entering the engine. (3) With spindle speed at 300 to 700 RPM, drill
(Coat tip of drill and tap with petrolatum through lockring and neck of insert to destroy the serra-
(V-V-P-236), tape all openings, and/or tion interlock.
pressurize the component.)
NOTE
(1) Determine thread size and part number of
stud to be installed. , Ensure drill does not progress beyond the
depth of counterbore in parent material.
(2) Select step drill of appropriate size and drill Portions of serrations will engaged will
out hole. readily break away when removal torque
is applied.
(3) Select tap of appropriate size and tap hole.
WARNING
WARNING
PERFORM CLEANING OPERATION
PERFORM CLEANING OPERATION IN WELL VENTILATED AREA.
IN WELL VENTILATED AREA. AVOID AVOID PROLONGED INHALING OF
PROLONGED INHALING OF FUMES. FUMES.
(4) Flush hole with methyl-ethyl-ketone (T-T-P- (4) Using a square screw extractor, remove in-
261), and use a standard Class 3 tap to complete hole sert. When top threads meet bottom surface of lockring,
preparation. the ring will be removed. If lockring fails to lift out, the
ring may be collapsed with a punch and removed. Flush
hole with methyl-ethyl-ketone (T-T-P-261).
70-00-00
53
AVCD l..YCOMING OIVISION
INSTALLATION
1. PREPAREPARENT MATERIAL HOLE PER APPLICABLESTUO DATA

SHEET. TAP DRILL AND COUNTERBOREMUST BE CONCENTRIC
IMPORTANT WITHIN T.l.R.
.003
5 EC 2. WHEN PARENT MATERIAL SURFACEIS NOT FLAT OR (5 NOT

SPECIFY THIS STUD NORMAL TO AXIS OF HOLE, PROVIDEA 5POTFACEFCR PROPER
DIMENSION PROJECTION LOCK R1NG ENTRY.
SEE NOTE 3
3. WITH APPLICABLE WRENCH, INSTALL STUD TO DEPTH SHCWN.
.005 LOCK NOTE: LOCATION OF FLANGE 15 IMPORTANTSO THAT THE
RING LOCK RING DRIVETOOL WILL NOT MAKE CONTACT WITH
SEE NOTE 4 SURFACE 'A". ANY IMPACT OR PRESSURE ON THIS SURFACE
r MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO TMREADS IN PARENT MATERIAL,
RESULTINGIN A LOOSE FIT.
4. WITH APPLICABLEDRIVE TOOL INSTALL LOCK RING TO

DEPTH SHOWN.
STUD
REMOVAL
1. CLAMP PART FROM WHICH STUD 15 TO BE REMOVED SECURELY

REMOVAL
TOOL
TO DRILL PRESSTABLEAFTER CAREFULLY ALIGNING AXES OF
STUDAND DRILL PRESS SPINDLE. SET SPINDLE SPEED AT 300
TO 700 RPM,
2. SECURE REMOVAL TOOL IN CHUCK AND LONER OVER STUD

\ -
SHANK BEFORE STARTING MOTOR.
3. WITHOUT RAISlNG SPINDLE, STARTMOTOR. MILL THROUGH

LOCK RING, RAISING TOOL EVERY FEW SECONDS TO ALLOW
CHIPS TO CLEAR CUTTING TEETH, BEST RESULTSWILL BE
OBTAINED BY NOT MILLING COMPLETELY THROUGH LOCK
RING.
. . 4. WHEN REMOVING HYDRAULICRING LOCKED STUDS, MILL ONLY

THRU SERRATED FLANGE OF INSERT. DO NOT MILL THRU SECOND
FLANGE. 5EE P510026 FOR DEPTH.
STUD
5. APPLY REMOVAL TOROUE TO STUD. WHEN STUD THREAD
FLANKS BEAR AGAINST LOWER SURFACE OF LOCK RING,
CONT[NUED REMOVAL TORQUE WILL CAUSE THE LOCK RING
TO BE JACKED CUT. STUD REMOVAL MAY THUS BE COMPLETED.
LOCK RING
6. IF LOCK RING HAS BEEN MILLED COMPLETELY THROUGH AND
FAILS TO LIFT OUT WITH STUD, THE PORTION REMAINING
MAY BE COLLAPSEDWITH A PUNCH AND REMOVED.
U
O
NOTES: 1. FOR INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOL PART NUMBERS, REFER TO THE DATA SHEETSIN THIS SECTION.
2. REPLACEMENTOF ROSAN STUDS AND LOCK RINGS IS MADE WITH SAME SIZE PARTS AS THOSE REMOVED
AND IN SAME MANNER AS ORIGINALLY INSTALLED. ROTATENEW LOCK RING IF NECESSARY, BEFORE
DRIVING, TO A POSITION IN WHICH THE EXTERNAL SERRATIONS ARE ALIGNED WITH THOSE IN THE
PAR£NT MATERIAL.
XA-1012-349
Figure 13. Installation and Removal of Ring Locked Studs
70-00-00

JAVCC3 LYCOMING OIVISION
Table 10. Ring Locked Studs, Lockrings, and Special Tools (Sheet I of 5)
-Lt.015- -S
MAX TWO -G -T-.

INCOMPLETE C LOCKWIRE HOLE
-
-
THREADS
3C NUT END BTUD END HOLE IN NUT END

WHEN SPECIFIED
LOCKRING STUD
(REF)
FINE THREAD NUY END -COARSE THREADSTUD END

ROSA'N PART NUMBER 3)¢NUT END THREAD STUD END THD LOCKWIRE BASIC MILITARY PARTNO,
THREAD HOLE
STUD
G X THREAD T S
STUD
LOCKnRING LOCKnRING
U F-L NOTE 3
N
TZE
3
SF71-45A(L)A RL1658-5 .138-40

.38
-7.5
.164-32
.14 .25
-- --
MSS1989-102-(L)
SFB1-65A(L)A RL185B-6 .164-36
.41
-8 .190-24
.23 .38 50(.070) .11 M551989-103-(L SEE
5F91-75A(L)A RL215B-6 .190-32 -9 .250-20
50(.070) MS51989-104-(L)
.44 .28 .44 .12
MS51990
SF101-95A(L)A RL245B-7 .250-28 .50
-10 .3125-18
.39 .56 . 48(.076) .16 MSSl989-105-(L)
DRAWING
SFill-115A(L)A RL285B-8 .3125-24
.56
-11 .375-16
.51 .69 48(.076) MSSl989-106-(L)
FOR
.16
MATERIAL
SF121-125A(L)A RL335B-9 .375-24 -12 .4375-14
.52 .75 36(.106) MS51989-107-(L) AND TYPE
.62 .17
SFl31-135A(L)A RL385B-9 .4375-20 -13.5 .500-13

36(.106) MSS1999-108-(L)
RL475B-10
.69 .57 .81 .17
LOCKRING
SFl41-145A(L)A .500-20
.81
-15 .5625-12
.63 36(,106) .19 MS51989-109-(L)
REQUIRED
.88
5F151-165A(L)A RL475B-10 .5625-18

.94
-17 .625-11
.72 1.00 28(.141) .22 MSSl989-ll0-(L)
SFl61-185A(L)A RL565B-11 .625-18 1.00 -18 .750-10
.82 1.12 28(.141) .22 MSS1989-111-(L)
5F181-215A(L)A RL645B-11 .750-16
1.12 -20 .875-9 .99 1.31 28(.141) .22 MSS1989-112-(L)
FINE THREAD NUT END -
FINE THREAD STUD END
ROSAN PART NUMBER NUT END THREAD STUD END THD LOCKWIRE BASICM1LITARYPARTNO.
HOLE
STUD LOCKRING
THREAD G X THREAD T S STUD LOCKRING
NOTE 3 TE (REF)
(REF) SIZE C
UNF 3A N 3
SF72-45A(L)A RLl65B-5 .138-40
.38
-7.5 .164-36
.14 .25
-- --
MS51989-202-(L)
SF82-áSA(L)A RLl85B-6 .164-36 -8 ,190-32
50(.070) MSS1989-203-(L)
.41 .25 .38 .11
SEE
SF92-75A(L)A RL215B-6 .190-32
.44
-9 .250-28
.31 .44 50(.070) .12 MSS1989-204-(L) MSS1990
SFl02-95A(L)A RL245B-7 .250-28
.50
-10 .3125-24
.42 .56 48(.076) .16 MSS1989-205-(L) DRAWING
SF112-115A(L)A RL2858-8 .3125-24 -11 .375-24
48(.076) MS51989-206-(L)
.56 .55 .69 .16
FOR
MATERIAL
SF122-125A(L)A RL3358-9 .375-24
.62
-12 .4375-20
.55 .75 36(.106) .17 MSS1989-207-(L)
AND TYPE
SF132-135A(L)A RL385B-9 .4375-20 .500-20
.81 36(.106) MSS1989-208-(L)
.69 .61
LOCKRING
-13.5 .17
SF142-145A(L)A RL47SB-10 .500-20

.81
-15 .5625-18
.67 .88 36(.106) .19 MSS1989-209-(L) REQUIRED
SFl52-165A(L)A RL4758-10 .5625-18 .94
-17 .625-18
.78 1.00 28(.141) .22 MS51989-210-(L)
SF162-185A(L)A RL565B-11 .625-18
1.00 -18 .750-16
.88 1.12 28(.141) .22 MS51989-211-(L)
SFl82-215A(L)A RL645B-ll .750-16
1.12 -20 .875-14
1.05 1.31 28(.141) .22 MS51989-212-(L)
z
1. MATERIAL CODE: SA =
4130 STEEL, PER MIL-5-6758, HEAT TREATEDTO 125,000-145,000 PS1. O
MS51989-( )-(L) THE FIRST DA5H 15 EQUIVALENT IDENTIFICATION.
SX = 17-10P CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL ALTERNATE MATERIAL A-286 PER AMS 5734 -
MS51989E()-(L) THE"E" IN L1EUOF F1RST DASH (-) IS EQUIVALENT IDENTIFICATION.
THESE PARTS ARE AVAILABLEIN OTHER MATERIALS;REFER TO PSl0017 FOR MATERIAL CODE (SEE INDEX),
2. FINISH: ALLOY STEEL CADMlUM PLATE PER QQ-P-416, TYPE II, CLASS 3, CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL PASSIVATE PER QQ-P-35.
3. THREADS: THE STUDEND THREADHAS A SPECIALPITCH DIAMETER WHICH MATES WITH A NATIONAL CLASS 3 TAPPEDHOLE.
DIMENSION "L" WILL BE THREADED ITS FULL LENGTH WHEN IT IS "X" DASH LENGTH OR SHORTER.
4. DESIGN DATA: STANDARD SERIESOF STUD END THREAD LENGTHS SHOWN ARE BASED ON INSTALLATION IN 2024-T4 ALUMINUM AND IN SUCH
MATER1AL WILL ACCOMMODATE TENSION LOADS UP TO THE STRENGTH OF THE NUT END. IF THIS DESIGN CRITERIAIS REQUIRED
IN PARENT MATERIALS OF LOWER MECHANICAL PROPERTIES, LONGER STUD END LENGTHS THAN SHOWN IN COLUMN "5"
SHOULD BE SPEC1F1ED.
5. DIMENSIONS: DIMENSIONS IN INCHES: TOLERANCES UNLESS NOTED, DEC, .XX =

.015, .XXX = Ì .005,
6. INSTALLATION: STUDS INSTALLEDPERPS10005 (SEE INDEX) OR IN ACCORDANCEWITH MS51995.
7. PART NUMBEREXAMPLE:
SF 101 -9
SA 24A
RosA'N STUD J| LUNDRILLED NUT END. OMIT "A" FOR DRlLLED NUT END. (iN
F1NE THD NUT END- "MS" PARTNUMBERUSE "D" IN LIEU OF SECOND DASH (-) FOR
DRILLED NUT END)
SERIES NUMBER (NUT AND 5TUD- -NUT END LENGTH (L) CODE: 1.500 INCHES (1/16 INCH INCREMENTS
END THREAD COMS1NATION) (APPLICABLE TO BOTH ROSAN AND "MS" PART NUMBER)
STUD END LENGTH: .56 (1/16 INCH INCREMENTS)- MATERIALCODE: ALLOY STEEL 4130
LENGTHS AS SHOWN 1N TABLE ARE STANDARD
* NOT END THREAD IS AVAILABLE WITH MIL-S-8879 THREADS BY

ADDING LETTER "J" AFTER PREFIX LETTER e.g., SFJ101-9SA(L)A.
XA-1012 350
70-00-00
55
AVCO LYCOMING OIVisiON
Table 10. Ring Locked Studs, Lockrings, and Special Tools (Sheet 2 of 5)
STEP DRILL TAP WRENCH DRIVE TOOL
REMOVAL
TOOL
STUO i.OCKRING
STEP I STEP 2 STEP 3 sTEP 4 MO

STEP DRILLPART NUMBER TAP WRENCH STUD PART NUMBER DRIVE LOCKRING PART NUMBER REMOVAL
THREAD PART TOOL TOOL
PARENTMATERIAL NATIONAL NUMBER ROSA'N BASIC MILITARY BASIC PART ROSA'NBASIC MILITARY BASIC PART
.CLASS 3 PARTNO. PART NO. NUMBER PART NO. PAATNO. NUMBER
ALUMINUM MAGNESIUM
(REF) (REF) (REF) (REF) *
RCD<l6-136 RCAD<l6-136 .164-32

NC SF71-4( )(L)A MS51989( )l02-{L:
RCD<16-136 RCAD-C16-136 .164-36
NF
Rl102-W
5F72-4( )(L)A MSS1989( )202-(L,
S71D-9 RL16( )-5 SM71-16
RCD<18-1495 RCAD<18-149S .190-24

NC 5F81-6( )(L)A MS51989( )l03-{t'
R1103-W 581D-10 RLl8( )4 SMS1-16
RCD-C18-1595 RCAD-C18-159S .190-32
NF SFB2-6( )(L)A MSSl989( )203-(L(
RCD-C21-2015 RCAD-C21-2015 .250-20

NC SF91-7( )(L)A MS51989( )104-(L'
RCD-C21-213S RCAD-C21-2135
Rl104-W 591D-10 RL21( )4 SM91-16
.250-28
NF SF92-7( )(L)A MSS1989( )204-(L)
RCD-C24-2575 RCAD-C24-257S .3125-20
NC SF101-9( )(L)A MSS1989( )105-(L,
RCD-C24-2725 RCAD-C24-2725 .3125-24
NF
R1105-W
SFl02-9( )(L)A MSSl989( )205-(L)
5101D•12 RL24( )-7 SEE SM101-18
MS51990
RCD-C28-312S RCAD-C28-3125 .375-16
NC SF111-11( )(L)A MS51989( )106-(L DRAWING
RCD<28-3325 RCAD-C28-3325 .375-24
NF
Rl106-W
SFll2-11( )(L)A MSS1989(
)206-(L. S111D-12 RL28( )-4 FOR SM111-20
MATERIAL
RCD-C33-368S RCAD<33-3685 .4375-14
NC 5F121-12( )(L)A MS51989( )107-(L) AND TYPE
RCD-C33-3865 RCAD-C33-3865 .4375-20
NF
R1107X-W
SF122-12( )(L)A MS51989( )207-(L
5121D-12 RL33( )-9 LOCKRING SM121-22
REQUIRED
RCD-C38-4225 RCAD-C38-422S .500-13
NC SF131-13( )(L)A MS51989( )108-(L
RCD<38-4535 RCAD-C38-4535 .500-20
NF
Rl106-W
SF132-13( )(L)A MS51989( )200-(I
5131D-14 RL38( )-9 SMl31-24
RCD-C47-4845 RCAD-C47-4845 .5625-12

NC SFl41-14( )(L)A MS51989( )109-(L
RT110-W
RCD-C47-5005 RCAD-C47-SODS .5625-18 NF SF142-14( )(L)A MSS1989( )209-(L
S141D-14 RL47( )-10 SM141-26
RCD-C47-5315 RCAD-C47-5315 .625-11

NC SF151-16( )(L)A MSS1989( )110-(L)
RCD-C47-5625 RCAD-C47-5625 .625-18
NF
R1110-W
SF152-16( )(L)A MS51989( )210-(L)
SlSID-16 RL47( )-10 SMl51-28
RCD-C56-6415 RCAD<56-641S NC SF161-18( )(L)A MSS1989( )111-(L

RLS6( )-11
.750-10
R1111-W 5161D-16 SM161-30

RCD-C564875 RCAD-C56-6875 .750-16
NF SF162-18( )(L)A MSS1989( )211-{L
RCD-C64-7655 RCAD-C64-7655 .875-9

NC SF181-21( )(L)A MS51989( )Il2-(L o,
RCD-C64-7965 RCAD-C64-7965 .875-14
NF
Ril12-W
SF182-21( )(L)A MS51989( )212-(L
5181D-18 RL64( )-11 SM181-34
* REFERTO PS10005 (SEE INDEX)

FOR REMOVALINSTRUCTION5
THRU HOL E
APPLICATION
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 2.01.3
XA-101, -352
70-00-00

HOLE PREPARATION
TAP THREAD NAT C
C (FOR STANDARD
CATALOG SIZES)
TAP DRIL
TAP DRILLAND C BOREDIA MUSTBE

CONCENTRIC WITHIN T.1.R. .003
STUDBASIC TAP DRILL(RE C'BORE DIA B C TAP

PARTNUMBER +.003 C'BORE MIN FULL THREAD
STUDEND THREAD COARSE FINE 000 - DEPTH THREAD NATIONAL
FINE AND COARSE THREAD THREAD ALUM MAG
SF71-4( )(L)A 29(.136) NC

SF72-A( \(L)A ---
29(.136)
250 ' 258 ' 094 ' 285 .164-32
.164-36
NF
SF81-6( )(L)A 25(.149)

' 281 ' 291
---
109
SFS2-6( )(L)A ---
21(.159) .190-32
NF
SF91-7( )(L)A 7(.201)

' 328
-
337 109
SF92-7( )(L)A ----
3(.213) *
.250-28
NF
SFl01-9( )(L)A F(.257)

' 381 "14!
---
375
SFl02-9( )(LlA ----
\(.272) .3125 24 NF
SF111-11( )(L)A 5/16(.312)

' 448 ' 156
----
437 .375-24NF
SFll2-II( )(L)A ----
Q(.332)
SFl21-12( )(L)A U(.368) ----
515 526 172

SF122-12( )(L)A ----
W(.386) .4375-20
NF
SFl31-13( )(L)A 27/64(.42T - .500-13

NC
SFl32-13( )(L)A ----
29/64(,45 .593 .601 .172 .845
SF141-14( )(L)A 31/64(.484) NC

' 734 ' 188
.5625-12
----
747 915
SF142-14( )(L)A -----
1/2(.500) °
.5625-18
NF
SFlS1-16( )(L)A 17/32(.531) ---- .625-11

NC
SF152-16( )(L)A .7A7 .188 1.035
NF
.734
---
9/16(.562) .625-18
SFl61-18( )(L)A 41/64(.641 -----

.750-10
NC
1.155
SF162-18( )(L)A -----
11/16(.687)
.875 .888 .203
,750-16
NF
SF181-21( )(L)A 5 .875-9

NC
1.000 1.015 203 1.345
SF182-21( )(L)A -----
51/64(.796 .875-14
NF
XA-1012 351
70-00-00
57
EQUIVALENT
OR IN LIEU
OF STEPS 2,3 AND 4
STEP I SAME AS SHOWN ON
PAGE 2.01.2
C'BORE TOOL NUMBER MIN DR1LLDEPTH

TAP
DRILL PARENTMATERIAL PLUG BOTTOM
(REF) TAP TAP
ALUMINUM MAGNESIUM
29(.136) RC-C16-136 RCA-C14-136 .426 .363
29(.136) RC-C16-136 RCA-C16-136 .410 .354
25(.149) RC-C18-149 RCA-C18-149 .602 .519
21(.159) RC-C18-159 RCA-C18-159 .556 .493
7(.201) RC-C21-201 RCA-C21-201 .700 .600
3(.213) RC-C21-213 RCA-C21-2l3 .636 .564
F(,258 RC-C24-257 RCA-C24-257 .845 .734
!(.272) RC-C24-272 RCA-C24-272 .782 .699
5/16(.312) RC-C28-312 RCA-C28-312 1.006 .881
4.33 RC-C28-332 RCA-C28-332 .912 .829
U(.368) RC-C33-368 RCA-C33-368 1.106 .964
.386)
RC-C33-386 RCA-C33-386 1.010 .910
27/64(.422) RC-C38-422 RCA-C38-422 1.191 1.037

29/64(.45 RC-C38-453 RCA-C38-453 1,070 .970
31/64(.484) RC-C47-484 RCA-C47-484 1.290 1.123

1/2(.500) RC-C47-500 RCA-C47-500 1.165 1.054
17/32(.531) RC-C47-531 RCA-C47-531 1.444 1.262

9/16(.562) RC-C47-562 RCA-C47-562 1.285 1.174
41/64(.641) RC-C56-641 RCA-C56-641 1.605 1.405

11/16(,687) RC-C56-687 RCA-C56-687 1.436 1.311
49/64(.765) RC-C64-765 RCA-C64-765 1.845 1.623

51/64(.796) RC-C64-796 RCA-C64-796 1.666 1.524
BLIND HOLE
APPLICATION
BOTTOMING
PLUG TAP TAP
MIN ORILL MIN DRILL
DEPTH DEPTH
NOTE: MIMIMUM DRILLDEPTHSARE BASED

ON STANDARDMACHINING PRACTICES,
X A-1012-353
70-00-00

TAP THD. NATIONAL CLASS 3
MATERIAL: 4130 STEEL PER SPECIFICATION MIL-5-6758. HEAT TREATED TO 125,000-
145,000 P.S.I. THESEPARTS ARE AVAILABLE MADE FROM OTHER 45= C'BORE DIA
LOCK RING HOLE SIZE MATERIALS,SEE PAGE 8.01 FOR CODE.
( SEE NOTE 7)
Fy: CADMIUM PLATE, PER SPECIFICATION QQJ-416 CLASS 3 TYPE II.
CB: LETTER "A" tNDICATES UNDRILLED NUT END. OMIT "A" FOR DR1LL STUD.
NT
ERD
G AVAILABILITY CODE: A .TANDARD PARTS NORMALLY STOCKED.
- - STOCKED.
STANDARD PARTS TOOLED NOT NORMALLY
C'8ORE
DEPTH
L SEE CODE NB: 1. TEIE STUD END THREAD HAS A SPECIAL PITCH DIAMETER WHICH
,
MATES WITH A NATIONAL CLASS 3 TAPPED HOLE.
2. SEE CATALOG SECTION 7 FOR TOOLING ILLUSTRATIONS.
3. NUT END LENGTHS "L" ARE DES1GNED TO MEET A.N.D. STANDARDS
.010-.020
AFTER STUD SERRATED COLLAR IS INSTALLED BELOW THE
SURFACEOF THE PARENT MATERIAL.
4. FOR LOCK RING DIMENSIONAL DATA SEE SECTION 5.
S. SFA & SFB STUDS ARE ONLY FURNISHED TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN.
CODING OF MODIFICATIONS IS NOT PERMISSIBLE.
6. INSTALLATION OF RING LOCKED STUDS TO BE MADE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH PSl0005.
*TAP DRILL
T 7, SEE P510031 IN SECTION 8 FOR MAGNESIUM PARENT MATERIAL
CIBORE DIAMETERS.
INSTALLATION HOLE
N_O_TE: NUT END AVAILABLE WITH MIL-S-8879 THREADS BY ADDING LETTER "J" AFTER PREFIX LETTERS e.g., SFAJl01-95A-12A.
† USE REMOVAL TOOL TO C'BORE DEPTH MAXIMUM
STUD END L C'BORE C'BORE

A.N.D. STuo LocK RING NUT END MIN. HOLE TAP DRILL DIAMETER DEPTH C'BORE DRIVE REMOVAL AVAiL-
THREAD SEE 5 T C WRENCH
STANDARD PART NUMBER PART NUMBER THD. 3A FULL SIZE (REF.) +.003 +.030 TOOL TOOL TOOL ABILITY O
(SEE NOTE 1) NOTE 3 -.000
THD. -.000
.
SFA 101-9 SA-i2A RL 24 58-7 1/4-28 5/16-18 .656

0 .56 .39 .16
RCC24-257 5101D-12 SM101-18
.375 .141
20005 f48(.076) F(.257) Rl l05-W A
. S
20000 SFB101-9-SA-14A RL245B-7 1/4-28 5/16-18 .6BS .56 .39 .16 E48(.076) .375 .141
RCC24-257 Rll05-W 5101D-12 SMIOl-18
F(.257) A
20009 SFA 111-11 SA-14A RL28 SB-8 5/16-24 3/8-16 .688 .69 .51 .16 f48(.076) .437 .156
RCC28-312 RilO6-W 5111D-12 SMlli-20
.880
S/16(.312) A
o Õ
.936
20001
SFilli-lisA-14.SA RL285B-8 5/16-24 3/8-16 .688 .69 .16 *48(.076) .437
RCC28-312 R1106-W SM111-20
.156
20003 .906
.Si 5/16(.312) 5111D-12 A
20010 SFAlll-llSA-16A RL28SB-8 S/16-24 3/8-16 .719 .69 .51 .16 E48(.076) .437 .156
RCC28-312 RilO6-W S11]D-12 SMill-20
1
S/16(.312) A
20002
20004 SFA l21-12 SA-16.5A RL 33 SB-9 3/8-24 7/16-14 .812 .75 .52 .17 N36(.106) U(.368) .515 .172
RCC33-368 Rl!07X-W 5121D-12 SM121-22 A
20007
2 5A-18A 58-9 3/8-24 7/16-14 .812

SFA 121-12 RL 33 - .75 .52 .17 936(.106) U(.368) .515 .172
RCC33-368 Rll07X-W 5121D-12 SMl21-22 A
20004 SFA 131-13 SA-18A RL 38 SB-9 7/16-20 1/2-13 .812 .81 .57 .17 E36(.106) 27/64(.422) .593 .172
RCC38-422 Ril08-W Sl31D-14 SM131-24 A
± .015. .XXX .005

DIMENSIONS IN INCHES. TOLERANCES UNLESS NOTED: DECIMAL .XX
ISSUED 7 FEB 62 O 15 NOV 62 15 JAN 64 15 NOV 65

o
JAVCD LYCOMING OlVISION
(5) Select a new lockring and insert. Using ap- NOTE

propriate wrench, install new insert so that top of ser-
rated flange is 0.010 to 0.020 inch below surface. Do not start drill motor until tool is
positioned over stud.
(6) Position new lockring over the insert (under-
cut side down). Align external serrations of lockring (2) Position removal tool over stud and start
with serrations made by lockring that was removed. drill. Drill through a minimum of 75 percent of serrated
Using appropriate drive tool, install lockring, flange of lockring with a series of light cuts, raising the
spindle frequently to allow chips to clear.
E. Replacement of Slimsert Inserts.
(3) Using a suitable tool (stud extractor or use
NOTE grips), back out stud. Clean hole.
Special tools required are listed in table NOTE

9. If component is installed on the
engine, care shall be taken to prevent Stud thread flanks will bear against lower
chips from entering the engine. (Coat surface of remaining position of lockring
tip of drill with petrolatum (V-V-P- causing ring to backout also. If lockring
236), tape all openings, and/or pressur- was milled completely through and fails
ize the component.) to lift out with stud, then position remain-
ing may be collapsed with a punch and
(1) Install appropriate removal tool in drill removed.
chuck, and drill to depth of counterbore.
(4) Coat end of new stud to be threaded into
(2) Using apprpriate drive wrench, back out in- component, with zinc chromate primer (T-T-P-645).
sert. Clean hole.
(5) Engage appropriate wrench with serrated
(3) Select new insert. Using appropriate drive flange of stud and install stud in component. The pro-
wrench, install insert. When shoulder of wrench meets truding stud length shall be 1.03 inches, and top of
surface of parent material, the insert is installed to pro- serrated flange 0.010 to 0.020 inch below surface.
per depth.
(6) Position new lockring over the stud (under-
(4) Place appropriate swage tool in the insert cut side down). Align serrations of new lockring with
and apply downward force. When shoulder of swage serrations made by lockring that was removed. Using
tool bottoms on surface of parent material, full swage appropriate drive tool, install lockring on stud.
and lock setting is accomplished.
31. TOUCHUP PROCEDURE FOR DAMAGED BLACK-
F. Replacement of Ring Locked Studs. OXIDE COATING. Proceed as follows:
NOTE A. Damaged black oxide coated surfaces may be re-

stored to specified requirements by a touchup procedure.
Special tools required are listed in table
10. If component is installed on the B. Touch up black-oxide coating as follows:
engine, care shall be taken to prevent
chips from entering the engine. (Coat (1) Swab part clean with dry cleaning solvent
tip of drill with petrolatum (V-V-P-236), (P-D-680).
tape all openings, and/or pressurize the
component.) (2) Immerse part in oxidizing bath prepared with
Black Magic for such times and at such temperatures
(1) Install appropriate Ring Locked Stud re- as necessary to produce acceptable coatings.
moval tool in chuck of 1/2-inch variable speed drill.
70-00-00

AWWCO LYCOMING 01VIS10N
STRÆfPGAQ. CONNECTimuy DATE Feb 3/81
NO. ÛÌ

On page 60, Table 10A., Ñigure14., and step G. are added as follows:
Sheet 1 of 7
DATE Feb 3/81
No. 87
Table 10A. Captive Ring Locked Studs, Lockrings, and Special Tools
AD OfA HOLE THAU

WHEN SPECIFIED A
A
A DIA (REP)
MIN FULL ............ ... (SEE TABLE III)
RL ($EE TABLE IVI
PO lAPPROX)
INCOMPLETE
THOS MAX MA.10R DIA
OF THD
C
B MIN FULL
TO
Tg THD
TABLE i
T1 THD T2 THD A B C D E MIN SHEAR

BASIC PAftT NUMBER UNJF-3A UN.lC-3A -020 + .005 ENGAGEMENT
(SEEPARTNO.EXAMPLE) MIL-S4879 MIL4-8879 -.002
AREA1N2
SPC164 ( HM ) .164·36 .164-32 . .246 .43 .067 .11 .0884
SFC190( NH ) .191M2 .TSO-24 SEE .286 .47 .067 .12 .1142
SFC250t NH I .25G-28 .2E020 TABLE ß79 .61 .067 .TS .2076
5FC212( MM ) .2125-24
2125,18 IV .469 .70 .067 .18 -1311
$FC275( MM ] .375·24 .375.16

.582 ß0 .096 .17 .4891
NOTES:
1. MATERIAL 'S2' STUD: 8740 (AMsd322) AING: 1117 STL 004437
-
'SUM* STUD: A280 (AMS6734) RING: 303 CRES (MIL-W-62263)

-
2. FINISH: '32* CADMIUM P1.ATE PER QQ-Pa16. Ct.ASS 3 TYPE II EXCEPT STUD SERRAYION AND
-
LOCKRING INTERNAL SERAATION AREA MAY BE MIN,7HICKNGSS. .0001
'SUM' PASSIVATEDPER 004-35

-
3. HEAT TREAT: '32' kÖ RCN2.NING-

CASE HON i]C3&42 .001•.004
'SUM' STUD' 130KSI uts (BRINELL 248-341) RING: NONE

-
PART NUMBER GXAMPLE: SF 1 -

Sg og 24
Sizs<1N-SI2E STUD CODE ENUT END LENGTH CODE AND STUD

NOMINAL THREAD DIA (GOTH ENOSI S"I"ANDOPF AFTER INSTALLAT10N.
MATERIAL COCC flN 1/18" INCREMENTS.SSE TABLE IVI
A DAILLEOHOLE IN NUT END WHEN
SPECIFIED (DASH WHEN NONE REQU1REO)
MA•104G•146'
Sheet 2 of 7
DATE Feb 3/81
NO. 87
Table 10A. Captive Ring Locked Studs, Lockrings, and Special Tools (Continued)
TABLE Il
M DIA BASIC T3 THD F G H J K

(REF) PART UNJC•38 +.020 MIN MIN +ß03
NUMBER MIL-S·8879 -.000 -.000
73
THREAD SFC1ss( H )() .16442 .444 ßs7 ß2 ß6 228
---
SFC190( N H.) .19 24 .473 .101 38 .66 256

K Q\A SFC250( H )() .250-20
.623 .128 .75 ßS .337
SFC312( )()( ) 3125.18 .747 .100 ß9 1.00 .381
SFC375( )()() .375•16

ß80 .204 1&4 1.16 .448
MIN FULL
TABLE Ill
THD DEPTH M M R
TAP DRILL BASIC LOCKRING BOSS KNURL RING
TAP DRILL DEPTH MIN PAAT DRIVE TOOL DIA HEIGHT DIA
DEPTH MIN POR PLUG NUMBER NUMBER MIN 2.010 +.005
FOR BOTTOMING I
TAp -.004
TAP
SFC164()()(þ SFC16D16 .31 .042 .252
SFC190()()(I SFC19D16 .34 .062 .274
SFC250()()(•) SFC25DTS .44 .088 .254
SFC312 HN ( ) SPC31D16 .50 .134 299

SFC375()()() SFC38D16 .62 .170 .468
HOLE PAEPARATION
TABLE IV
NUT END THREAD DIA.
LENGTH .164 .190 .250 212 ß75
LENGTH CODE L 1 A
APPLIES WHEN 2.015 MIN FULL THREAD FOR
APPLICABLE THREAD DIA SHOWN
LOCKRING TEETH
ARE AGAINST STUD STOP 5 .312 .185
- - - -
8 .375 .248 .218

- - -
7 .438 .310 .281

- - -
I e 8 ..500 ß72 .344

- - -
ISTEP 2 SAME i 9 .562 .435 .406 ß88 - -
e I |STEP 1 10 .468 - -
AS .625 .455 .430
DRIVE I THREAD IN STUD 11 .688 .455 .531 .493 .430

-
LOCKRING TO L 12
i
-
.750
1 VNTIL LOCKRING .455 .562 .556 .493
DEPTH SHOWN 13 .812 A55 .562 .618 .555 .519

* * CONTACTS BOSS 14 .875 .455 .562 .800 .617 .581
† -
BOSS
15 .938 .455 .562 ß88 .880 .644
14 1.000 .455 .562 .688 .719 .707
i FACE (REF) 17 1.062 .465 .562 .688 .719 .769
. r, 18 1.125 .4E5 .562 .680 .719 .831
| 4 19 1.188 .455 .562 .688 .719 ß94

| 11i 20 , 1.250
.455*
.562 .688 .719 .938
21 1.312 .455 .688 .719
N
.562 .938
ß00
7 I 22 1.375 .455 .562 .688 .719 .938
(REP) .010
23 1.438 .455 .542 .688 .719 .938
24 1.600 455 .562 .688 .719 .936
25 1.562 455 .562 .688 .719 338

*
26 1.625 455 562 .688 .719 .938
27 1.688 455 .582 .488 .719 .938
28 1.750 .455 .562 .688 .719 .938
29 1.812 ¼55 .562 .688 .719 .938
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 30 1.875 .455 .562 ßBB .719 338

31 1.938 .455 .562 .688 .719 .938
32 2.000 .455 .562 .688 .719 .938
X A•T 046•147
Sheet 3 of 7
dP
DATE Feb 3/81
NO . 87
BODY NUT •
PILGT CUTTER SPIROL PIN

MANOAEL
C REF)
TOOL PILOT MANDREL CUTTER BOOY NUT A D

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER DIA IREP) (REF)
SFCP6164 SFCPB162.1 SAPB19-2 SFCPB16-3 SFCPB1&4 SEPB194 .55 .134 3.06

SFCPS190 SFCPB194-1 SAPB19·2 SFCPG1Œ3 SFCPG194 SRPB194 .56 .150 3.11
SFCPB250 SFCPB250.1 SRPS25-2 SFCPB25-3 SFCPS254 SRPS254 .62 201 3.21
SPCPG312 SFCPB318-1 SRPB31-2 SFCPS31•3 SFCPB314 SRPB314 .68 259 3A1
SFCPB375 SFCPB37&1 SRPB37-2 SFCPG37-3 SFCPB374 SRPB314 20 .314 3.56
GENERA1. If3AGE
A 714E3E ARE HAND HÈLD TOOLS DESIGNED TO BROACH

SERRATIONS IN THE COUNTERSORE WALL OF HOLE
PREPARATION FOR BASIC "SFC" TYPE SizE-ON-SI3E
STUDS THAT AME TO BE INSTALLED INTO HARD
MATERIALS.
B. THE PILQT IS INSERTED INTO THE TAP ORILL HOLE, ANO
SUFFICIENT FORC$ APPLIED TO THE TOP OF THE MANOREL
TO ALLOW THE CUTTER TO BROACH INTO THE C' BORE.
WHEN THE EXTERNAL SHOULDER OF THE MANDREL COM
TACTS THE INTEANAL SHOULDER IN BODY. BROACHING
IS COMPLETE. [F CUTTER STICKS IN C° BORE, NUT MAY
BE TURNED TO EXTRACT CUTTER. REFER TO ROSAN
TSB 75-0102 FOR HOLE PREPARATION AND STUD
INSTALLATION INTO BOSSES OF HARD MATERIALS.
C. ADDITIONAL CUTTERS ARE AVAILABLE AS SPARES OR
REPLACEMENTS.
STUD HOLE CONTROLLED MINOR DIAMETER

AND SERNATION DEPTH
CONTROLLED
MINOR DIA, DRILL SI2E SERRATION
BASIC STUD NO.
+ .0020 (REFI DSPTH (MIN)
• .0010
*
SFC164 .1360 #29 (.1360) .054
SFC190 ,1520 ‡à!4 (.1520) .073
SFC250 2031 13/64 (2031) DOS

SFC312 .2610 "G" (.2610! .145
SFC375 .3160 "O" (.3160) .181
xA-1046-148
Sheet 4 of 7
DATE Feb 3/81
NO. 87
5TUD REMOVAL DAILL SfZES
SASIC #1 REMOVAl. DRILL #2 REMOVAL DAlkL

STUD NO. (INCHES) UNCHESI
DIAMETER MIN DEWTH DIAMETER (+. 016) OEPTH
SFClee t/16 (.062) 250 3/16 f.189) Æ0

SFC190 1/10 (.062) 250 7/32 (219) .090
SFCTSO 3/32 (M3) 250 19/08 (297) .105
SFC312 1/8 f.125) .312 . R 4.339) .120
SFC375 1/8 1.125) .375 13/32 f.406) .120
MA•1046.149
4.00±.05
3.00±.02
.010
.005
A BC . .
DIA .
DIA DIA
TOOL A DIA B DIA C DIA

NUMBER +.002 +.015
-.007 -.025
SFC16DI6 .172 .229 .50
SFC19D16 .198 .259 .50
SFC25D16 .258 .338 .62
SFC31016 .321 .382 .62
SFC38DI6 .383 .449 .75
X A-1046.150
Figure 14. Captive Ring Locked Stud Lockring Driver
Sheet 1 of 1
DATE Feb 3/81
NO. 87
G. Replacement of Captive Ring Locked Studs.
NOTE
Stud, lockrings, and tools required are listed in

table 10A. If component is installed on the en-
gine, care shall be taken to prevent chips from
entering the engine. (Coat tip of drill with pet-
rolatum (VV-P-236), tape all openings, and/or
pressurize the component.)
(1) Cut the stud off approximately flush with the surface of
the parent material.
(2) Center punch the remaining stud.
(3) Locate the required drill (#1) directly over the center of
the part and drill into the stud to the depth shown.
(4) Center the second larger drill (#2) over the small hole and
drill to the depth noted. This should cut the engagement between the stud
serrations and the internal serrations of the lockring.
(5) The
remaining lockring will have a very thin wall. A sharp
punch will easily break it away from the parent material. Remove all
pieces of the lockring.
(6) Drive an "ezy out" into the small hole in the stad and ap-
ply a removal torque.
WARNING
PERFORM CLEANING OPERATION IN WELL VENTILATED

AREA. AVOID PROLONGED INHALING OF FUMES.
(7) Flush hole with methyl-ethyl-ketone (TT-M-261).
NOTE
The saÂesize Captive Ring Locked Stud can be in-

stalled that was removed.
Sheet 6 of 7
DATE Feb 3/81
NO. 87
(8) Coat threaded hole with zinc chromate primer (TT-P-645).
NOTE
In following step, insert a 0.002 inch shim or

equivalent between the lockring and the broached
surface to prevent the lockring from prematurely
dropping into the boss serrations.
(9) Turn the stud, by hand, into the threaded hole until the
top of the lockring has stopped against the upper part of the stud serra-
tions and the lower points of the lockring serrations rest on the shim
surface.
(10) Remove the shin. If the lockring's external serrations

match the serrations in the counterbore, drive the lockring using the pro-
per size drive tool until it is located 0.000 to 0.010 inch below the sur-
face. (Refer to Figure 14.) If the serrations do not match, turn the stud
clockwise until they do and then drive the lockring using the proper size
drive tool. (Refer to Figure 14.)
Sheet 7 of 7
(3) Wash part thoroughly in cold running water. 33. TORCH-BRAZE REPAIR. Proceed as follows:
Follow with hot water rinse and air-dry.
A. Torch-braze repair may be employed to return
(4) Dip part in corrosion-preventive oil (MIL-C- some particularly damaged parts to usable status.
8188).
B. The mating surfaces and adjacent areas of parts
32. CHEMICAL FILM COATING FOR ALUMINUM to be joined must be thoroughly cleaned to remove all
AND ALUMINUMALLOYS (ALODINE, NONIMMER- oil, grease, paint, scale, artificial oxide films, conversion
SIBLE PROCESS). Proceed as follows: coatings, or any other foreign substances. Joining areas
must also be free of burrs.
A. The following alodine nonimmersible procedure
provides a touchup process for chemical film coating of C. The joint areas must be preheated with a neutral
anodized surfaces of aluminum and aluminum alloy of slightly reducing flame to heat such areas to a uni-
parts. form temperature sufficient to liquify the filler metal.
Overheating should be avoided.
B. Apply chemical film coating as follows:
D. The type of braze filler metal and flux should be
(1) Prepare alodine 1200 solution, using follow- that recommended in the braze-repair instructions for
ing elements: the part, as detailed in the overhaul section of this
manual.
(a) Three ounces alodine 1200 solution.
E. Maximum clearance between surfaces of steel parts
(b) One gallon distilled water. being torch-brazed should be 0.003 inch, excepting those
instances where faces of joint parts are intentionally
Using tape (PPP-T-60), mask all surfaces not
(2) bevelled.
intended for alodine treatment.
F. When fabricating aluminum assemblies, where sheet
(3) Using sandpaper (No. 320), sand all exposed material clad with brazing metal is employed, the joints
surfaces to thoroughly remove all oxidation. should make contact since the cladding substance pro-
vides sufficient clearance.
(4) Clean exposed surfaces with clean, lint-free
cloth dampened with Freon-TF solvent. Wipe away ex- G. Parts to be jointed by torch brazing may be se-
cess solvent. cured in position with jigs, clamps, supports, or be self-
fixturing. Such fixtures, jigs, etc. should be of noncon-
(5) Allow cleaned surfaces to air-dry for mini- taminative materials and should be designed to involve
mum of 30 minutes. only point or line contact. Design should also accom-
modate expansion and contraction of the part during
(6) After surfaces have dried, apply coating with torch-braze treatment.
clean, lint-free cloth wet with alodine solution. Allow
solution to remain on surface until the metal surface H. Necessary staking, pinning, or riveting, tack- or
attains an iridescent gold or dark brown shade. The spot-welding shall not be employed in areas subject to
bright gold shade is preferred. high stress during service.
(7) Clean treated surfaces with clean, lint-free I. On closed assemblies, appropriate vent holes
cloth saturated with distilled water. Repeat washing should be drilled.
three times.
J. Use of stopoff material should be used as neces-
(8) Air-dry parts at room temperature until dry. sary to restrict flow of filler metal.
(9) Wipe treated surfaces with clean, dry cloth. K. When fabricating joints having one end inaccessi-
If alodine treatment rubs off, procedure must be re- ble for visual inspection, the filler metal shall be placed
peated. at that (blind) end prior to assembly, whenever practi-
cable.
70-00-00
61
AVCO LYCOMING OlVISiON
L Perform torch-braze repair procedure as follows: Table 11. Time and Cycle Code
(1) Dry clean parts. (Refer to paragraph 15.) Code Hours or Cycles Code Hours or Cycles
(2) Deburr parts. Ensure that all chips are re- A 10 K 700
moved.
B 25 L 800
(3) Torch-braze repair parts according to relative
instructions for particular part as detailed in overhaul C 50 M 900
section of this manual.
D 100 N 1,000
(4) Remove flux residue by rinsing with water
82°C (180°F) or as directed.
heated to E 200 P 2,000
(5) Remove excess braze deposits. F 300 R 3,000
34. TIME AND CYCLE CODING. G 400 S 4,000
Operating time and cycle sensitive engine parts (identi- H 500 U 5,000
fied in applicable rotating component service life limit
service bulletin) were letter-coded at overhaul to indi- J 600 V 10,000
cate both operating hours and cycles at time of over-
haul EXAMPLES:
The code for operating time is the leter T followed by TNDC CY PJC
code letters denoting the number of hours accumulated. T TIME
=
CY CYCLES
=
The code for operating cycles is the letters CY followed N =

1,000 P = 2,000
by code letters denoting the number of operating cycles ,
D =
100 J =
600
accumulated. (Refer to table 11 for time/cycle code C =
50 C =
50
letters.)
Total Time =
1,150 hours Total Cycles =
2,650
at Overhaul at Overhaul
70-00-00

AVCO LYCOIVIING DIVISION
synarFORD, CONNECTICUT
DATE Jun 12 / 8 1
NO.

TEIS CHANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
INSERT TRIS PAGE Facing page 62, 70-00-00
On page 62, paragraph 33A is added as follows:
33A. PROCESS FOR EPOXY ADHESIVE. Proceed as follows:
A. Prepare surface as follows:
(1) Vapor degrease part. (Refer to paragraph 14A.)
(2) Mask areas adjacent to surfaces to be abradeda
(3) Dry abrasive blast bonding surfaces using 220 grit aluminum
oxide, or No. 103 zirconite grit.
(4) When it is not possible to dry abrasive blast, prepare

bonding surfates using 120 grit aluminum oxide paper or cloth.
(5) Clean abraded surfaces with Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (TT-M-261)

or Acetone (0-A-51).
NOTE
Epoxy adhesive shall be applied within 2 hours

of surface preparation. If time exceeds 2 hours
re-abade.
B. Prepare epoxy adhesive (Type I and II) as follows:
(1) Type I Weigh out 98 to 102 units

-
of epoxy adhesive, P/N
Epon 931, Component "A" (Hysol Division, The Dexter Corp., Pittsburg,
California), and 8.8 to 9.2 units of epoxy adhesive, P/N Epon 931,
Component "B" (Hysol Division, The Dexter Corp., Pittsburg, California).
(2) Type II Weigh -

out 98 to 102 units of epoxy adhesive, P/N
Epon 934, Component "A" (Hysol Division, The Dexter Corp., Pittsburg,
California), and 32 to 34 units of epoxy adhesive, P/N Epon 934, Component
"B" (Hysol Division, The Dexter Corp., Pittsburg, California).
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Jun 12/81
90. 97
WARNING
10 PREVENT INHALATION OF VAPORS, ENSURE THAT

AREA IS WELL VENTILATED. AVOID CONTACT WITH
SKIN. IN CASE OF CONTACT WITH SKIN, WASH IM-
MEDIATELY WITH SOAP AND WATER.
NOTE
Do not mix more epoxy and catalyst than can be

used in 40 minutes.
C. Bonding Procedure.
(1) Mask areas adjacent to surfaces to be bonded.
(2) Apply a thin continuous film (2 to 6 mils thick) of

adhesive to all surfaces to be bonded.
(3) Join surfaces to be bonded, and clamp to keep adequate

pressure on bonded joint during cure.
(4) Remove masking material.
NOTE
Adhesive may be removed before cure cycle,

using Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (TT-M-261) or
Acetone (0-A-51).
(5) Cure as outlined in following step D.
D. Cure epoxy at one of the following temperatures:
(1) Type I
(a) 140 to 160°F (60 to 70°C) for 4 hours minimum.
(b) 240 to 260°F (115 to 130°C) for one hour minimum.
(2) Type II
(a) 70 to 90°F (20 to 30°C) for 24 hours minimum.
(b) 190 to 210°F (90 to 100°C) for one hour minimum.
Sheet 2 of 2
POWER PLANT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
1. General ......... .. . . .. ..............

71-00-00 3
2. DescriptionofEngines ............ ....... . ..........
71-00-00 3
3. LeadingParticulars........... . . ...... ..........
71-00-00 3
4. Description of Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 3
5. Description of Engine Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 4
6. Fuel System .. ... ... .. .. ....... .. .... .. .. . ... .... .
71-00-00 4
7. FuelSystemOperation ...............................
71-00-00 8
8. LubricationSystem ......................... .......
71-00-00 8
9. Inlet Airflow Modulation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 9
10. ElectricalSystem ...................................
71-00-00 10
11. Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 10
12. Anti-IcingSystem..................... ... .........
71-00-00 12
13. Preparation for Service and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 12
14. Inspection of Shipping Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 12
15. Removal of Engine From Shipping Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 12
16. Activating Engine After Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 12
17. Activating Engine After Flyable or Temporary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 12
18. Activating Installed Engine After Permanent Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 12
19. PreservationofEngine ................ ... ..........
71-00-00 13
20. Flyable/Temporary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 13
21. PermanentStorage ............... ..................
71-00-00 13
22. Preservation of Fuel Control Removed From Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 14
23. Installing Engine Into Shipping Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 14
24. Engine Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 17
25. Removal of Engine From Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 17
26. Installation of Engine Into Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 17
27. FuelandOilRequirements ...............,...............
71-00-00 18
28. Recommended Oil-Analysis Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 19
29. Spectrometric Oil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 19
30. IntermixingofOilTypes ..............................
71-00-00 21
31. EngineOperation .......... .......... . . .......
71-00-00 21
32. EngineRunupandCheck ........... .......... ........
71-00-00 22
33. Engine Vibration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 22
34. Checkout and Installation of Vibration Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 23
35. Adjustment of Vibration Meter (LTCT14664-10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 23
36. Vibration Pickup (Transducer) Check (LTCT14664-10) . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 24
37. Installation of Vibration Test Equipment (LTCTl4664-10) . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 28
38. FilterInspection(LTCT484) ............................
71-00-00 29
39. Preliminary Warmup (LTCT484) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 29
40. Vibration Pickup (Transducer) Check (LTCT484) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 29
41. Installation of Vibration Test Equipment (LTCT484) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 30
42. Adjustment of Vibration Meter (LTCT484) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 30
43. Checks Prior to Motoring and Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 30
44. Engine Motoring and Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 31
45. GroundOperationChecks .............................
71-00-00 31
46. PowerTrimCheck(Topping) ...........................
71-00-00 31
47. ShutdownChecks ..................................
71-00-00 31
71-00-00
1
POWER PLANT
Chapteir/Section
Figure Subject Page
1. EngineLeft-SideView ............. ... ...............

71-00-00 3
2. EngineRight-SideView ............... ................
71-00-00 4
3. Engine Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 5
4. EngineAftView................ ........ . ........
71-00-00 6
5. FuelSystemSchematic ................................
71-00-00 8
6. Lubrication System Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 9
7. Inlet Airflow Modulation System Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 10
8. Electrical System Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 11
9. Preparation and Marking of Shipping Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 15
10. Wear-MetalTrend(Example) .............................
71-00-00 20
11. Wear-Metal Guidelines Parts Per Million (ppm) By Weight -
. . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 21
12. Vibration Meter (LTCT14664-10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 25
13. VibrationMeter(LTCT484) ..............................
71-00-00 26
LIST OF TABLES
Chapter/Section
Table Subject Page
1. LeadingParticulars ......................... ........

71-00-00 7
2. FuelandOilRequirements .......... ...................
71-00-00 18
3. Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71-00-00 22
4. RotationalSpeedLimits .......... ....... ...........
71-00-00 23
5. TorqueLimits ......................... ............
71-00-00 24
6. VibrationTestDataSheet .......... . ..................
71-00-00 27
71-00-00
DATE Jan 22 |8 1 STNTPOND. CONNECTICUT
so. 82

TRIS CRANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
2. DESCRIFTION OF ENGINES.
The LTP engines are modular designed turboprop engines. Each model con-
sists of an accessory/reduction gearbox module, gas generator module,
radial inlet, and a combustor turbine module. (Refer to figures 1 darough
4 for arrangement of engines and location of components.)
Sheet 1 of 1
AVCO LYCOMING OtVISiON
POWER PLANT
L GENERAL. The LTP101-600A-1B differs from the LTP101-600A-1A

in that it is flat rated at 500 shp.
The following paragraphs contain descriptive information
about the LTP101 engines, their operation and their 3. LEADING PARTICULARS.
systems. Detail description and operation of system
components will be found in applicable Chapters within Refer to table 1 for engine leading particulars.
this manual. The data in this section applies to all
LTP101 engines unless otherwise specified. 4. DESCRIPTION OF ENGINE OPERATION.
2. DESCRIPTION OF ENGINES. Inlet air passes through the engine air inlet and inlet
housing and is compressed by the axial/centrifugal com-
The LTP engines are modular designed turboprop en- pressor. It is then directed through the air diffuser to
gines. Each model consists of an accessory/reduction the combustor, where fuel is introduced to form a com-
gearbox module, gas generator module, radial inlet, and bustible mixture. Combustion occurs within the annular
a combustor turbine module. (Refer to figures 1 combustion chamber liner and the expanding gases are
through 4 for arrangement of engines and location of directed through the gas generator nozzle onto the
components.) The LTP101-600A-1A and LTP101- blades of the gas generator turbine. The gas generator
700A-1A configuration differs from the LTP101-600A-1 turbine extracts energy from the gas stream to drive the
and LTP101-700A-1 in that they are designed to ac- compressor and certain accessories. The gas stream then
commodate a sheave to belt-drive customer accessories. passes through the power turbine nozzle onto the blades
The LTP101-600A-1A and LTP101-700A-lA also in- of the power turbine. The power turbine extracts energy
corporate a different configuration customer drive pad. to drive certain accessories and the propeller shaft
through external gearing. The gases then exit through an
exhaust tailpipe.
(To be supplied at later date.)
Figure 1. Engine Left-Side View
71-00-00
3
JAVCO LYCOMtNG OtVISION
Figure 2. Engine Right-Side View
5. DESCRIPTION OF ENGINE SYSTEMS. A. Gas Generator Fuel Control. The fuel control and
integral pump are mounted on the accessory/reduction
6. FUEL SYSTEM. (Refer to figure 5.) The fuel system gearbox and are driven through gearing by the gas genera-
consists of an airframe-mounted fuel filter, a basic en- tor. The ambient temperature compensator is mounted on
gine control system, a fuel manifold with integral flow the forward fire shield. The governor and metering sections
divider, a starting assist fuel system (if incorporated), of the fuel control combine the inputs of compressor dis-
and associated lines. A pressure-operated drain valve, charge pressure (P3), ambient temperature (Tl), gas gen-
at the bottom of the combustion chamber housing, erator rpm (Ng), and power-lever position (PLA) to regu-
drains fluids from the combustion chamber when the late engine fuel flow by positioning the metering valve.
engine is shut down. The basic engine control system Superimposed maximum and minimum fuel flow limits
consists of a gas generator fuel control, which includes govern acceleration (including starting) and deceleration.
a fuel pump and ambient temperature compensator. The The cutoff valve shuts off fuel flow whenever the condi-
following steps describe the fuel system components. tion/propeller lever is retarded below 15 degrees.
71-00-00
4
Figure 3. Engine Front View
NOTE starting the engine under varying ambient

temperatures; lever movement is con-
The power lever selects engine power in trolled by the propeller governor speed-
Forward, Idle, and Reverse. An exten- select lever during the forward flight
sion of this lever is attached to the pro- range.
peller low-blade-angle select lever to
manually decrease propeller pitch B. Temperature Compensator. The temperature com-
angles from idle to full reverse, and to pensator is mounted on the forward fire shield, and
progressively reset the propeller con- biases the P3 signal to the gas generator fuel control to
stant speed governor between forward compensate the acceleration fuel flow schedule for
and reverse. changes in the ambient air temperature during accelerations.
The condition/propeller lever is used

to shut off fuel to the engine and to
provide a modulated fuel supply for
71-00-00
5
Figure 4. Engine Aft View
C. Fuel Manifold. The fuel manifold is mounted ex- D. Starting Assist Fuel Solenoid Valve (If installed).
ternally to the aft end of the combustor housing and The starting assist fuel solenoid valve is mounted on the
support. It consists of eight dual-orifice fuel nozzles, accessory/reduction gearbox. The valve is operated
two tubular fuel channels, and a flow divider. The flow through a spring-loaded switch located in the aircraft
divider delivers fuel to one or both fuel channels de- cockpit. The switch electrically opens the solenoid valve
pending on its pressure as delivered by the fuel control. to allow fuel to flow from the output of the fuel pump
At low pressure, fuel is directed through the primary through a fixed orifice to the output side of the fuel
fuel channel to the innermost of two concentric orifices control. This supplies an optional additional 20 pounds
in the fuel nozzles. As pressure increases, fuel is directed per hour fuel flow for low ambient temperature starting.
through both the primary and secondary channels and
to both orifices in the fuel nozzles.
71-00-00
6
JAVCO LYCOMING 01VISION
DATE Jan 22/81 STRATPORD, CONNECT1CUT
NO. $$

On page 7, Table 1, Weight is revised as follows:
Weight
Specification Weight (Dry) LTP 101-600A-1A
Engine .......... 325 Pounds
LTP 101-700A-1A
Engine .......... 330 Pounds
Estimated Weight of Residual

Fluids 3.0 Pounds
Sheet 1 of 1
Table 1. Leading Particulars
Dimensions
Overall Length (Without Tailpipe) 36.9 Inches
Maximum Height 22.8 Inches
Maximum Width (At Inlet) 18.5 Inches
Width (At Forward Fire Shield) 23.2 Inches
Weight
Specification Weight (Dry) LTP101-600A-1, -600A-1A, -600A-1B
Engines 325 Pounds
. . .
LTP101-700A-1, -700A-1A Engines

. 330 Pounds
. .
Estimated Weight of Residual Fluids 3.0 Pounds
Rotational Directions (As Viewed From Rear of Engine)

Compressor Rotor Clockwise
Gas Generator Turbine Clockwise
Power Turbine Clockwise
Propeller Shaft Clockwise
Rotational Directions of Accessory Pad Splines (Looking at Pad)

Fuel Control Clockwise
Oil Pump Counterclockwise
Starter Clockwise
Customer Pad Counterclockwise
Overspeed Governor Counterclockwise
Propeller Governor Clockwise
Miscellaneous
Combustion Chamber Design Reverse Flow Annular
Operating Altitude 0 to 30,000 Feet
-54°C +55°C (-65°F to 131°F)
Operating Temperature (Ambient Range) to
71-00-00
7
START ASSIST
FUEL SOLENOID
VALVE
(IF
¯
INCORPORATED)
ORIFICE
->-TO N2 RESET LEVER
POWER
FUEL
LEVER
---TO BETA LEVER NOZZLE
PRIMARY --+
GAS GENERATOR
DRIVE 5PLINE --
METERING MANUAL START -
FLOW
SECTION --
AND FUEL ...-.. DIVIDER
GAS
FUEL SHUT43FF VALVE
GENERATOR
PUMP
GOVERNOR
'
AIR
t I SECONDARY
FRAME
FILTER I
I
L_ _ __ ___ __ __ ___J
ENGINE TEMP.
P3 COMPENSATOR
TO CONDITION/
PROPELLER LEVER
FUEL CONTROL XA-1053-128
Figure 5. Fuel System Schematic
7. FUEL SYSTEM OPERATION. Fuel is delivered pressure element and filter; then to two channels. The
through an airframe-mounted fuel filter to the pump forward channel supplies the torquemeter, the accessory/
section of the fuel control. The pump, driven by gear- reduction gearbox, propeller governor, and No. 1 bear-
ing from the compressor rotor, delivers fuel to the me- ing. The aft channel supplies the No. 2 and 3 bearings.
tering section of the fuel control. During starting, met- ,
Scavenge oil from the forward channel gravity-flows to
ered fuel flow from the fuel control is initially directed the bottom of the gearbox and is returned through the
to the primary orifices of the fuel nozzles by the flow oil cooler to the oil tank by the scavenge element of
divider. Combustion is initiated by the igniter plugs the oil pump. Scavenge oil from the No. 2 and 3 bear-
and, as Ng increases, the flow divider begins to direct ing cavities is returned through the oil cooler to the oil
fuel through the secondary orifices of the fuel nozzles. tank by the scavenge element. The following steps de-
When the gas generator reaches 48 to 52 percent Ng, scribe the lubrication system components.
ignition and starter are manually de-energized. Takeoff
to ground idle to full reverse power is controlled by A. Oil Pump. The pump incorporates one pressure
the gas generator fuel control. Maximum fuel flows are element, one main scavenge element, and one power tur-
limited by the fuel control forward and reverse stops. bine scavenge element. Output pressure is regulated by
an adjustable pressure-relief valve. The 5-micron (abso-
8. LUBRICATION SYSTEM. (Refer to figure 6.) The lute) integral disposable filter incorporates an impending
lubrication system consists of an airframe-mounted oil bypass-indicator button that actuates at 10 ± 1.5 psid
tank and cooler, a three-element lube and scavenge across the filter. Actual bypass occurs at 25 ± 2 psid.
pump with integral oil filter, a torquemeter, and asso-
ciated piping. Oil flows front the tank through the
71-00-00
ARRIER RESTRICTOA
(BEAR NG SUPPOR ) (CARR ER)
SUN
TOROAKEAMEETER PLSANET PLSAUNNET
POWER NO 5 NO. 19 NO. 20 PLANET PLANET PLANET NO 6 NO / PLANET NO 38 NO 39 PROP
PIN10N BEARING BEARING BEARING BEARtNGS BEARINGS BEARINGS BEARING BEARING MESH BEARING BEARING GOVERNOR
ANO BLEED MESH MESH
(TRANSFER TUBEl
NO 4 NO 1
BEARING BEARING
MESH
CHECK
GEAR BOX
VENT
LVRE
1 FILTER BYPASS VALVE
C
SUMP AT BOTTOM
CENTRI LGAL
OF ACCESSORY/
REOUCTION GEARBOX
SEPARATOR
GEAR
L
82EAARNONSO.3
CHIP
DETECTORSTRAINER CN
O
VENMGE
Psi
SC
CHECK VALVE
EU
R AT G
12 GPM
SCAVENGE PUMP ----
LUBE PUMP
AJRCRAFT MOUNTED
COOLER BYPASS VALVE
VENT
SCAVENGE
CHIP DETECTOR AIHCRAFT
-
AIRCRAFT OIL COOLER
(IF INSTALLED) OIL TANK
X 1053 130
Figure 6. Lubrication System Schematic
B. Torquemeter. The torquemeter is an oil-pressure 9. INLET AIRFLOW MODULATIONSYSTEM. (Refer

balance-chamber type. As axial forces generated by the to figure 7.) The inlet airflow modulator is mounted
torque reaction of the helical power-output idler gear on the air diffuser. A compressor inlet airflow modu-
move it forward with increasing torque, the chamber lator ring is mounted in an annular channel in the inlet
sealing shaft (piston) is driven forward until it contacts housing. When extended, the ring protrudes slightly into
a poppet valve. The valve allows oil, at the pressure re- the inlet air path. The actuator extends or retracts the
quired to resist the forward movement of the gear, to ring relative to compressor pressure ratio and thereby
enter the blance chamber. This oil-pressure valve is affects the amount of air drawn into the compressor,
transmitted to an indicator in the cockpit. The input signal to the control is compressor discharge
pressure (P3). The ring is extended for low compressor-
C. Chip Detectors. Ferrous chips in the lubrication pressure ratios and retracted for high compressor-
system are detected by a chip detector in the sump of pressure ratios.
the accessory/reduction gearbox. In order for the engine
to be eligible for the "on condition" maintenance pro-
gram, a TEDECO, P/N AS88, full flow chip detector
must be installed in the return scavenge line as close as
praótical to the engine. (Refer to figure 6 for location.)
71-00-00
9
AVCO LYCOMING OfVISION
oo o o'
CONTROL VAC
OOOOO AMS
AMB //////////////////////////
ACTUATOR
FEEDBACK L1NK -
--
' o o EgyEND
P,
O
MODULATOR
RING
AIR
INLET
XA 959-25495B
Figure 7. Inlet Airflow Modulation System Schematic
10. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. (Refer to figure 8.) NOTE

Electrical power, externally supplied from a 28-vde
power source, provides power for the ignition unit and The MGT harness is not part of the
anti-icing valve. The ignition unit is a hermetically sealed main electrical cable assembly.
low-tension, high-energy unit, with a spark rate of one
spark per second minimum at 10 vde and four sparks A thermocouple harness consisting of
per second at 30 vde. The electrical harness also pro- four pairs of chromel and alumnel
vides a path for the oil temperature transmitter, gas thermocouple probes is provided with
generator speed (Ng) magnetic pickup, and power tur- the engine. The thermocouples, which
bine speed (Np) magnetic pickup. generate voltage proportional to
temperature, are mounted circumferen-
The power and propeller speed coordinating system kit, tially in the turbine housing where the
P/N 4-203-010-01, is designed to adapt a constant-speed probes extend into the gas path just
feathering and reversing propeller to the LTP101 series prior to the power turbine nozzle.
engine. For further information, refer to the kit instal- Leads pass through the turbine hous-
lation and operation manual. ing to a junction box. Airframe alumel
and chromel wires carry the millivolt
11. MEASURED GAS TEMPERATURE (MGT) thermocouple signal from the junction
SYSTEM. (Refer to figure 8.) box to the cockpit instrument.
71-00-00
10
JAVCO LYCOMING DIVIS10N
' OTRATFOMO, CONNECTICtJT
DATE Feb 3/81
NO.

On page 11, Figure 8 is revised as shown on Sheet 2.
Sheet 1 of 2
ca e
,>
aO
LTI
rt
oo e
o
Io
oo
1630 VDC 1&30 VDC

D667AMFPSMAX 12
TE TI RE 25FMAX
N TOR
COCKPIT
LOCK PICHCH
1630 VDC
250 MA ,, 1&30 VDC
--------
L2AMPSMAX ON OFF r--
16-3DVDC 1630VOC
2 AMPS MAx Np 125 AMPS MAX e 72°F TEM ERATURE
IGN OHN CNNGC)

C PRESSURE
H
F
ON V OFF OF W
CR AL
A B A E
ENGINE
ENGINE C C AL
I JI I t
L
MEASURED
EM R URLEE
-
6"° LLO
jo T
PT PEI SYLllM,
, P2 P3 Pb START
r¯·¯ P4
. ,_ .. '-. + d a ' Assist
i OIL i Ng IANTilCINGI lity
1 - - --
VALVE
.
i Np a ED AUTO LOCK I CHIP
IGNITION ---- - ITEMPEH^1I
ti MAGNETIC i IMAGNETICI NELET ‡&AINEN PITCH DETECTOR (F
-----
I VALVE I
i UNIT -y ITRA‡¢SMilitBI *
P1 PICKUP I PICKUP (1 I: SQLENOfD $OLENOID LOLENOID INCORPORATED)
e_ __ i i u m m x n TR t
- --
DETAILS OF POWER AND PROPELLER
IGNITEA IGNITER SPEED COORDINATING SYSTEM KIT
LEADS PLUGS P/N 4 20301001 USTOMER WIR£D CONNECTIONS
M1053135A
Figure 8. Electrics . System Schematic

FPSDMAX
A3MPS McAX
NDICN 0.66 A 1.2
t A OR TOR
i..
COCKPlT
COCKPIT
GRO DN.EST
LOCK PICHCH
16-30 VDC
250 MA 16-30 VDC
r-------- 1.2AMPSMAX ON OFF r------,
1630VDC 1630VDC
I
972°F TEMPERATURE l
2 AMPS MAX NP 1.25 AMPS MAX
INDICATOR INDICATOR I
HN A- ANTI-ICINNGC)
PRESSURE
AIR SWITCH
(N.O)
AIR
ON OFF o FLOONW
CR AL
-----AIRFRAME
--- --
'A' 'P'
EN INE
ENGINE CR C CR CR C R AL
--- -
J1 ¡L
.
MEASURED ,, y,
GAS A B
r--- TEMPERATURE
*---
-
GROUND TO e THERMOCOUPLE
P1 SHELL SYSTEM
P6 P7 PB
-----,
¯ r P2 P3 P4'A' Ÿ P5'A' 'B C 'A START

r _.
_
8&-&--...
_±_ ASSIST
OIL I ' Np I Ng lANTI-ICINGl OVERSPEED AUTO LOCK VALVE
IGNITION L -----
i TEMPERATURE MAGNETIC IMAGNETICI 1 I RESET FEATHER i PlTCH | (IF
i UNIT -- --- ITRANSMITTER VALVE
P1 I r I PICKUP l PICKUP I 1 l i SOLENOID SOLENOID i sOLENOID I INCORPORATED)
-- DETAILS OF POWER AND PROPELLER

IGNITER IGNITER SPEED COORDINATING SYSTEM KtT
LEADS PLUGS P/N 4-203-010-01
X-1053 131
Figure 8. Electrical System Schematic

o
12. ANTI-ICING SYSTEM. During engine operation, F. Install engine in airframe or maintenance stand
the anti-icing valve is normally energized to the CLOSED (LTCT5463).
position by manually actuating a swtich in the cockpit.
In the event of an electrical power failure, the fail-safe, G. If engine is installed in airframe, connect all air-
spring-loaded valve returns to the OPEN position to frame accessories in accordance with airframe manufac-
provide continuous anti-icing air. turer's instructions.
13. PREPARATION FOR SERVICE AND STORAGE. H. Store shipping container in dry area for reuse.
14. INSPECTION OF SHIPPING CONTAINER. Inspect 16. ACTIVATING ENGINE AFTER STORAGE. The
shipping container for evidence of damage. If it appears particular procedure chosen depends on length of time
that engine was dropped, perform Excessive G Inspec- engine has been inactive. Examine the preservation re-
tion. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 10.) cord tags and historical records of engine to determine
period of inactivity. (Refer to paragraph 19.)
15. REMOVAL OF ENGINE FROM SHIPPING CON-
TAINER. 17. ACTIVATING ENGINE AFTER FLYABLE OR
TEMPORARY STORAGE. Remove covers or barrier
Special Tools Required material from inlet and exhaust, and remove any tape
residue with solvent (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item
Universal Engine Lifting Sling LTCT5454 13.) Engine is ready for operation.
Maintenance Stand LTCT5463
18. ACTIVATINGINSTALLED ENGINE AFTER PER-
CAUTION MANENT STORAGE. Proceed as follows:
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO ENGINE NOTE

USE CARE WHEN OPENING SHIP-
PING CONTAINER. Engine motoring and operation shall
be accomplished in accordance with in-
A. If engine is packed in reusable plywood container, structions contained in airframe flight
open container, as necessary, to clear engine and remove manual.
engine records.
A. Remove covers or barrier material from inlet, ex-
B. Remove bolts securing engine to base. haust, and engine cowling.
C. If engine is packed in reusable cardboard contain- B. Check exposed openings for foreign material, and
er, perform the following steps: service oil tank.
(1) Cut tapes securing container. C. Disconnect fuel line at discharge port of fuel con-
trol and route a temporary line to container having
(2) Open top of cardboard container. capacity of at least one gallon.
(3) Lift out foam packing. D. Disconnect 28 vde to ignition unit. Operate air-
frame boost pump (if incorporated) to prime fuel sys-
(4) Remove engine records. tem and motor engine to maximum cranking speed.
(Refer to paragraph 44). Move power lever and condition/
D. Attach universal engine lifting sling (LTCT5454) prop lever to maximum position until solid stream of
to lifting bosses on top of accessory/reduction gearbox fuel, without bubbles, can be seen. Move power lever to
and on top of combustor housing. Attach a suitable Ground Idle and condition/prop lever to Feather.
hoist to sling and raise hoist to support weight of
engine. NOTE
E. Carefully guide and lift engine from shipping con- The engine lubrication system is fully
tainer. primed when the oil pressure gage shows
a steady, positive indication.
71.00-00
12
.
STWATPONC.CONNECTH:UT DATE Oct 31/79
NO• R ev $
MANUAL101-2CHANGE NOTICE
THIS CHANGE APPLIES TO: LTP Maintenance Manual
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 19 dated May 25/79. Please remove , and discard MCN
No. 19.
On page 12, paragraph 15., CAUTION following step G. is added as follows:
CAUTION
IF OIL TO BE USED DURING ENGINE OPERATION IS DIFFERENT

TYPE THAN OIL USED DURING ENGINE TESTING (SEE TAG),
FLUSH ENGINE AS SPECIFIED IN PARAGRAPH 30.
Also NOTE after paragraph 16. is added as follows:
NOTE
Lubricating oil may drain from the reservoir into the

engine if engine has been idle for more than a few days.
If oil level is low, do not service reservoir until
engine has been run or until accessory gearbox has been
drained of this accumulation of oil.
Sheet _1 of 1
4
9
'
4
E. After fuel system is primed, reconnect fuel hose B. Shut down engine and allow to cool.
and ignition unit.
NOTE
NOTE
If covers are not available, seal inlet and
If fuel system was not preserved with exhaust openings with barrier material
oil, a 2-hour fuel soak period is re- and secure with tape.
quired before starting engine.
If in a corrosive inducive environment
F. Start and run engine for 5 minutes at approxi- or if engine is to be idle for more
mately 70 percent Ng. Visually inspect for leakage. than 14 days, coat all exterior surfaces
and spray compressor while motoring
G. Shut down engine. engine, if possible, (refer to 71-00-00,
paragraph 44) with corrosion inhibitor
H. Visually inspect impending-bypass indicator on oil (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 11).
filter for indication. If button is extended, replace filter
and perform lubrication-system contamination trouble- C. Install inlet and exhaust covers.
shooting outlined in 72-00-00, paragraph 13.
D. Cover all openings in engine cowling with suitable
I. Check engine (and scavenge, if installed) chip de- covers or barrier material and tape.
tector elements for continuity or remove, inspect, and
clean or replace chip detectors. E. Motor engine for 30 seconds every 7 days. (Refer
to paragraph 44.)
J. If there is no contamination on chip detector
elements, engine is ready for operation. 21. PERMANENT STORAGE. Proceed as follows:
K. If accumulation is slight, clean detector element A. If engine is not removed from aircraft, check oil
and reinstall. Repeat preceding steps F. through J. If level. If necessary, service.
evidence of foreign material still exists, drain oil and
refill system with new oil. Repeat steps F. through J. B. Clean engine compressor. (Refer to 72-00-00, para-
If there is still evidence of foreign material, a thorough graph 5, steps A and B.)
investigation is necessary. If there is no further accum-
ulation, engine is ready for operation. C. Coat all exterior surfaces and spray compressor
while motoring engine, if possible, (refer to 71-00-00,
19. PRESERVATION OF ENGINE. Proceed as follows: paragraph 44) with corrosion inhibitor (Refer to 72-00-
00, table 15, item 11).
A. The degree of preservation is based on the follow-
ing storage periods. D. Disconnect main fuel line at fuel control outlet
port and attach drain hose.
(1) Flyable/Temporary Storage engine to be
--
idle for up to 180 days. Renew every 30 days. E. Place end of drain hose in receptacle.
(2) Permanent Storage -
engine to be idle for F. Disconnect main fuel line at fuel-control inlet poit.
more than 180 days.
G. Attach hose from container of lubricating oil (Re-
B. All preservation procedures require that accumu- fer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 21) to fuel-control inlet
lations of dirt be removed from engine. port.
20. FLYABLE/TEMPORARYSTORAGE. Proceed as CAUTION

follows:
DISCONNECT 28-VDC POWER SUPPLY
A. Run engine at Ground Idle until all instruments FROM IGNITION UNIT TO PREVENT
have been checked to ensure normal engine operation. ACCIDENTAL START OF ENGINE.
71-00-00
13
H. Set power lever and condition/prop lever at maxi- E. Cap or plug all openings.
mum and motor engine (Refer to 71-00-00, paragraph
44) to flush fuel control wíth lubricating oil (Refer to F. Enclose in plastic envelope.
72-00-00, table 15, item 21.) Continue motoring until
approximately one pint of lubricating oil has passed G. Install securely in shipping container.
through control. Move condition/prop lever to cutoff
and release. 23. INSTALLING ENGINE INTO SHIPPING CONTAIN-
ER. Proceed as follows:
NOTE
Special Tools Required
Do not store engine with lever forced
into CUTOFF, damage to needle and seat Universal Engine Lifting Sling LTCTS454
may result.
A. Cover rear opening of engine combustor housing
I. Disconnect flushing line and reconnect fuel lines. with a 10-1/2 inch diameter triple wall corrugated cover.
Secure cover with tap (12, figure 9.)
NOTE
B. Cover engine air inlet.
If covers are not available, seal inlet
and exhaust openings with barrier ma- C. Attach universal engine lifting sling (LTCTS454) to
terial and secure with tape. lifting bosses of accessory/reduction gearbox and on top
of combustor housing. Attach a suitable hoist to sling
J. Install inlet and exhaust covers. and suspend engine.
K. If engine is installed in aircraft, cover all openings D. Enclose engine in a polyethylene bag (6).
in engine cowling.
E. Overwrap polyethylene bag (6) with polyethylene
L. Visually check entire engine. Plug all holes, cap fihn (5) and secure with tape.
all ports, and make sure all external parts are complete
and secure. F. Lower the engine into either triple wall corrugated
container (1) or cleated plywood container (9), using
M.If engine is to be shipped, install in shipping con- preformed pads to position the engine centrally.
tainer. (Refer to 71-00-00, paragraph 23.)
G. Place 5 sixteen unit bags of desiccant (13) in a
N. Record date of preservation on engine historical 12 inch by 20 inch polyehtylene bag (16). Place bag
record. with desiccant across the top of cover (17) and secure
with tape (12). Slit bag (16) in such a manner so that
22. PRESERVATION OF FUEL CONTROL REMOVED the desiccant bags will not slide out but allow air to
FROM ENGINE. When fuel control has been removed circulate through bag.
from engine and is to be shipped, preserve in following
manner: H. Secure a humidity indicator to the inside of the
bag enclosing the engine and secure by taping the top,
A. Allow fuel to drain from fuel control. and bottom of the indicator to the bag with tape (12)
in a way so that the tape does not interfere with the
B. Connect a 1- and 5-foot pressure head source of indicator.
clean, unused lubricating oil (Refer to 72-00-00, table
15, item 21), to fuel-control inlet port- I. Seal the bag enclosing the engine with tape (I I),
except for a small opening through which air will be
C. Position the fuel control in operating attitude. evacuated.
D. Position power lever and condition/prop lever to J. Using a vacuum device, evacuate the air out of
maximum open position. Using a rotary air gun and a the bag enclosing the engine.
spline adapter, which will not damage the fuel control
drive, motor the fuel control at 200 to 250 rpm until K. After all air is evacuated from the bag, fold the
approximately one pint of oil has passed through control. bag neatly and secure with tape (11).
71-00-00

14
AVCO LYCOMtNG OlVISION
SEE SHEET 2
CORNER PROTECTORS
12
1
2
10
THIS SIDE
HANDLE WITH CARE
EIGHT (8) REQUIRED, TWO (2) AT

EACH CORNER, FOUR (4) CORNERS
PACKAGED WITH
OR INSPECTION
FIVE (5) REQUIRED, TOP, ENDS

AND SIDES.
XA-1045-103
Figure 9. Preparation and Marking of Shipping Container (Sheet 1 of 2)
71-00-00
15
AWICO LYCOMING OlVISION

STRATFORD, CONNECTICUT
U.S.A.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR MONITORING LTP-101 ENGINES IN STORAGE
AND
REUSE OF THIS SHIPPING CONTAINER
This Engine is secured in its shipping container using the Foam-In-Place method.
This method provides a top and a bottom cushion pad. The top pad is removable,
and so long as its surfaces are not distorted, the pack can be reused for the original
engine or another engine of identical exterior configuration.
The Engine is enclosed in a six (6) mil polyethylene envelope within which has been
placed five (5) bags of desiccant (moisture absorbing) material. These five bags are
located on top of the air inlet cover in a polyethylene sleeve so that air can circulate
thru the sleeve.
Secured on the inside of and visible thru the top of the engine envelope there is a
humidity indicator which registers the moisture content within the envelope.
This indicator, by its color coding, designates the need of the envelope being opened
for removal of the desiccant so as to reactivate the desiccant by drying it in an oven.
Following reactivation of the desiccant, it will be replaced in identical position, the
excess air removed from the envelope, and the envelope resealed.
Examination of the desiccant indicator should initially be checked every 60 days

and subsequently as frequently as experience dictates.
X A-1048-246
Figure 9. Preparation and Marking of Shipping Container (Sheet 2 of 2)
71-00-00
14
AVCC LYCOMING DIVISION
Key to Figure 9.
1. Triple Wall Corrugated Container, Type PPP-B- 10. Screw

640, Class 2, Style E-RSC, Size 41 inches by 11. Tape, Type PPP-T-97
30 inches by 30 inches by 34 inches 12. Tape, Type PPP-T-60
2. Instruction Sheet 13. Desiccant, MIL-D-3464, Type III, 16
3. Steel Straping Unit Bags
4. Polyethylene Film -
1-1/2 mil thickness 14. Bolt
5. Polyethylene Film -
1-1/2 mil thickness 15. Nut
6. Polyethylene Bag, Size 54 inches by 60 inches 16. Polyethylene Bag, 12 inches by 20
by 6 miles inches
7. Foam 17. Masonite Cover, 18-1/2 inches, by
8. Wooden Skid, Size 42 inches by 31 inches 9-1/4 inches by 1/4 inch
9. Cleated Plywood Container, Type PPP-B-601, 18. Label
Style A, Overseas Type 1/4 inch plywood, 1 inch 19. Label
by 4 inch cleats, Size 41 inch by 30 inch by
34 inch
L. Place complete engine records in container. C. Inspect the engine to ensure that all drain plugs
and all lines are in place and connected, and all bare
M.Install preformed top plug. metal surfaces, including internal and external threads,
are suitably protected against corrosion.
N. Seal the triple-wall corrugated container (1). Se-
cure each of the four ends of the two outside flaps to NOTE
the container side with 18-inch length of tape (11),
about one inch in from the flap edge, and one piece Make sure all openings are closed with
across the center of the two flaps. the proper shipping covers.
O. Secure the cover of the cleated plywood container D. Attach universal engine lifting sling (LTCT5454)
with twelve #10 x 2-1/2 inch flat head screws (10). to lifting pads on top of accessory/reduction gearbox
and on top of combustor housing.
P. Secure triple wall corrugated container to the
wooden skid (8) with three 3/4-inch steel straps (3) E. Attach hoist to sling and remove engine from air-
with corner protectors at the container edges. craft. (Refer to airframe manufacturer's instructions.)
Install inlet and exhaust covers.
Q. Mark the shipping container as shown in figure 9.
NOTE
24. ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.
Prior to installation into maintenance
25. REMOVAL OF ENGINE FROM AIRCRAFT. Pro- stand, mount engine adapters into engine
ceed as follows: mount pads. Secure with bolts.
Special Tools Required F. Guide engine into shipping container (Refer to

paragraph 23), or into maintenance stand (LTCTS463)
Universal Engine Lifting Sling LTCTS454 as required.
26. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE INTO AIRCRAFT.
A. Preserve engine for permanent storage. (Refer to Proceed as follows:
paragraph 21.)
B. Remove all airframe accessories from engine. (Re-
fer to airframe manufacturer's instructions.) Universal Engine Lifting Sling LTCT5454
71-00-00
17
CAUTION CAUTION
OPERATION OF ENGINE WITHOUT TO BE EFFECTIVE, ALL ADDITIVES

TAILPIPE PROPERLY SECURED BY MUST BE USED IN STRICT ACCOR-
V-BAND COUPLING WILL ALLOW ANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S
POWER-TURBINE NOZZLE TO INSTRUCTIONS.
MOVE AFT INTO POWER-TURBINE
ROTOR CAUSING SEVERE DAMAGE NOTE
TO ENGINE.
Shell petroleum ASA3 anti-static addi-
A. Attach universal engine lifting sling (LTCTS454) tive at concentration not in excess of
to lifting pads on top of accessory/reduction gearbox 0.0001 percent by volume is approved
and on top of combustor housing. Attach suitable hoist for use in fuels listed in table 2.
to sling and raise hoist to support weight of engine.
Prist MIL-I-27686 (NATO S-748) or
B. Carefully guide and lift engine. Install engine in Phillips PFA-55MB anti-icing additive or
airframe. (Refer to airframe manufacturer's instructions.) equivalent, at concentration not in ex-
cess of 0.15% by volume is approved
C. Install airframe accessories. (Refer to airframe for use with fuels listed in table 2.
manufacturer's instructions.)
Operation on emergency fuel requires
D. Service, activate, and perform runup and check logbook entry. Hot-section inspection
procedures as required in following paragraphs. must be performed after 50 hours of
operation is accumulated on emergency
27. FUEL AND OIL REQUIREMENTS. For fuel and fuel. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 7.)
oil requirements refer to table 2.
Table 2. Fuel and Oil Requirements
Type Fuels (Primary)

Wide-Cut Type ASTM D1655-70 (Jet B)
MIL-T-5624 (Grade JP-4)
NATO Code F-40 or F-45
Kerosene Type NATO Code F34 or F35
ASTM D1655-70 (Jet A-1)
NATO Code F42 or F44
MIL-T-5624 (Grade JP-5)
Type Fuels (Emergency)
Diesel Fuel ASTM D975 (No. 2D)

NATO Code F54 or lighter
12 Centistokes Maximum
Viscosity
Type Oils
Type I (At Ambient Temperatures) MIL-L-7808

-54°C (-65°F))
Down to NATO 0-148
Type II (At Ambient Temperatures MIL-L-23699

Down to -45°C (-40°F)) NATO 0-150
NATO 0-156
71-00-00
18
A¾aVCD LYCOMING DIVISION DATE Jun 30 /79
STRATFORD.CONNECTICUT
NO. 15Rev
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 15 Rev 1 dated May 25/79. Please remove and
discard MCN No. 15 Rev 1.
On page 18, paragraph 26., CAUTION following step D. is added as follows:
CAUTION
IF OIL TO BE USED DURING ENGINE OPERATION IS DIFFERENT

TYPE THAN OIL USED DURING ENGINE TESTING (SEE TAG),
FLUSH ENGINE AS SPECIFIED IN PARAGRAPH 30.
Paragraph 27., NOTE is revised as follows:
NOTE
Shell Petroleum ASA3 anti-static additive at concen-

tration not in excess of 0.0001 percent by volume is
approved for use in fuels listed in table 2.
Icing protection is required for operation at outside

air temperatures below 40°F (AOC).
Prist MIL-I-27686 (NATO S-748) or Phillips PFA-55ME

anti-icing additive, or equivalent, at concentration ggd
not in excess of 0.15% by volume is approved for use
with fuels listed in table 2.
Operation on special usage fuels requires logbook

entry. Hot-Section inspection must be performed after
400 hours of operation is accumulated on special usage,
fuels. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 7.)
Cetane improvers are not required for diesel fuels

used in gas turbine engines, and their use is dis-
couraged, although not prohibited.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Jun 30/79
NO. 15 Rev 2
Table 2, Type Fuels is revised as follows:
Type Fuels (Primary)
Wide-Cut Type ASTM D1655 (Jet B)

*MIL-T-5624 (Grade JP-4)
*NATO Code F-40
Kerosene Type *NATO Code F34

ASTM D1655 (Jet A or Jet A-1)
*NATO Code F-42
NATO Code F44
*MIL-T-5624 (Grade JP-5)
Type Fuels (Special Usage)
Diesel Fuel (Arctic Grade) ASTM D975 No. 1D

To be used with an VV-F-800 Grade DF-A
outside air temperature MIL-F-46162, Grade I,
above +5°F (-1500) Arctic
Diesel Fuel (Winter VV-F-800 Grade DF-1

Grade) To be used with
an outside air tempera-
ture above +20°F (-7°C)
Diesel Fuel (Regular ASTM D975 No. 2D

Grade) To be used with an VV-F-800 Grade DF-2
outside air temperature MIL-F-46162, Grade II,
above +40°F (+50C) Regular
NATO Code F54 or lighter
12 Centistokes Maximum
Viscosity
* Contain Anti-Ice Additive NATO S-748
Also, Table 2. in Type Oils, NATO 0-150 is deleted from Type II.
Sheet 2 of 2
1b
M LYCOMING OlV1SION
STWATPO ©. CCNNBCTICtJT
DATE Oct 31/80
NO. ÍÛRev Î
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 16 dated Mar 15/79. Please remove and discard MCN
No. 16
On page 19, paragraph 29, NOTE after third paragraph in B. Analysis is added
as follows:
NOTE
An increase of 3 ppm in iron content since last analysis

shall be cause for investigation.
Also, address after fifth paragraph in B. Analysis is revised as follows:
Avco Lycaning Division

Product Support Department
'
550 South Main Street
Stratford, Connecticut (06497)
U. S. A.
Attention: Manager, LTP 101 Custaner Services
Sheet 1 of 1
28. RECOMMENDEDOIL-ANALYSISPROGRAM. Avoid scraping interior of tank with sampling tube

and do not allow sample to become contaminated. Al-
NOTE ways use a clean, dry sample bottle.
Under this program, oil samples are B. Analysis:

to be taken at 100-hour intervals.
These samples are to be analyzed Oil samples must be promptly sent to a labora-
for acid number and viscosity. Un- tory capable of emission or atomic absorption testing
der the analysis program, oil filters for the parts per million (ppm) of following wear metals:
are to be changed only when im- Aluminum, Chromium, Copper, Iron, and Silver. To
pending bypass is indicated. avoid analysis variations due to test equipment and
technique differences, only one laboratory should be
A. The oil analysis may be performed by any com- used.
mercial laboratory or by using a Gerin turbo-lube test
kit, TL410 (Gerin corporation, Avon, New Jersey, The laboratory reports must be evaluated for wear
07717), er equivalent. Acidity shall be tested in accord- metal buildup trends from one sample to another. (Re-
ance with ASTM D664. Viscosity shall be tested in ac- fer to figure 10.)
cordance with ASTM D445.
A normal increase of wear metals occurs at a slow
B. An oil change is required when the acid number steady rate and eventually levels off. An abnormal in-
exceeds 1.0 or the viscosity changes more than plus 25 crease occurs at an accelerated rate showing significant
percent or minus 10 percent of the new oil viscosity. increases between successive samples and if allowed to
continue without checking to determine source, may
C. If an oil-analysis program is not undertaken, the lead to failure of a component.
engine oil and oil filter shall be changed every 100
hours. The wear metal guideline is that level of wear
metal content at which an engine is considered "sus-
29. SPECTROMETRICOIL ANALYSIS. Proper samp- pect" and must be checked. It is not the absolute point
líng and analysis of engine lubricating oil for wear metal at which the engine or module must be removed. Wear
content can provide an advance warning of an excessive metal guidelines in general are not go-no-go criteria.
wear condition of an engine component or components. They are established just below that level of wear metal
content determined to be abnormal based on past ex-
NOTE perience. (Refer to figure 11.)
This analysis program may not be These wear metal guidelines have been established
effective if engine oil is changed at based upon experience with a limited number of engines.
100-hour intervals. Each operator is asked to assist Avco Lycoming in vali-
dating these guidelines by forwarding a copy of each
A. Sampling: laboratory report to:
Oil samples must be taken from the supply tank Avco Lycoming Division
at 2 to 5 operating hours after installation of a new 550 South Main Street
or overhauled engine or module and at intervals of 100 Stratford, Connecticut (06497)
operating hours thereafter. If a rising metal content U.S.A.
trend occurs, the frequency of sampling should be in- Attention: R. Sussman
creased.
Include any maintenance actions performed to cor-
Samples should be taken before oil has completely rect excessive wear metal content.
cooled and should always be taken before servicing oil
tank. When taking sample, the lower end of the plastic C. Wear metal sources for use in determining main-
sampling tube should not be less than 3 inches from tenance action requirements or checks are as follows:
bottom of oil supply tank.
(1) Iron: Gears, bearings, bearing liners, oil pump,
or major support structures.
71-00-00
19
AVCD LYCOMtNG 01VISt0N
NORMAL TREND
25
WEAR METAL
GUIDELINE
20
15
PPM
10
0
SAMPLE INTERVALS
ABNORMAL TREND
25
WEAR METAL
GUIDELINE
20
-ENGINE REMOVED
15
PPM
10
0
SAMPLE INTERVALS
XA-992-132
Figuæ 10. Wear-Metal Trend (Example)
71-00-00
20
AmWCO LYCOMING DIVISION
STRATPORD, CONNECTICUT
DATE Mar 15/79
NO.

On page 20, Figure 10. is revised as shown below:
NORMAL TREND
10
PPM -- - - - - - - -- -- -- - -- -- - - -- - - - -
WEAR METAL
GUIDELINE
4
SAMPLE INTERVALS
ABNORMÄCTREND
10
PPM -
WEAR METAL
. - -- - - - -- - -- -- -- -- -- ...... -- - - ...
GUIDELINE
MAINTENANCE ACTION TAKEN
SAMPLE INTERVALS
Figure 10. Wear-Metal Trend (Example)
Sheet 1 of I
A
I
"i
DATE Oct 31/79
STRATPOND, CONNECTICUT
NO. ]$ Rev ]
MANUAL101-2CHANGE NOTICE
THIS CHANGE APPLIES TO: LTP Maintenance Manual
No. 18 .
AI Cr Cu F6e AB
XA-904255
Figure 11. Wear-Metal Guidelines -

Parts Per Million (ppm) by Weight
The technical aspects of this MCN were approved by FAA per A$co Lycoming DER.
Sheet _1 of 1
Al Cr Cu Fe Ag
6 4 10 20 4
XA-992-133
Figure 11. Wear-Metal Guidelines --

Parts Per Million (ppm) by Weight
(2) Silver: Bearing cages. (7) Repeat steps (2) through (5).
(3) Aluminum: Gearbox or inlet housing. 31. ENGINE OPERATION. Proceed as follows:
(4) Chromium: Power turbine shaft. (Refer to A. Engine shall be motored, started, and operated in
Iron above.) accordance with instructions in the applicable airframe
flight manual. Operating limits are as follows:
(5) Copper: Bearing cages or oil pump.
B. Operating Limits.
30. INTERMIXING OF OIL TYPES. Proceed as fol-
lows: (1) Measured Gas Temperature (MGT).
A. Intermixing of Type I with Type II (Refer to NOTE

table 2) oils is prohibited. If intermixing oil types inad-
vertently occurs, the oil shall be changed immediately. For measured gas temperature limits,
If a change of oil type becomes necessary, or if oil refer to table 3,
types are intermixed, follow instructions in following
step. (2) Rotational Speeds.
B. Change engine oil as follows: NOTE
(1) Drain oil from system. For rotational speed limits, refer to
table 4.
(2) Replace engine oil filter. (Refer to 79-20-03,
paragraph 3.) (3) Torque.
(3) Refill oil system with new oil and operate NOTE
engine for 10 to 15 minutes.
For torque limits, refer to table 5.
(4) Shut down engine.
(4) Oil Pressure.
(5) Remove and inspect engine oil filter. If oil
filter is heavily contaminted, replace filter and perform NOTE
following steps (6) and (7). If oil filter is not contam-
inated, reinstall filter and resume normal operation. When starting at low ambient tempera-
ture, pressure may be within 20 to 200
(6) Drain oil from system. psig.
71-00-00
21
Table 3. Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) Limits
LTP LTP LTP LTP LTP

101-600A-1 101-600A-lA 101-600A-lB 101-700A-1 101-700A-1A
PowerLevel Engine Engine Engine Engine Engine
Starting* 899°C 899°C 899°C 899°C 899°C
Transient* 843°C 843°C 843°C 843°C 843°C
Steady State
771°C 771°C 771°C 777°C 777°C

Takeoff Rating
757°C 757°C 757°C 760°C 760°C

Maximum
Continuous
Rating
NOTES
If temperature limits are exceeded, perform Hot Section Inspection. (Refer to 72-00-00,
table 7.)
*Transient and starting temperatures must not exceed 799°C for more than 12 seconds.
(a) At continuous power intallation or removal and reinstallation of the combustor

and above . . . . . . . 95 to 105 psig turbine module, gas generator module, No. 1, 2, and 3
bearings, compressor rotor assembly, gas generator turbine
NOTE rotor assembly, or power turbine rotor assembly; to com-
plete a dropped engine inspection; or when excessive en-
Oil pressure may decrease with altitude, gine vibration is suspected.
but must not be less than 70 psig at
20,000 feet. One axial vibration pickup mounted on the air diffuser
flange, and one radial pickup mounted on the accessory
(b) Ground Idle and gear box lifting bosses, transmit electrical impulses
below . . . . . . . . . 20 psig through cables to a portable vibration meter. The meter
minimum (see Figures 12 and 13) indicates the velocity of engine
movement in inches per second (average). The maximum
(5) Oil Temperature. velocity shall not exceed the limits given in table 6. The
engine is operated at speeds indicated on the Engine
(a) Maximum at all Vibration Test Data Sheet (refer to table 6) and meter
ambient velocity indications are recorded. If velocity limits are
temperatures) 99°C
. . ... exceeded, displacement columns should be completed
for that speed. Interpretation of these readings will make
(b) Minimum for possible the isolation of the systein causing any over-
operation above limit operation. If limits are exceeded, the cause of the
Ground Idle 10°C
. . . . . excessive vibration must be found and corrected before
the engine can be accepted for flight.
32. ENGINE RUNUP AND CHECK.
33. ENGINE VIBRATION TEST. An engine vibration

test using vibration kit (LTCT14664-10 or LTCT484) is
required after initial engine installation or after initial
71-00·00
22
¿PAVCD L.YCOMING DIVISION
STRATFORO, CONN, DATE Sep 15/81
NO• Rev
MANUAL CHANGE NOTKE
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 32 Rev 1 dated Dec 21/79. Please remove and
On page 22, Table 3 is reyised as shown below:
Table 3. Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) Limits
LTP LTP
101-600A-1A 101-700A-lA
Power Level Engine Engine
Starting* .
899°C 899°C
Transient* 843°C 843°C
Steady State
Takeoff Rating 782°C 782°C
Maximum 763°C 763°C

Continuous
Rating
NOTES
If temperature limits are exceeded, perform Hot Section Inspection. (Refer

to 72-00-00, table 7.)
*Transieht ænd starting temperatures must not exceed 782°C for more than
T.lA3T
12 seconds.
Also, paragraph 35, first paragraph is revised as follows:
33. ENGINE VIBRATION TEST. An engine vibration test using vibration kit
(LTCT14664-10 or LTCT484) is required after initial installation of other
than new or newly overhauled engine, after removal and reinstallation of
the combustor turbine module, gas generator module, No. 1, 2, and 3
bearings, compressor rotor assembly, gas generator turbine rotor assembly,
or power turbine rotor assembly; to complete a dropped engine inspection;
or when excessive engine vibration is suspected.
Sheet 1 of 1
APAVCD LYCOlvilNG OlVISION
DATE Jan á /82 STRATFORO CONS
50. 66 Rev 2
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 66 Rev 1 dated Jan 22/81. Please remove and discard
MCN No. 66 Rev 1.
On page 23, Table 4. is revised as follows:
Table 4. Rotational Speed Limits
LTP LTP
101-600A-1A 101-700A-1A
Ground Idle Ng* 46-48% 46-48%
Ground Idle Np** 0-1950 rpm 0-1950 rpm
Steady State
Takeoff Rating
Ng* 103.2% 102%
Np** 1950 rpm 1950 rpm
Maximum
Continuous
Rating
Ng* 101.1% 101%
TransiNp** '
,
1950 rpm 1950 rpm
Ng* 104.8% 104.8% \
Np** 2032 rpm 2032 rpm '
* Ng -
Gas generator rotational speed.
** Np -
Power output shaft rotational speed.
NOTE
If any of the rpm limits listed in this table are exceeded, per-
form an Engine Overspeed Inspection. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 8.)
Sheet 1 of 1
Table 4. Rotational Speed Limits
LTP LTP LTP LTP LTP

101-600A-1 101-600A-1A 101-600A-lB 101-700A-1 101-700A-1A
Ground Idle Ng* 46-48% 46-48% 46-48% 46-48% 46-48%
Ground Idle Np** 0-1950 rpm 0-1950 rpm 0-1950 rpm 0-1950 rpm 0-1950 rpm
Steady State
Takeoff Rating
Ng* 103.2% 103.2% 103.2% 102% 102%

i
Np** 1950 rpm 1950 rpm 1950 rpm 1950 rpm 1950 rpm
;
i
Maximum
Continuous
Rating
Ng* 101,7% 101.7% 101.7% 101% 101%
Transient
Ng* 104.8% 104.8% 104.8% 104.8% 104.8%
* Ng -
Gas generator rotational speed.
** Np -
Power output shaft rotational speed.
NOTE
If any of the rpm limits listed in this table are exceeded, perform an
Engine Overspeed Inspection. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 8.)
34. CHECKOUTAND INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION NOTE

EQUIPMENT. Checkout and installation of vibration
equipment included in kit (LTCT14664-10) is specified The following steps are required for
in following paragraphs 35 through 37. Checkout and normal use. When a malfunction is
installation of vibration equipment included in kit experienced, refer to vibration equip-
(LTCT484) is specified in following paragraphs 35 ment manual. Only channels with
through 42. wiring and pickups connected can be
adjusted.
35. ADJUSTMENT OF VIBRATION METER (LTCT
14664-10). Proceed as follows: A. Place RANGE selector to 500 position (Refer to
Figure 12)
71-00-00
23
AVCO LYCOMING OtVielON
Table 5. Torque Limits
LTP LTP LTP LTP LTP

101-600A-1 101-600A-lA 101-600A-lB 101-700A-1 101-700A-lA
Transient 687 lb.-ft. 1687 lb.-ft. 1687 lb.-ft. 1887 lb.-ft. 1887 lb.-ft.
Steady State
Takeoff Rating 1634 lb.-ft. 1634 lb.-ft. 1634 lb.-ft. 1832 lb.-ft. 1832 lb.-ft.
Maximum
Continuous 1542 lb.-ft. 1542 lb.-ft. 1542 lb.-ft. 1739 lb.-ft. 1739 lb.-ft.
NOTE
If any torque limits in this table are exceeded, perform Overtorque

Inspection. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 9.)
B. Place SELECTOR to CONT position. F. Set SENSITIVITY selector to the particular trans-
ducer sensitivity. Example: Use 5.75 millivolts per inch
C. Depress each CHANNEL SELECTOR in turn for per second. Set 5 into window and on inside
.75
channels to be used. Check that meter deflection is in vernier scale.

green band. This indicates a good circuit through
transducer. G. Using a small screwdirver in hole above CHANNEL
SELECTOR 1, adjust meter pointer to full scale.
NOTE
H. Repeat preceding steps A. through G. for all
If meter goes to full scale deflection, channels in use.
an open circuit exists in wiring or
transducer. Inspect and replace as I. Place SELECTOR to desired filter position.
required.
36. VIBRATION PICKUP (TRANSDUCER) CHECK
D. Place SELECTOR TO CALIB. position and adjust (LTCT14664-10). Proceed as follows:
calibration oscillation level with a small screwdriver, in-
serted in small hole at extreme right side below RANGE CAUTION
selector marked OSC LEVEL. Adjust until meter
pointer is at full scale position. HANDLE TRANSDUCER WITH CARE.
IF TRANSDUCER IS DROPPED, OR
NOTE STRUCK WITH FORCE, ITS ACCUR-
ACY MAY BE IMPAIRED; IT MUST
In following steps E. through G., allow THEN BE CALIBRATED BY QUALI-
5 minutes for instrument to settle before FIED PERSONNEL BEFORE USE.
adjusting.
NOTE
E. Place SELECTOR to the SENS. ADJ. position
and depress CHANNEL SELECTOR 1. Each transducer must be checked for
response to vibration before testing is
attempted.
71-00-00
24
AWWCO LYCOMING OlVISION
STWATFORD. CONNECT1CUT
DATE Jan 22 / 81
NO. $
On page 24, Table 5 is revised as follows:
Table 5. Torque Limits
LTP LTP
101-600A-1A 101-700A-1A
Transient 1687 lb.-ft. 1887 lb.-ft.
Steady State
Takeoff Rating 1634 lb.-ft. 1832 lb.-ft.
Maximum
Continuous 1542 lb.-ft. 1739 lb.-ft.
NOTE
If any torque limits in this table are exceeded,

perform Overtorque Inspection. (Refer to
72-00-00, table 9.)
Sheet [ of jg
"
-g
O
s
AVCD LPCOMING OIVISION
O $
2 5 4
O O won 4<. 5
DISPLACEMENT --
MI S PEAN TO PEAM
VELOCITY-Oi IPS AVERAGE
Emon. so rescrocom.ac couronoN
VIEAAlioN METER 1-157
sensacu
cwe o SENSITIVITY so so
SELECTOR
OOOOOOO
2
O 3 4 5 6
Dv
RANGE
OSC
LEVEL
CHANNEL SELECTOR
FRONT VIEW
EXT
... METER ALARM
tengotenrib RNilograA-Mi (DEF

lismiluisi Olm upws-i (-r
þ41ti&T
SC3PE GALVO
°°o
C NNECTED
T cit1ER
REAR VIEW
X-966-244
Figure 12. Vibration Meter (LTCTl4664-10)
71-00-00
25
JAVCO LYCOM1NG OlVISION
IN
1 f
XR-644 190
Figure 13. Vihration Meter (LTCT484)
71-00-00
© 1978, Aveo Lycoming Division
26
Table 6. Vibration Test Data Sheet
Engine Serial No. Time Since New
Last Overhaul Location Time Since Overhaul
Aircraft Type and Serial No. A/C Time
Tested By Date
Engine Passed Test -

Accepted Engine Failed Test
No. 1 Pickup (Gearbox -
Radial) No. 2 Pickup (Diffuser -

Axial)
Ng Np No 70 Hz 200 Hz No 70 Hz 200 Hz
% RPM Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter
DVDVDVDVDVDV
80 -
90 1540
90 1730
90 1924
95 1924
Max 1924
The maximum acceptable average velocity using no filter is 2.8.
The maximum acceptable average velocity using the 70 Hz filter is 1.2.
The maximum acceptable average velocity using the 200 Hz filter is 0.8 .
71-00-00
27
AVC© LYCOMING OIVISION
Table 6. Vibration Test Data Sheet ---
Continued
Disposition
Exceeds Exceeds Exceeds

Filter Out 70 Hz 200 Hz Action
Limit Filter Limit ,
Filter Limit
No No No None
Yes No No Investigate Prop or Installation
No Yes No Investigate Prop or Installation
No Yes Yes Investigate Prop, Installation or Engine
No No Yes Investigate Engine
A. Turn vibration meter switch ON. Warm up vibra-. NOTE

tion meter until temperature has stabilized (approxi-
mately 10 minutes). If indicator does not move, check condi-
tion of the transducer, connectors,
B. Connect each of the transducers, P/N 4-128, to cables, and vibration meter receptacle.
each cable (LTCT9283-02) at the disconnect plug. Interchange components until defective
unit is found. Replace defective unit or
C. Connect cables to vibration meter at proper chan- component.
nel receptacles. (Refer to figure 12.) Connect transducer
to be radially mounted in lifting boss of accessory drive J. Depress CHANNEL SELECTOR 2. Using same
gearbox to CHANNEL 1, and connect transducer to be procedures, check operation of remaining transducer.
axially mounted on air diffuser flange to CHANNEL 2. No. 2 transducer will be moved horizontally.
D. Adjust vibration meter. (Refer to paragraph 35.) 37. INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION TEST EQUIP-
MENT. (LTCTl4664-10) Proceed as follows:
E. Set SELECTOR to OUT.
A. Remove three bolts from the 10-o'clock position
F. Set white dot on inner RANGE selector to V on air diffuset flange and install bracket (LTCT23917-01).
(velocity). Secure bracket with three removed bolts.
G. Depress CHANNEL SELECTOR 1. B. Install bracket (LTCT23916-01) in lifting boss of

accessory drive gearbox.
H. Set RANGE selector to 5.
C. Using four socket-head screws, MS24677-3, attach
I. Slowly move number 1 transducer vertically by each transducer securely to each bracket to avoid any
hand while observing vibration meter. The indicator possible vibration originating at attachment point,
should jog or show a slight movement.
71-00-00
28
AVCO LYCOMNG OlVISION
CAUTION CAUTION
IN FOLLOWING STEP, LEAVE HANDLE TRANSDUCER WITH CARE.

ENOUGH SLACK IN CABLE TO IF TRANSUDCER IS DROPPED, OR
PREVENT UNNECESSARYSTRAIN STRUCK WITH FORCE ITS ACCURACY
ON PICKUPS AND CONNECTORS. MAY BE IMPAIRED. IT MUST THEN
AVOID CONDITIONS THAT WOULD BE CALIBRATED BY QÏ.JALIFIED
CAUSE CABLES TO DETERIORATE PERSONNEL BEFORE USE.
FROM HEAT OR ABRASION.
NOTE
D. Secure cables to aircraft and engine with tape or
cord. Each transducer must be checked for
response to vibration before testing is
38. FILTER INSPECTION (LTCT484). If it is not attempted,
certain that proper filters are at the proper locations,
they must be installed as follows: A. While meter is warming up, lay out two cable as-
semblies (LTCT9283-02) and two transducers (P/N 4-128)
A. Remove meter housing,
B. Connect each of the transducer (P/N 4-128) to
B. Plug 70-Hz high-pass filter (CECl-003-0070) into each cable (LTCT9283-02) at the disconnect plug.
INPUT NETWORK socket number 1.
C. Connect cables to vibration meter at proper
C. Plug 200-Hz high-pass filter (CECl-003-0200) into channel receptacles. (See figure 13.) Connect transducer
INPUT NETWORK socket number 2. to be radial y mounted in lifting boss of accessory drive
gearbox to CHANNEL 1, and connect transducer to be
D. Secure filters with screws provided. axially mounted on air diffuser flange to CHANNEL 2.
E. Install meter housing. -

D. Set INPUT NETWORK selector to OUT.
39. PRELIMINARY WARMUP(LTCT484). Proceed as E. Set OPERATION selector to V x 10.

follows:
F. Set CHANNEL selector to 1.
WARNING
G. Set RANGE selector to 5.
IN FOLLOWING STEP, TO PREVENT
POSSIBLE HAZARD TO PERSONNEL H. Slowly move number 1 transducer by hand, while
AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT, SET observing vibration meter. The indicator should jog, or
POWER SWITCH TO OFF WHILE show slight movement.
CONNECTING TO POWER SOURCE.
NOTE
A. Connect power lead to suitable source of electri-
cal power (105 to 125 volts, 50/60/400 Hertz, 30 If indicator does not move, check con-
watts). dition of transducer, connectors, cables,
and vibration meter receptacle. Interchange
B. With power switch on, allow approximately 1/2 components until defective unit is
hour for temperature to stabilize within the meter. found. Replace defective unit or com-
ponent.
40. VIBRATION PICKUP (TRANSDUCER) CHECK
(LTCT494). Proceed as follows: I. Set CHANNEL selector to 2. Using same proce-
dures, check operation of remaining transducer.
71-00-00
29
4L INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION TEST EQUIP- 42. ADJUSTMENT OF VIBRATION METER (LTCT

MENT (LTCT484). Proceed as follows: 484). Proceed as follows:
A. Remove three bolts from the 10-o'clock position A. Set OPERATION selector to C. Indicator should .
on air diffuser flange and install bracket (LTCT23917- swing toward right-hand side of scale.
01). Secure bracket with three removed bolts.
NOTE
B. Install bracket (LTCT23916-01) in lifting boss of
accessory drive gearbox. With OPERATION selector set at C,
the INPUT NETWORK selector and
C. Using four socket-head screws, MS24677-3, attach RANGE selector may be in any
each transducer securely to each bracket to avoid any position.
possible vibration originating at attachment point.
B. Set CHANNEL selector to 1.
CAUTION
C. Push in CALIBRATE SIGNAL control. Turn until
IN FOLLOWING STEP, LEAVE indication is 6.0. Read on the 0 to 15 scale.
ENOUGH SLACK IN CABLE TO
PREVENT UNNECESSARY STRAIN D. Release CALIBRATE SIGNAL control carefully
ON PICKUPS AND CONNECTORS. without turning.
AVOID CONDITIONS THAT WOULD
CAUSE CABLES TO DETERIORATE E. Open panel below CALIBRATE SIGNAL control
FROM HEAT OR ABRASION. to expose SENSITIVITY controls.
D. Secure cables to aircraft and engine with tape or F. Turn SENSITIVITY control for CHANNEL 1 to
cord. . obtain analyzer indication of 15.0.
WARNING G. Confirm proper adjustment of CHANNEL 1 by

pushing in and releasing CALIBRATE SIGNAL control,
IN FOLLOWING STEP, TO PREVENT while observing for consistent indications of 6.0 and
A POSSIBLE HAZARD TO PERSON- 15.0.
NEL AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT,
SET METER POWER SWITCH TO OFF, NOTE
WHILE BREAKING OR MAKING CON-
NECTION TO A SOURCE OF ELEC- If an indication of 15.0 cannot be ob-
TRICAL POWER. tained vibration analyzer must be recali-
brated internally by qualified personnel.
NOTE
H. Obtain indication of 15.0 for remaining channels
To prevent cooling off of vibration meter, by setting CHANNEL selector to proper number and
it must not be without a source of turning SENSITIVITY control for that channel.
power for more than a few minutes.
NOTE
E. Disconnect meter from source of power used for
preliminary warmup, and immediately connect it to Only one setting 6.0 made at CHANNEL
aircraft electrical power (105 to 125 volts, 50/60/500 1 is necessary for use with all channels.
Hertz, 30 watts).
43. CHECKS PRIOR TO MOTORING AND STARTING.
F. Secure vibration meter will bungee cord (shock Before motoring or starting engine, perform preflight in-
cord), or other suitable means, to a cushioned, pro- spection and check. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 1 and air-
tected location in aircraft cabin. frame flight manual.
G. Connect cable assemblies to proper CHANNEL

receptacles.
71-00-00
30
44. ENGINE MOTORING AND STARTING. Motor 46. POWER TRIM CHECK (TOPPING). Power trim
and start engine in accordance with instructions on check shall be performed after engine or module replace-
airframe flight manual. ment, fuel control replacement or power turbine gover-
nor replacement. (Refer to airframe flight and mainte-
45. GROUND OPERATION CHECKS. Perform engine nance manuals for topping check procedures.)
ground operation checks in accordance with instruction's
in airframe flight and maintenance manuals. 47. SHUTDOWNCHECKS. Shutdown checks shall be
performed in accordance with instructions in airframe
flight and maintenance manuals. After last flight of day,
perform daily inspection. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 2
and airframe maintenance manual.)
71-00-00

LTP10 I Mamtenance Manual
ENGINE, CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
1. EngineServicing .............. ....... . ......

72-00-00 3
2. Gearbox and Scavenge Chip Detector Elements . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 3
3. Oil Filter .......... . ... . . .........
72-00-00 3
4. Engine Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 3
5. Compressor Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 3
6. Engine Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 4
7. Scheduled Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 4
8, Special Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 6
9. Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 6
10. Overhaul Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 6
11. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 6
12. Isolating the Trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 6
13. Lubrication System Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 6
14, Removal, Disassembly, Reassembly, and Installation of Modules . . .
72-00-00 26
15. Removal of Accessory/Reduction Gearbox Module . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 26
16. Disassembly of Accessory/Reduction Gearbox Module . . . . . . .
72-00-00 27
17. Reassembly of Accessory/Reduction Gearbox Module . . . . . . .
72-00-00 29
18. Installation of Accessory/Reduction Gearbox Module . . . . . . .
72-00-00 37
19. Removal of Gas Generator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 38
20. Disassembly of Gas Generator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 39
21. Reassembly of Gas Generator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 44
22. Installation of Gas Generator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 48
23. Removal of Combustor Turbine Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 50
24. Disassembly of Combustor Turbine Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 50
25. Reassembly of Combustor Turbine Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 54
26. Installation of Combustor Turbine Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 57
27. Engine Fits and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
724)0-00 57
28. Consumable Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 57
Chapter/Section
Figure Subject Page
. 1. Removal/Installation of Accessory/Reduction Gearbox Module . . . .

72-00-00 5
2. Accessory/Reduction Gearbox Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 10
3. Measuring From Tip of Torquemeter Valve Assembly Plunger to
Seating Surface ...............................
72-00-00 32
4. Gap Determination and Spacer Selection for Customer Drive Pad . .
72-00-00 35
5. Gap Determination and Spacer Selection for Gearbox Mounting
Posts ......................... . . .......
72-00-00 36
6. Removal/Installation of Gas Generator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 40
72-00-00
1
A7AVCO LYCOMING OlVISION
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
Chapter/Section
Figure Subject Page
7. GasGeneratorModule ............................
72-00-00 42
8. Adjustment of Lever and Scribing of Open and Closed Marks on
InletHousingAssembly................ .........
72-00-00 . 45
9. Bearing Axial Clearance Location and Shim Thickness Ranges . . . .
72-00-00 46 .
10. Checking Engine C-Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 47
11. Measuring Stretch of Compressor Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 49
12. Removal/Installation of Combustor Turbine Module . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 51
13. Gas Generator Turbine Disc Cover Fabrication -
. . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 52
14. Combustor Turbine Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 53
15. Determining No. 3 Bearing Pinch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 56
16. Engine Fits and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 59
LIST OF TABLES
Chapter/Section
Table Subject Page
1. Preflight Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

72-00-00 6
2. Daily Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 7
3. Periodic (100-Hour) Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 7
4. Periodic (600-Hour) Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-004)0 8
5. Periodic (1200-Hour) Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 8
6. Accessory/Reduction Gearbox (1200-Hour) Inspection Require-
ments ................ . . .. ... ........
72-00-00 9
7. Hot-Section Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 15
8. Overspeed Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 16
9. Overtorque Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 16
10. Excessive-G Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 17
11. Sudden Stoppage Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 17
12. Engine Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 18
13. Lubrication System Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 25
14. Engine Fits and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 58
15. Consumable Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-00-00 60
72-00-00
2 © 1978, Avco Lvcomine Division

..::¾/CD LYCOMING DivisicN
STRATPomm. CUNNBCTICUT
DATE Sep 26/80
NO.

INSERT.THIS PAGE Facing page 3, 72-00-00
On page 3, paragraph 5, step B. (1) is revised and step (1A) is added as

follows:
(1) Disconnect tube assembly (Refer to 73-10-1, 1, figure 1)

from tenperature canpensator at temperature compensator. Cap tube assembly.
(1A) Loosen both "B" nuts on tube assembly. (Refer to 75-30-01,

1, figure 1) between air diffuser and air flow modulator actuator (8).
Disconnect tube at air diffuser. Cap diffuser port.
Sheet )[ of L
JAVCO L.YCOMING OIVISION
ENGINE, CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
1. ENGINE SERVICING. NOTE

2°C
2. GEARBOX AND SCAVENGE CHIP DETECTOR At ambient temperature below
(35°F),
ELEMENTS. Proceed as follows: use anti-detonation injection
fluid (table 15, item 4) or 40 per-
A. Remove chip detector elements (Refer to 77-30- cent methanol (table 15, item 25)
00, paragraphs 4 and 5). and 60 percent water mixture in
place of fresh water. This will pre-
B. Inspect for metallic chips. If chips are noted, per- vent freezing.
form lubrication system contamination troubleshooting.
(Refer to 72-00-00, paragraph 13.) Clean and perform (2) Remove salt deposits by using only clean,
continuity check. No continuity should exist. fresh water for all steps of this procedure.
C. Install chip detector elements (Refer to 77-30-00, (3) Remove CB fire extinguishing agent by blow-
paragraphs 9 and 10). ing clean with compressed air and washing with solvent
(table 15, item 13). Do not use water-rinse step of pro-
3. OIL FILTER. Proceed as follows: cedure.
A. If bypass button is extended, or if other condi- (4) Ensure airframe inlet ducts, filters, and
tions warrant, remove oil filter. (Refer to 79-20-03, screens are clean and engine is cooled to ambient tem-
paragraph 3). perature. (Minimum of 45 minutes since shutdown.)
Remove airframe components to gain access.
B. Inspect for contamination and presence of chips.
If chips are noted, perform lubrication system contam- (5) To avoid drain on aircraft battery use aux-
ination troubleshooting. (Refer to 72-00-00, paragraph iliary power unit, if available.
13.)
B. Cleaning.
C. Install new oil filter. (Refer to 79-20-03, para-
graph 7.) (1) Disconnect and plug tube assemblies (Refer
to 73-10-01, 1, 2, 3, and 4, figure 1) at temperature
4. ENGINE CLEANING. compensator P3 inlet and at airflow modulator actuator
P3 fitting. Disconnect and plug customer air-bleed. Dis-
In addition to compressor cleaning instructions given connect and cap Py line from fuel control to propeller
here, instructions for cleaning specific components are governor.
given in applicable Chapter/Sections. General cleaning
procedures are described in 70-00-00. NOTE
5. COMPRESSOR CLEANING. Proceed as follows: If water-soluble cleaner is not effec-

tive, substitute approximately one-
A. General. half gallon of cleaning solvent (72-
00-00, table 15, item 13), or equi-
(1) Remove oil and dirt, usitig cleaning solution valent, in following step (2).
of one part cleaning agent (table 15, item 8) or one
part cleaning agent (table 15, item 9) to four parts of
clean, fresh water.
72-00-00
3
(2) Using equipment which delivers liquid in the C. Daily water-rinse compressor to remove salt depo-
form of a spray at the rate of two to three gallons per sits.
minute, introduce liquid cleaner into compressor inlet
for approximately 5 seconds before motoring engine NOTE
and while motoring engine.
All air lines may be left connected dur-
(3) Motor engine for 15 seconds. (Refer to 71- ing the following procedure.
00-00, paragraph 44).
(1) Using equipment which delivers liquid in the
(4) Allow compressor to coast to a stop. form of a spray at the rate of 2 to 3 gallons per min-
ute, introduce water into compressor inlet for approxi-
(5) Allow 30 seconds for starter to cool down. mately 5 seconds before motoring and while motoring
engine.
(6) Repeat preceding steps (2), (3), (4), and (5)
and allow sufficient time for cleaner to act. (2) Motor engine for 30 seconds. (Refer to 71-
(7) Allow engine to drain completely (approxi-
mately 15 minutes). Ensure combustion chamber drain (3) Allow starter to cool for 30 seconds.
valve is not clogged.
(4) Repeat preceding steps (2) and (3) until clear
(8) Motor engine for 30 seconds while spraying water runs from the exhaust and combustion-chamber
water at the rate of 2 to 3 gallons per minute into the drain valve. Do not exceed the starter duty cycle.
compressor inlet.
6. ENGINE INSPECTION.
(9) Allow 30 seconds for starter to cool down.
In addition to the engine inspection requirements given
(10) Repeat steps (8) and (9) until clear water here, specific instructions for inspecting engine compon-
runs from exhaust and combustion chamber drain valve ents are given in applicable Chapter/Section. General in-
(Refer to 73-10-01, 13, figure 1). Do not exceed start- spection procedures are described in 70-00-00.
er duty-cycle.
7. SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS. Scheduled inspections
(11) Remove plugs from tube assemblies (1, 2, 3, are to be performed at prescribed intervals:
and 4) and blow out (toward air diffuser) with clean,
dry air. Reconnect tube assemblies, customer air-bleed, Preflight: Prior to the first flight of the
and Py line. day.
Daily: Subsequent to the last flight of

CAUTION the day.
CLEANING SOLVENT (72-00-00, TA- Periodic (100-Hour): At intervals of 100-engine oper-

BLE 15, ITEM 13) IS FLAMMABLE. ating hours.
ENSURE ENGINE AND ENGINE COM-
Periodic (600-Hour): At intervals of 600-engine oper-
PARTMENT ARE DRAINED BEFORE
STARTING. ENSURE DRAIN HOLES ating hours.
ARE NOT CLOGGED. Periodic (1200-Hour): At intervals of 1200-engine op-
erating hours.
(12) Allow engine to drain completely (approxi-
mately 15 minutes) before starting. Ensure combustion- Hot Section: At intervals of 600-engine oper-
chamber drain valve (Refer to 73-10-01, 13, figure 1) is ating hours.
not clogged.
Accessory/Reduction At intervals of 1200-engine op-
Gearbox: (Refer to erating hours.
1, figure 1.)
72-00-00
4 © 1978. Avco Lvcomine Division

sTWATwomo, coNNacTicui DATE Jun 10/81
NO. 58Rev

TRIS CHANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
This MUN supersedes MCN No. 58 Rev 1 dated Sep 26/80. Please remove and
On page 4, paragraph 5, step 3. (11) is revised as follows:
(11) Remove caps from tube assembly (1) and air diffuser port
and blow out (toward air diffuser) with clean, dry air. Reconnect tube
assemblies.
NOTE following step C. is deleted and steps C. (Al) and (5) are added as
follows:
(Al) Disconnect tube assembly (Refer to 73-10-01, 1, figure 1)

-from
temperature compensator. Cap fitting on temperature compensator and
disconnected end of tube assembly.
(5) Remove caps from tube assembly and temperature compensator

fitting. Reconnect tube assembly to temperature compensator.
Also, paragraph 7, 300-hour periodic inspection interval is added between the

100-hour and 600-hour periodic inspections as follows:
Periodic (300-Hour) At intervals of 300-engine

operating hours.
Sheet 1 of 1
.dPAVCO LYCOMING OlVISION
4 10 9
13
LEGEND
RLBUE
X-1053101
1. Accessory/Reduction Gearbox 7. Washer

Module 8. Nut
2. Engine Data Plate 9. Combustor Turbine Module
3. Packing 10. Gas Generator Module
4. Packing 11. Lower Radial Inlet Panel
5. Upper Radial Inlet Panel 12. Nut
6. Bolt 13. Radial Inlet Assembly
Figure 1. Removal/Installation of Accessory/Reduction Gearbox Module
72-00-00
5
8. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS. Special inspections are re- the engine. Check each possible source of trouble until
quired when certain engine operating parameters have the trouble has been isolated by a process of elimina-
been exceeded, when an abnormal condition exists, or tion. Refer to table 12 and applicable paragraphs for
when deemed necessary: corrective action.
Hot-Section In- When overtemperature limits 13. LUBRICATION SYSTEM CONTAMINATION.

spection: listed in 71-00-00, table 3,
are exceeded. A. Before proceeding with the cleaning of the oil sys-
tem and the rerunning of the engine, check for possible
Overspeed In- When Ng or Np limits listed sources of contamination (Refer to table 13) and repair
spection: in 71-00-00, table 4, are ex- engine/module as required. If an excessive amount of
ceeded. chips is found on the main engine oil-filter element (Re-
fer to 79-20-03, 9, figure 1) or chip detector element
Overtorque In- When engine torque limits (Refer to 77-30-01, 3, figure 1) proceed as follows:
spection: listed in 71-00-00, table 5,
are exceeded. (1) Remove chips from main oil filter element
and retain for identification. Install new filter element.
Excessive G In- When G-force limits are ex- (Refer to 74-20-03.)
spection: ceeded.
(2) Drain all oil from accessory/reduction gear-
Sudden Stoppage When propeller contact with box and engine oil tank.
Inspection: obstacles occurs.
(3) Remove chips, if any, from gearbox or oil
9. INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS. Refer to following scavenge line (if installed), chip detector elements and
tables 1 through 11, for specific requirements. retain for identification. Flush gearbox by introducing
solvent (table 15, item 13) through vent fitting in top
10. OVERHAUL REQUIREMENTS. Refer to applicable of gearbox; clean chip detector element and reinstall.
ServiceBulletins. (Refer to 77-30-01.)
11. TROUBLESHOOTING. (4) Inspect No. 2 and 3 bearing scavenge line for
chips. If chips are noted, retain for identification.
12. ISOLATING THE TROUBLE. It is essential to have
information of previous trouble and work performed on
Table 1. Preflight Inspection Requirements
INSPECTION ITEM
Check oil tank for proper servicing.

Remove engine inlet/exhaust covers.
Check engine inlet and exhaust areas for foreign matter and damage.
Visually inspect engine area for evidence of leakage.
Check cowling fasteners for security.
Manually rotate propeller to ensure there is freedom of movement of the Np gear train.
72-00-00
6 e ion Aven Lvenmino nivision

APAVCO LYCOIVIING DIVISION
STRATFORD, CONN,
DATE Jan 6/82
NO. 36 Rev 2
LNSERT THIS PAGE Facing page 6, 72-00-00
This MON supersedes MCN No. 36 Rev 1 dated Nov 11/80. Please remove and
discard MON No. 36 Rev 1.
On page 6, paragraph 8, first item is revised as follows:
Hot-Section Inspection When overtemperature limits listed

in 71-00-00, table 3, are exceed-
ed, and, at special usage fuel
limit specified in 71-00-00, para-
graph 27.
Table 1, after first paragraph, NOTE is added as follows:
NOTE
Lubricating oil may drain from the reservoir into the

engine if engine has been idle for more than a few days.
If oil level is low, do not service reservoir until engine
has been run or until accessory gearbox has been drained
of this accumulation of oil.
Table 1, after third paragraph, NOTE is added as follows:
NOTE
Fuel pump assembly seal leakage is evident by the

presence of blue grease at the fuel pump to fuel
control interface. If leakage is evident, replace
-fuel control and pump assembly.
Sheet ). of ).
APAVCO LYCOfVIING DIVISION
STRATFORD, CONN,
DATE Jan 6/82
NO. 37 Rev 4
This MON supersedes MUN No, 37 Rev 3 dated Jun 10/81. Please remove and
On page 7, Table 2, after first paragraph, NOTE is added as follows:
NOTE
Lubricating oil may drain from the reservoir into the en-
gine if engine has been idle for more than a few days. If
oil level is low, do not service reservoir until engine
has been run or until accessory gearbox has been drained
of this accumulation of oil.
Table 2, after fifth paragraph, NOTE is added as follows:
NOTE
Fuel pump assembly seal leakage is evident by the

presence of blue grease at the fuel pump to fuel
control interface. If leakage is evident, replaces
fuel control and pump assembly.
Table 3, CAUTION and paragraph preceding first paragraph are added as follows:
CAUTION
When removing fittings from fuel control, ensure

surfaces are clean. Do not allow foreign matter
to enter control ports.
Disconnect pneumatic lines from fuel control. Remove pneumatic line fit-
tings from control. Visually inspect interior surfaces (threads included)
of ports for corrosion. If any evidence of corrosion exists, replace af-
fected component. Reinstall fittings and lines. (Refer to 72-20-01.)
Also, paragraph following Visually inspect impending-bypass indicator

paragraph is added as follows:
Inspect mul lubricate the male and female drive splines of starter
and customer accessory, using spline lubricant (72-00-00, table 15,
item 29).
Sheet J. of ).
AVCO LYCOMING OlvlSION
Table 2. Daily Inspection Requirements
INSPECTION ITEM
Check oil tank for proper servicing.
Check engine inlet duct for evidence of foreign matter entry and damage.
Check wiring, fuel, oil, and air tubing, and manifolds for leakage, chafing, and security.
Visually inspect impending-bypass indicator on oil filter for indication (button extended). If button is extended,
remove and inspect oil filter. Reset indicator. Install new filter, perform lubrication system contamination trouble-
shooting procedure if contaminated. (Refer to 72-00-00, paragraph 13.)
Visually inspect engine and accessories for leakage, cracks, damage, and security of mounting.
Visually inspect exterior of combustor turbine and tailpipe for cracks, hot spots, and buckled areas.
Check power-turbine rotor and interior of tailpipe for damage.
Visually inspect fuel manifold and flow divider for leakage, damage, and security of mounting.
Check engine (and scavenge, if installed), chip detector elements for continuity or remove, inspect, and clean or
replace elements.
Manually rotate propeller to ensure that there is freedom of movement of the Np gear train.
Table 3. Periodic (100-Hour) Inspection Requirements
INSPECTION ITEM
Check wiring, fuel, oil, and air tubing for leakage, chafing, and security.
Visually inspect engine and accessories for leakage, cracks, damage, and security of mounting.
Visually inspect exterior of combustor turbine and tailpipe for oracks, hot spots, and buckled areas.
Visually inspect fuel manifold and flow divider for leakage, damage, and security of mounting.
Visually inspect power-turbine blades and nozzle for cracks, FOD, and burning.
Visually inspect compressor blades for FOD and cracks by looking through inlet with an inspection mirror and
strong light.
Check engine (and scavenge, if installed), chip detector elements for continuity or remove, inspect, and clean
elements.
remove and inspect oil filter. Perform lubrication system contamination troubleshooting procedure if contamin-
ated. (Refer to 72-00-00, paragraph 13.) Reset indicator and install new filter.
72-00-00
7
Table 3. Periodic (100-Hour) Inspection Requirements -

(Continued)
INSPECTIONITEM
Manually rotate propeller to ensure there is freedom of movement of the Np gear train.
Perform MGT thermocouple resistance check. (Refer to 77-20-02, paragraph 7.)
Perform oil-analysis check (acidity/viscosity) or drain oil, remove and inspect oil filter, and service with new oil.
(Refer to 71-00-00, paragraph 28).
Check logbook to determine the status of time and cycle life limited engine components.
Check all control linkage for freedom of movement of rod and bearings.
INSPECTION ITEM
Inspect and lubricate the male and female drive splines of the fuel control, starter, and customer accessory us-
ing spline lubricant (72-00-00, table 15, item 29).
Perform operational check of airflow modulator actuator. (Refer to 75-30-02, paragraph 6.)
INSPECTION ITEM
Perform accessory/reduction gearbox inspection. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 6.)
Disconnect and flush fuel control, propeller governor, and airflow modulation P3 air lines with cleaning solvent
(72-00-00, table 15, item 13). Blow dry with compressed air.
NOTE
Ensure cleaning solvent does not enter accessories.
72-00-00

«dBWCO LYCOMING OlVIsiCN
STRATFONO, CONNECTICUT
DATE Jun 10 / 8 1
NO. 59 Rev
This McN supersedes MCN No. 59 Rev 1 dated Mar 24/81. Please remove and
On page 8, Table 3, paragraph to perform MGT thermocouple resistance check is

deleted.
Paragraph to Perform oil-analysis check is revised as follows:
Perform oil-analysis check or drain oil, remove and replace oil filter,
and service with new oil. (Refer to 71-00-00, paragraph 28.)
Table 3A is added as follows: -
Table 3A. Periodic (300-Rour) Inspection Requirements
INSPECTION ITEM
Inspect and lubricate the fuel pump (P/N 4-301-103) drive

shaft and coupling (Refer to 73-20-01, paragraphs 3,4,5,
and 7).
Table 4, first paragraph is revised as follows:
Inspect and lubricate the male and female splines of the fuel
control, using spline lubricant (72-00-00, table 15, item 29).
Also, Table 5, second paragraph is revised as follows:
Disconnect and flush P3 air lines for the fuel control, propeller gover-
nor, and airflow modulation with cleaning solvent (72-00-00, table 15,
item 13). Blow dry with compressed air.
The technical aspects of this MEN were approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of 1
Table 6. Accessory/Reduction Gearbox (1200-Hour) Inspection Requirements
INSPECTION ITEM
Remove cover assembly from accessory/reduction gegrbox and remove carrier assembly. (Refer to 72-00-00, para-
graph 16.)
NOTE
Do not clean parts prior to inspection
Inspect all parts for nicks, burrs, and scratches.
Inspect all threaded parts for damaged threads.
Inspect all parts for cracks, distortion, and excessive or abnormal wear.
Inspect case and cover for damaged screw thread inserts.
Visually inspect bearings (without the aid of a magnifying glass) for the following:
a. General condition
b. Surface defects
c. Foreign matter
d. Discoloration due to overheating
Visually inspect internal and external splines for wear, fretting, and corrosion. Inspect all gear teeth for damage
and excessive or irregular wear.
NOTE
In order to gain access to inspect the power train heli-

cal gear (Refer to 72-00-00, 76, figure 2), the starter
gear assembly (153) must be removed from the case
assembly. Do not disassemble the carrier assembly or
remove ring gear (56) to perform the visual inspection
of the gears. Rotate gears to ensure complete inspec-
tion of all teeth. Use a strong light during inspection.
Inspect all gears for discoloration due to overheating.
CAUTION
IF A CARRIER ASSEMBLY PLANET GEAR OR POW-

ER TRAIN HELICAL GEAR (29) IS FOUND UNAC-
CEPTABLE BECAUSE OF A SURFACE CONDITION,
THE CARRIER ASSEMBLY AND POWER TRAIN HE-
LICAL GEAR MUST BE REPLACED.
72-00-00
9
30
26 27
225
18
6
16 15
LEGEND
IN LBS.
FT. LBS.
12 11
7 8 10 -
X 1053 102
Figure 2. Accessory/Reduction Gearbox Module (Sheet 1 of 4)
72-00-00

..:FAVCO LYCOMING OlVISION DATE Jan 7/80
STRATFORD. CONNECTICUT
NO. 51

On page 10, Figure 2. (Sheet 1 of is revised as shown on sheet 2.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Jan 7/80
10 52
28 27 30 30
18 15
LEGEND
N. ess,
T. LBS.
Gasta
Sheet 2 of 2
JACO LYCOMING DIVISION
STWATFomo. CONNacTimuT DATE Nov 10/80
NO.

THIS CHANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual .
INSERT THIS PAGE .

Preceding page 11, 72-00-00
On page 11, Figure 2. (sheet 2) is revised as shown on sheet 2.
FEB9
TELEDYNE
NEOSHO
Sheet 1 of 2
DÀTE Nov 10/80
10. 9
61
50 37 36 35 34
44
47
te 2 •
41 # 39 38
Acce*Bory/Red
et
earbo
dole
(Shee
2 °
4) "'¾
Sheet 2 of 2
AVC© LYCOMING OlVISION
LTPIOI Maintenance Manual
61
BO
55
53
51
52
38
39
41
72-00-00
11
123 67
g
82
119
117 118
114
83
gg 100
92
73 72 .
91 75 74
76
X-1053-104
72-00-00

\¾
t
\
STÀATFOAOL CONNECTICUT
DATE Jan 31/79
NO.

THIS CHANGEAPPLIES TO• LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
On page 13, figur d as shown
Sheet 1 of 1
178
170 169
147
141 140
14
131 130
osios
72-00-00
13
Key to Figure 2.
1. Packing 51. Packing 100. Roller Bearing 136. Spur Gear

2. Union 52. Gearbox Cover Assembly 101. Retaining Ring 137. Ball Bearing
3. Packing 53. Packing 102. Packing 138. Spur Gear Assembly
4. Spacer 54. Packing 103. Retaining Ring 139. Nut
5. Packing 55. Retaining Ring 104. Torquemeter Valve 140. Locking Cup
6. Chip Detector 56. Ring Gear Assembly 141. Ball Bearing
7. Washer 57. Bushing 105. Packing 142. Helical Gear
8. Nut 58. Packing 106. Packing 143. Disc
9. Seal 59. Oil Transfer Tube 107. Retaining Ring 144. Woodruff Key
10. Ng Speed Pickup 60. Packing 108. Roller Bearing 145. Spur Gear
11. Key Washer 61. Carrier Assembly 109. Retaining Ring 146. Roller Bearing
12. Packing 62. Bumper Gear 110. Woodruff Key 147. Helical Gear Assembly
13. Seal 63. Packing 111. Ring Seal 148. Wave Washer
14. Fire Shield Assembly 64. Gear Retainer 112: Packing 149. Ball Bearing
15. Fire Shield Plate 65. Retaining Ring 113. Gearbox Case 150. Plug
16. Bolt 66. Roller Bearing Assembly 151. Starter Gear
17. Np Speed Pickup 67. Bumper 114. Support Assembly 152. Ball Bearing
18. Key Washer 68. Retaining Ring 115. Washer 153. Starter Gear Assembly
19. Packing 69. Spur Gear . 116. Bolt 154. Roller Bearing
20. Bolt 70. Locking Cup 117. Nut 155. Idler Gear
21. Elbow 71. Nut 118. Locking Cup 156. Ball Bearing
22. Nut 72. Retaining Ring 119. Ring Seal 157. Idler Gear Assembly
23. Packing 73. Roller Bearing 120. Torquemeter Piston 158. Wave Washer
24. Nipple 74. Packing 121. Ball Bearing 159. Ball Bearing
25. Packing 75. Retaining Ring 122. Retaining Ring 160. Accessory Gear
26. Nipple 76. Power Train Gear 123. Torquemeter Gear 161. Ball Bearing
27. Packing 77. Packing Assembly 162. Accessory Gear Assem-
28. Gasket 78. Retaining Ring 124. Accessory Gear bly
29. Helical Gear 79. Retaining Ring Assembly 163. Wave Washer
30. Packing 80. Packing 125. Bearing 164. Ball Bearing
31. Washer 81. Key Washer 126. Accessory Gear 165. Idler Gear
32. Bolt 82. Oil Baffle Screen 127. Bearing 166. Pin
33. Bolt 83. Ball Bearing 128. Wave Washer 167. Ball Bearing
34. Nut 84. Spur Gear 129. Wave Washer (all 168. Idler Gear Assembly
35. Locking Cup 85. Roller Bearing .engine models ex- 169. Seal
36. Retainer 86. Washer cept LTP101-600 170. Wave Washer
37. Ball Bearing 87. Bolt A-Al and 101- 171. Ball Bearing
38. Roller Bearing 88. Packing 700A-lA) 172. Accessory Spur Gear
39. Seal 89. Packing 130. Ball Bearing 173. Ball Bearing
40. Packing 90. Packing 131. Spur Gear 174. Accessory Spur Gear
41. Seal Housing 91. Oil Transfer Tube 132. Spur Gear Assembly Assembly
42. Bolt Assembly 133. Ball Bearing (all en- 175. Ball Bearing
43. Shaft Assembly 92. Power Pinion Cover gine models except 176. Accessory Gear
44. Pin 93. Washer LTP101-600A-lA 177. Ball Bearing
45. Sleeve 94. Bolt and 101-700A-1A; 178. Wave Washer
46. Packing 95. Bolt rollerbearing for 179. Accessory Gear Assem-
47. Bumper Sleeve 96. Bolt LTP101-600A-1A bly
48. Retaining Ring 97. Power Pinion Bumper and 101-700A-1A) 180. Module Identification
49. Ring Gear Nut 98. Shim 134. Wave Washer Plate
50. Spacer 99. Packing 135. Ball Bearing 181. Spacer (for LTP101-
600A-1A and 101-
700A-lA engine models)
72-00-00
14
M LYCOMING DIVISION
STWATPOM©. CONNECTICtJT
DATE thyv 10/80
NO. Rev

. INSERT THIS PAGE Facing page 14, 72-00-00
MCN No. 11 Rev 1.
On page 14, Key to Figure 2, item 129. is deleted. Items 30A. and 180A. are
added and items 133. and 181. are revised as follows:
30A. Packing
133. Roller Bearing
180A.Torque Calibration Plate
181. Spacer
\
FEB9
TELEDYNE
Sheet 1 of 1
e
4.
DATE Mar 24|81 STAATFORD, CONNECTICUT
NO. 90Rev 1

INSERT TKIS PAGE Facing page 15, 72-00-00
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 90 dated Feb 3/81. Please remove and discard MCN
No. 90.
On page 15, Table 7, after Remove combustion chamber liner paragraph, the
following paragraph is added:
Perform fluorescent-penetrant inspection (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph

19A) of power turbine rotor assembly blades for defects noted in 72-50-00.
Also, Perform MGT thermocouple resistance check paragraph is revised as

follows:
Perform MGT thermocouple continuity check. (Refer t:o 77-20-02, paragraph

7.)
Sheet 1 of 1
Table 7. Hot-Section Inspection Requirements
INSPECTION ITEM
NOTE
If overtemperature limits (Refer to 71-00-00, table 3) are

exceeded, troubleshoot to determine and correct cause,
prior to performing the following inspection.
Remove tailpipe.
Install V-band coupling and ensure power turbine nozzle is fully seated.
Measure power turbine blade tip clearance (0.010inch minimum).
Remove combustor turbine module. (Refer to 72-00-00, paragraph 23.)
Remove combustion chamber liner. (Refer to 72-00-00, paragraph 24.)
Check gas-generator turbine blades and cylinder for evidence of rubs. Light rub indications are acceptable. Heavier
rubs, indicated by obvious metal displacement and rollover, are unacceptable.
Inspect all components visible for cracks, rubs, and security of mounting. Inspect leading edges of gas-generator
nozzle vanes using mirror and flashlight.
NOTE
If internal engine damage is suspected, disassemble engine

as required.
If inspection reveals excessive damage, clogging, or deposits, or if limits cannot be met, repair or replace appro-
priate modules.
Perform MGT thermocouple resistance check. (Refer to 77-20-02, paragraph 7.)
Reassemble engine and perform test flight.
NOTE
When installing tailpipe, ensure V-band coupling does not

contact any part of engine which would prevent complete
seating.
CAUTION
OPERATION OF THIS ENGINE WITHOUT THE TAIL-

PIPE PROPERLY SECURED BY THE V-BAND COUP-
LING WILL ALLOW THE POWER TURBINE NOZZLE
TO MOVE AFT INTO THE POWER TURBINE ROTOR
CAUSING SEVERE DAMAGE TO THE ENGINE.
72-00-00
15
Table 8. Overspeed Inspection Requirements
INSPECTION ITEM
If maximum steady state Ng or Np limits are exceeded, (Refer to 71-00-00, table 4), correct cause of overspeed
and perform test-flight check.
If maximum transient Ng limit is exceeded, complete engine must be overhauled.
If maximum transient Np limit is exceeded, no more than 2112 rpm, and power turbine blade tip clearance is
within limits, remove power turbine rotor assembly and inspect dise and blades for cracks using the fluorescent-
penetrant method. Do not allow inspection materials to enter shaft.
If maximum transient Np limit is exceeded, more than 2112 rpm, or if blade tip clearance is not within limits,
replace the power turbine rotor assembly. Return propeller governor and propeller overspeed governor to an ap-
proved overhaul facility for overhaul.
Table 9. Overtorque Inspection Requirements
INSPECTION ITEM
Manually rotate propeller and listen for unusual noises.
Check engine and mounts for cracks and distortion.
Check engine (and scavenge, if installed), chip detector elements for continuity or remove, inspect, and clean
chip detector elements.
.Visually inspect impending-bypass indicator on oil filter for indication (button extended). If button is extended,
ated. (Refer to 72-00-00, paragraph 13.) Reset indicator and install new filter.
Correct cause for overtorque. At maximum continuous power, operate engine for 5 minutes. Check chip detector
elements for continuity or remove, inspect, and clean chip detector elements. Visually inspect impending-bypass
indicator on oil filter for indication (button extended). If button is extended, remove and inspect oil filter. Per-
form lubrication system contamination troubleshooting procedures if contaminated, as outlined in paragraph 13.
Reset indicator and install new filter.
Repeat preceding step, increasing engine operating time to 10 minutes. Perform engine-vibration check during this
run.(Refer to 71-00-00, paragraphs 32 through 45).
Perform test flight. Check chip detectors for continuity or remove, inspect, and clean chip detector elements.
ated as outlined in 72-00-00, paragraph 13. Reset indicator and install new filter. If no accumulation of metal
or foreign matter is noted, engine may be released for normal operation.
72-00-00
16 Ca 107R Aven Lvcomimr Division

JAVCD LYCOMING DIVISION
sTRATFORD. CONNECTICUT
DATE J un 2 3 / 8 0
NO.

INSERT THIS PAGE Yacing page 16, 72-00-00
On page 16, Table 8, third paragraph is revised as. follows:
If maximum transient Np limit is exceeded no more than 2112 rpm and

power turbine blade tip clearance is within limits, clean and inspect
blades and rear face of.disc for cracks using the dye-penetrant
method.
Sheet 1 of 1
a *
4 i
%s
STRATFQAD.CONNECTICUT
DATE Jan 15/79
NO. 5
On page 17, Table 11 is revised as follows:
Table 11. Sudden Stoppage Inspection Requirements
INSPECTION ITEK
NOTE
Sudden stoppage is defined as the shock felt by the drive

system the aircraft
when propeller comes in contact with
the ground, water, trees, or other obstacles that would
cause damage requiring propeller change.
CAUTION
Failure to comply with the foilowing inspections may affect

airworthiness.
If sudden stoppage occurred at Ng of 70% or less, disassemble accessory/

reduction gearbox module as required to remove ring gear (Refer to 72-00-00,
56, figure 2). Forward ring gear to an Avco Lycoming approved overhaul
facility for crack inspection by magnetic-particle inspection method.
If sudden stoppage occurred at Ng above 70%, remove engine and forward to an

Avco Lycoming approved overhaul facility for inspection.
The technical aspects of this MCN were approved by FAA per Arco Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of 1
Table 10. Excessive G-Inspection Requirements
INSPECTION ITEM
Inspect engine and mounts for cracks and distortion.
Inspect engine accessories for cracks and security of mounting.
Check gas producer for rubs and unusual noises by motoring engine. Check power turbine for rubs and unusual
noises by turning propeller by hand.
Operate engine 10 minutes at ground idle and 2 minutes at maximum continuous power. Perform eilgine-vibra-
tion check during this run. (Refer to 71-00-00, paragraphs 32 through 45).
Check engine (and scavenge, if installed), chip detector elements for continuity or remove, inspect, and clean chip
detector elements.
If no accumulation of metal or foreign matter is observed, engine may be released for normal operation.
remove and inspect oil filter. Perform lubrication system contamination troubleshooting procedure (Refer to 72-
00-00, paragraph 13), if contaminated, reset indicator and install new filter.
Perform test flight.
Table 11. Sudden Stoppage Inspection Requirements
INSPECTION ITEM
NOTE
Sudden stoppage is defined as the shock felt by the drive

system when the aircraft propeller comes in contact with
the ground, water, trees, or other obstacles that would
cause damage requiring propeller change.
Remove engine and forward to designated overhaul facility for inspection. Failure to do so may affect airworthi-
ness.
72-00-00
17
Table 12. Engine Troubleshooting
Trouble Probable Cause Corrective Action
1. Starter does not turn en- 1. Faulty aircraft system or low l. Refer to airframe maintenance manual
gine or engine maximum battery. for system troubleshooting.
cranking speed is below
17 percent Ng. 2. Starter failure. 2. Refer to airframe maintenance manual
for starter troubleshooting.
3. Gas-generator rotor hard to rotate 3. Listen for rub. Light intermittent rubs
are acceptable.
4. Accessoriesbinding. 4. Check driven accessories by removing.
5. Icing condition 5. Check for icing when weather condi-

tions are conducive to it. Direct hot
air into inlet to de-ice.
6. Foreign object damage or com- 6. Investigate. Light rubs are acceptable.

pressor rubbing on housing
7. Gas-generator turbine rotor rubs 7. Remove combustor turbine (Refer to

72-00-00, paragraph 24) and inspect.
2. No combustion during 1. Faulty aircraft electrical system. 1. Refer to airframe maintenance manual
start attempt. No snap- No voltage or low voltage to the for electrical system troubleshooting.
ping sound heard when ignition unit.
starter is energized.
Spark plugs not firing. NOTE
Fourteen volts shall be the
minimum when cranking.
2. Faulty igniter plug. 2. Disconnect leads from igniter plugs. In-

stall serviceable igniter plugs on leads
(Refer to 74-20-02 and 74-20-03).Tape
igniter plugs to combustor housing.
Energize ignition system and check for
spark. If spark is evident, old plug was
faulty. Replace plug.
3. Faulty ignition unit. 3. Replace ignition unit if sufficient volt-

age is supplied and plugs still do not
fire. (Refer to 74-10-00).
4. Faulty ignition cable. 4. If corrective action in preceding steps

2. and 3. under Probable Cause does
not result in spark, replace igniter lead.
(Refer to 74-20-02).
72-00-00
18
© 1978. Avco Lvcomine Division
¿PAVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
STRATFORD, CONN.
DATE Dec 10/81
ND. 105
On page 18, Table 12, Trouble 1, Probable Cause and Corrective Action step 3.
is revised as follows:
3. Compressor/gas generator 3. Listen for rub. Light, inter-

rotor hard to rotate, mittent tip rubs acceptable
on gas generator rotor. Tip
rubs not acceptable on axial
compressor rotor; replace
compressor rotor assembly.
The technical aspects of this HCN were approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming DER,
Sheet 1 of 1
STRATPCAD,CONNECTICUT
DATE Jul 17/81
NO. $$ Rev

THIS CKANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 38 Rev 1 dated Feb 12/81. Please remove and
discard MCN No, 38 Rev 1.
On page 19, Table 12., Trouble 3., Corrective Action step 4. is revised as
follows:
4. Perform the following:
a. Check for airbound or

clogged lines,
b. Prime fuel control:
(1) Disconnect fuel line

at discharge port of
fuel control and
route a temporary
line to container
having capacity of
at least one gallon.
(2) Disconnect 28 vde to

ignition unit.
Operate airframe
boost pump (if
incorporated) to
prime fuel system
and motor engine to
maximum cranking
speed. (Refer to
Airframe Flight
i Manual.) Move power
lever and
condition/prop lever
\ .to maximum position
until solid stream
of fuel, without
bubbles, can be
seen. Move power
lever to Ground Idle
"
and condition/prop
lever to Feather.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Jul 17/81
No. 38 Rev 2
(3) After system is

primed, reconnect
fuel line and
ignition unit.
c. Ensure power-lever
rigging is correct.
Refer to Airframe
Maintenance Manual and
Power and Propeller
Coordinating System
Installation and
Operation Manual.
d. Replace defective fuel

control. (Refer to
73-20-01.)
Also, Trouble 4., Probable Cause and Corrective Action step 4. is revised and
steps 4A. and 7A. are added as follows:
4. P3 lines blocked. 4. Repair or replace. (Refer to

73-10-01 and 75-30-01.)
4A. P3 lines leaking. 4A. Perform pneumatic leak

check. (Refer to 73-10-01.)
7A. Contaminants in 7A. Clean. (Refer to 73-10-02.)

temperature com-
pensator, accel-
eration bellows
pressure (Px)
circuit.
Sheet 2 of 2
Table 12. Engine Troubleshooting --
Continued
3. No combustion during 1. Faulty aircraft fuel system. 1. Refer to airframe maintenance manual.
start attempt. Ignition
system normal. 2. Aircraft fuel shutoff valve closed. 2. Open valve.
(If incorporated)
3. Blockage in fuel lines. 3. Clean or replace. (Refer to 73-10-01.)
4. No fuel from fuel control. 4. Check for airbound or clogged lines.

Ensure power-lever rigging is correct.
Refer to airframe maintenance manual
and Power and Propeller coordinating
system Installation and Operation Man-
ual. Replace defective fuel control.
(Refer to 73-20-01.)
5. Faulty fuel manifold 5. Replace. (Refer to 73-10-04.)
6. Condition/prop lever in 6. Use proper start procedure.

FEATHER or CUT OFF
4. Slow (or no) accelera- 1. Low battery. 1. Investigate.

tion after starting com-
bustion occurs. ·
2. Power or condition/prop lever 2. Position condition/prop lever or power

setting incorrect. lever, as required, to maintain mgt
within limits.
3. Power lever or condition/prop 3. Check rigging. Refer to airframe main-

lever rigging incorrect. tenance manual and Power and Propel-
ler coordinating system Installation and
Operation Manual.
4. P3 lines leaking or blocked. 4. Repair or replace (Refer to 75-30-01.)
5. Faulty fuel manifold. 5. Replace (Refer to 73-10-04.)
6. Excessive accessory loads. 6. Investigate.
7. Faulty fuel control. 7. Replace. (Refer to 73-20-0 l)
8. Low starting torque. 8. Check circuit and starter. Refer to air-

frame maintenance manual.
72-00-00
19
A7AVCO LYCOMING OIVISION
Table 12. Engine Troubleshooting -

Continued
5. With power lever in ground 1. Faulty indicating system. 1. Inspect and repair.(Refer to 77-00-00.)
idle position, engine does
not reach speed. 2. Power lever and/or condition/ 2. Re-rig linkage. Refer to airframe
prop lever linkage not in pro- manual and Power and Propeller Co-
per position. ordinating System Installation and
Operation Manual. Check that lever
is in middle of ground idle band.
3. P3 lines leaking or blocked. 3. Repair or replace.(Refer to 75-30-01.)
4. Accumulator leaking. 4. Replace.
5. Compressor damaged. 5. Inspect and repair. (Refer to 72-30-00.)

6. Faulty fuel control. 6. Replace. (Refer to 73-20-01)
6. Power low at maximum 1. Power lever or condition/prop 1. Adjust linkage. Refer to airframe main-
power lever setting. lever does not reach stop be- tenance manual and Power and Propel-
cause of faulty linkage adjust- 1er Speed Coordinating System Installa-
ment. tion and Operation Manual.
2. Airframe fuel filter element clogged. 2. Replace filter element. (Refer to air-
frame maintenanee manual.)
3. Airframe fuel shutoff valve not 3. Open valve.

fully open. (If incorporated).
4. Leaking or clogged P3 lines. 4. Repair or replace. (Refer to 75-30-01.)
5. Compressor dirty, foreiga.object 5. Check inlet and compressor. Clean, if

damage, or obstructions. required. (Refer to 72-00-00, para-
graph 5.)
6. Malfunctioning airflow modulator 6. Perform operational check. (Refer to

actuator. 75-30-02, paragraph 6.)
7. Airflow modulator linkage interfer- 7. Check linkage. (Refer to 75-30-02,

ence. paragraph 6.) Ensure radial inlet panels
are properly installed. (Refer to 72-
20-00, paragraph 8.)
8. Maximum Ng speed adjustment of 8. Adjust. (Refer to 73-20-01, paragraph

fuel control too low. 9.)
9. Flow divider sticking. 9. Replace fuel manifold. (Refer to 73-

10-04.)
10. Faulty temperature compensator 10. Replace. (Refer to 73-10-02 or 73-20-

or fuel control. 01.)
11. Combustor turbine damaged. 11. Perform hot-section inspection. (Refer

to 72-00-00, table 7.)
72-00-00
20
STRATFORD, CONNEcricuT DATE Jul 17/81
NO. Rev I
No. 92.
On page 20, Table 12., Trouble 5., Probable Cause ænd Corrective Action step
3. is revised and steps 3A. and 7. are added as follows:
3. P3 lines blocked. 3. Repair or replace.

(Refer to 73-10-01 and
75-30-Œl.)

check. (Refer to
73-10-01.)
7. Contaminants in 7. Clean. (Refer to 73-10-

temperature com- 02.)
pensator, accel-
eration bellows
pressure (Px)
circuit.
Also, Trouble 6., Probable Cause and Corrective Action step 4. is revised and
steps 4A. and 9A. are added as follows:
4. P3 lines clogged. 4. Repair or replace.

75-30-01.)

check. (Refer to
73-10-01.)
9A. Contaminants in 9A. Clean. (Refer to 73-10

pensator, accel-
eration bellows
pressure (Px)
circuit. SEŸ1 L
SOSHO
The technical aspects of this MCN were approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming D
Sheet 1 of 1
A7AVCD LYCOMING DIVISION
DATE ,Tut 17 /8 1 sTRATwomo, coNNacYtcuT
90• Rev 0
No. 93.
On page 21, Table 12., Trouble 7., Probable Cause and Corrective Action step
3. is revised and steps 3A. and 7. are added as follows:
3. P3 lines blocked. 3. Repair or replace.

75-30-01.)

check. (Refer to
73-10-01.)

pensator, accel-
eration bellows
pressure (Px)
circuit.
Also, Trouble 9., Probable Cause and Corrective Action step 8. is added as
follows:
Trouble Probable Cause Correcti-ve Action

pensator, accel-
eration bellows
Sheet 1 of 1

Continued)
7. Engine surges on accel- 1. Compressor dirty. 1. Clean compressor. (Refer to 72-00-00,

eration. paragraph 5.)
2. FOD or erosion. 2. Inspect for FOD or erosion.
3. Obstruction or leak in P3 line 3. Repair or replace. (Refer to 75-30-01.)

to airflow modulator actuator.
4. Malfunctioning airflow modula- 4. Perform operational check. (Refer to

tor actuator. 75-30-02, paragraph 6.)
5. Airflow modulator linkage inter- 5. Check linkage. (Refer to 75-30-02,

ference. paragraph 6.) Ensure radial inlet pan-
els are properly installed. (Refer to
72-00-00, paragraph 8.)
6. Engine accelerating too fast. 6. Replace temperature sensor or fuel

control. (Refer to 73-20-01.)
8. Excessive Ng transient 1. Incorrect power lever and/or con- 1. Check rigging to ensure stop is contact-
overshoots; Np speed dition/prop position. ed. (Refer to 73-20-01, paragraph 9.)
cannot be reached
2. Improper rigging. 2. Refer to airframe maintenance manual
and Power and Propeller speed coor-
dinating systems Installation and Op-
eration Manual.
3. Faulty fuel control. 3. Replace. (Refer to 73-20-01.)
9. Erratic or oscillating Ng 1. Faulty indicating system. 1. Inspect and repair. (Refer to 77-00-00.)
speed.
2. Fuel starvation. 2. Check airframe fuel system.
3. Fuel contamination. 3. Check all filters.
4. Erratic power lever operation 4. Check linkage system. Refer to air-

frame maintenance manual.

actuator. 75-30-02, paragraph 6.)

ference. paragraph 6.) Ensure radial inlet panels
7. Malfunctioning fuel control. 7. Replace. (Refer to 73-20-01.)
72-00-00
21
.dAVCO LYCOMING OtVISION
Continued)
10. Erratic or oscillating 1. Faulty instrumentation if only 1. Refer to airframe maintenance manual.
measured parameters. one of parameters is erratic.
11. Flameout. 1. Loss of fuel supply. 1. Check inlet connections and boost
pump pressure.
2. Fuel contamination. 2. Check all filters. Refer to airframe

maintenance manual and Power and
Propeller Speed Coordinating Systems
Installation and Operation Manual.
3. Condition/prop lever momentari- 3. Check linkage adjustment. Refer to air-

ly moving to CUTOFF or partial frame maintenace manual and Power
FEATHER. and Propeller Speed Coordinating Sys-
tems Installation and Operation Manual.
4. Faulty fuel control 4. Replace. (Refer to 73-20-01.)
12. Oil pressure indicating 1. Low oil supply. 1. Check and service.
low or high.
2. Faulty indicating system. 2. Check pressure by teeing in direct read-
ing gage at oil-pressure transducer port.
3. Oil pump requires adjustment. 3. Adjust oil pump. (Refer to 79-20-03,

paragraph 9.)
4. Oil-pump relief valve stuck in 4. Replace oil pump. (Refer to 79-20-03.)

open or closed position.
13. Excessive oil-pressure 1. Faulty indicating system. 1. Check accuracy of airframe oil-pressure
fluctuation (total indicating system by teeing in direct
needle oscillation reading gage at oil-pressure transducer
of more than 10 port. If airframe oil-pressure indicating
psi). system is found to be at fault, replace
system components as necessary. (Re-
fer to airframe maintenance manual.)
2. Faulty oil pump. 2. If indicating system is satisfactory, re-

place oil pump. (Refer to 79-20-03.)
14. Chips found on oil- 1. Possible internal failure. 1. Refer to lubricating system contamina-
filter element or chip tion troubleshooting procedure. (Refer
detector. to 72-00-00, paragraph 13.)
72-00-00
22 © 1978. Avco Lvcomino nividon

A7AVCD LYCOMING DIVISION
STAATFORD.CONNECTICUT
DATE Jan 15/79
NO. Û
On page 22, Table 12, probable cuase and corrective action 5. is added to
Trouble 12, as follows:
5. Air leak in suction 5. Inspect lines and fittings

side of oil system for security and damage.
(low pressure). Refer to airframe mainte-
nance manual.
Also, probable cause and corrective action 3. is added to Trouble 13. as

follows:
5. Air leak in suction 5. Inspect lines and fittings

side of oil system for security and damage.
(low pressure). Refer to airframe mainte-
nance manual.
Sheet 1 of 1
DATE Adar 24/81 CONNECTIC1JT
STWATPOND,
NO. ÎÊRev Î

This MCN supersedes MCN No. 78 dated Nov 10/80. Please remove and discard NON
No. 78.
On page 23, Table 12, Trouble 15., Corrective Action 2. is revised as follows:
2. Perform continuity
check. (Refer to
77-20-02, paragraph 7.)
Also, Trouble 16., Probable Cause lA. and 13. and Corrective Action lA. and
1B. are added as follows:
LA. Internal leakage lA. Replace. (Refer to

in starting assist 73-10-05.)
fuel solenoid valve
(if installed).
13. Wrong elbow in- 13. Install elbow which has

stalled in start- a 0.018 inch orifice.
ing assist fuel (Refer to 73-10-05.)
solenoid valve
(if installed).
Sheet 1 of 1

Continued
15. High mgt. (During 1. Faulty indicating system. 1. Refer to airframe maintenance manual.
steady-state opera-
tion.) 2. Faulty thermocouple. 2. Perform check. (Refer to 77-
resistance
2042, paragraph 7.)
3. Dirty compressor, FOD, or 3. Inspect and clean. (Refer to 72-00-00,

erosion. paragraph 5.)
4. Engine-driven accessories bind- 4. Inspect and repair or replace.

ing.
5. Damaged gas-generator nozzle. 5. Replace. (Refer to 72-0040, paragraph

20.)
6. Blocked or damaged fuel noz- 6. Replace fuel manifold. (Refer to 73-

zles. 10-04.)
7. Anti-icing valve ON. 7. Investigate.

actuator. 75-3042.)

ference. paragraph 6.) Ensure radial inlet panels
20.00, paragraph 8).
16. High mgt during starts. 1. Incorrect starting procedure. 1. Restart using correct procedure.
2. Low starter cranking speed. 2. Crank engine with no ignition. If en-

gine reaches 17 percent, starter sys-
tem is satisfactory.
3. Combustion-chamber drain valve 3. Check and clean or replace. (Refer to

sticking. 73-1043.)
4. Compressor, turbine, or accessory 4. Crank engine and listen for rub.

rub.
5. Engine-driven accessories binding. 5. Inspect and repair or replace.
6. Blocked or damaged fuel nozzles. 6. Replace fuel manifold. (Refer to 73-

1044.)
72-00-00
23
Table 12. Engine Troubleshooting --

Continued
17. High mgt. during ac- 1. Check engine-driven accessories. 1. Repair or replace binding accessories.
celerations.
2. Faulty temperature compensator. 2. Replace. (Refer to 73-10-02.)
3. Engine surging. 3. Investigate. (Refer to Trouble No. 7.)
18. Incorrect or no Ng 1. High coil resistance on magnetic 1. Replace Ng magnetic pickup. (Refer
speed indication. pickup. to 77-10-01.)
2. High resistance or open airframe 2. Check circuit. (Refer to airframe main-

circuit. tenance manual.)
19. Incorrect or no Np 1. High coil resistance on magnetic 1. Replace Np magnetic pickup. (Refer
speed indication. pickup. to 77-10-02.)
2. High resistance or open airframe 2. Check circuit. (Refer to airframe main-

circuit. tenance manual.)
20. High oil consumption. 1. External leak. 1. Replace defective parts.
2. Damaged shaft or bearing seal. 2. Replace seal or module.
3. Faulty oil-pump scavenge ele- 3. Replace oil pump. (Refer to 79-20-03.)

ment.
4. No. 2 and 3 bearing vent line 4. Repair or replace. (Refer to 79-20-01.)

clogged.
5. Damaged oil transfer tube in oil S. Replace oil feed ring assembly. (Refer
feed ring assembly to No. 2 and to 72-00-00, paragraph 16.)
3 bearings.
72-00-00
JAVCO LYCOMING OfVISiCN
Table 13. Lubrication System Contamination
Contaminant Source Remarks
Fine Particles Generally indicates even though possi-

bly excessive wear.
Flat Metal (Pieces) Lock Cups or Baffles
Very Hard Steel (Pieces) Splines or Gears Indicates chipping of splines and/or
gear teeth.
Steel Particles Shaft, Gears, and/or Bearings Analysis of steel particles will reveal
which parts are to be suspected.
Aluminum Particles Bearing Bores of Accessory/Reduc-

tion Gearbox
Bronze Material Bearing Retainers (Usually)
Silver Plating Material From Certain

Bearing Retainers
Chrome Plating Material From Shafts, etc.,

and Also From Certain Steels
Brass Propeller Oil Transfer Tube Bush-

ing
Slivers of Metal May be machining chips from new

parts not thoroughly cleaned before
installation.
NOTE
It is not unusual for a new engine to generate some

chips during the first 5 to 10 hours of operation.
72-00-00
25
JAVCO LYCOMING OlVIS10N
(5) Flush bearing package by introducing solvent A. Disconnect or remove tube assemblies and electri-
(table 15, item 13) or equivalent, under pressure, through cal connectors as required. Tag each disconnected or
oil in fitting. Flush scavenge line and oil tank, and re- removed tube assembly and electrical connectors and
place oil cooler. If no contamination is found, proceed identify as to nomenclature and location.
with following step.
B. Tag and note location of all clamps, ties, and
(6) Refill engine oil tank to capacity with new brackets to ensure their reinstallation in correct posi-
lubricating oil. tion. Retain all mounting hardware for future reinstal-
lation.
CAUTION
C. If gearbox module is to be disassembled or re-
IN FOLLOWING STEP, ANY FLUC- placed, remove accessories. (Refer to applicable chap-
TUATION IN OIL PRESSURE IN EX. ter/sections, kit manuals, or airframe maintenance man-
CESS OF 10 PSI TOTAL NEEDLE ual.)
OSCILLATION, OR A RISE IN OIL
TEMPERATURE ABOVE THE ES- D. Remove jumper tubes (Refer to 75-10-03, 5 and
TABLISHED LIMITS, IS CAUSE 7, figure 1). Refer to 75-10-03, paragraph 2 for re-
FOR IMMEDIATE ENGINE SHUT- moval procedures.
DOWN.
E. Remove upper and lower radial inlet panels (Re-
(7) Start engine and run at ground idle (Refer fer to 72-00-00, 5 and 11, figure 1). Refer to 72-20-00,
to 71-00-00, paragraph 45) until temperatures have sta. paragraph 2 for removal procedure.
bilized. Check instruments for proper engine operation.
F. Index both accessory/reduction gearbox module
(8) Shut down engine. Inspect oil-filter bypass (Refer to 72-00-00, 1, figure 1) and gas generator mod-
button for indication of bypass and chip detector ele- ule (10) for correct installation.
ments for contamination.
G. Support combustor turbine/gas generator module
(9) If quantity of chips remains the same after and remove nuts (8) and washers (7) securing gas gen-
second engine run, investigate to determine cause and erator module (10) to accessory/reduction gearbox mod-
replace the defective component or module. ule (1).
14. REMOVAL, DISASSEMBLY, REASSEMBLY, AND CAUTION

INSTALLATION OF MODULES
IN FOLLOWING STEP DO NOT REST
15. REMOVAL OF ACCESSORY/REDUCTIONGEAR. ACCESSORY/REDUCTION GEARBOX
BOX MODULE. Proceed as follows: MODULE ON STUDS THAT PROTRUDE
FROM AFT SURFACE.
H. Carefully lift combustor turbine/gas generator mod-
Maintenance Stand LTCT5463 ules rearward. Place combustor turbine/gas generator
modules on solid flat surface. Remove accessory/reduc-
NOTE tion gearbox module from stand LTCT5463. Two men
are required.
In order to remove accessory/reduction
gearbox module the complete engine I. Remove packing (4). Remove packing (3) from oil
must be removed from the aircraft. transfer tube (91, figure 2).
(Refer to 71-00-00, paragraph 25.)
Protect all lines, fittings, and parts

with clean caps or plugs to prevent
contamination.
72-00-00
JAWC© LYCOMING DIVIS10N
ST11tATWONC. CONNECTICUT
DATE Sep 24/80
No. 62
32IS CHANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
' INSERT THIS PAGE page 72-00-00
Facing 26,
On page 26, paragraphs 14A. and 143. are added as follows:
14A. POWER TURBÍNE SHAFT AND POWERTRAIN GEAR ALIGNMENT. Proceed as follows:
Special Tools
Fixture LTCT14575
NOTE
Whenever the combustor turbine module or accessory/

reduction gearbox module is removed from the engine,
the proper relationship of the power turbine shaft
to the povertrain gear must be established to ensure
correct reassembly.
CAUTION
IF ENGINE IS INSTALLED DO NOT ROTATE PROPELLER.

NOV3
A. MédulRe oe oevaverspeed
governor from gearbox.
, (2) Install fixture (LTCT14575) on governor mounting to

secure gear train.
(3) Using marking pencil (table 15, item 24A), index (at
6-o'clock position) a.trailing edge blade tip of power turbine rotor (40,
figure 14) to cylinder of power turbine nozzle (36).
(4) Carefully separate modules until power turbine rotor stops

turning (approximately one inch). Using marking pencil (table 15, item
24A), index cylinder of power turbine nozzle to the index mark on blade
made in previo.us step (3).
(5) Continue separation of modules.as specified in detail para-

graph.
The -technical
aspects of this MCN were approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of 3
o
ASIWCO LYCOMING DIVISION
DATE
erntwomo, ceNNecticur
Jan 7/80
so. 53
On page 27, paragraph 16., step B. (3) is revised as follows:
(3) Position covet assembly (52) (nose down) on flat surface.

Remove three spacers (4), and two packings (1).
Also, step D. is revised as follows:
D. Lift power train helical gear (29) from case assembly (113).
Remove and discard packings (30 and 30A).
Sheet ) of )
¿¾CC LYCOMING OlVIS10N
ST ATWORC. CONNECTIC1.JT
DATE Sep 24/80
so. 62
'
ÎNSERT THIS PAGE Facing page 26, 72-00-00
On page 26, paragraphs 14A. and 143. are added as follows:
14A. POWER TURBÌNE SHAFT AND POWERTRAIN GEAR ALIGNMENT. Proceed as follows:
Special Tools
Fixture LTCT14575
NOTE
Whenever the combustor turbine module or accessory/

reduction gearbox module is removed from the engine,
the proper relationship of the power turbine shaft
to the powertrain gear must be established to ensure
correct reassembly.
CAUTION DL \
IF ENGINE IS INSTALLED DO NOT ROTATE PROPELLER. N

NOV3
A. Module Removal.
(1) Remove overspeed governor from gearbox.
(2) Install fixture (LTCT14575) on governor mounting to '

secure gear train.
(3) Using marking pencil (table 15, item 24A), index (at
6-o'clock position) a.trailing edge blade tip of power turbine rotor (40,
figure 14) to cylinder of power turbine nozzle (36).
(4)
Carefully separate modules until power turbine rotor stops
turning (approximately one inch). Using marking pencil (table 15, item
24A), index cylinder of power turbine nozzle to the index mark on blade
made in previo.us step (3).
(5) Continue separation of modules.as specified in detail para-

graph.
Sheet 1 of 3
DATE Sep 24/80
NO. 62
B. Module Installation.
(1) Position modules with mating flanges no less than one inch
apart.
(2) Rotate power turbine rotor until indexed blade is aligned

with counter-clockwise index mark on cylinder of power turbine nozzle.
(3) Carefully position modules together, allowing power turbine

rotor to turn when shaft splines engage with splines of powertrain gear.
(4) When modules are joined, the indexed blade must align with
6-o'clock position index on cylinder of power turbine nozzle. If blade and
index do not align, separate modules, rotate rotor as necessary to bring
indexed blade and index mark on cylinder into alignment.
(5) Remove fixture (LTCT14575) from overspeed governor mounting

pad. Reinstall overspeed governor.
(6) Proceed with installation of modules as specified in detail

paragraph.
14B. POWERTRAIN GEAR RUNOUT CHECK. Proceed as follows:
NOTE
Whenever the combustor turbine module, accessory/

reduction gearbox module, powertrain gear or power
turbine rotor is replaced, a runout check must be
performed on the povertrain gear to ensure the pro-
per relationship of the gear to the power turbine
rotor shaft.
NOTE
When performing runout check, the engine shall be

removed from aircraft and positioned as level as
possible. The accessory/reduction gearbox module
cover and gear that meshes with povertrain gear shall
be removed. If powertrain gear or accessory/reduction
gearbox module was not replaced, remove existing index
mark from forward face of gear.
A. Using marking pencil (table 15, item 24A), temporarily index

forward face of powertrain gear at four equally spaced locations.
Sheet 2 of 3
DATE Sep 24/80
NO. 62
B. Using yellow enamel (table 15, item 16), index shaft of speed
indicator plug to align with one of marks on gear face. Plug shaft will be
marked in two places on length of its shaft.
C. While rotating power turbine rotor, take runout on No. 4 bearing

journal of the gear, with one of four marks on gear face aligned with mark
on plug shaft, and record. Total indicated runout shall not exceed 0.0012
inch.
D. Repeat step C. for each of three remaining marks on gear face.
E. If none of four alignments are within limit, mark four inter-

mediate positions on face of gear, remove original marks and repeat steps
C. and D.
F. If more than one position is within limits, select position with

least runout and align it with index on plug shaft.
G. Remove temporary markings on face of gear and, using yellow

enamel (table 15, item 16), index face of gear with alignment mark on plug
shaft.
Also, paragraph 15, step Fl. is added as follows:
Fl. Index the power turbine rotor (40, figure 14) to power tu bin
nozzle (36). (Refer to paragraph 14A.) 21.
NOV
Sheet 3 of 3
e
JAVCD L.YCOMING OIVISION
DISASSEMBLYOF ACCESSORY/REDUCTION
16. C. Remove outer race of ball bearing (149) from cover
GEARBOX MODULE. Proceed as follows: assembly (52), and install on inner race of bearing (149).
Special Tools Required D. Lift power train helical gear (29) from case assem-
bly (113). Remove and discard packings (30).
Wrench LTCTS431
E. Remove carrier assembly (61) as follows:
Wrench LTCT5435
(1) Remove bolts (32) and washers (31) that se-
Holding Fixture LTCT5438 cure carrier assembly (61).
Holding Fixture LTCTS450 CAUTION
Holding Fixture LTCT5468 IN FOLLOWING STEP, USE CARE

TO AVOID DAMAGE TO OIL TRANS-
Holding Fixture LTCT14575 FER TUBE WHEN REMOVING CAR-
RIER ASSEMBLY.
Tru-arc No. 7
Snapring Pliers (2) Using three 1/4-28 bolts as jackscrews,separ-
ate carrier assembly (61) from cover assembly (52). Lift
A. Remove fire shield assembly (14, figure 2) as fol- carrier assembly (61) straight up from ring gear (56),
lows: and cover assembly (52).
(1) Remove bolts (20) that secure fire shield as- (3) Remove oil transfer tube (59) and packings
sembly (14) and gearbox cover assembly (52) to gear- (51 and 60).
box case assembly (113).
F. Remove ring gear (56) as follows:
(2) Remove fire shield assembly (14) from cover
assembly (52). (1) Straighten deformed portions (two places) of
sleeve (45).
CAUTION
(2) Using spanner nut and holding fixture (de-
IN FOLLOWING STEP, DURING tails of LTCT5468), remove ring gear nut (49). Remove
SEPARATION, SOME GEARS MAY sleeve (45).
BECOMEDISLODGED FROM CASE
ASSEMBLY (113). USE CARE TO (3) Reinstall sleeve (45) engaging tangs in slots
PREVENT GEARS FROM DROP- of shaft assembly (43). Using suitable drift and mallet,
PING. tap on sleeve (45) to dislodge ring gear (56) from cover
assembly (52). Remove ring gear (56). Remove packings
B. Remove cover assembly (52) as follows: (53 and 54).
(1) Remove three nuts (8) and washers (7) from (4) Remove retaining ring (55) that secures bush-
studs at 3-, 6-, and 9-o'clock positions and one bolt (20), ing (57) in ring gear. Remove bushing (57). Remove
inboard of gearbox vent. packing (58).
(2) Using three 0.2500-28 UNF-2B bolts as jack- G. Remove shaft assembly (43) as follows:
screws, separate cover assembly (52) from case assembly
(113). (1) Engage forward end of shaft assembly (43)
with adapter, P/N LTCT5468-03, detail of P/N LTCT
(3) Position cover assembly (52) (nose down) on 5468. Straighten tabs of locking cup (35).
flat surface. Remove and discard gasket (28). Remove
three washers (4), and two packings (1).
72-00-00
27
(2) Using wrench, P/N LTCT5431, remove nut (1) Remove bolts (87 and I16) and washers (86
(34). Remove locking cup (35). and 115) that secure support assembly (114) to case as-
sembly (113).
NOTE
(2) Using three 1/4-28 bolts as jackscrews, sep-
In following step, spacer (50) and in- arate support assembly (114) from case assembly (113).
ner race of roller bearing (38) will be Remove packings (112).
removed with shaft assembly (43).
(3) Remove outer race of bearing (85) from sup-
(3) Using suitable sleeve and press, remove shaft port assembly (114) and install on inner race of bearing
assembly (43) from cover assembly (52). (85). Remove retaining ring (103).
(4)Remove inner race of bearing (38) and spa- (4) Remove ring seal (111) from support assem-
cer (50) from shaft assembly (43). bly. Discard ring seal (111).
H. Remove seal housing (41) as follows: (5) Using Tru-arc No. 7 snapring pliers, remove
retaining ring (109) that secures roller bearing (108).
(1) Remove bolts (42) that secure seal housing Remove bearing and remaining retaining ring (107).
(41).
(6) Remove bolt (96) that secures torquemeter
(2)Using suitable sleeve and press, remove seal valve assembly (104) to support assembly. Remove
(39) from housing. Remove packing (40). torquemeter valve assembly (104). Remove valve assem-
bly shim (98).and packings (105 and 106).
I. Remove outer race of bearing (38) from cover as-
sembly (52). (7) Remove retaining ring (101) from support as-
sembly (114). Remove roller bearing (100). Remove
J. Remove bolts (33) that secure retainer (36). Re- packings (99) from bearing.
move retainer (36).
Q. Remove torquemeter gear assembly (123) as fol-
. K. Remove ball bearing (37) from cover assembly lows:
(52).
(1) Lift torquemeter gear (123), with torque-
L. Remove retaining ring (48) from assembly
shaft meter piston (120) and ball bearing (121) installed,
(43). Using suitable drift, remove
sleeve (47). Remove frona case assembly (113). Remove ring seal (119) and
packings (46). If damaged, remove two pins (44) from discard.
shaft assembly (43).
(2)Straighten tabs on locking cup (l 18). Posi-
M. Using suitable sleeve and press, remove seal (9) tion torquemeter gear assembly in fixture, P/N LTCT
and two seals (13). 5450, and remove nut (117). Remove locking cup (118).
N. Remove bolts (94 and 95) and washers (93) that (3) Using suitable fixture, remove piston (120)
secure power pinion cover (92) to support assembly and bearing (121) from torquemeter gear assembly (123).
(114). Remove cover (92). Remove packing (102). If
damaged, remove power pinion bumper (97) from cov- (4) Remove retaining ring (122) and bearing
er (92). (121) from piston (120).
O. Remove oil transfer tube assembly (91) from sup- (5) Using Tru-arc No. 7 snapring pliers, remove
port assembly (114). Remove packings (88, 89, and 90). retaining ring (65), roller bearing (66), and power idler
bumper (67).
P. Remove support assembly (114) as follows:
72-00-00

$1WATP©RO, CONNECTICL.if DATE Sep 26/80
NO. Rev

THIS CEANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
INSERT THIS PAGE_Preceding page 29, 72-00-00
MCN No. 8 Rev 2.
On page 29, paragraph 16, step T. is revised as follows:
T. Remove gear assemblies (132, 157, 179, 124, 138, 153, 162, 168,
174, and 147) by lifting them straight away from case assembly (113).
Remove wave washers (178, 128, 134, 148, 158, 163, and 170) and spacer
(181). Remove seal (169).
Paragraph 16A. is added as follows:
16A. NUMBERS 6 AND 7 BEARING CLEARÄNCE CHECK. Proceed as follows:
Whenever the gearbox case assembly, support assembly,

position No. 6 bearing, position No. 7 bearing or the
torquemeter gear assembly is replaced, a clearance check
must be performed to ensure proper running clearance.
A. Measure internal clearance of both position No. 6 and No. 7

bearings (66 and 108 figure 2) as follows:
NOTE
Record each bearing clearance separately.
(1) Insert 0.001 inch feeler gage between bearing rollers and
outer race. Rotate outer race in relation to inner race, so that roller is I
on feeler gage. If feeler gage is tight, record clearance as 0.0007 -
0.0009 inch.
(2) If feeler gage is loose, insert 0.0015 inch feeler gage

between rollers and outer race. Rotate outer race in relation to inner
race so that roller is on feeler gage. If feeler gage is tight, record
clearance as 0.0011 -
0.0014 inch; if feeler gage is loose, record

clearance as 0.0015 -
0.0017 inch.
B. Measure bearing to bore clearance for both position No. 6 and

No. 7 bearings as follows:
The .technical aspects of this MCN were approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming DER,-
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Sep 26/80
NO. 8 Rev 3
(1) Measure ID of position No. 6 bearing bore in case assembly

(113) and position No. 7 bearing bore in support assembly (114) and record.
(2) Measure OD of both position No. 6 and No. 7 bearings and

record.
(3) Subtract OD of each bearing from the ID of its respective

bore and record.
C. Measure bearing to shaft clearance for both position No. 6 and

No. 7 bearings as follows:
(1) Measure OD of shaft on torquemeter gear assembly (123) for

both position No. 6 and No. 7 bearings and record.
(2) Measure ID of both position No. 6 and No. 7 bearings and

record.
(3) Subtract OD of each shaft journal from the ID of its

respective bearing and record.
D. Add the following recorded clearances separately for position

No. 6 bearing and for position No. 7 bearing.
(1) Internal clearance of bearing, recorded in step A. (1) or

(2).
(2) Bearing to bore clearance, recorded in step B. (3).
(3) Bearing to shaft clearance, recorded in step C. (3).
(4) The total clearance at each bearing position shall be

between 0.002 -
0.004 inch.
E. The total clearance for position No. 6 bearing shall match the
total clearance of position No. 7 within 0.001 inch. Replace parts, as
required, to achieve match.
Also, paragraph 17, in Special Tools Required list, the following tools are
added:
Wrench LTCT5675
Holding Fixture LTCT5769
Crimping Tool LTCT5837
Sheet 2 of 2
(6) If damaged, remove bumper gear (62), gear W. Remove remaining items from gearbox cover as-
retainer(64), and packing (63) from torquemeter gear sembly (52) as follows:
assembly (123).
(1) Remove nipples (24 and 26) and packings
R. Remove power train gear (76) as follows: (25 and 27).
(1) Lift power train gear (76) from case assem- (2) Remove elbow (21), nut (22), and packing
bly (113). (23),
(2) If damaged, remove retaining rings (78 and (3) Remove union (2) and packing (3),
79). Remove and discard packing (77).
(4) Remove two bolts (16) securing fire shield
(3) Remove retaining rings (72 and 75) from plate (15). Remove fire shield plate (15).
each side of roller bearing (73).
(5) Remove Np speed pickup (17). (Refer to
(4) Remove bearing (73). Remove packings (74). 77-10-02, paragraph 2.)
S. Remove spur gears (84 and 69) as follows: (6) Remove Ng speed pickup (10). (Refer to
77-10-01, paragraph 2.)
(1) Straighten tabs of locking cup (70). Remove
bearing (85) from spur gear (84). X. Remove chip detector (6). (Refer to 77-30-01,
paragraph 2.)
(2) Using holding fixture, P/N LTCTS438, on
spur gear (84) and wrench, P/N LTCT5435, remove nut 17. REASSEMBLY OF ACCESSORY/REDUCTIONGEAR-
(71). Remove locking cup (70). BOX MODULE. Proceed as follows:
(3) Remove spur gear (69) from spur gear (84). Special Tools Required
Remove key (110).
Wrench LTCTS431
(4) Remove spur gear (84) and bearing (83) from
case assembly. Remove retaining ring (68). Wrench LTCTS435
NOTE Holding Fixture LTCT5438
In following step, it is not necessary Wrench LTCT5450

to remove bearings from gear assem-
blies to perform inspection. Lifting Sling LTCT5454
T. Remove gear assemblies (132, 157, 179, 124, 138, Maintenance Stand LTCTS463
153, 162, 168, 174, and 147) by lifting them straight
away from case assembly (113). Remove wave washers Wrench LTCTS468
(178, 128, 129, 134, 148, 158, 163, and 170). Remove
seal (169). Pusher LTCT5485
U. If required, position holding fixture, P/N LTCT Pusher LTCTS486

14575, on spur gear (145). Straighten tabs on locking
cup (140) and, using wrench, P/N LTCTS435, remove Holding Fixture LTCT5588
nut (139). Remove locking cup (140).
Crimping Tool LTCTS674
V. Remove oil baffle screen (82).
Holding Fixture LTCT14575
Tru-arc No. 7'

Snapring Pliers
72-00-00
29
NOTE (1) Coat packing (40) with shortening (table 15,

item 19); then install packing (40) into seal housing (41).
During following buildup procedure,
if replacement part has serial num- (2) Install housing (41) into gearbox cover as-
ber, enter both part number and sembly (52) and secure with bolts (42). Tighten bolts -
serial number in engine log and re- (42) as required.
cord card.
G. Install shaft assembly (43) as follows:
A. Install elbow (21, figure 2) as follows:
(1) Using pusher, P/N LTCTS486, and arbor press,
(1) Install nut (22) onto elbow (21). Coat pack- install bearing (38) inner race and spacer (50) onto shaft
ing (23) with shortening (table 15, item 19); then in- assembly (43).
stall packing (23) onto elbow (21).
NOTE
(2) Position elbow (21) to face aft on cover as-
sembly (52) and tighten nut (22), as required. In following step, lubricate threads
of nut (34) and lubricating oil (ta-
B. Install holding fixture, P/N LTCTSS88, onto cover ble 15, item 23 or 24).
assembly (52).
NOTE carefully press shaft assembly (43) into cover assembly
(52). Secure with locking cup (35) and nut (34). Us-
In following step, lubricate bolt (33) ing wrench, P/N LTCTS431, tighten nut (34) 175 to
threads with lubricating oil (table 15, 200 foot-pounds torque. Bend locking cup (35) into
item 23 or 24). nut (34) in two places, 180 degrees apart.
Ensure that bolts (33) are bottomed (3) Coat packings (46) with shortening (table 15,
on retainer (36). item 19); then install packings (46) onto sleeve (47). In-
stall sleeve (47) into forward end of shaft assembly (43)
. C. Install bearing (37) as follows: and secure with retaining ring (48).
(1) Using pusher, P/N LTCTS486, and arbor press, (4) If removed, install two pins (44) into shaft
install ball bearing (37) into cover assembly (52). assembly (43).
(2) Secure in place with retainer (36) and six H. Install ring gear (56) as follows:
bolts (33). Tighten bolts (33) as required.
(1) Coat packing (58) with shortening (table 15,
D. Using pusher, P/N LTCTS486, and arbor press, in- item 19); then install packing (58) onto bushing (57).
stall seal (39) into housing (41). Install bushing (57) into forward end of ring gear (56)
and secure with retaining ring (55).
E. Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor press, in-
stall bearing (38) outer race into cover assembly (52). (2) Coat packings (53 and 54) with shortening
(table 15, item 19); then install packings (53 and 54)
NOTE onto ring gear (56). Install ring gear (56) onto shaft as-
sembly (43) and secure with lock sleeve (45) and nut
In following step, lubricate bolt (42) (49).
threads with lubricating oil (table 15,
item 23 or 24). (3) Using wrench, P/N LTCT5468-02, and hold-
ing f xture, P/N LTCT5468-03, torque nut (49) 25 to
F. Install housing (41) as follows: 30 foot-pounds. Bend lock sleeve (45) into nut (49) in
two places, 180 degrees apart.
72-00-00

STWAWORO. C©NNECT1CUT DATE Jan 2 5 / 8 0
NO. 54

On page 30, paragraph 17., NOTE preceding step A. is revised as follows:
NOTE
During the following buildup procedure, if a re-

placement part has a serial number, enter both
part number and serial number in engine/module
log and record card.
If gearbox case assembly (113), support assembly

(114), position No. 6 bearing (66), position No.
7 bearing (108) or torquemeter gear assembly (123)
have been replaced, a bearing clearance check must
be performed. (Refer to paragraph 16A.)
Sheet 1 of 1
\ 4
AAVCo LYCOMING 01V1510N
DATE Mar 2 6|8 1 STRATPCAD, CONNECT1CUT
NO. 49 wax 2

This MCN supersedes MCN No. 49 Rev 1 dated Jan 25/80. Please remove and
On page 31, paragraph 17, step J1. is added as follows:
J1. Using pusher, P/N LTCTS486, and arbor press, install outer race
of bearing (146) into cover assembly (52).
NOTE preceding·step L. (1) is added as follows:
NOTE
If torquemeter gear assembly (123) has been replaced, a

clearance check of positions No. 6 and No. 7 bearings
(66 and 108) must be performed. (Refer to paragraph 16A.)
NOTE preceding step L. (5) is added as follows:
NOR
If position No. 6 bearing (66) has been re-

placed, a clearance check of positions No. 6
and No. 7 bearings (66 and 108) must be per-
formed. (Refer to paragraph 16A.)
Also, step M. and substeps (1) through (5) are deleted.
Sheet 1 of 1
(4) Coat packing (60) with shortening (table 15, (2) Using pusher, P/N LTCTS486, and arbor press,
item 19); then install packing (60) onto transfer tube install ball bearing (121) with torquemeter piston (120)
(59). Install transfer tube (59) into bushing (57). onto torquemeter gear assembly (123). Secure in place
with locking cup (118) and nut (117). Using wrench,
NOTE P/N LTCTS450, tighten nut (117) 75 to 80 foot-pounds
torque. Deform locking cup (118) in two places, 180
In following step, lubricate bolts (32), degrees apart.
with lubricating oil (table 15, item 23
or 24). (3) Coat packing (63) with shortening (table 15,
item 19); then install packing (63) onto retainer (64).
L Install carrier assembly (61) as follows: Install bumper gear (62) and retainer (64) into torque-
meter gear assembly (123).
(1) Install suitable 0.250-28 alignment pins at
12- and 6-o'clock positions of cover assembly (52). (4) Install ring seal (119) into torquemeter pis-
Coat packings (51) with shortening (table 15, item 19); ton (120).
then install packings (51) into cover assembly (52).
(2) Position carrier assembly (61) on cover as- install bumper gear (67) and roller bearing (66) into
sembly (52), carefully aligning alignment pins on cover case assembly (113). Using Tru-arc No. 7 snapring pliers,
assembly (52) with holes in carrier assembly (61), and secure with retaining ring (65), beveled edge away from
meshing planet gears with ring gear (56). Using soft- bearing (66).
faced mallet, tap on carrier assembly (61) sufficiently
to allow engagement of bolts (32). Secure with 18 M. Dimensionally check roller bearings (73 and 100)
washers (31) and 18 bolts (32). Tighten bolts (32) as as follows:
required.
(1) Using an OD micrometer, measure the OD
J. Install seals (9 and 13) as follows: of the outer races of roller bearings (73 and 100). Re-
cord as dimension A.
(1) Coat seating areas of seals (9 and 13) with
gasket compound (table 15, item 19). (2) Using an ID micrometer, measure the gear-
box case assembly (113) and support assembly (114)
(2) Using pusher, P/N LTCT5485 and arbor press, bore ID's of roller bearings (73 and 100). Record as
install two seals (13) and one seal (9). dimension B.
K. Install suitable fixture onto case assembly (113). (3) Using an OD micrometer, measure each bear-
ing journal OD of power train gear (76). Record as di-
L. Assemble torquemeter gear assembly (123) as fol- mension C.
lows:
(4) Using an ID micrometer, measure the ID of
(1) Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor press, roller bearings (73 and 100). Record as dimension D.
install ball bearing (121) into torquemeter piston (120).
Secure with retaining ring (122). (5) Subtract dimension A from dimension B and
dimension C from dimension D to obtain fits between
NOTE outer races and bore ID's and bearing inner races and
journals of power train gear. Fits shall not exceed
In following step, lubricate nut (117) 0.0005 inch loose. Replace bearings, as necessary, until
threads with lubricating oil (table 15, proper fits are obtained and retain bearings (73 and
item 23 or 24). 100) and gear (76) as matched set.
72-00-00
31
LTPIOI Maintenance Manual
N. Assemble support assembly (114) as follows: NOTE
(1) Using Tru-arc No. 7 snapring pliers, install In following step, lubricate bolt (96)
retaining ring (107) into support assembly (114). Us- threads with lubricating oil (Ref. 72-
ing pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor press, install 00-00, table 15, item 23 or 24),
roller bearing (108) and secure with retaining ring (109).
(4) Coat packings (105 and 106) with shortening
(2) Install ring seal (111) into support assembly (table 15, item 19); then install packings (105 and 106)
(114). onto valve assembly (104). Install valve assembly (104)
with shim (98) to support assembly (114). Secure with
(3) Measure from tip of torquemeter valve as- bolt (96).
sembly (104) plunger to seating surface of support as-
sembly (114). Dimension shall be 0.907 to 0.913 inch- (5) Install retaining ring (101) into support as-
(Refer to figure 3.) If limit is not met, adjust thick- sembly (114). Coat two packings (99) with shortening
ness of shim (98, figure 2). Record shim thickness and (table 15, item 19); then install packings onto roller
clearance obtained. bearing (100). Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor
press, install bearing (100) into support assembly (114)
down to retaining ring (101).
(6) Install retaining ring (103) into support as-

sembly (114).
0.913
INCH, O. Install bearing (73) as follows:
0,907
(1) Install retaining ring (72) into case assembly

(113). Coat two packings (74) with shortening (table 15,
item 19); then install packings (74) onto roller bearing
(73).
(2) Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor

press, install bearing (73) into case assembly (113) down
to retaining ring (72). Install one retaining ring (75) to
hold bearing (73) in position.
P. Using pusher, P/N LTCT5485, and arbor press, in-

stall seal (169) into case assembly (114).
NOTE
In following step, lubricate threads of

shaft, inside face of locking cup, and
SHIM forward face and threads of nut with
X A-992-131 lubricating oil (table 15, item 23 or
24).
Q. Install gear assembly (147) as follows:
(1) Install disc (143), woodruff key (144), and

helical gear (142) onto spur gear (145). Using pusher,
P/N LTCT5486, and arbor press, install ball bearing
Figure 3. Measuring From Tip of Torquemeter Valve (141) onto spur gear (145) and secure with locking cup
Assembly Plunger to Seating Surface (140) and nut (139).
724)0-00

AMWCO LYCOMING DIVISION DATE Jan 25/80
STWATPCM©. C©NNSCTICUT
NO. 50 nov 1

This MCN supersedes MCN No. 50 dated Jan 2/80. Please remove and discard MCN -
No. 50.
On page 32, paragraph 17., NOTE preceding step N. (1) is added as follows:
NOTE
If position No. 7 bearing (108) has been replaced,

a clearance check of positions No. 6 and No. 7
bearings (66 and 108) must be performed. (Refer
to paragraph 16A.)
Step N. (6) is revised as follows:
(6) Install retaining ring (103) into support assembly (114) and
using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor press, install outer race of roller
bearing (85) snug against retaining ring (103).
Also, CAUTION following step Q. is added as follows:
CAUTION
IN FOLLOWING STEP, ENSURE DISC ANTIROTATION TAB

.
IS MATED TO WOODRUFF SLOT IN HELICAL GEAR (142) .
Sheet 1 of 1
LYCOMING OlVISION
STWÆTWOR©. C©NNSCTICtJT
DATE Sep 24/80
NO. 51 ne, 1
MANUAL CHANGE NOllCE
' INSERT THIS PAGE Facing page 33, 72-00-00
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 51 dated Jan 2/80. Please remove and discard MCN
No. 51.
On page 33, paragraph 17, step Q. (3) is tevised as follows:
(3) Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor press, install inner race
and rollers of roller bearing (146) onto spur gear (145). Install gear
assembly (147) into case assembly (113).
Step Y. (1) is revised as follows:
(1) Install retaining ring (68) into gearbox case assembly (113).
Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor press, install bearing (83) and
inner race and rollers of roller bearing (85) onto spur gear (84).
Also, NOTE preceding step X. (1) is added as follows:
NOTE
When new powertrain gear (76) is installed, a runout

cËeck must be performed. (Refer to paragraph 14B.)
Ensure that letter size marked adjacent to journal of

gear matches the letter size marked on face of outer
, races of bearings (73.and 100).
The technical aspects of.this MCN were approved by FAA per Avco Lycaming DER.
'
Sheet 1 of 1
A7AVCO L.YCOMING OlVISION
CAUTION (2) Install wave washer (170) and gear assembly

(174) into gearbox case assembly (113).
IN FOLLOWING STEP, DO NOT USE
HAMMER AND DRIFT OR CHISEL V. Install idler gear assembly (168) as follows:
TO BEND LOCKING CUP INTO
SLOTS OF NUT. (1) Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor press,
install two ball bearings (164 and 167) onto idler gear
(2) Install assembly into holding fixture, P/N assembly (168).
LTCT5438, and, using wrench, P/N LTCT5435, tighten
nut (139) 250 to 275 inch-pounds torque. Using crimp- (2) Install wave washer (163) and idler gear as-
ing tool, P/N LTCT5674, bend locking cup (140) into sembly (168) into gearbox case assembly (113).
slots of nut (139) in two places, 180 degrees apart.
Using 7 to 10 power magnifier, visually inspect locking W. Install torquemeter gear assembly (123) into gear-
cup for cracks. No cracks allowed· box case assembly (113).
(3) Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor X. Install gear (76) as follows:
press, install roller bearing (146) onto spur gear (145).
Install gear assembly (147) into case assembly (113) (1) Coat packing (77) with shortening (table 15,
item 19); then install packing (77) onto ring (78).
R. Install gear assembly (179) as follows:
(2) Install ring (78) onto helical power train

(1) Using pusher, P/N LTCTS486, and arbor gear (76) and secure in place with retaining ring (79).
press, install two ball bearings (175 and 177) onto gear Install gear (76) into case assembly (113).
assembly (179).
Y. Install spur gear (84) as follows:
(2) Install wave washer (178) and gear assembly
(179) into gearbox case assembly (113)· (1) Install retaining ring (68) into gearbox case
assembly (113). Using pusher, P/N LTCTS486, and ar-
S. Install gear assembly (124) as follows: bor press, install bearings (85 and 83) onto spur gear
(84).
(1) Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor
press, install two ball bearings (125 and 127) onto gear Install spur gear (84) into case assembly (113)
(2)
assembly (124)- down to retaining ring (68).
(2) Install wave washer (128) and gear assembly Z. Install gear assembly (157) as follows:
(124) into gearbox case assembly (113).
(1) Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor press,
T. Install gear assembly (162) as follows: install bearings (156 and 154) onto idler gear (155).
(1) Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor (2) Install gear assembly (157) into case assem-
press, install two ball bearings (161 and 159) onto gear bly (113).
assembly(162).
AA. Install starter gear assembly (153).
(162) into gearbox case assembly (113)· (1) Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor press,
install two ball bearings (149 and 152) onto starter gear
U. Install gear assembly (174) as follows: (151).
(1) Using pusher, P/N LTCTS486, and arbor (2) Install wave washer (148) and starter gear as-
press, install ball bearings (171 and 173) onto gear assembly (153) into case assembly (113),
sembly (174).
72-00-00
33
AVCO L.YCOMING OIVISION
AB. Install gear assembly (138) as follows: NOTE
(1) Using pusher, P/N LTCTS486, and arbor press, In following step, lubricate bolts (87
install two ball bearings (135 and 137) onto gear as- and 116) threads with lubricating oil
sembly (138). (table 15, item 23 or 24).
(2) Install wave washer (134) and gear assembly AE. Install support assembly (114) as follows:
(138) into case assembly (113).
(1) Coat two packings (112) with shortening
AC. For all engine except LTP101-600A-1A
models (table 15, item 19); then install packings (112) into
and -700A-1A, install gear assembly (132) as follows: gearbox case assembly (113).
(1) Using pusher, P/N LTCTS486, and arbor press, (2) Install and secure support assembly (114)
install bearings (130 and 133) onto spur gear (131). with washers (86 and 115), nine bolts (116), and two
bolts (87). Tighten bolts (116 and 87) as required.
(132) into case assembly (113). NOTE
AD. For LTP101-600A-1A and -700A-1A engines, in- In following step, lubricate bolts (94
stall gear assembly (132) as follows: and 95) threads with lubricating oil
(table 15, item 23 or 24).
NOTE
AF. Install transfer tube assembly (91) and power pin-
In following step, roller bearing in- ion cover (92) as follows:
ner race shoulder must be installed
against gear shoulder as shown in (1) Coat packings (88, 89, 90, and 102) with
figure 4. shortening (table 15, item 19); then install packings
(88, 89, and 90) onto transfer tube assembly (91). In-
(1) Using pusher, P/N LTCT5486, and arbor press, stall tube assembly (91) through support assembly (114)
install ball bearing (130, figure 2) and roller bearing and gearbox case assembly (113). Install packing (102)
(133) onto spur gear (131). into support assembly (114).
(2) Measure and record dimensions A, B, C, and (2) Install power pinion bumper (97) into power
D as shown in figure 4. pinion cover (92). Install power pinion cover (92) onto
support assembly (114) and secure with two washers
(3) Using the formula A + B C D GAP,
- - = (93), one bolt (95), and one bolt (94). Tighten bolts
determine the gap at roller bearing outer race to cover (94 and 95) as required.
assembly as shown in figure 4.
AG. Install oil baffle screen (82) into gearbox case as-
(4) Select spacer (181, figure 2) (P/N 4-083-092) sembly (113). Coat packings (30) with shortening (ta-
to obtain 0.001 to 0.022 inch gap at roller bearing out- ble 15, item 19); then install packings onto helical gear
er race to cover assembly as shown in figure 4. (Spac- (29). Install helical gear (29) into torquemeter gear as-
er sizes are given in figure 4.) sembly (123).
(5) Install gear assembly (132, figure 2) and AH. Determine thickness of spacer (4) as follows:
spacer (181) into case assembly (113).
(1) Measure thickness of gasket (28) and record
as dimension A.
72-00-00
symATwomo, coNNacTicur DATE Jan 2 5 / 80
NO. 9 Rev 3

This MCN supersedes MCN No. 9 Rev 2 dated Jan 7/80 . Please remove and discard
MCN No. 9 Rev 2.
On page 34, step AC. and substeps (1) and (2) are deleted. Step AD. is revised
as follows:
AD. Install gear assembly (132) as follows:
NOTE preceding step AE. is revised as follows:
NOTE
In following step, lubricate bolts (87 and 116)

threads with lubricating oil (table 15, item 23
or 24).
If support assembly (114) has been replaced, a

clearance check of positions No. 6 and No. 7
bearings (66 and 108) must be performed. (Refer
to paragraph 16A.)
NOTE preceding step AE. (2) is added as follows:
ROTE
In following step, shortening (table 15, item 19) may

be used to secure rollers of bearing (85) snug against
inner race.
Also, step AG. is revised and step AGl. and Figure 3A. are added as follows:
AG. Install oil baffle screen (82) into gearbox case assembly (113).
AGl. Coat packings (30 and 30A) with shortening (table 15, item 19}¶"1Î "'s
install packings onto helical gear (29) as shown in figure 3A. Ipstall -
ygg
helical gear (29) into torquemeter gear assembly (123). TIO
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Jan 25/80
NO. 9 R ev 3
PACKING MS3248/1-216
PACKING MS3248/1-026
XA-904-260
Figure 3A. Installation of Packings on Helical Gear

Sheet 2 of 2
INSTALL ITEM 1 TO
OBTAIN THIS DIMENSION
0.001
1
BEARING INNER RACE

SHOULDER MUST BE
INSTALLED AGAINST
GEAR SHOULDER
AS SHOWN
SPACER P/N 4-083-092

THICKNESS
DASH NO.
(INCHES)
-01
0.019 -
0.021
-02
0.029 -
0.031
-03
0.039 -
0.041
3
1.000 INCH 1.000 INCH
PARALLEL PARALLEL 1.SPACER
BAR BAR 2. BALL BEARING
3. GEARBOX COVER
ASSEMBLY
4. ROLLER BEARING
5. SPUR GEAR
6.GEARBOX CASE
ASSEMBLY
7. GASKET
X A-1053-127
Figure 4. Gap Determination and Spacer Selection For Customer Drive Pad
72-00-00
35
(2) Using a suitable parallel bar, measure from (5) Select spacer of thickness determined in step
mounting flange of gearbox case assembly (113) to one (4). Apply Super 300 Formagasket (table 15, item 18A)
of the three posts. Record as dimension B. (Refer to to both sides of spacer and position spacer on cover as-
figure 5.) sembly boss.
(3) Using a suitable parallel bar on cover assembly (6) Repeat steps (1) through (5) for each of the
(52), measure height of mating boss of post measured in two post positions in gearbox case assembly
remaining
step (2). Record as dimension C. (Refer to figure 5.) (113) and cover assembly (52).
(4) Subtract dimension C from dimension B and AI. Install cover assembly (52) as follows:
add dimension A to result. Result is thickness of spacer
required to maintain 0.000 to 0.002 inch clearance be- (1) Coat two packings (1) and gasket (28) with
tween spacer and case assembly post. (Refer to figure 5.) shortening (table 15, item 19); then install two packings
(1) and gasket (28) onto case assembly (113).
GEARBOX CASE
ASSEMBLY POST GEARBOX CASE ASSEMBLY
.7
MOUNTING FLANGE
COVER ASSEMBLY ,
I
BOSS
+---DIMENSION "C"
VENRTI GSF
GE
/ /
SPACER THICKNESS
/ / / PART NUMBER (INCHES)
4-083-10441 0.012-0.013
4-083-104-02 0.014-0.015
GEARBOX CASE 0.000
IN. 4-083-104-03 0.016-0.017
ASSEMBLY POST 0.002
4-083-104-06 0.0224.023
4-083-104-07 0.024-0.025
SPACER COVER ASSEMBLY

BOSS X A-1053-140
Figure 5. Gap Determination and Spacer Selection for Gearbox Mounting Posts
72-00-00

STWATPORO. CONNECTICUT
NO. Ô$Rev

This MCN supersedes MCN No. 31 Rev 1 dated Jan 2/80. Please removed and dis-
card MCN No. 31 Rev 1.
On page 37, paragraph 17, NOTE preceding step AI. (2) is revised as follows:
NOTE
In following step, shortening (table 15, item 19)

may be used to secure rollers of bearing (146) snug
against inner race.
In following step, lubricate bolt (20) threads with

lubricating oil (table 15, item 23 or 24).
When installing fire shield assembly, ensure that

0.000 to 0.020 inch gap is maintained between mating | ,
halves. (Refer to 72-60-00, figure 1.)
NOTE following step AO. is deleted.
Also, steps AP. (1) and (2) are revised and steps (3) through (9) are added as
follows:
(1) Using trichloroethylene (table 15, item 31) or equivalent,

thoroughly clean mating faces of gear (69), woodruff key (110), nut (71),
journal and threads on shaft of gear (84) and new locking cup (70). Avoid
contamination of these surfaces during assembly.
NOTE
Steps (2) through (6) must be accomplished as quickly as

possible, but not to exceed 15 minutes total lapsed time. y
(2) Using a cotton swab, carefully apply Loctite (table L STN
item 20) to key slot in shaft of gear (84) and install woodruff ke , o
not use Loctite þrimer. Remove excess Loctite from shaft.
Sheet 1 of 3
FAVCD LYCOMING OIVISJON
NOTE (2) Coat packing (25) with shortening (table 15,

item 19); then install packing (25) onto nipple (24). In-
In following step, lubricate bolt (20) stall nipple (24) onto gearbox cover assembly (52).
threads with lubricating oil (table 15, Tighten nipple (24) as required.
item 23 or 24).
(3) Coat packing (3) with shortening (table 15,
When installing fire shield assembly, item 19); then install packing (3) onto union, (2). In-
ensure that 0.000 to 0.020 inch gap stall union (2) onto gearbox cover assembly (52). Tight-
is maintained between mating halves. en union (2) as required.
(Refer to 72-60-00, figure 1.)
AO. Install lifting sling (LTCT5454) in accessory/reduc-
(2) Install cover assembly (52, figure 2) onto tion gearbox module boss. Install gearbox module onto
case assembly (113) taking care to mesh gearshaft with maintenance stand (LTCT5463) and secure, as required.
planet gears. Secure cover assembly (52) with fire shield
assembly (14) and bolts (20). Tighten bolts (20) as re- NOTE
quired.
In following step, lubricate threads of
NOTE shaft, inside face of locking cup and
forward face and threads of nut with
In following step, lubricate nut (8) lubricating oil (table 15, item 23 or 24).
threads with lubricating oil (Refer
to table 15, item 23 or 24). AP. Install spur gear (69) as follows:
(3) Install three washers (7) and three nuts (8) (1) Install spur gear (69) with key (110) onto
onto gearbox cover assembly (52). Tighten nuts (8) as spur gear (84) and secure with locking cup (70) and
required. nut (71).
AJ. Install chip detector (6). For installation instruc- CAUTION

tions refer to 77-30-01, paragraph 11.
IN FOLLOWING STEP, DO NOT USE
AK. Install fire shield plate (72-00-00, 15, figure 2) as HAMMER AND DRIFT OR CHISEL
follows: TO BEND LOCKING CUP INTO SLOTS
OF NUT.
(1) Install fire shield plate (15) onto fire shield
assembly (14) and secure with two bolts (16). (2) Install assembly into holding fixture, P/N
LTCTS438, and, using wrench, P/N LTCTS435, tighten
(2) Tighten bolts (16) as required. nut (71) 250 to 275 inch-pounds torque. Using crimp-
ing tool, P/N LTCT5674, bend locking cup (70) into
AL. Install Ng speed pickup (10). For installation in- slots of nut (71) in two places, 180 degrees apart. Us-
structions refer to 77-10-01, paragraph 6. ing 7 to 10 power magnifier, Visually inspect locking
cup for cracks. No cracks allowed.
AM. Install Np speed pickup (72-00-00, 17, figure 2).
For installation instructions refer to 77-10-02, paragraph 6. 18. INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORY/REDUCTION
GEARBOX MODULE. Proceed as follows:
AN. Install remaining items as follows:
(1) Coat packing (72-00-00, 27, figure 2) with
shortening (table 15, item 19); then install packing (27) Maintenance Stand LTCT5463
onto nipple (26). Install nipple (26) onto gearbox cover
assembly (52). Tighten nipple (26) as required.
72-00-00
37
NOTE B. Position accessory/reduction gearbox module in main-

tenance stand, P/N LTCT5463, and install new packing (4,
When accessory/reduction gearbox mod- figure 1) on accessory/reduction gearbox module (1).
ulehas been replaced, a power trim check
must be accomplished. Refer to airframe
NOTE
flight and maintenance manuals. Enter
new module data in engine/module log- Ensure that new packing (3) is installed
book. on oil transfer tube assembly (91, figure
2) and that tube enters oil hole in No. 1
A. If accessory/reduction gearbox module is replaced, bearing housing during installation.
the engine data plate from the old module must be re-
moved and attached to the replacement module as fol- CAUTION
lows:
IN FOLLOWING STEP, USE CARE IN
NOTE MESHING OF POWER TURBINE AND
GAS GENERATOR DRIVEN GEARS.
In order to comply with the intent of
Federal Aviation Regulations, notify the C. Align scribe marks made at removal and install gas
local FAA Field Office of the conditions generator/combustor turbine modules on accessory/reduc-
which require the replacement or transfer tion gearbox module (1, figure 1), using nuts (8) and
of an engine data plate and the action , washers (7). Tighten nuts 120 to 165 inch-pounds torque.
taken.
D. Install upper and lower radial inlet panels (5 and
(1) Using an edged tool, remove the engine data 11), using bolts (6) and nuts (12). Tighten as required.
plate (2, figure 1) from the accessory/reduction gearbox
module which is being replaced E. Install fire shield jumper tubes (Refer to 75-10-03,
5 and 7, figure 1). Refer to 75-10-03, paragraph 6 for
(2) Clean new data plate and the attachment installation procedure.
area of the replacement module with methyl-ethyl-ke-
tone (table 15, item 26) and attach engine data plate F. Install accessories on accessory/reduction gearbox
with adhesive (table 15, item 1). Allow cement to cure module. (Refer to applicable chapter/sections, kit manu-
completely in accordance with manufacturer's instruc¯ als, or airframe maintenance manual.)
tion prior to operating engine.
G. Using mounting hardware removed, install and con-
NOTE nect brackets, wiring, and tubing as required. Connect
If the data plate becomes damaged or is tube assemblies to proper parts/connectors observing tags
installed at removal. Tighten all fittings as required.
illegible, a new data plate is available
from Avco Lycoming. Make a logbook
H. Install engine into aircraft. (Refer to 71-00-00, para-
entry covering the condition and for-
graph 26).
ward the old data plate along with jus-
tification for the removal and your re-
19. REMOVAL OF GAS GENERATOR MODULE. Pro-
turn address to:
ceed as follows:
550 South Main Street NOTE
Stratford, Connecticut, 06497 If it is necessary to remove the engine
U.S.A- in order to remove the gas generator
Attention: Manager, Service module, refer to 71-00-00, paragraph 25.
Engineering
Protect all lines, fittings, and parts with
Upon receipt of the information and
clean caps or plugs to prevent contam-
data plate, Avco Lycoming will issue
ination.
a new data plate for attachment to
the engine.
72-00-00

JAVCO LYCOMING OlVISlQN
'~~
STRATPCMC, CONNŒCT1CUT
DATE Feb 12/81
NO. Rev $
TKIS CHANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 12 Rev 2 dated Nov 10/80. Please remove and
On page 38, paragraph 18, step A. (2) is revised as follows:
(2) Fasten data plate to gearbox module by bonding method as

follows:
WARNING
PERFORM IN WELL VENTILATED AREA. AVOID PROLONGED

INHALATION OF FUMES.
(a) Abrade both surfaces to be bonded using 180 grit emery

cloth (carborundum Co., Niagara Falls, NY). If surface is painted, lightly
abrade surface until gloss has been removed.
' NOTE
All residue from original adhesive must be removed.
(b) Wipe surfaces to be bonded with a clean soft wiper

soaked in methyl-ethyl-ketone (table 15, iten 26) or acetone-(Federal g¢
Specification D-A-51) until surfaces are clean.
(c) Allow surfaces to thoroughly air dry.
(d) Prepare adhesive (Scotch-weld 1838 B/A, 3M Co.,

Adhesives, Coatings Sealers Div., Saint Paul, MN) by mixing 5 parté by \
volume part A to 4 parts by volume part B. Thoroughly mix the two
camponents together.
NOTE
The pot life of the mixed adhesive is approximately 60

minutes.
(e) Apply the adhesive in a thin even fits to the back of

the data plate.
Sheet 1 of 3
DATE Feb 12/81
NO. 12 Rev 3
(f) Position data plate on the gearbox case assembly.
(g) Apply contact pressure by the use of clamps or dead

weight to hold the data plate in position.
(h) Remove excess adhesive from along edges of the data

plate with a clean soft wiper wet with methyl-ethyl-ketone (table 15, item
26) or acetone (Federal Specification 0-A-51).
(i) Cure adhesive before removing clamps or dead weight by

one of the following methods:
1 For 24 hours at room temperature.
2 For 2 hours at 200°F (93°C).
3 For 4 hours using a 200 watt reflector heat lamp 2

to 4 inches from the data plate. The surface temperature must reach
120°F (49cc).
Paragraph 18, NOTE preceding step B. is revised as follows:
NOTE
If the data plate becomes damaged or is illegible, a

new data plate is available from Avco Lycoming. Make
a logbook entry covering the condition and forward the
old data plate along with justification for the removal
and your return address to:

Product Support Dept.
550 South Main Street
Stratford, Connecticut, 06497,
U. S. A.
Attention: Manager, LTS/LTP Customer Services
Upon receipt of the information and data plate, Avco

Lycoming will issue a new data plate for attachment to
the engine.
If the same accessory/reduction gearbox module is being

installed and the powertrain gear has not been replaced,
power turbine shaft and powertrain gear alignment must be
accomplished. (Refer to paragraph 14A.) If the accessory/
reduction gearbox module or the powertrain gear was re-
placed, a powertrain gear runout check must be accomplished.
Sheet 2 of 3
DATE Feb 12/81
NO. 12 Rev 3
Also, CAUTION after step B. is revised as follows:
CAUTION
IN FOLLOWING STEP, ENSURE GAS GENERATOR ACCESSORY DRIVE

AND DRIVEN GEARS MESH BY ROTATING COMPRESSOR ROTOR AS
ACCESSORY/REDUCTION GEARBOX MDDULEIS BEING INSTALLED.
IF GEARS ARE NOT MESHED DURING INSTALLATION OF MODULE,
DAMAGE AND POSSIBLE FAILURE CAN RESULT.
Also, paragraph 18, step Gl. is added as follows:
Gl. Perform pneumatic leak check. (Refer to 73-10-01, paragraph 7.)
Sheet 3 of 3
STWATW©AC. CONNECT1CUT
DATE Dec 22 /81
NO. 21 Rev 3

This MCN supersedes MCN No. 21 Rev 2 dated Sep 24/80. Please remove and
On page 39, paragraph 19, step D1. and Figure 5A. are added as follows:
D1. Check compressor rotor axial blade tip clearance as follows:
(1) Position airflow modulator actuator ring assembly in full

open position.
NOTE
Feeler gage use,d in following step (2) should be 12

inches long by 1/2 inch wide with insertion end re-
duced to 1/4 inch wide and 0.006 inch thick for
LTP 101-600 Series engines or 0.007 inch thick for
LTP 101-700 Series engines.
(2) Insert feeler gage

between blade tips and compressor vane
assembly (refer to figure 5A). Iffeeler gage cannot be inserted,
clearance is insufficient. Replace compressor rotor assembly. If feeler
gage can be inserted, slowly rotate compr'essor rotor by hand..Light or no
resistance to the feeler gage indicates sufficient clearance.
(3) Repeat step (2) in at least seven additional, equa11ý

spaced locations including the compressor vane assembly split lines.
MODEL DIMENSION A
LTP 101 400 SERIES 0.006 IN. MIN
LTP 101-700 SERIES 0.007 IN. MIN
MAPRE¾ORVANE I
N¾ÆMBLYCYLINDER
AXiAi. COMPRESSOR
BLADE
Figure SA. Compressor Rotor Axial Blade Tip Clearance
The technical aspects of this MCN were approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming,DER.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Dec 22/81
NO. 21 Rev 3
Step Gl. is added as follows:
Gl. Index power turbine rotor (40, figure 14) to power turbine
nozzle (36). Refer to paragraph 14A.
Paragraph 20, in Special Tools Required list, Spanner Wrench LTCT5708-02 is

deleted, and the following tool is added.
Fixture LTCT5455
CAUTION and NOTE following step A. (5) are added as follows:
CAUTION
IF SPACER SEPARATES FROM ROTOR DISC, ENSURE PRO-

PER INDEXING OF ROTOR TO SPACER IS ACCOMPLISHED
AND THEN REMOVE SPACER FROM IMPELLER. ASSEMBLY OF
ROTOR TO SPACER CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED BY PREHEATING
SEALING DISC/SPACER AT 135° TO 149°C (275°
TO 300°F) FOR 30 MINUTES, THEN MATCH INDEX
MARKS AND PRESS INTO PLACE. VERIFY RUNOUTOF
ROTUR BORE TO IMPELLER INTERFACE DOES NOT EXCEED
0.0005 INCH. UPON INSTALLATION OF ENGINE INTO
AIRFRAME, A VIBRATION TEST MUST BE PERFORMED.
NOTE
In following step, discard bolts (41) which are not

identified by a nine-digit part number.
Also, step B. is revised as follows:
B. Remove gas generator nozzle (46) and combustion chamber curl

(47). Straighten tabs of tabwasher (42). Remove bolts (41), and tabwashers
(42). Remove seal (43), gas generator nozzle (46), and combustion chamber
curl (47) from diffuser assembly. If required, remove two metal seal rings
(45) and expander springs (44) from ID of gas generator nozzle (46).
Sheet 2 of 2
A. Disconnect or remove tube assemblies and electri- Puller LTCTS656

cal connectors as required. Tag each disconnected or re-
moved tube assembly and electrical connectors and iden- Inner Race Puller LTCT5447
tify as to nomenclature and location.
Tool LTCT5598
brackets to ensure their reinstallation in correct position- Holding Fixture LTCT5708
Retain all mounting hardware for future reinstallation.
Spanner Wrench LTCTS708-02
C. Remove fire shield jumper tubes (Refer to 75-10-
03, 5 and 7, figure 1). Refer to 75-10-03, paragraph 2 A. Remove gas generator turbine rotor assembly as
for removal procedure. . follows:
D. Remove upper and lower inlet panels (Refer to (1) Straighten rim of locking cup (37, figure 7).
72-00-00, 3 and 14, figure 6). Refer to 72-20-00, para-
graph 2 for removal procedure. (2) Using fixture (LTCTS333-02) and torquing
and holding wrench (LTCTS332), break torque on nut
E. Remove airflow modulator actuator (Refer to 75- (36). Remove nut (36) and locking cup (37). Discard
30-01, 8, figure 1). Refer to 75-30-02, paragraph 2, for locking cup.
removal procedure.
(3) Using puller (LTCT5628), pull roller bearing
F. If gas generator module is to be replaced or dis- (38) and seal (39) from compressor shaft.
assembled, remove accessories. Refer to applicable chap-
ter/sections, kit manuals, or airframe manuals- (4) Index rear face of gas generator turbine ro-
tor to compressor shaft for proper reassembly.
G. Index accessory/reduction gearbox module (Refer
to 72-00-00, 1, figure 6), gas generator module (10), CAUTION
and combustor turbine module (9) for correct installa-
tion. GAS GENERATOR TURBINE ROTOR
ASSEMBLY (40) CONSISTS OF DISC,
H. Remove combustor turbine module (9). Refer to BLADES, SEALING PLATE, RING
paragraph 23. AND SPACER. DO NOT DISASSEM-
BLE. THIS ASSEMBLY MUST BE RE-
L Remove nuts (6) and washers (5), securing gas PLACED AS AN ASSEMBLY.
generator module (10) to accessory/reduction gearbox
module (1). Remove gas generator module (10) and (5) Using puller (LTCTS656), pull gas generator
place on solid working surface. Remove and discard turbine rotor assembly (40) from compressor shaft.
packings (11 and 12).
B. Remove gas generator nozzle (46) and combustion
J. Remove bolts (16) and clips (15), securing radial chamber curl (41). Straighten tabs of tabwashers (42).
inlet assembly (2) to gas generator module (10). Remove and discard bolts (41), and tabwashers (42). Re-
move seal (43), gas generator nozzle (46), and combus-
20. DISASSEMBLYOF GAS GENERATOR MODULE. tion chamber curl (47) from diffuser assembly. If re-
Proceed as follows: quired, remove two metal seal rings (45) and expander
springs (44) from ID of gas generator nozzle (46).
C. Remove air diffuser (48) as follows:
Holding Wrench LTCTS332
(1) Invert gas generator module onto a suitable
Fixture LTCT5333-02 wooden pad.
Puller LTCTS628
72-00-00
39
72-00-00

STRATFCAO, CONNŒCTICUT
DATE Liay 25/79
so. 22
On page 41, paragraph 20., steps C. (5) and (6) are added as follows:
(5) Place module, aft end up, onto bench. Install centering and
locating fixture (LTCT5455) onto rotor assembly and secure to diffuser
housing flange.
(6) Perforn C-clearance check as outlined in 72-00-00,

paragraph 21, step N. (10) (a). Record C-clearance for use during
reassembly. Remove centering and locating fixture (LTCTS455).
The technical aspects of this MCN were'approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of 1.
AVCO LYCOMING 01VISION
Key to Figure 6.
1. Accessory/Reduction Gearbox 6. Nut 12. Packing

Module 7. Bolt 13. Nut
2. Radial Inlet Assembly 8. Washer 14. Lower Radial Inlet
3. Upper Radial Inlet Panel 9. Combustor Turbine Module Panel
4. Bolt 10. Gas Generator Module 15. Clip
5. Washer 11. Packing 16. Bolt
(2) Remove bolts (32), lockwashers (33), cover (6) Using puller (LTCT5447), remove inner race
(34) and gasket (35) from diffuser housing (19). of ball bearing (9) from compressor shaft. Remove face-
plate of seal (11).
(3) Remove bolts (26 and 28), lockwashers (25
and 29), fittings (24 and 30), and gaskets (23 and 31) (7) Remove bolts (13) and lockwashers (14). Re-
from diffuser housing (19). move inlet housing assembly (12), compressor vane as-
sembly (27), and diffuser housing (19).
NOTE
(8) Using tool (LTCTSS98), push seal (11) from
In following step, a light tapping with inlet housing assembly.
a mallet may be required to free air
diffuser. (9) If required, remove cotter pin (50), washer
(55), and pin (54); then remove adjustable link assem-
(4) Remove bolts (22) and lockwashers (21) . bly (53).
from diffuser housing (19). Position module, inlet hous-
ing assembly down, onto bench. Remove air diffuser (10) If required, loosen nut (51). Remove adjust-
(48) from diffuser housing. able link (52) and nut (51) from adjustable link assem-
bly (53).
D. Remove inlet housing (12), compressor vane as-
(11) If required, loosen nut (61). Remove lever
sembly (27), and diffuser housing (19) as follows:
(62), nut (61), and spacer (60) from shaft (63). Remove
(1) Place module inlet housing up, onto bench. shaft from inlet housing assembly.
(2) Straighten rim of locking cup (2). Straight- (12) If required, remove links (64 and 59) from
en tabs of tabwashers (5). ring assembly (65). Remove ring assembly (65) from
inlet housing assembly.
(3) Install holding fixture (LTCTS367-01, detail
E. Remove compressor rotor assembly as follows:
of LTCTS708) and secure with bolts and nuts. Using
spanner wrench (LTCTS708-02, detail of LTCTS708), CAUTION
break torque on nut (1). Remove nut and locking cup;
then remove fixture. Remove spur gear (3)- COMPRESSOR ROTOR ASSEMBLY
(15) CONSISTS OF COMPRESSOR
(4) Remove four bolts (4) and tabwashers (5) SHAFT, AXIAL COMPRESSOR RO-
that secure No. 1 bearing package to inlet housing as- TOR, AND CENTRIFUGAL IMPEL-
sembly (12). Remove bearing retainer (6), shims (7 and LER. DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.
8), and bearing liner assembly (10) with outer race of
ball bearing (9) as a unit. (1) Straighten tabs of tabwashers (17). Remove
bolts (16) and tabwashers. Separate and remove impel-
(5) Remove remaining four bolts (4) and tab- ler shroud assembly (18).
washers (5). Remove bearing retainer (6), shims (7 and
8), and ball bearing (9) from bearing liner assembly (10). (2) Install compressor rotor assembly (15) into
suitable holding fixture.
72-00-00
41
13 14
12
SEE SHEET 2
FOR BREAKDOWN
4
2
3
1
18
23
36
39
49
LEGEND
TOROUE
TOROUE
I FT. LBS.
X-1053-107
Figure 7. Gas Generator Module (Sheet I of 2)
72-00-00

..::MWCO LYCOMING DIVISION
STStATPQitO, C©NNECTICUT DATE Nov 10 /8 0
NO.

On page 42, Figure 7. (sheet 1) is revised as shown on sheet 2.
\ TELEDYNE /
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Nov 10 /80
NO. 70
55
54
53 51
SEE SHEET 2
OR BREAKDOWN
6 11
4 10
2
17 15
18
22
25
44 44 43 37
39
47 45
L GEND
7°"LO E
TORQUE
FT. LBS.
X-1051107B
Figure 7. Gas Generator Module (Sheet 1 of 2)
Sheet 2 of 2
& ..
JACO LYCOMING DIVISION
DATE Nov 10/80 gymaygg g, gengggggggy
NO.

INSERT THIS PAGE .

Facing page 43, 72-00-00
On page 43, Key to Figure 7, item 20. is revised as follows:
20. Module Nameplate Bracket
The technical aspects of this MCN were approved by FAA per Aveo Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of 1
57
65
62 0
XA-1053-134
1. Nut 23. Gasket 44. Expander Spring

2. Locking Cup 24. P3 Fuel Control Fitting 45. Metal Seal Ring
3. Compressor Shaft Spur Gear 25. Lockwasher 46. Gas Generator Nozzle
4. Bolt 26. Bolt 47. Combustion Chamber Curl
5. Tabwasher 27. Compressor Vane Assembly 48. Air Diffuser Assembly
6. Bearing Retainer 28. Bolt 49. Ring
7. Outer Shim 29. Lockwasher 50. Cotter Pin
8. Inner Shim 30. Airflow Modulator Fitting 51. Nut
9. Ball Bearing 31. Gasket 52. Adjustable Link (Male End)
10. Bearing Liner Assembly 32. Bolt 53. Adjustable Link (Female End)
11. Seal 33. Lockwasher 54. Pin
12. Inlet Housing Assembly 34. Customer Air Bleed Cover 55. Washer
13. Bolt 35. Gasket 56. Insert
14. Lockwasher 36. Nut 57. Inlet Housing
15. Compressor Rotor Assembly 37. Locking Cup 58. Inserts
16. Bolt 38. Roller Bearing 59. Link
17. Tabwasher 39. Seal 60. Spacer
18. Impeller Shroud Assembly 40. Gas Generator Turbine 61. Nut
19. Diffuser Housing Rotor Assembly 62. Lever
20. Module Identification Plate 41. Bolt 63. Shaft
21. Lockwasher 42. Tabwasher 64. Link
22. Bolt 43. Seal 65. Ring Assembly
Figure 7. Gas Generator Module (Sheet 2 of 2)
72-00-00
43
21. REASSEMBLYOF GAS GENERATOR MODULE. (61, figure 7), as required, while maintaining proper po-
Proceed as follows: sition of shaft. Ensure dimension required in previous
step E. is met after installation of lever.
NOTE
Wrench LTCT3406
In following step, ends of gage must
Wrench LTCT5332 meet squarely with no overlap. If
Splined Shaft LTCT5333-02 ends do not meet, inspect compon-
ents to determine cause.
Centering and Locating Fixture LTCT5455
G. Install setting gage (LTCT5625) in ID of ring as-
Tool LTCT5598 sembly and move lever toward close until ends of gage
Setting Gage LTCT5625 butt together.
Holding Fixture LTCTS708 H. With ring held in closed position on gage, verify
that index mark on shaft aligns with scribed mark (C)
NOTE on inlet housing. If there is no closed mark on inlet
housing or if marks do not align, make a new mark on
During the following buildup proce- inlet housing. Remove gage.
dures, if a replacement part has a
serial number, enter both part num- I. Move lever toward open position until the entire
ber and serial number in engine log ring is out of the air flow path. As soon as ring is clear
and record card. of inlet housing bore, verify that index mark on shaft
aligns with scribed mark (O) on inlet housing. If there
In following step, use alignment pin is no open mark on inlet housing or if marks do not
in housing assembly as a guide. align, make a new mark on inlet housing. If ring does
not entirely clear housing assembly bore before shaft
A. Collapse ring assembly (65, figure 7) as required; goes over center, temporarily install compressor stator
then install ring assembly into inlet housing (12). assembly and make new mark on inlet housing where
ring clears ID of the stator assembly.
B. Check axial clearance between ring and groove in
inlet housing. The minimum axial clearance for 360 de- J. If removed, install nut (51, figure 7) on adjustable
grees shall be 0.004 inch, File ring, as required, up to link (52); then install adjustable link (52) in adjustable
0.002 inch maximum. Maintain ring flatness. link (53).
C. Apply lubricant (table 15, item 27) to both ends K. Install adjustable link on lever (62) and secure
of links (59 and 64, figure 7). Install long leg of one with pin (54), washer (55), and cotter pin (50).
link and short leg of other link on ring assembly (65).
L. If press seal (11) into inlet housing as-
removed,
D. Apply lubricant (table 15, item 27) to rubbing sembly (12), using tool (LTCT5598) and arbor press.
surface of shaft (63, figure 7). Install shaft into inlet
housing (12) and engage links (59 and 64). M. Install compressor rotor assembly as follows:
E. Install nut (61) and spacer (60) on lever (62). (1) Install impeller shroud assembly (18) around
Measure from bottom of spacer (60) to centerline of centrifugal impeller of compressor rotor assembly (15)
lever bearing hole (Refer to figure 8). Dimension shall and secure with bolts (16) and tabwashers (17).
be 0.66 inch. Adjust nut as required.
(2) Tighten bolts, as required, and bend tabs of
F. Hold nut from rotating and install assembled lev- washers against bolt heads.
er in shaft (63, figure 7). Hole in lever must be parallel
with centerline of shaft (Refer to figure 8). Tighten nut
72-00-00
aa © 1978, Avco Lycoming Division

.dAVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
STMATWOM©.CONNECT1CWY
DATE Feb 12/81
No. $ÛRev $
This MUN supersedes MCN No. 30 Rev 2 dated Sep 26/80. Please remove and
On page 44, paragraph 21, in Special Tools Required list, Wrench LTCT3406 is
deleted and the following tools are added:
Wrench LTCT3046
Setting .Gage LTGT5645
NOTE following Special Tools Required is revised as follows:
NOTE
During the following buildup procedures, a re-

if
placenent part has a serial number, enter both part
number and serial number in engine Logbook and mo-
dule record card.
Step lA. and NOTE is added as follows:
lA. If removed, install seal (11, figure 7) as follows:
(1) Heat inlet housing assembly (12) in a suitable oven to 82

to 93°C (180 to 200°F) for 15 minutes minimum.
(2) Remove inlet housing assembly (12) from oven and using
arbor press and tool (LTCT5598), press seal (11) into inlet housing
assembly (12).
NOTE
In following step, use alignment pin in housing assem-

bly as a guide.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Feb 12/81
NO. 30 Rev 3
Steps E. and G. are revised as follows:
E. Install nut (61) and spacer (60) on lever (62). Measure from
bottom of spacer (60) to centerline of lever bearing hole (Refer to figure
8). Dimension shall be approximately 0.785 inch. Adjust nut as required.
G, On all LTP 101 engines except the

-700
series engines, install
setting gage (LTCT5625) in ID of ring assembly; on LTP 101-700 series
engines install setting gage (LTCTS645) in ID of ring assembly. Move lever
toward close until ends of gage butt together.
Also, step L. is deleted.
Sheet 2 of 2
STWATWOMO. CONNECT1CUT DATE Apr 30/81
NO. R ev

This MCN supersedes MCN No. 33 Rev 1 dated Oct 29/80. Please remove and
On page 45, Figure 8. is revised as follows:
MARKS SCRIBED ON INLET

-0.785
IN- HOUSING ASSEMBLY
C 0
LEVER
SHAFT
ALIGNMENT
MARKS
INLET HOUSING
ASSEMBLY XA-1045-113A
Figure 8. Adjustment of Lever and Scribing of Open and Closed Marks on

Inlet Housing Assembly
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Apr 30/81
NO. 33 Rev 2
Also, NOTE following step N. (4) is revised and Figure 8A. is added as follows:
NOTE
In following step, select inner shim (8) of thickness

required to obtain an 0.0015 to 0.0035 inch axial clear-
ance between bearing retainer (6) and outer race of ball
bearing (9). (Refer to figure SA.) Shim thickness range
is 0.0397 to 0.0702 inch. (Refer to figure 9.)
DASH
DIM A (IN.)
NO.
-01
0.0205 -
0.0209
-Oi 0.0210 --
0.0215
-d3 0.0220 -
0.0 25
A4 0.ðž30 -
O 0205
« 4)6 0,0240 -
0.0 45
0 0250 -
0.0255
4 7 0.0260 -
.0265
9 0.0280 -
0 0285
-iO 0.0290 -
0 02á5
Ti 6 6300 -
o 0505
J2 0.0310 -
0.0315
-13
0.03 O -
0.0325
-14
0.0330 -
d.0Š36
45 0,0340 -
0.0345
0.075
- DIM A
0.069
NOTE: USE TWO SHIMS TO OBTAIN 0.031 TO 0.041 SOLID, .
SPECIFIEDCLEARANCE REMAINING THICKNESS IS IN

--
0.001 THICK LAMINATIONS
P/N 4.101-092-01
THRU P/N 4-101-015-03
4-1014)92-15
ALL ÖfMENSIONS
ARE IN NCHES
x Ïo 41a
Figure 8A. Shim Selection
Sheet 2 of 2
AVCD LYCOMING DIVISION
MARKS SCRIBED ON INLET

0.66 IN. HOUSIN SEMBLY
LEVER
SHAFT
ALIGNMENT
MARKS
INLET HOUSING
ASSEMBLY ×A-1045-113
Figure 8. Adjustment of Lever and Scribing of Open and Closed Marks on Inlet Housing Assembly
N. Install inlet housing, compressor vane, and diffuser NOTE

housing as follows:
In following step, select inner shim
(1) Install diffuser housing (19) over shroud as- (8) of thickness required to obtain
sembly (18) and align hole pattern. Install compressor an 0.0008 to 0.0018 inch axial clear-
vane assembly (27) and align hole pattern with diffuser ance between bearing retainer (6) and
housing hole pattern. outer race of ball bearing (9). Shim
thickness range is 0.0397 to 0.0702
(2) Install inlet housing assembly (12) onto vane inch. (Refer to figure 9).
assembly (27) and diffuser housing (19), and align hole
pattern. CAUTION
(3) Lubricate threads of bolts (13) with Ease-Off LOOKING AFT, ENSURE OIL TRANS-
990 (table 15, item 14). Install bolts (13, figure 7) and FER HOLE IN BEARING RETAINER
lockwashers (14), and tighten bolts as required. IS AT 3-O'CLOCK POSITION. OTHER-
WISE, BEARING WILL NOT RECEIVE
NOTE LUBRICATION.
In following step, align slot in outer (5) Install inner shim (8, figure 7) and outer shim
ring of ball bearing (9) with pin in (7); then align hole pattern, and install bearing retainer
bearing liner assembly (10). (6) into bearing liner assembly (10). Secure bearing re-
tainer to liner with bolts (4) and tabwashers (5). Tighten
(4) Using a suitable drift and an arbor press, bolts as required.
press outer race of ball bearing (9), thrust side forward,
into bearing liner assembly (10).
72-00-00
45
.JPAVCD LYCOMING OlVISION
(6) Install inner ring and balls of bearing (9) (12) Deform rim of locking cup (2, figure 7) in
into outer race. Coat aft side of inner race and balls two places, 180 degrees apart.
with shortening (table 15, item 19) to hold inner race
in place. Install No. 1 bearing package to inlet housing. (13) Bend tabs of tabwashers (5) against heads of
bolts (4).
(7) Install compressor shaft spur gear (3, figure
7) and use gear and soft mallet to seat bearing (9). Ap- (14) Remove assembly from holding fixture and
ply paste consisting of 25 grams of Molykote Type "Z" place assembly on bench, inlet side down. Remove cen-
(table 15, item 27) and 10 grams of lubricating oil (ta- tering and locating fixture (LTCT5455).
ble 15, item 23) to threads and face of nut (1). Install
nut (1) and locking cup (2) on compressor shaft. O. Install air diffuser as follows:
(8) Install centering and locating fixture (LTCT (1) Install air diffuser assembly (48) onto suit-
5455) onto rotor assembly and secure to diffuser hous- able wooden pad, aft end down. Place assembled por-
ing flange, Install holding fixture (LTCT5367-01, detail tion of gas producer module onto air diffuser and align
of LTCT5708) and secure with bolts and nuts. Using bolt hole pattern. Lubricate bolts (22) with Ease-Off 990
spanner wrench (LTCTS708-02), tighten nut (1) 30 to (table 15, item 14), then install bolts and lockwashers
45 foot-pounds torque. Remove holding fixture (LTCT (21, figure 7). Tighten bolts as required.
5708).
(9) Secure No. I bearing package to inlet hous-

ing with four bolts (4) and tabwashers (5). Tighten bolts
: IN.
as required. o.o7o2 IN. 0.0008
0.0397
INNER SHIM
NOTE
THICKNESS
RANGE
In following step, C-clearance shall be

0.014 to 0.016 inch if new housings
are used, or 0.018 to 0.022 inch clear-
ance if used housings are used.
(10) Check C-clearance as follows:
(a) With compressor rotor in its most for-

ward position, check clearance (Refer to figure 10) in
four equally spaced locations. Record clearance.
(b) If limits cannot be met, adjust thiclmess

of outer shim (7, figure 7), as required, and record new
shim thickness. Shim thickness range is 0.0132 to
0.0592 inch. (Refer to figure 9).
(11) Rotate compressor rotor assembly to check

for freedom of movement.
N.
0.0132
CAUTION OUTER SHIM
THICKNESS RANGE XA-1048-131
IN FOLLOWING STEP, DO NOT AL-

LOW TOOL TO CONTACT GEAR. Figure 9. Bearing Axial Clearance Location and
ENSURE LOCKCUP IS NOT CRACKED. Shim Thickness Ranges
72-00-00

STRATFCA©.CONNECT1CUT
DATE Apr 30/81
NO. ÈRev $

This MCN supersedes MCN No. 23 Rev 2 dated Oct 29/80. Please remove and dis-
On page 46, paragraph 21., step N. (8) is revised as follows:
(8) Install centering and locating fixture (LTCT5455) onto

rotor assembly and secure to diffuser housing flange. Install holding fix-
ture (LTCT5367-01, detail of LTCTS708), and secure with two bolts and
nuts. Using spanner wrench (LTCT5708-02, detail of LTCT5708), tighten nut
(1) 30 to 45 foot-pounds torque. Remove holding fixture (LTCT5367-01).
NOTE preceding step N. (10) is revised as follows:
NOTE
In following step, C-clearance shall be 0.020 to 0.025

inch if new or recoated housings are used, or 0.020 inch
minimum if original housing is to be reinstalled without
recoating.
Step N. (10) (b) is revised as follows:
(b) If limits cannot be met, adjust thickness of outer

shim (7, figure 7), as required, and record new shim thickness.
Step N. (14) is revised as follows:
(14) Place assembly on bench, inlet side down. Remove centering

and locating fixture (LTCT5455).
Sheet 1 of 2
Date Apr 30/81
NO . 2 3 R ev 3
Also, Figure 9. is revised as follows:
0.0035
IN
IN. 0.0015
0.0397
INNER SHIM
TalCKNESS /
AANGE
OUTER SHIM
X A-1091-146 A
Figure 9. Bearing Axial Clearance Location and Shim Thickness Range
Sheet 2 of 2
AJAVCD LYCOIVilNG DIVISION
STRATFORD, CONN. DATE Jan 6/82
NO. 24 R ev 4

INSERT TRIS PAGE Preceding page 47, 72-00-00
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 24 Rev 3 dated Oct 29/80. Please remove and dis-
(NEW OR
IN. RECOATED
0.020 HOUSING)
0.020 IN. (MINI (USED

HOUSING
WITHOUT
RECOATING)
0.25 iN.
"C"CLEARANCE
LOCATION
(4 PLACES EQUALLY
SPACED)
XA-1053-136B
Figure 10. Checking Engine C-Clearance
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Jan 6/82
NO. 24 Rev 4
Paragraph 21., NOTE following step P. (2) is revised as follows:
NOTE
In following step, use only bolts (41) which are

identified by a nine-digit part number on the head.
Step P. (3) is revised as follows:
(3) Install combustion chamber curl (47), gas generator nozzle

(46) and seal (43) onto air diffuser assembly (48). Coat threads of bolts
(41) with Ease-Off 990 (table 15, item 14); then install bolts and
tabwashers (42, figure 7). Tighten bolts (41) as required. Bend tabs of
tabwashers securely against heads of bolts.
CAUTION following step P. (5) is added as follows:
CAUTION
Ensure O.D. compressor

of rotor assembly (15) shaft
and I.D. of rotor assembly (40) are free of carbon
deposits. Carbon deposits can cause damage to com-
pressor shaft. If necessary, clean with carbon re-
moving compound and fiber brush.
Ensure mating surfaces of spacer and impeller are

clean and free of foreign material. If necessary,
clean with dry cleaning solvent.
Also, NOTE following step P. (5) is revised as follows:
NOTE
Place a spacer of sufficient height under spur gear (3,

figure 7) so inlet housing is not sitting on plate of
arbor press. This is to prevent preload damage to ball
bearing (9) when pressing seal (39) and roller bearing
(38) onto compressor shaft.
Sheet 2 of 2
(2) If removed, install expander springs (44) and

metal seal rings (45) in grooves in OD of gas generator
nozzle (46).
NOTE
In following step, use only new bolts

(41) which have heads coated with
green dye.
(NEW
IN
HOSESING)
(3) combustion chamber curl (47), gas
IRStall
IN
HOUSING)
0.018
geneTRÍOT (46), and seal (43) onto air diffuser as-
ROzzle
sembly (48). Coat threads of new bolts (41) with Ease-
Off 990 (table 15, item 14); then install bolts and tab-
025]N. Washers (42, figure 7). Tighten bolts (41) as required.
"C"CLEARANCE Bend tabs of tabwashers securely against heads of bolts.
LOCATION
(4 PLACES EOUALLY
SPACED)
NOTE
If gas generator module is removed,

place a spacer of sufficient height un-
der spur gear (3) so inlet housing is
not sitting on plate or arbor press.
This is to prevent preload damage to
bearing (9) when gas generator turbine
rotor assembly (40) is pressed onto
compressor shaft.
. XA 1053 136
Figure 10. Checking Engine C-Clearance (4) If gas generator module is removed, using a
suitable lifting sling, move gas generator module to an
arbor press. Remove sling.
(2) Install gasket (31) and airflow modulator
fitting (30) next to customer pad on diffuser housing (5) Align match marks made during disassembly,
(19). Lubricate bolts (28) with Ease-Off 990 (table 15, and, using a suitable pusher, install gas generator turbine
item 14); then install bolts and lockwashers (29, figure rotor assembly (40) onto compressor shaft.
7). Tighten bolts as required.
NOTE
(3) Install gasket (23) and P3 fuel control fit-
ting (24) on diffuser housing (19). Lubricate bolts (26) New rotor assembly may be installed in
with Ease-Off 990 (table 15, item 14); then install bolts any radial position. Lubricate nut (36)
and lockwashers (25, figure 7). Tighten bolts as required. with a paste consisting of approximately
25 grams of Molykote Type Z powder
(4) Install gasket (35) and cover (34) on diffus- (table 15, item 27) and 10 grams lubri-
er housing (19) pad. Lubricate bolts (32) with Ease-Off cating oil (table 15, item 23).
990 (table 15, item 14); then install bolts and lock-
washer (33, figure 7). Tighten bolts as required. Place a spacer of sufficient height under
spur gear (3, figure 7) so inlet housing
P. Install gas generator turbine, seal, nozzle, and is not sitting on plate of arbor press.
combustion chamber curl as follows: This is to prevent preload damage to
bearing (9) when pressing seal (39) and
(1) Invert gas generator module; position mod- roller bearing (38) onto compressor
ule on bench, inlet housing down. shaft.
72-00-00
47
(6) If removed, using a suitable drift and an ar- NOTE

bor press, press seal (39) and roller bearing (38) onto
compressor shaft and secure in place with nut (36) and When gas generator module has been
locking cup (37). replaced, power trim check must be
accomplished. Refer to airframe flight
(7) If gas generator module is removed, using a and maintenance manuals. Enter new
suitable lifting sling, position gas generator module in module data in engine/module logbook.
a suitable holding fixture; then remove lifting sling.
In following step, if the engine was re-
(8) Using dial indicator, measure height of com- moved from the aircraft, ensure that
pressor shaft. (Refer to figure 11.) accessory/reduction gearbox module is
positioned in maintenance stand(LTCT
NOTE 5463).
Preload compressor shaft in a radial A. Install new packing (11, figure 6) on accessory/
direction to prevent shaft movement. reduction gearbox module (1) and packing (12) on oil
transfer tube (91, figure 2).
(9) Measure and record dimension A shown in
figure 11. B. Install radial inlet assembly (2, figure 6) on gas
generator module (10) with bolts (16) and clips (15).
(10) Using splined shaft (LTCTS333-02), with
wrench (LTCTS332 and LTCT3046), tighten nut (36, NOTE
figure 7) 110 to 140 foot-pounds (estimated) torque.
In following step, ensure that oil trans-
(1i) Remeasure and record dimension A shown fer tube enters oil hole in bearing re-
in figure 11 in the same position used in preceding tainer (6, figure 7) during installation.
step (9).
C. Align index marks made during removal and install
(12) Subtract dimension recorded in previous gas generator on accessory/reduction gearbox module.
step (9) from dimension recorded in step (11). Differ- Secure with four nuts (6, figure 6), and washers (5).
ence is the compressor shaft stretch and shall be be- Tighten nuts 120 to 165 inch-pounds torque.
tween 0.011 to 0.012 inch.
D. Install combustor turbine module (9). (Refer to
(13) Adjust torque on nut (36, figure 7) as nec- paragraph 26.)
essary, to bring shaft stretch within limits.
E. Check power turbine tip clearances and axial clear-
(14) Deform locking cup (37) into two slots of ances between forward blade root and nozzle inner shroud.
nut (36), 180 degrees apart. (Push forward on power turbine rotor while checking).
22. INSTALLATION OF GAS GENERATOR MOD- F. Using spline handle (LTCTS484), rotate Ng and
ULE. Proceed as follows: Np gear trains and rotor, and check for noise and free-
dom of rotation.
G. Install accessories on gas generator module as re-
Spline Handle LTCT5484 quired. (Refer to applicable chapter/sections, kit manu-
als, or airframe maintenance manual.
72-00-00

..-
FAVCD LYOOIVIING OlVISION
STRATFORO, CONN,
DATE Jan 6/82
NO. 13 Rev 3
THIS CRANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 13 Rev 2 dated May 21/81. Please remove and discard
MCN No. 13 Rev 2.
On page 48, paragraph 21, CAUTION preceding step P. (6) is added and step P.
(6) is revised as follows:
CAUTION
ENSURE THAT RUNNER OF SEAL (39) IS CLEAN AND FREE

•
OF ANY FOREIGN MATERIAL. IF NECESSARY, CLEAN WITH
DRY CLEANING SOLVENT.
(6) If removed, using a suitable drift and an arbor press,

press seal (39) and roller bearing (38) onto compressor shaft.
CAUTION and NOTE preceding step P. (7A) and step P. (7A) are added as follows:
CAUTION
ENSURE SHAFT THREADS OF COMPRESSOR ROTOR ASSEMBLY

(15) AND TEREADS OF NUT (36) ARE CLEAN AND FREE
OF ANY FOREIGN MATERIAL. IF NECESSARY, CLEAN WITH
DRY CLEANING SOLVENT.
NOTE
If new rotor assembly is being installed, align balance

marks on gas generator rotor and compressor shaft.
Thoroughly
(7A) mix 25 grams of molykote dry lubricant (table'
15, item 27) and 10 milliliters of spindle oil (MIL-L-46014, Type 2).
Apply a light coat of lubricant to compressor shaft threads, threads and
clamping face of nut (36), and to nut cavity in locking cup (37). Install
nut (36) and locking cup (37) on compressor shaft.
Sheet 1 of 3
DATE Jan 6/82
No. 13 Rev 3
(13B) Replace nut (36) if it shows evidence of burrs or surface

defects on threads. Polish face of nut and/or locking cup (37) if they
show evidence of burrs or surface defects. If there are any burrs or sur-
face defects on threads of shaft, polish threads using Tampico brush
(FC-2592-PA-20, Osborne Mfg. Co., Cleveland, Ohio) or equivalent, and
Roberts Rouge No. 1 (Roberts Rouge Co., Stratford, Conn.) or equivalent
(minimal stock removal) and reinspect. When defects have been eliminated
from all parts, repeat steps (7A) through (13).
Also, paragraph 22, CAUTION after step B. is added as follows:
CAUTION
IN FOLLOWING STEP, ENSURE GAS GENERATOR ACCESSORY

DRIVE AND DRIVEN GEARS MESH BY ROTATING COMPRESSOR
ROTOR AS GAS GENERATOR MODULE IS BEING INSTALLED.
IF GEARS ARE NOT MESHED DURING INSTALLATION OF
MODULE, DAMAGE AND POSSIBLE FAILURE CAN RESULTS.
Sheet 3 of 3
DATE Jan 6/82
NO. 13 Rev 3
Step 5. (10) is revised as follows:
(10) Using splined shaft (LTCT5333-02) with wrenches (LTCTS332

and LTCT3046), tighten nut (36, figure 7) to approximately 120 foot-pounds
torque.
NOTE preceding step P. (12) is added and step P. (12) is revised as follows:
NOTE
In following step, after establishing compressor

shaft elongation, measure inner diameter of shaft
at gas producer nut (36, figure 7) location. When
using a new shaft, the inner diameter shall not be
less than 1.1855 inches. When using a shaft from
a previously run engine, the inner diameter shall
not be less than 1.184 inches.
(12) Subtract dimension recorded in previous step (9) from

dimension recorded in step (11). Difference is compressor shaft stretch
and shall be between 0.0115 and 0.0120 inch.
NOTE preceding step P. (13) is added and step P. (13) is revised as follows:
NOTE
The following step must be accomplished each time an

attempt is made to attain proper stretch.
(13) If proper stretch not wasattained in step (12), remove nut

and locking cup. Clean lubricant from nut, cup, and shaft threads with dry
cleaning solvent. Relubricate shaft threads, nut, and locking cup (refer
to previous step (7A) and repeat steps (9) through (12) with an increase
or decrease, as required, from initial torque of 120 foot-pounds. Torque
shall not exceed 200 foot-pounds.
Steps P. (13A) and P. (13B) are added as follows:
(13A) If maximum torque is reached before the elongation is

attained in previous step (13), disassemble the components and inspect for
burrs and surface defects on shaft threads, threads and clamping face of
nut (36), and forward face of locking cup (37). Visually inspect for
presence of lubricant.
Sheet 2 of 3
f
r
ACCEPTABLE METHOD
PREFERRED METHOD
¯¯
XA-1048-132
Figure 11. Measuring Stretch of Compressor Shaft
72-00-00
49
H. Install airflow modulator actuator. (Refer to 75- E. Index combustor turbine module (Refer to 72-00-
30-02, paragraph 6 for installation procedure). 0(), 4, figure 12) and gas generator module (5) for cor-
rect reinstallation.
I. Install upper and lower radial inlet panels (3 and
14, figure 6). Secure with bolts (4) and nuts (13). F. Support combustor turbine module and remove
Tighten as required. bolts (2) and washers (3) that secure combustor turbine
module to gas generator module.
J. Install fire shield jumper tubes (Refer to 75-10-03,
5 and 7, figure 1). (Refer to 75-10-03, paragraph 6 for NOTE
installation procedure.)
In following step, two men are re-
K. Using mounting hardware removed, install and con- quired to remove combustor turbine
nect brackets, wiring, and tubing as required. Connect module.
tube assemblies to proper parts/connectors observing tags
installed at removal. Tighten all fittings as required. G. Using 1/4-28 jackscrewsinstalled in puller holes
of impeller diffuser housing, remove combustor turbine
L. If install engine in aircraft. (Refer to
required, module rearward far enough to clear power turbine shaft.
71-00-00, paragraph 26.)
H. Place combustor turbine module with power tur-
23. REMOVAL OF COMBUSTOR TURBINE MOD- bine shaft facing upward, on solid flat working surface.
ULE. Proceed as follows:
I. Fabricate gas generator turbine disc cover as shown
NOTE in figure 13. Position cover over gas generator turbine
disc and secure in place with masking tape.
If it is necessary to remove the engine
in order to remove the combustor tur- 24. DISASSEMBLYOF COMBUSTORTURBINE MOD-
bine module, refer to 71-00-00, para- ULE. Proceed as follows:
graph 25.
with clean caps or plugs to prevent Spanner Wrench LTCT3046
contamination.
Spanner Wrench LTCT5334
A. Disconnect or remove tube assemblies and electri~ No. 2 Seal Pusher LTCT5390
cal connectors as required. Tag each disconnected or
removed tube assembly and electrical connectors and No. 3 Bearing Puller LTCT5393
identify as to nomenclature and location.
A. Remove igniter plugs (18, figure 14) from combus-
B. Tag and note location of all clamps, ties, and tor and bearing support housing (12).
brackets to ensure their reinstallation in correct posi-
tion. Retain all mounting hardware for future reinstal- B. Remove fuel nozzle and manifold assembly (25).
lation. For removal instructions, refer to 73-10-04, paragraph 2.
C. Remove airflow modulator actuator (Refer to 75- C. Remove combustion chamber liner assembly (1) as
30-01, 8, figure 1). Refer to 75-30.02, paragraph 2 for follows:
removal procedure.
(1) Bend tabs of lockwashers (15). Remove bolts
turbine module is to be replaced or
D. If combustor (16) and lockwashers (15), securing combustion chamber
disassembled,remove accessories. Refer to applicable liner assembly (1) to housing (12).
chapter/sections, kit manuals, or airframe maintenance
manuals. (2) Remove liner assembly and discard lockwashers.
72-00-00
50 © 1978, Aveo Lycoming Division

JAvec LYCOMING OlVISION
sTRATweng. CONNBCTIC1.JT
DATE Feb 12/81
NO. 25Rev
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 25 Rev 1 dated Sep 24/80. Please remove and
On page 50, paragraph 22, steps Kl. and Kl. are added as follows:
Hl. Check compressor rotor axial blade tip clearance. (Refer to

72-00-00, paragraph 19 , step Dl.) If rotor assembly was replaced due to
tip rubs and minimum clearance cannot be attained, replace compressor vane
assembly.
Kl. Perform pneumatic leak check. (Refer to 73-10-01, paragraph 7.)
Also, paragraph 23, step E1. is added as follows:
E1. Index the power turbine rotor (40, figure 14) to power turbine
nozzle (36). (Refer to paragraph 14A.)
Sheet 1 of 1
¿PAVCO LYCOMING OlVISION
2 3
4
X-1053-108
1. Accessory/Reduction Gearbox 2. Bolt 4. Combustor Turbine Module

Module 3. Washer 5. Gas Generator Module
Figure 12. Removal/Installation of Combustor Turbine Module
D. Remove thermocoupÏe
assemblies (5). For remov- F. Remove power turbine rotor assembly (40) as fol-
al instructions, refer to 77-20-02, paragraph 2. lows:
E. Remove retaining plates (2) as follows: (1) Position combustor and bearing support hous-
ing (12) on flat work surface providing access to both
(1) Bend tabs of key washers (19). power turbine rotor assembly (40) and forward end of
power turbine shaft.
(2) Remove bolts (20), key washers (19), and
retaining plate (2). CAUTION
NOTE IN FOLLOWING STEP, USE CARE

WHEN REMOVING POWER TUR-
It is not necessary to remove combus- BINE ROTOR; POWER TURBINE
tion chamber liner assembly (1) in or- NOZZLE (36) MAY DROP WHEN
der to remove power turbine rotor as- POWER TURBINE ROTOR IS BE-
sembly (40) and nozzle (36). ING REMOVED.
72-00-00
51
AVCO L.YCOMING OlVl510N
-
2-3/8 IN.
1/4 IN FABRICATE FROM SUITABLE PLASTIC OR WOOD ×A-992-119
Figure 13. Gas Generator Turbine Disc Cover --

.Fabrication
(2) Using a soft-faced mallet, tap on speed in- (1) Straighten tabs of key washers (22). Remove
dicator plug (41), in forward end of power turbine bolts (23) and key washers (22) securing shroud (21) to
shaft, to disengage power turbine rotor assembly (40) support housing (12).
from housing. Remove power turbine rotor.
(2) Remove shroud (21).
G. Remove power turbine nozzle (36) as follows:
K. Disassemble power turbine rotor assembly (40) as
(1) Remove power turbine nozzle from housing. follows:
Remove ring spacers (31).
CAUTION
H. Remove oil feed ring (30) and roller bearing outer
ring (28) from support housing (12). DO NOT REMOVE PLUG (41) FROM
POWER TURBINE ROTOR ASSEMBLY.
I. Using No. 2 seal pusher (LTCT5390), remove No.
2 bearing seal (3) from combustor and bearing support (1) Place power turbine rotor assembly in a suit-
housing (12). able holding fixture.
J. Remove shroud (21) as follows: (2) Unlock locking cup (33).Using spanner wrench
(LTCT5334 and LTCT3046), remove nut (32) and lock-
NOTE ing cup (33) from power turbine rotor assembly. Discard
locking cup (33).
In following step, remove shroud (21)
only if replacement is required.
72-00-00

M LYCOMING DIVISION
STWATPCINO, C©NNECTICtJT
DATE Nov 10/80
NO . Rev I
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 45 dated Dec 19/79. Please remove and discard MCN
No. 45
On page 53, Figure 14. is revised as showtt on sheet 2.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATËNov 10 /8 0
NO. 45 R ev I
37
o ou
x.ios ise
Figure 14. Combustor Turbine Module
Sheet 2 of 2
12
10
4
1
17
2
, Figure 14. Combustor Turbine Module
72-00-00
53
Key to Figure 14.
1. Combustion Chamber Liner Assembly 22. Key Washer

2. Retaining Plate 23. Bolt
3. No. 2 Bearing Seal 24. Seal
4. Thermocouple Mounting Plate 25. Fuel Nozzle and Manifold Assembly
5. Thermocouple Assembly 26. Lockwasher
6. Key Washer 27. Bolt
7. Bolt 28. Roller Bearing Outer Ring
8. Bolt 29. Oil Transfer Tube
9. Key Washer 30. Oil Feed Ring
10. Gasket . 31. Ring Spacer
11. Module Identification Plate 32. Nut
12. Combustor and Bearing Support 33. Locking Cup
Housing 34. Ball Bearing
13. Anchor Nut 35. No. 3 Bearing Seal
14. Dowel 36. Power Turbine Nozzle
15. Eockwasher 37. Gasket
16. Bolt 38. Pin
17. Pin 39. Seal Housing
18. Igniter Plug 40. Power Turbine Rotor Assembly
19. Key Washer 41. Plug
20. Bolt 42. Retainer
21. Shroud 43. Igniter Plug Sealing Guide
(3) Using No. 3 bearing puller (LTCTS393), CAUTION

remove ball bearing (34) from power turbine rotor as-
sembly. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF BEAR-
ING OUTER RING (28, FIGURE 14)
(4) Remove seal housing (39) from power tur- IN FOLLOWING STEP, ENSURE THAT
bine rotor assembly. Remove gasket (37). ANTIROTATIONAL PIN (17) IS SE-
CURE IN BEARING BORE AND PRO-
(5) Using a suitable sleeve, remove No; 3 bear- TRUDES APPROXIMATELY 0.070
ing seal (35) from seal housing (39). INCH.
25. REASSEMBLY OF COMBUSTORTURBINE MOD- A. Position outer ring (28) (flange end aft) in bearing
ULE. Proceed as follows: bore, aligning machined flat on ring with machined cut-
out in bore at 6-o'clock position, one slot in ring with
Special Tools Required antirotational pin at 2-o'clock position and remaining
slot in ring with oil hole in bore at 3-o'clock position.
Special Wrench LTCT3046
B. Position oil feed ring (30) over outer ring (28),
Wrench LTCTS334 aligning transfer tube (29) with slot at 3-o'clock posi-
tion on outer ring. Install oil feed ring, engaging tube
NOTE . with slot.
During the following buildup proce- C. Install No. 2 bearing seal (3) as follows:
dures, if a replacement part has a
serial number, enter both part num-
ber and serial number in engine log
and record card.
72-00-00

JMCO LYCOMING DIVISION
sTWATweno, coNNecticur
DATE Nov 10/80
NO. ÛR ev Ë
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 46 dated Dec 19/79. Please remove and discard MCN
No. 46.
On page 54, Key to Figure 14, item 11.is reyised and item 44,is added as
follows:
11. Module Nameplate Bracket
44. Dowel
Sheet 1 of 1
APAVCO LYCOlVIING OtVISION
DATE Sep 16/81
90. 63aev 1
No. 63.
On page 55, paragraph 25, step D.(2) is revised and steps D.(3) through (9)
are added as follows:
(2) Install shroud (21) onto support housing (12) and secure
with key washers (22) and bolts (23). Tighten bolts as required. If used
shroud (21) has been installed, do not bend key washers at this time and
perform following steps (3) through (9).
(3) Install 0.015 inch diameter copper wire in three places

over tip of one gas producer turbine blade. Secure with suitable tape
around airfoil.
(4) Position support housing (with shroud installed) onto

engine and secure with 8 bolts equally spaced.
(5) Rotate the compressor rotor at least one revolution.
(6) Remove support housing from the engine.
(7) Inspect wire and shroud for evidence of rubs. Rubs are not e
allowed. Remove wire and tape from gas producer turbine blade.
(8) If rubs were evident, replace shroud or forward shroud and

support housing to an Avco Lycoming approved Service Center for repair.
(9) If rubs were not evident, bend key washers (22) into bolts
(23).
Also, NOTE preceding step J. (1) is added as follows:
When new power turbine rotor assembly (40) is installed,

a runout check must be performed. (Refer to paragraph
Sheet 1 of 1
(1) Place support housing assembly (12) aft end H. Install power turbine nozzle (36) in support hous-
down on an arbor press. Using suitable bar stock, in- ing (12).
stall No. 2 bearing seal (3) into support housing (12),
making certain that scribed radial line on seal case is I. Assemble power turbine rotor assembly (40) as
within 0.20 inch total of dowel centerline. follows: Place power turbine rotor assembly into a suit-
able holding fixture.
(2) Remove support housing (12) from arbor
press. (1) Install gasket (37) onto seal housing (39) and
install seal housing (39) and gasket (37) onto power tur-
D. Install shroud (21) as follows: bine rotor assembly. Install No. 3 seal faceplate.
(1) Lubricate threads of bolts (23) with Ease- (2) Using a mallet and fibre drift, install ball
Off 990 (table 15, item 14). bearing (34) onto power turbine rotor assembly, making
certain pins in seal housing (39) are engaged in grooves
(2) Install shroud (21, figure 14) onto support of bearing.
housing (12) and secure with key washers (22) and
bolts (23). Tighten bolts as required. Bend key wash- (3) Prepare a paste consisting of approximately
ers into bolts. 25 grams of Molykote type Z powder (table 15, item
27) and 10 grams of lubricating oil (table 15, item 23).
E. Determine pinch of ball bearing (34) as follows: Lubricate threads and face of nut (32, figure 14) with
(Refer to figure 15). prepared paste.
(1) Measure from seal housing surface of sup- (4) Install locking cup (33) and nut (32) onto
port housing (12, figure 14) to oil feed ring (30). Re- power turbine rotor assembly. Using spanner wrench
cord as dimension A. (LTCT3046) and wrench (LTCT5334), tighten nut (32)
30 to 45 foot-pounds torque. Bend locking cup into
Measure thickness of outer race of ball bear-
(2) nut in two places, 180 degrees apart.
ing (34). Record as dimension B.
J. Install power turbine rotor assembly (40) as fol-
(3) Measure from forward face of seal housing lows:
(39) to seat of ball bearing (34). Record as dimension C.
(1) Lubricate threads of bolts (20) with Ease-
(4) Dimension A minus dimension B minus di- Off 990 (table 15, item 14). Install power turbine ro-
mension C plus PINCH equals the thickness of two tor assembly with two ring spacers (31, figure 14) se-
ring spacers (38) required. A 0.0382 to 0.0591 inch lected in step E. in support housing (12).
thickness of two spacers must be maintained when ob-
taining a 0.002 to 0.004 inch pinch. (2) Secure with retaining plate (2), key washers
(19) and bolts (20). Tighten bolts as required. Bend
(5) Select two ring spacers (31) to obtain pro- key washers around bolts.
per bearing pinch.
K. Install thermocouple assemblies (5). For installa-
F. If removed, install pin (38) into seal housing (39). tion instructions, refer to 77-20-02, paragraph 6.
G. Install seal (35) as follows: L. Install combustion chamber liner assembly (1) as
follows:
(1) Align double scallops in No. 3 bearing seal
(35) with scallops in seal housing (39). (1) Lubricate threads of bolts (16) with Ease-
Off 990 (table 15, item 14). Install combustion cham-
(2) Using arbor press and hollow dowel stock, ber liner assembly (1, figure 14) into support housing
install seal (35) into seal housing (39). (12) and secure with lockwashers (15) and bolts (16).
72-00-00
55
COMBUSTOR AND BEARING

SUPPORT HOUSlNG (12, FIGURE 14)
SEAL HOUSING
(39, FlGURE 14)
BALL BEARING
(34, FIGURE 14)
/ I RING SPACERS
(31, FIGURE 14)
SPACER RANGE
OIL FNEED
INCH
(30,FIGURE 14)
I
NOTE:
"A" -
"B" - "C"+ PINCH =
THICKNESS OF TWO RING SPACERS
X-1053-110
Figuæ 15. Determining No. 3 Bearing Pinch
72-00-00

DATE Feb 12/81 ermarwomo, coNoscricut
NO. Rev Î

ÏNSERT THIS PAGE Facing page 57, 72-00-00
No. 64.
On page 57, paragraph 26, NOTE preceding step E. is revised as follows:
NOTE
If the same combustor turbine module is being installed,

and the power turbine rotor has not been replaced, check
for-proper power turbine shaft and powertrain gear align-
ment. Refer to paragraph 14A.
If the combustor turbine module or the power turbine rotor

was replaced, perform powertrain gear runout check. Refer
to paragraph 14B.
In following.step, two men are required.
In following step, lubricate bolts with Ease-Off 990 (table

15, item 14).
Also, paragraph 26, step Gl. is added as follows:
Gl. Perform pneumatic leak check. (Refer to 73-10-01, paragraph 7.)
Sheet 1 of 1
(2) Tighten bolts as required. Bend tabs of lock- C. Check power turbine tip clearances and axial clear-
washers into bolt heads. ance between forward blade root and nozzle inner shroud.
(Refer to table 14 for fits and clearances.) Push forward
M. Install fuel nozzle and manifold assembly (25). For on power turbine rotor while checking.
installation instructions, refer to 73-10-04, paragraph 6.
D. Using spline handle (LTCTS484), rotate rotor and
N.Install igniter plugs (18). For installation instruc- check for noise and freedom of rotation.
tions, refer to 74-20-03, paragraph 5.
E. Install accessories on combustor turbine module as
26. INSTALLATION OF COMBUSTORTURBINE MOD- required. (Refer to applicable chapter/section, kit manu-
ULE. Proceed as follows: als or airframe maintenance manual.)
Special Tools Required F. Install airflow modulator actuator (Refer to 75-30-

01, 8, figure 1). (Refer to 75-30-02, paragraph 6 for in-
Maintenance Stand LTCT5463 stallation procedure.)
Spline Handle LTCT5484 G. Using mounting hardware removed, install and con-
nect brackets, wiring, and tubing as required. Connect
NOTE tube assemblies to proper parts/connectors observing tags
installed at removal. Tighten all fittings as required.
When combustor turbine module has
been replaced, power trim check must H. If required, install engine in the aircraft (Refer to
be accomplished. Refer to airframe 71-00-00, paragraph 26).
flight and maintenance manuals.
27. ENGINE FITS AND CLEARANCES.
Enter new· module data in engine/
module logbook. Refer to table 14 for engine fits and clearances.
If the engine was removed from the 28. CONSUMABLE MATERIALS.

aircraft, ensure that accessory/reduc-
tion gearbox/gas generator modules Table 15 lists all consumable materials required for main-
are positioned in maintenance stand tenance.
(LTCT5463).
NOTE
A. Lubricate inner race and rollers of No. 2 bearing Inclusion in table 15 does not consti-
on compressor shaft with shortening (table 15, item 19) tute endorsement of a specific manu-
to hold rollers inboard in cage. facturer's product, nor does it imply
that the use of a listed product is
NOTE
mandatory or recommended. The ta-
ble contains a random selection of
In following step, two men are re' manufacturers whose products meet
quired· the requirements of the applicable spe-
cifications and should be considered
In following step, lubricate bolts only as a guide for commercial pro-
with Ease-Off 990 (table 15, item
curement of these materials.
14).
When common. chemicals, cleaners, paints, and other ma-

B. Align index marks made during removal and install terials listed in table 15 are identified by Military or
combustor turbine module (4, figure 12) into gas gener¯ Federal Specification number only, any good commercial
ator module (5). Secure with washers (3) and bolts (2). grade of the product may be used.
Tighten bolts 110 to 120 inch-pounds torque.
72-00-00
57
JAVCD LYCOM1NG OIVISION
Table 14. Engine Fits and Clearances
Chapter/ Fig. & Refer to Fig.

Component Section Index Min Max and Index
16
Power Turbine Rotor 72-00-00 1440 0.049 0.097 1

(Disc) to
Power Turbine Nozzle 72-00-00 14-36
Power Turbine Rotor 72-00-00 1440 0.010 2

(OD) to
Power Turbine Nozzle 72-00-00 14-36
(ID) (Tip Clearance)
Impeller Shroud Assembly 72-00-00 7-18 0.014C 0.016C 3

to Centrifugal Impeller 7-15
(New)
Impeller Shroud Assembly 72-00-00 7-18 0.018C 0.022C 3

Centrifugal Impeller 7-15
(Used)
72-00-00
co (c3 I 07R Aven T vanmino Division

JAVCCI LYCOMING DIVISION
ermATFema, ceNNacticut
DATE May 25/79
NO.

On page 58, table 14, component Impeller Shroud Assembly to Centrifugal

Impeller is revised and Axial Compressor Rotor Blades to Compressor Vane
Assembly is added as follows:
Chapter/ Fig. Refer to Fig.

Component Section Index Min Max and Inder
Impeller Shroud 72-00-00 7-18 0.014C 0.016C 3

Assembly to 7-15
Centrifugal Im-
peller (New or
Recoated Hous-
ing)
Impeller Shroud 72-00-00 7-18 As Recorded 3

Assembly to 7-15 During Disassembly
Centrifugal Im-
peller (Used
Housing)
Axial Compressor 72-00-00 7-15 * 4

Rotor Blades (OD) 7-2T
to Compressor
Vane Assembly
¯
(ID) (Tip
Clearance)
*0.006 minimum on LTP 101-600 Series and

0.007 minimum on LTP 101-700 Series.
Sheet ). of 1
«dAWCO L.YCÒMING OlVISION
STRATFOAC. CCÑNECTICtJT
DATE May 25/79
NO.
MANUAL CHANGE NOTKE

THIS CEANGE APPLIES TOf LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
INSERT THIS PAGK Facing page 59, 72-00-00
Figure 16. Engine Fits and Clearances
Sheet of i
AVCO LYCOMING OlVlSION
72-00-00
59
Table 15. Const mable Materials

-
Military or Manufacturer's
Item No. Description Federal Specification Designation Manufacturer
l Adhesive Epon 931 Shell Chemical Co., Division of Shell
Oil Co.
New York, New York
2 Alodine 1200 Amehem Products Inc.

Ambler, Pennsylvania
3 Aluminum Ox- MIL-A-10825

ide (320 Grit)
4 Anti-Detonation ADI Fluid Lyndhurst Chemical Co.

Injection Fluid Passaic, New Jersey
5 Anti-Seize Com- Molykote "G" Dow Corning Corp.

pound Spray Paste Trumbull, Connecticut
6 Brazing Alloy QQ-B-654

(Silver)
7 Brazing Alloy AMS4771
8 Cleaning Agent Part B&B B&B Chemical Co.

3100 Miami, Florida
9 Cleaning Agent Turco 5884 Turco Product Div. of Purex Corp.,

Ltd.
Carson, California
10 Compound KEL-F-800 Standard T. Chemical Co.

Staten Island, New York
11 Corrosion In- WD 40 WD 40 Co.

hibitor San Diego, California
LPS 2 LPS Laboratories Inc.

2050 Cotner Avenue
Los Angeles, California 90025
12 Crocus Cloth P-C-458
13 Dry Cleaning P-D-680

Solvent
14 Ease-Off 990 Texacone Co.

Dallas, Texas
15 Electrical Tape No. X1099 Minnesota Mining and Manufac-

turing Co.
St. Paul, Minnesota
16 Enamel MIL-E-5558
72-00-00

STRATFORD, CONNacTicuT DATE J un 12 /81
NO. 55aev1

No. 55.
3n page 60, Table 15., item 1 is revised and items 1A and 4A are is added as
follows:
Military or
Federal Manufacturer's
Item No. Description Specification Designation Manufacturer
1 Adhesive Epon 931 Hysol Division,

Dexter Corp.,
Pittsburg,
California
lA Adhesive Epon 934 Hysol Division,

Dexter Corp.,
Pittsburg,
California
4A Anti-Fretting 718050 Sundstrand

Compound Aviation
Rockford, Ill.
Sheet 1 of 1
DATE Jul 17/81 STRATFORD.CONNECTICUT
NO. Rev

TRIS CHANGEAPPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 65 Rev 1 dated Mar 26/81. Please remove and
discard MUN No. 65 Rev 1.
On page 61, Table 15, item 22 is deleted.
Also, items 17A, 24A and 29A are added as follows:
Military or
Federal Manufacturer's
Item No. Description Specification Designation Manufacturer
17A Freon No. 12 or 22 E.I. Dupont

Liquid and de Nemours
Gas Wilmington,
Delaware
24A Marking Colorbrite Pencil Eberhard-

Pencil Nos. 2127, or Faber Inc.
4127 Wilkes Barre,
Pa.
29A Stainless AMS5685

Steel
Wire
Sheet i of 1
AVCD L.YCOMING OlVISION
Table 15. Consumable Materials (Continue<)
17 Enstrip A Enthone Corp.

West Haven, Connecticut
18 .
Gasket Com- 83H Permatex Co., Inc.
pound Formagasket West Palm Beach, Florida
18A Gasket Com- Super 300 Permatex Co., Inc.

pound Formagasket West Palm Beach, Florida
19 Hydrogenated EE-S-321
Vegetable
Shortening
20 Loctite Loctite Corp.

Newington, Connecticut
21 Lubricating Oil MIL-L-6081
25 Methanol O-M-232
26 Methyl-Ethyl- TT-M-261
Ketone (MEK)
27 Molykote Dry Molykote Type Moly Lube Products

Lubricant Z Great Neck, Long, Island, New York
(Powder)
28 Sandpaper No. 320 Carborundum Co.

Niagara Falls, New York
29 Spline Plastilube Moly Warren Refining and Chemical Co.

Lubricant No. 3 Cleveland, Ohio
ML7 plus 2 Moly Lubricants Corp.

5007 River Road
Harahan, Louisiana 70123
30 Trichloroe- O-T-620
thane
31 Trichloro- O-T-634
ethylene
72-00-00
© 1978, Avco Lycoming Division 61

Table 15. Consumable Materials (Continuel)
32 Welding Wire AMS4190
35 Welding Wire AMSS798
36 Zinc Chro- TT-P-645

mate Primer
72-004)0

AIR INLET SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
Paragraph Subject . Page
1. AirInletSection .................................
72-2040 3
2. Removal of Radial Inlet Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-20-00 3
3. Removal of Radial Inlet Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-20-00 3
4. CleaningofAirInletSection ........................
72-20-00 3
5. Inspection of Air Inlet Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-20-00 3
6. RepairofAirInletSection .........................
72-20-00 5
7. Installation of Radial Inlet Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-20-00 5
8. Installation of Radial Inlet Panels . . .'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-2040 5
Chapter/Section
Figure Subject Page
1. AirInletSystem .................................
72-20-00 4
2. Radial Inlet Assembly Nonallowable Crack Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-20-00 5
72-20-00
1/2
AIR INLET SECTION
1. AIR INLET SECTION. (3) Visually for dents. Repair as outlined in

paragraph 6.
2. REMOVAL OF RADIAL INLET PANELS. Proceed
as follows: (4) Visually for corrosion. Repair as outlined in
paragraph 6.
A. Remove screws (2, figure 1) and nuts (3) secur-
ing upper radial inlet panel (1) to lower inlet panel D. Inspect inlet housing assembly (Refer to 72-00-00,
(4). 12, figure 7) as follows:
B. Remove panels. (1) Visually inspect for cracks. Replace if cracks

are evident.
3. REMOVAL OF RADIAL INLET ASSEMBLY. Re-
move radial inlet assembly (5, figure 1). For removal (2) Visually for foreign object damage on air
procedure refer to 72-00-00, paragraph 19. passage contour. Blend-repair as outlined in paragraph 6.
4. CLEANING OF AIR INLET SECTION. Clean up- (3) Visually for loss of surface treatment. Repair
per and lower radial inlet panels (1 and 4, figure 1), as outlined in paragraph 6.
radial inlet assembly (5), and inlet housing assembly
(Refer to 72-00-00, 12, figure 7) by dry cleaning sol- (4) Visually inspect inserts (Refer to 72-00-00,
vent method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 15.) 56, and 58, figure 7) for damage. Repair as outlined in
72-20-00, paragraph 6.
5. INSPECTION OF AIR INLET SECTION. Proceed
as follows: (5) Inspect inlet flow paths for nicks, dents,
gouges, and cracks. Limits are as follows:
A. Visually inspect all parts for severe damage. Re-
place damaged parts. (a) Defects up to 1/16 inch deep are accept-
able. Replace if limit is exceeded.
B. Inspect upper and lower radial inlet panels (1 and
4, figure 1) as follows: (b) Smooth defects are acceptable without
blend repair.
(1) Visually for cracks. Repair as outlined in
paragraph 6. (c) Blend-repair defects with sharp edges or
protrusions as outlined in paragraph 6.
(2) Visually for dents. Repair as outlined in
paragraph 6. (d) Separation between maximum depth de-
fects shall be at least twice the widest dimension of larg-
(3) Visually for corrosion. Repair as outlined in est discrepancy. Replace if limits are exceeded.
paragraph 6.
(e) Light, minor surface discrepancies are ac-
C. Inspect radial inlet assembly (5, figure 1) as fol- ceptable without concern for concentration or separation.
lows:
(6) Visually inspect lever (Refer to 72-00-00, 62,
(1) Inspect anti-icing holes for clogging. Repair figure 7), for excessive wear and thread damage. Replace
as outlined in paragraph 6. if link hole is eccentrically worn. Repair damaged threads
as outlined in 72-20-00, paragraph 6.
(2) Visually for cracks. Replace radial inlet as-
sembly if cracks exist on flange in figure 2. Repair all (7) Visually inspect shaft (Refer to 72-00-00, 63,
other cracks as outlined in paragraph 6. figure 7) for wear or galling on OD in link holes. Replace
if wear or galling exists.
72-20-00
3
5
X A-1053-112
1. Upper Radial Inlet Panel 4. Lower Radial Inlet Panel

2. Screw 5. Radial Inlet Assembly
3. Nut
Figure 1. Air Inlet System
(8) Visually inspect links (59 and 64) for mis- (9) Visually inspect ring (65) for contamination in
alignment, distortion, wear, and galling. Replace if any laminations, burrs, or nicks which would interfere with op-
of these conditions exist. eration. Blend-repair burrs and nicks as outlined in 72-20-
00, paragraph 6.
72-20-00
4
(3) Repair corroded surface finish using alodine

coating procedure. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 32.)
B. Repair radial inlet assembly (72-20-00, 5, figure 1)

as follows:
(1) Clean any clogged anti-icing holes by insert-

REPAIR AREA ing a 0.090 inch diameter wire through clogged hole.
(2) Using TIG welding procedure, repair cracks

with welding wire (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item
NO CRACKS
ALLOWED ON 32). (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 24.)
FORWAR
FLANGE (3) Reform dents to original contour.
(4) Repair defective surface finish (corrosion) us-

ing alodine coating procedure. (Refer to 70-00-00, para-
graph 32.)
C. Repair inlet housing assembly (Refer to 72-00-00,

12, figure 7) as follows:
XA-1053-135
(1) Blend-repair damage on air passage contour.

(Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.) Touch up repaired
Figure 2. Radial Inlet Assembly Nonallowahle area with chemical film coating. (Refer to 70-00-00,
Crack Amas paragraph 32.)
(2) Touch up areas that have loss of surface treat-

(10) Visually inspect ring for cracks or separation ment with chemical film coating. (Refer to 70-00-00,
of tack welds, worn link holes, and distortion. Replace paragraph 32.)
ring if cracked or if separation of tack welds exist. Re-
place if link holes are eccentrically worn or distortion or (3) Repair damaged inserts. (Refer to 70-00-00,
contamination prevents free movement in inlet housing paragraph 30.)
(11) Inspect shaft bore in inlet housing for evi- 7. INSTALLATION OF RADIAL INLET ASSEMBLY.
dence of corrosion, wear, or galling. Replace inlet hous- Install radial inlet assembly (5, figure 1). For installation
ing if corrosion or galling exists. procedure refer to 72-00-00, paragraph 22.
E. Visually inspect all threaded parts for damaged 8. INSTALLATION OF RADIAL INLET PANELS. Pro-
threads. Repair as outlined in paragraph 6. ceed as follows:
6. REPAIR OF AIR INLET SECTION. Proceed as fol- A. Install upper radial inlet panel (1, figure 1) to low-
lows: er radial inlet panel (4).
A. Repair upper and lower radial inlet panels (1 and B. Secure with screws (2) and nuts (3). Tighten as re-
4, figure 1) as follows: quired.
(1) Using TIG welding procedure, repair cracks

with welding wire (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item
32). (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 24.)
(2) Reform dents to original contour.
72-20-00

JAVCO L.YCOMING OtVISION
COMPRESSOR SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
1. CompressorSection .............................
72-30-00 3
2. Cleaning of Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-30-00 3
3. Inspection of Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-30-00 3
4. Repair of Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-30-00 7
Chapter/Section
1. Centrifugal Impeller Inspection Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

72.30-00 4
2. Axial Compressor Rotor Blade Inspection Areas . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-30-00 4
3. Compressor Vane Assembly Inspection Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-30-00 6
4. Centrifugal Impeller Blade Repair Areas and Limits . . . . . . . . . .
72-30-00 7
5. Axial Compressor Rotor Blade Repair Areas and Limits . . . . . . .
72-30-00 8
6. Identïfication Plate Repair or Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-30-00 9
7. Air Diffuser Repair by Step Dowel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-30-00 10
8. Bearing Retainer Repair of Loose Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-304)0 11
72-30-00

1/2
DATE Oct 24/80 JAVCO LYCOIVIING DIVISION
STRATFORD.CONNECTICUT
NO. R ev

This MUN supersedes MCN No. 28 dated May 25/79. Please remove and discard MUN
No, 28.
On page 3, paragraph 2, step A is revised and step A1 is added as follows:
A. Clean, handle and process No. 1 position ball bearing (Refer to

72-00-00, 9, figure 7) per standard practices (Refer to 70-00-00, para-
graphs 11 and 22.)
A1. Clean, handle and process No. 1 seal (Refer to 72-00-00, 11,
figure 7) per standard practices. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 12.)
Also paragraph 3., step B. (2) (b) is revised as follows:
(b) Inspect for tip rubs. Tip rubs are not allowed. Heavy roll-
aver and evidence of overheating is not allowed. Replace compressor rotor
assembly.
Sheet 1 of 1
COMPRESSOR SECTION
1. COMPRESSORSECTION. not exceed 1/32 inch in diameter and/or 1/64 inch in

depth. If dent damage exceeds these limits, replace com-
2. CLEANING OF COMPRESSORSECTION. Proceed pressor rotor assembly.
as follows:
2 Leading Edge. Nicks or dents are
A. Clean, handle, and process No. 1 position ball bear- permitted, provided they do not exceed 3/64 inch in
ing (Refer to 72-00-00, 9, figure 7) per standard proce- depth after repair. Repair as outlined in paragraph 4.
dures (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 11).
3 Trailing Edge. Nicks or dents are
B. Clean all other compressor parts by dry cleaning permitted, provided they do not exceed 1/32 inch in
solvent method (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 15). depth after repair. Repair as outlined in paragraph 4.
C. All other gas generator module parts. (Refer to Blade Tips. Nicks or dents are per-
4
72-00-00, 12, 13, 14, 36 through 47, and 50 through mitted, provided they do not exceed 1/32 inch in depth
65, figure 7) are covered in Air Inlet Section 72-20-00 after repair. Repair as outlined in paragraph 4.
or Turbine Section 72-50-00.
5 Airfoil (Sides). Nicks and dents are
3. INSPECTION OF COMPRESSORSECTION. Proceed permitted, provided the minimum thickness of blade, at
as follows: any point, after repair is 80 percent of blade thickness.
Repair as outlined in paragraph 4.
CAUTION
6 Visually inspect for tip rubs evi-
COMPRESSOR ROTOR ASSEMBLY denced by tip roll-over. Replace compressor rotor assem-
(REFER TO 72-00-00, 15, FIGURE bly (Refer to 72-00-00, 15, figure 7) if heavy rubs are
7) CONSISTS OF COMPRESSOR evident.
SHAFT, AXIAL COMPRESSOR RO-
TOR, AND CENTRIFUGAL IMPEL- 7 Inspect for rubs on 2.419 to 2.421
LER. DO NOT DISASSEMBLY. IF inch diameter (Refer to 72-30-00, figure 1). Rubs are
DAMAGE EXCEEDS LIMITS ON permitted, provided they do not exceed 0.005 inch in
ANY PART, ENTIRE ASSEMBLY depth. Repair rubs as outlined in paragraph 4. If limit is
MUST BE REPLACED. exceeded, replace compressor rotor.
A. Visually inspect all parts for severe damage. Re- (2) Inspect axial compressor blades as follows:
place affected parts.
Visually inspect blades for bends or
(a)
B. Inspect compressor rotor assembly (15). distortion. None allowed. Replace compressor rotor as-
sembly.
(1) Inspect centrifugal impeller as follows:
(b) Inspect for tip rubs. Light tip rubs are
(a) Visually inspect all accessible areas for allowed, provided clearance requirements can be met at
mutilation, bent, distorted or broken blades, missing assembly. Heavy roll-over and evidence of overheating is
pieces, or cracks. This damage is not allowed. Replace not allowed. Replace compressor rotor assembly.
rotor assembly.
(c) Visually inspect for erosion. Light ero-
(b) Inspect blades for foreign object dam- sion with proper tip clearance is allowed. Rounding off
age (FOD). (Refer to 72-30-00, figure 1). of tip corners or severe undercutting at leading edge
(Refer to figure 2) is cause for compressor rotor assem-
1_ Critical Area. No nicks allowed. Re- bly (Refer to 72-00-00, 15, figure 7) replacement.
place compressor rotor assembly (Refer to 72-00-00, 15,
figure 7). Smooth dents are permitted, provided they do (d) Visually inspect for cracks. None al-
lowed; replace compressor rotor assembly.
72-30-00
3
TRAILING
EDGE
CRITICAL AREA
(RADIUS)
BLADE
TIP
AIR FOIL
(SIDE
LEADING
EDGE
2.421 IN. DIA.

RUB AREA
XA-1012-194
Figure 1. Centrifugal Impeller Inspection Areas
(e) Inspect blade leading edge, trailing edge,

BLADE tip, and airfoil surfaces for nicks, burrs, and other FOD
TIP (Refer to 72-30-00, figure 2 for areas and limits). If de-
AIR FOIL
fects are evident, proceed as follows:
SURFACE
LEADING
EDGE NOTE
All defects in noncritical areasshall be

SEVERE EROSION
reworked exception of smooth dents
with
UNDERCUT NOT TRAILING
ALLOWED
where burrs are not evident. Defects that
EDGE
exceed allowable repair limits given in
72-30-00, paragraph 4 will require re-
CRITICAL placement of compressor rotor assembly.
AREA
WITHIN 1 Leading and Trailing Edges: Smooth
1/F4 INCH
dents, not exceedig 1/32 inch on longest side and 0.010
BLADE ROOT inch deep, are acceptable without rework. Blend defects
as outlined in paragraph 4.
XA-1053-139
2 Blade Tips: Blend defects as out-

Figure 2. Axial Compressor Rotor Blade Inspection Aœas lined in paragraph 4.
72-30-00
4
A7AVCO LYCOMING OIVISION
DATE Nov 10 /80 STWATPCA©, CONNŒCTICUT
NO.

On page 5, paragraph 3, NOTE following step D. is added as follows:
NOTE
Whenever diffuser housing has been replaced, the module

data must be transferred to the new nameplate bracket
attached to replacement diffuser housing. The serial num-
ber of the module must not be changed regardless of which
or how many components have been replaced.
Also, step D. (3) is revised as follows:
(3) Inspect gas producer module nameplate bracket (Refer to

72-00-00, 20, figure 7) on diffuser housing for damage and security.
Repair as outlined in 72-30-00, paragraph 4.
Sheet ) of )L
3_ Airfoil Surfaces: Blend defects as (3) Inspect gas producer module identification
outlined in paragraph 4. plate (Refer to 72-00-00, 20, figure 7) on diffuser hous-
ing for damage and security. Repair as outlined in 72-
(3) Inspect compressor shaft as follows: 30-00, paragraph 4.
(a) Visually inspect compressor shaft for E. Inspect air diffuser (Refer to 72-00-00, 48, figure
cracks. No cracks allowed. Replace compressor rotor as- 7) as follows:
sembly (Refer to 72-00-00, 1S, figure 7).
(1) Visually inspect exterior of air diffuser par-
(b) Inspect compressor shaft for bending, ent nietal for cracks, dents, broken vanes, or warped
distortion, and mutilation. None allowed. Replace com- areas. None allowed; replace air diffuser.
pressor rotor assembly.
(2) Visually inspect leading edge and side of each
(c) Inspect compressor shaft for corrosion vane for FOD causing raised metal, nicks, burrs, or
and pitting. Replace compressor rotor assembly with scratches. Repair as outlined in 72-30-00, paragraph 4.
moderate to heavy pitting.
(3) Inspect threaded holes for thread damage.
C. Inspect impeller shroud assembly (18) as follows: Repair minor damage as outlined in paragraph 4.
NOTE (4) Visually inspect ring (Refer to 724)0-00, 49,

figure 7) for separation from air diffuser (48). None al-
In following steps (1) and (2), shroud lowed; replace air diffuser.
halves are matched. If one half is re-
jected, replace assembly. F. Inspect compressor vane assembly (Refer to 72-
00-00, 27, figure 7) as follows:
In following step, coating rubs not ex-
tending into the parent metal are al- (1) Visually inspect vane assembly for distortion
lowed. or mutilation. None allowed; replace vane assembly.
(1) Visually inspect impeller shroud assembly for (2) Inspect vanes for cracks, nicks, dents, and
cracks, distortion, rubs into parent metal, and/or mutila- bends as follows: (Refer to 72-304)0, figure 3).
tion. None allowed, replace impeller shroud assembly.
(a) Leading and Trailing Edge: Nicks and
(2) Visually inspect all areas for nicks, burrs, dents are permitted up to 0.080 inch in depth after re-
and scratches. Repair minor damage as outlined in 72- pair. Length of repair shall be at least twice, but not
30-00, paragraph 4. more than four times the depth. Cracks that can be re-
moved by blend repair shall be repaired provided FOD
(3) Visually inspect for thread damage. Repair limits are not exceeded. Complete removal of cracks
as outlined in paragraph 4. shall be ensured by dye-check. No cracks are allowed
after repair. Repair as outlined in paragraph 4.
(4) Inspect dowel pins and dowel pin holes for
damage and misalignment. Replace damaged pins as out- NOTE
lined in paragraph 4.
Bent vanes may be straightened pro-
D. Inspect diffuser housing (Refer to 72-00-00, 19, vided no cracks are generated.
figure 7) as follows:
(b) Airfoil (Sides): No cracks are allowed.
(1) Visually inspect diffuser housing for cracks, Nicks and dents are permitted if 75 percent of vane thick-
distortion, and mutilation. None allowed; replace diffus- ness remains after repair. Repair as outlined in paragraph
er housing. 4.
(2) Visually inspect all areas for nicks, burrs, (3) Inspect vanes for erosion. Light erosion is
and scratches. Repair minor damage as outlined in 72- permissible. If heavy undercut and metal roll-over exist,
304)0, paragraph 4. replace compressor vane assembly.
72-30-00
5
OUTER
SHROUD
BRAZED
AREA
AIRFOIL
AXIAL COMPRESSOR
CYLINDER AREA
(LIGHT RUBS ALLOWED) LING
LEADING BRAZED AREA

EDGE LIGHT EROSION
UNDERCUTTING
COMPRESSOR OF VANE OR SHROUDS
VANE IS PERMISSIBLE
(TYPICALOF
34 TOTA L )
INNER LIGHT RUBS ALLOWED

SHROUD ON INNERSHROUDS
XA-1012-205
Figure 3. Compressor Vane Assembly Inspection Areas
(4) Inspect for rubs on inner shroud sealing area. (1) Visually inspect spur gear for cracks, severe
(Refer to figure 3.) Rubs on inner shroud are allowed damage, and mutilation. None allowed. Replace spur
provided build clearances can be met. Repair rolled-over gear.
and protruding metal of inner shroud rubbed areas as
outlined in paragraph 4. (2) Visually inspect spur gear for nicks, burrs, or
scratches. Repair as outlined in 72-30-00, paragraph 4.
(5) Inspect for rubs on cylinder area. (Refer to
figure 3.) Rubs on cylinder area are allowed provided (3) Inspect internal and external splines for wear.
compressor tip clearances can be maintained. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 21.)
G. Inspect nut (Refer to 72-00-00, 1, figure 7) as I. Inspect bearing retainer (Refer to 72-00-00, 6, fig-
follows: ure 7) as follows:
(1) Visually inspect nut for cracks. None allowed. (1) Visually inspect for cracks. None allowed.
Replace nut. Replace bearing retainer.
(2) Visually inspect nut for damaged threads. (2) Visually inspect for nicks, burrs, and scratch-
Replace nut if threads are damaged. es. Repair as outlined in 72-30-00, paragraph 4.
(3) Inspect four slots for broken or rounded ed- (3) Inspect for loose pins. Restake loose pins,
ges, or tool damage. Replace nut if slots are damaged. if required, as outlined in paragraph 4.
H. Inspect compressor shaft spur gear (3) as follows:
72-30-00
6
AAvec LYCOMING DIVISION
symArFamo, coNNacticut
DATE May 25/79
NO.
MANUAL CHANGE NOTKE
On page 6, paragraph 3., step F. (5) is revised as follows:
(5) Inspect for rubs on cylinder area. (Refer to figure 3.)

Light rubs on cylinder area are allowed.
Sheet i of 1
JPAVCD LYCOIVIING DIVISION
STRATFORD, CONN,
DATE Aug 31/81
NO. ÈÛ

On page 7, paragraph 3, step J. is revised and steps J. (1) and (2) are added
as follows:
J. Inspect ball bearing (No. 1 position) (Refer to 72-00-00, 9,

(1) Inspect bearing in accordance with 70-00-00, paragraph 22.
(2) Inspect for metal pickup adhering to forward side of outer

race. Repair bearings exhibiting this metal pickup as outlined in
Also, step K. (4) is added as follows:
(4) Inspect hard-faced coating (rear face) for spalling or loss

of material. None allowed. Replace liner.
Sheet 1 of 1
JAVCC3 LYCOMING OlVISION
J. Inspect ball bearing (No. 1 position) (Refer to 72- CAUTION

00-00, 9, figure 7). (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 22.)
COMPRESSOR ROTOR ASSEMBLY
K. Inspect bearing liner (No. 1 position) (Refer to (REFER TO 72-00-00, 15, FIGURE
72-00-00, 10, figure 7) as follows: 7) CONSISTS OF COMPRESSOR
SHAFT, AXIAL COMPRESSOR RO-
(1) Visually inspect bearing liner for cracks. None TOR, AND CENTRIFUGAL IMPEL-
allowed. Replace liner. LER. DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.
(2) Inspect liner for nicks, burrs, and scratches. A. Repair centrifugal impeller as follows:
Blend-repair as outlined in 72-30-00, paragraph 4. (1) Repair FOD on blades of centrifugal impeller
to depths shown in 72-30-00, figure 4 by blend-repair
(3) Inspect threaded holes for damaged threads. method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.) If limits
Repair threads as outlined in paragraph 4. cannot be met, replace compressor rotor assembly.
L. Inspect No. 1 bearing seal (Refer to 72-00-00, 11, (a) Leading Edge: 3/64 inch maximum re-
figure 7) for obvious damage that would cause leakage pair depth. Distance between repaired areas must be
such as coking and chipping. (Refer to 70-00-00, para- equal to, or greater than, the length of the longest re-
graph 12.) pair.
4. REPAIR OF COMPRESSORSECTION. Proceed as (b) Trailing Edge: 1/32 inch maximum re-
follows: pair depth. Distance between repaired areas must be equal
to, or greater than, the length of the longest repair.
TRAILING EDGE
REPAIR DEPTH
1/32 IN. MAX.
REPAIRS MADE WITHIN 1/16
INCH OF EITHER CORNER
SHOULDBEBLENDEDTOA -
SMOOTH RADIUS BLADE TlP I I

REPAIR DEPTH
í¯
1/32 IN. i
LEADING EDGE
.REPAIR DEPTH - --
----
3/64 IN. MAX. ---
CRITICAL AREA
(RADIUS)
NO REPAIR ALLOWED.
2.421
----
IN. DIA LENGTH OF ALL REPAIRS MUST
2.419
REF RUB BE AT LEAST TWICE BUT NOT
INSPECTION AREA MORE THAN FIVE TIMES THE
DEPTH.
XA-1012-211
Figure 4. Centrifugal Impeller Blade Repair Areas and Limits
72-30-00
7
JAVCC LYCOMING OIVISION
(c) Tip: 1/32 inch maximum repair depth. (b) Depth of repairs in leading and trailing
Distance between repaired areas must be at least 3/8 edges of blade shall not exceed 1/32 inch deep.
inch.
(c) Repairs to damage within 1/8 inch of.
(d) Air-Foil (Sides): Repair depth is gov- blade tip shall be continued to the tip.
erned by blade thickness. At least 80 percent of blade
thickness must remain. Distance between repaired areas (d) If distance between damaged areas is less
(regardless of location) on either side must be at least than 3/32 inch, make one blend-repair. If distance is great-
1/2 inch. er than 3/32 inch, make separate repairs.
(2) Repair tip roll-over caused by light rubs by (2) Blade Tips: Repair tips by blend-repair meth-
blend-repair method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.) od. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.) Repairs on blade
tip edges shall be limited as follows:
(3) Repair rubs on 2.419 to 2.421 inch diameter
by blend-repair method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph (a) Maximum allowable repair depth is 3/32
23.) (Refer to 72-30-00, figure 4 for location.) If rubs inch.
exceed 0.005 inch in depth, replace compressor rotor
assembly. (b) Length of repair shall be at least three
times repair depth.
B. Repair axial compressor rotor as follows:
(c) If damage is closer to tip edge than 1/16
(1) Leading and Trailing Edges: Repair edges by inch, blend-repair to the leading or trailing edge, which-
blend-repair method (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23) ever applies.
and the following:
NOTE
(a) No repairs are allowed within 1/4 inch
from blade root in any areas. (Refer to 72-30-00, figure A minimum of one-half of the blade tip
5.) Smooth dents, not exceeding 1/32 inch on longest chordal width must remain after blend
side and 0.010 inch deep, are acceptable without rework. repairs.
BLADE TIP
REPAIR DEPTH
REPAIRS WITHIN 1/8 IN. 3/32 IN. MAX.
OF TIP SHALL BE REPAIRS MADE WITHIN 1/16
CONTINUED TO TIP INCH OF EITHER CORNER
* SHOULD BE BLENDED TO A
SMOOTH RADIUS.
LEADING EDGE
NDGEEDGE
RE3PA MDEPTH
RP
1/32 IN. MAX.
CRITICAL AREA -
NO REPAIR ALLOWED
WITHIN 1/4 IN.OF BLADE ROOT IN
ANY AREA
XA-1012-212
Figure 5. Axial Compressor Rotor Blade Repair Areas and Limits
72-30-00
8
ABIWCO LYCOMING DIVISION
STRATFORO,CONNECTICUT
DATE Nov 10/80
NO.

On page 9, paragraph 4, steps D. (3) and (3) (b) are revised and NOTE
following step D. (3) is added as follows:
(3) Replace damaged gas producer module nameplate bracket

(Refer to 72-00-00, 20, figure 7) as follows:
NOTE
The serial number of the module must not be changed

regardless of which or how many components have been
replaced.
(b) Transfer data to new plate and tack-weld plate in

locations shown in figure 6, using welding wire (Refer to 72-00-00, table
15, item 33).
Also, Figure 6. and title to Figure 6. are revised as shown on sheet 2.
ION
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Nov 10 /8 0
NO. 73
o
co
BEND EARS DOWN
O O . I
O FOR WELD PURPOSES
O O
O
O
O
O
o .
0.015 IN.
TACKWELD 3 PLACES
2 SIDES
O O
O
XA-1142-107
Figure 6. Nameplate Bracket Repair or Replacement
Sheet 2 of 2
(3) Airfoil Surfaces: Repair airfoil surfaces by (3) Replace damaged gas producer module iden-
blend-repair method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.) tification plate as follows: (Refer to 72-00-00, 20, fig-
Finished repairs to blade airfoil surfaces shall be limited ure 7).
as follows:
(a) Grind off old plate. (Refer to 72-30-00,
(a) Minimum airfoil thickness shall be 80 figure 6.)
percent of original thickness.
(b) Transfer data to new plate, P/N 4-101-
NOTE 074-01, and tack-weld plate in locations shown in figuie
6, using welding wire (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item
Distance between repaired areas (regard- 33.)
less of location on either side) must be
at least 1/2 inch.
(b) If distance between two damaged areas

is less than 1/16 inch, make one blend repair. If dis-
tance is greater than 1/16 inch, make separate repairs.
TACK WELD 3 PLACES
(c) Maximum allowable repair length on 2 SIDES
blade airfoil surfaces shall be 1/4 inch. 0.015
(d) If, in repairing blade damage, more

than 15 percent of total blade material is removed, re-
place compressor rotor assembly.
(e) No repairs are allowed within 1/4 inch

from blade root.
C. Repair impeller shroud assembly (Refer to 72-00-

00, 18, figure 7) as follows:
(1) Repair nicks, burrs, and scratches by blend-

repair method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.) -
(2) Repair damaged threads by chasing with tap

or repair by inserting correct size helical coil inserts.
(Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 26.) If holes cannot be
repaired, replace shroud assembly as a matched set.
(3) Replace damaged alignment pin with new

pin, P/N MS9390-170. Check that new pin aligns with
hole in opposite shroud.
D. Repair di user housing (Refer to 72-00-00, 19,

repair method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.)
(2) Repair damage to 1/4-28 jackscrew hole

threads by chasing threads with tap or repair by insert-
ing correct size helical coil insert. (Refer to 70-00-00,
paragraph 26.) Figure 6. Identification Plate Repair or Replacement
72-30-00
9
AVCO LYCOMING OlVIS10N
E. Repair air diffuser (Refer to 72-00-00, 48, figure (3) Repair thread damage by chasing with tap.
7) as follows: If threads are damaged beyond repair, install a correct
size helical coil insert. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph
(1) Repair nicks, burrs, scratches, and raised 26.)
metal by blend-repair method. (Refer to 70-00-00, para-
graph 23.) =
F. Repair compressor vane assembly (Refer to,72-00-
(2) Repair discrepant 0.1238 to 0.1245 inch dia-
meter dowel pin hole and fabricate new pin as follows: (1) Repair FOD by blend-repair method. (Refer
to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.) Remove only enough ma-
(a) Ream, if necessary, to true up hole. terial to obtain a smooth repair. Ensure that limits are
(Refer to 72-30-00, figure 7.) Depth shall be 0.300 not exceeded.
inch maximum.
(2) Repair surface cracks within limitation of
(b)Make a special step dowel of AMSS735 FOD criteria by blend-repair method. (Refer to 70-00-
material same as original part number, MS9390-180, 00, paragraph 23.) No cracks are allowed. Inspect vanes
with 0.1250 diameter, except as shown in figure 7. by dye-penetrant method to ensure complete removal
Length of pin is 0.500 inch. A diameter may vary of cracks. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 19.)
amount of discrepancy up to 0.100 inch oversize maxi-
mum (0.00025 to 0.00145 inch tight fit must be main- (3) Repair bent vanes by cold straightening. Af-
tained). ter straightening, perform a dye-penetrant inspection to
ensure no cracks were generated.
(c) Install fabricated pin in air diffuser.
(4)Repair inner shroud by blending rolled-over
and protruding metal using blend-repair method. (Refer
to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.)
G. Repair compressor shaft spur gear (Refer to 72-

///// (1) Repair nicks, burrs, or scratches by blend-

0.500 IN.«
(2) Repair gear as outlined in standard practices.
+--0.300 IN.
" ' DIA '_ H. Repair bearing retainer (Refer to 72-00-00, 6, fig-
ure 7) as follows:
VIEW A (1) Repair nicks, burrs, and scratches by blend-

XA-1012-218
(2) Restake loose pins using a suitable prick

Figure 7. Air Diffuser Repair by Step Dowel punch. (Refer to 72-30-00, figure 8.)
72-30-00
10
¿PAVCO LYCOIVllNG DIVISION
STRATFORD, CONN,
DATE Aug 31/81
no. 193

INSERT THIS PAGE Facing page 11/12, 72-30-00
On page 11/12, paragraph 4, step J. and figure 9. are added as follows:
J. Repair ball (No. 1 position)

bearing (Refer to 72-00-00, 9,
figure 7) exhibiting pickup
metal adhering to forward side of outer race
by lapping with valve grinding compound to remove all buildup, provided
dimensions specified in figure 9 are maintained.
NOTE
Repair shall be performed with bearing disassembled

and bearing retainer removed.
0.5512 BLUEPRINT
IN.
0.5462 AMSTER STATION
SEP2 1 081
TELEDYNE
NEOSHO
SERIAL NUMBER
TO BE MARKED THRUST MARKED ON
ON ALL SURFACES SHOWN INNER RACE
P/N 4-301-051-01 ONLY
2.185 IN. OlA .
2.350 IN. DIA
"V" THRUST MARK ON LYCOMING PART NUMBER

AND VENDOR PART
P/N 4-301-051-02 ONLY
NUMBER MARKED ON
OUTER RING ONLY
THIS FACE IS FLAT WITHIN

5 TO 8 HELIUM LIGHT BANDS
BETWEEN THESE DIAMETERS
xA-1045-191
Figure 9. Bearing (No. 1 Position) Repair Criteria
Sheet 1 of 1
I. Repair bearing liner (No. 1 Position) (Refer to

72-00-00, 10, figure 7) as follows:

(2) Repair damaged threads by chasing with 10-

32 UNF-3B tap. Replace liner if threads are damaged
beyond repair.
STAKE TWICE
[3 PLACES)
PINS SHALL SE FLUSH

TO 0.010 INCH
BELOW SURFACE
XA 1012-219
Figure 8. Bearing Retainer Repair of Loose Pins
72-30-00
COMBUSTION SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
1. CombustionSection ...........................
72-40-00 3
2. Cleaning of Combustion Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-40-00 3
3. Inspection of Combustion Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-40-00 3
4. Repair of Combustion Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-40-00 6
COMBUSTION SECTION
Chapter/Section
Figuæ Title Subject Page
Number Number Number
1. Combustion Chamber Liner Crack Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

72-40-00 4
2. Combustion Chamber Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-40-00 5
3. Turbine Rotor Shroud Inspection Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-40-00 6
4. Igniter Plug Sealing Guide Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-40-00 6
5. PlateNutReplacement .........................
72-40-00 7
6. Identification Plate Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-40-00 7
72-40-00
1/2
STRATPORD, CONNECT1CUT
DATE Feb 23/81
NO. Rev Î
TRIS GEREGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
This MCN supersedes BCN No. 74 dated Nov 10/80. Please remove and discard MCN
No. 74.
On page 3, paragraph 3, step B. (1) is revised as follows:
(1) Visually for cracks in outer liner, end liner, and inner
liner. If the following limits are exceeded, repair as outlined in
72-40-00. (Refer to figure 1.)
Also, NOTE following step D. is added as follows:
ROTE
Whenever the combustor and bearing support housing

has been replaced, due module data must be transferred
to the new nameplate bracket attached to the replace-
ment housing. The serial number of the module must not
be changed regardless of which or how many components
have been replaced.
Sheet 1 of 1
COMBUSTION SECTION
1. COMBUSTIONSECTION. (b) Replace washer, P/N 4-130-066-01, if

bore of washer exhibits excessive out-of-roundness.
2. CLEANING OF COMBUSTIONSECTION. Clean all
parts by dry cleaning solvent method. (Refer to 70-00- (4) Inspect liner splash rings for distortion or
00, paragraph 15.) broken spot welds.
3. INSPECTION OF COMBUSTIONSECTION. Proceed (a) Distortion is acceptable provided a gap

as follows: of 0.035 inch minimum exists between splash ring and
liner wall. Regap if required. (Refer to figure 2.)
NOTE
(b) No more than 12 resistance spot-welds
Liner may be removed in event greater are allowed to be broken per ring. If more than six
access is desired for further inspection. welds are broken, replace.
A. Visually inspect all parts for severe damage. Re- (5) Visually inspect for chafing on the forward
place if severe damage exists. edge of the inner and outer liner. This condition is ac-
ceptable provided metal break-through does not exist.
B. Inspect combustion chamber liner assembly (Refer
to 72-00-00, 1, figure 14) as follows: (6)Visually inspect for brazement cracks. Braze-
ment cracks are acceptable, provided spot-weld criteria
(1) Visually for cracks in outer and inner liner. given in preceding step (4) (b) is met. Crack length
If the following limits are exceeded, repair as outlined shall not exceed 1/2 inch. Brazement voids are accept-
in 72-40-00. (Refer to figure 1.) able.
(a) Nö more than one crack per hole (7) Visually inspect for hot spots. Hot spots in-
allowed. dicated by metal discoloration and/or distortion are ac-
ceptable, provided cracks are within limits. Moderate
(b) All cracks are to be tight-lipped. warpage or buckling is acceptable, provided no interfer-
ence of mating parts occurs.
(c) Ten hole-to-hole cracks are allowed in
each circumferential row of holes, provided they are (8) Visually inspect for loose, missing, or worn
located on nonadjacent pairs. igniter plug sealing guides. (Refer to 72-00-00, 43, figure
14). Repair as outlined in 72-40-00, paragraph 4.
(d) Covering cracks, which could result in
material fallout, are not acceptable. C. Inspect No. 2 seal retaining plate (Refer to 72-
(e) No crack to extend longer than 1.000
inch. (1) Visually inspect for cracks, distortion, and
elongated holes. Replace, if damaged.
(f) Axial cracks from holes in outer liner
area are allowed up to 1.000 inch. Refer to figure 1. (2) Visually inspect for minor nicks and burrs.
Repair as outlined in 72-40-00, paragraph 4.
(2) Visually inspect for burn-through. No single
area to exceed 1/8 by 1/8 inch. D. Inspect combustor and bearing support housing
(3) Visually inspect fuel nozzle port (washer)
for chafing, excessive wear, and seizure. (1) Visually inspect housing assembly for cracks.
No cracks allowed. Replace housing or module.
Adjust hold-down fingers to obtain free
(a)
radial movement of 0.100 inch minimum, with axial (2) Visually inspect drain valve mounting pad
play not to exceed 0.006 inch. Bend tabs and/or replace for cracks. Replace housing if cracks result in air or
washer to reobtain proper clearance. (Refer to figure 2.) liquid leake.
72-40-00
3
CRACKS
1.000 INCH ••
MAX. LENGTH
OO
O
O
1.000 INCH
OOOOOO
1.000
INCH
CRACKS
TEN (10) ALLOWED
XA-1046-114
Figure 1. Combustion-Chamber Liner Crack Limits
72-40-00
AVCO LYCOIVIING DIVISION
STRATFORO. CONN,
DATE Dec 22/81
NO. 47 Rev 3
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 47 Rev 2 dated Nov 10/80. Please remove and
discard MON No. 47 Rev 2.
On page 5, paragraph 3, step D. (3} is revised as follows:
(3) Visually inspect combustor turbine module nameplate bracket

(Refer to 72-00-00, 11, figure 14) for damage and security. Repair as
outlined in 72-40-00, paragraph 4.
Steps D. (8), (9), and (10) and Figure 2A are added as follows:
(8) Visually inspect all oil jets for cleanliness. Clean if

required. Refer to paragraph 2.
(9) Visually inspect housing dowels (Refer to 72-00-00, 14 and

44, figure 14) for looseness or leakage. Repair loose dowels or dowels
that show evidence of leakage as outlined in paragraph 4.
(10) Visually and dye-penetrant inspect (Refer to 70-00-00,

paragraph 19) the corner radii of the thermocouple bosses for cracks.
Tight lipped cracks that do not extend through the wall and that are
confined only to the corner radii (Refer to 72-40-00, figure 2A) are
acceptable. If such cracks extend beyond the radius replace the housing.
Also, step E.(2) is revised as follows:
(2) Inspect 7.571 7.575 inch diameter

-
for minor rubs. Light
rubs are acceptable provided tip clearances can be maintained (Ref.
72-40-00, figure 3). Local blend rubbed area to remove sharp edges and/or
step.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Dec 22/81
NO. 47 Rev 3
ACCEPTABLE TIGHT LIPPED CRACKS

THAT DO NOT EXTEND THROUGH THE WALL
AND THAT ARE CONFINED TO THE
CORNER RADII
XA-1046-161
Figure 2A. Combustor and Bearing Support Housing Assembly Crack Limits
Sheet 2 of 2
OUTER LINER
/ WITH TABS BENT,

WASHER SHALL BE FREE
TO MOVE 0.100 INCH
MINIMUM IN ALL RADIAL
DIRECTIONS.
LASH RINGS
O
IN.
INNER LINER 0.035 IN. MIN.

(5 PLACES)
(REGAP IF REQUIRED)
+ FORWARD
XA-1045-122
Figure 2. Combustion Chamber Liner
(3) Visually inspect for damaged plate nuts and (c) Circumferential cracks are not allowed
combustor turbine module identification plate. (Refer on vane inner or outer shrouds.
to 72-00-00, 11, figure 14). Repair as outlined in 72-
40-00, paragraph 4. (d) Eight vane attaching spot-welds may be
broken, provided no more than two consecutive welds
(4) Visually check housing walls for dents. Dents are affected and only one exists on short vane segment.
that do not deform walls more than 0.06 inch are ac-
ceptable. (7) Visually inspect all threaded areas for dam-
aged threads. Repair as outlined in paragraph 4.
(5) Visually check housing externally for nicks,
burrs, and scratches. Repair defects as outlined in para- E. Inspect gas generator turbine rotor shroud (Refer
graph 4. Minor nicks and dents are permitted on all to 72-00-00, 21, figure 14) as follows:
surfaces.
NOTE
(6) Visually inspect for nicks, burrs, dents, cracks
and broken spot-welds. Do not remove shroud unless replace-
ment is required.
(a) Nicks, burrs, and dents up to 1/16
inch in depth shall be repaired as outlined in paragraph (1) Visually inspect shroud for cracks.Replace
4. Nicks and dents beyond 1/16 inch in depth are un- shroud if cracks are evident.
acceptable.
(2) Inspect 7.571 to 7.575 inch diameter for
(b)On turning-vane segments, individual minor tip rubs. Light rubs up to 0.005 inch deep are
nonconvergent cracks up to one inch in length are ac- acceptable provided tip clearances can be maintained.
ceptable on inner shroud. Total length of these cracks (Refer to 72-40-00, figure 3).
must not exceed 6 inches.
72-40-00
5
7.571
CYLINDER
XA-1045-123
Figure 3. Turbine Rotor Shroud Inspection Areas
(3) Inspect cylinder portion of shroud for minor (2) Replace loose, missing, or worn igniter plug
nicks and burrs. Repair as outlined in 72-40-00, para- sealing guides as follows:
graph 4.
(a) Remove defective guides.
(4) Visually for burning (indicated by loss of
material) on cylinder portion of shroud. Replace shroud (b) Using suitable guide setting tool, install
if burning is evident. new guide, assure loose fit, and maintain dimension
shown in 72-40-00, figure 4.
F. Inspect roller bearing outer ring (Refer to 72-00-
00, 28, figure 14). .
(1) Inspect in accordance with general bearing

procedures. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 22.)
G. Inspect No. 2 and 3 bearing oil feed ring (Refer

to 72-00-00, 30, figure 14) as follows:
(1) Visually inspect for cracks. Replace ring if

cracked.
(2) Inspect for clogged or contaminated oil pas-

sages. Reclean ring as directed in 72-40-00, paragraph 2.
4. REPAIR OF COMBUSTIONSECTION. Proceed as

follows:
A. Blend-repair minor nicks and burrs on No. 2 seal

retaining plate (Refer to 72-00-00, 2, figure 14). (Refer
to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.)
0 020
IN.
"
B. Repair combustion chamber liner assembly (Refer
XA-1012-179
(1) Weld-repair out-of-limit cracks, using TIG
weld process (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 24) and
welding wire (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 34). Figure 4. Igniter Plug Sealing Guide Replacement
72-40-00
STRATFORD, CONN,
DATE Dec 23/81
NO. 48 Rev 2
LSSERT THIS PAGE Preceding page 7/8, 72-40-00
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 48 Rev 1 dated Nov. 10/80. Please remove and
discard MCN Nö. 48 Rev 1.
On page 7/8, paragraph 4, steps C. (2) and C. (2) (c) are revised and NOTE
following step C. (2) is added as follows:
(2) Replace damaged combustor turbine module nameplate bracket

NOTE
The serial number of the module must not be changed

regardless of which or how many components have been
replaced.
(c) Tack-weld (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 24) new plate

to housing using welding wire (Refer to 72-00-00, table 14, item 33).
Step C. (6) and (7) are added as follows:
(6) Repair loose or leaking dowels. (Refer to 72-00-00, 14 and

(a) Flush any residual oil from the integral oil passage
using methyl-ethyl-ketone (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 26) or
equivalent.
(b) Weld the dowel flush with the housing using fusion
weld TIG method (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 24) and w-1ding wire (Refer
to 72-00-00, table 15, item 34).
(7) Repair damaged 5/16 inch threaded lifting boss as follows:
NOTE: Whenever the threads of the lifting boss are dam-

aged beyond the ability to repair by retapping,
installation of a helicoil is allowed. Proceed as
follows:
Sheet 1 of 3
DATE Dec 23/81
NO. 48 Rev 2
(a) Drill hole to size using a "Q" (0.332) diameter drill.

Drill to an approximate depth of 0.350. Do not exceed existing depth.
(b) Countersink 120 + 5° to 0.390 -

0.400 inch diameter.
Tap full depth using standard helicoil tap No. 5cPB-H3.
(c) Tap minimum of 0.310 depth using bottoming tap,

helicoil No. SCBB-H3.
(d) Install helicoil No. 1185-5CN-(.312) inch diameter

into hole. Minimum threaded depth shall be 0.300. Grind excess helicoil
material located above countersink face. Break tang at bottom of helicoil.
J Also, Figure 6. and Title to Figure 6. are revised as shown on sheet 3.
Sheet 2 of 3
DATE Dec 23/81
NO. 48 R ev 2
GTAW -
IV 0.015 IN.
TACK WELD
3 PLACES AS
SHOWN 2 SIDES
O O
PLATE
O O
2.00 IN.
X 1142-106
Figure 6. Nameplate Bracket Replacement
Sheet 3 of 3
C. Repair combustor and bearing support housing (c) Tack-weld (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph
(Refer to 72-00-00, 12, figure 14) as follows: 24) new plate to housing, using welding wire (Refer to
72-00-00, table 15, item 34). (Refer to 72-40-00, fig-
(1) Repair damaged nuts as follows: ure 6.)
(a) Machine off discrepant nut. (3) Blend-repair (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph
23) all external nicks, burrs, and scratches.
(b) Weld new nuts on housing, using TIG
method (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 24) and welding (4) Blend-repair (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph
wire (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 34) in acoord- 23) nicks, burrs, and dents on turning vanes.
ance with 72-40-00, figure 5.
(5) Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00,
(2) Replace damaged combustor turbine module paragraph 26.)
identification plate (Refer to 72-00-00, 11, figure 14)
as follows:
(a) Transfer data to new plate.
(b) Machine off old plate +--2.00 IN.-+
0.015 IN.
0.04 0.05 TACKWELD 3 PLACES
4 PLACES \ \ \ AS SHOWN 2 SIDES
4.32 IN.
STDL3A09E2-02
XA-1012-186 XA-1012-187
Figure 5. Plate Nut Replacement Figure 6. Identification Plate Replacement
72-40- 00
TURBINE SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
Paragraph Title Subject Page
1. TurbineSection ......... . ... ..................

72-50-00 3
2. Cleaning of Turbine Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-50-00 3
3. Inspection of Turbine Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-50-00 3
4. RepairofTurbineSection ..........................
72-50-00 10
TURBINE SECTION
Chapter/Section
Figure Title Subject Page
1. Gas Generator Nozzle Crack Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

72-50-00 7
2. Gas Generator Nozzlé Rub Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-50-00 8
3. Curl Doubler Joint Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-50-00 9
4. Power ÏurbineNozzle Inspection Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-50-00 10
5. Seal Housing Pin Replacement Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-50-00 11
TURBINE SECTION
LIST OF TABLES
Chapter/Section
Table Title Subject Page
Number Number
1. Gas Generator Turbine Rotor Blade Inspection Limits . . . . . . . . . . .

72-50-00 3
2. Gas Generator Nozzle Inspection Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-50-00 4
3. Power Turbine Nozzle Inspection Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-50-00 9
72-50-00
AJAVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
STRATFORO, CONN,
DATE híay 7/82
NO. 35Rev2
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 35 Rev 1 dated Oct 24/80. Please remove and
2. CLEANING OF TURBINE SECTION. Proceed as follows:
A. Clean, handle and process No. 2 position roller bearing (Refer

to 72-00-00, 38, figure 7) in accordance with standard practices. (Refer
to 70-00-00, paragraphs 11 and 22.)
B. Clean, handle and process No. 3 position bearing (Refer to

72-00-00, 34, figure 14) in accordance with standard practices. (Refer to
70-00-00, paragraphs 11 and 22.)
C. Clean, handle and process No. 2 bearing seal (Refer to 72-00-00,

3 figure 14) No. 2 seal runner (Refer to 72-00-00, 39, figure 7) and No. 3
bearing seal. (Refer to 72-00-00, 35, figure 14) in accordance with
standard practices. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 12.)
D. Clean all other parts by dry-cleaning solvent method. (Refer to

70-00-00, paragraph 15.)
Paragraph 3, step B. (11) is added as follows:
(11) Dimensionally inspect OD of labyrinth tips in three equally

spaced locations on rotor sealing plate. Replace rotor if OD is less than
4.221 inches.
Also, step Bl. is added as follows:
Inspect
Bl. bolts (Refer to 72-00-00, 41, figure 7) for nine-digit
part number on head of bolts and for damaged threads. Replace bolts that
are not identified by a nine-digit part number or have damaged threads.
The technical aspects of this MCN were approved by FAA er Avco Lycoming DE .
TELEDY /
Sheet 1 of 1
AVCO LYCOMING DIV1510N
TURBINE SECTION
I. TURBINE SECTION. Table 1. Gas Generator Turbine Rotor Blade

Inspection Limits
2. CLEANING OF TURBINE SECTION. Clean all parts
by dry cleaning solvent method. (Refer to 70-00-00, Defect Inspection Limits
paragraph 15.)
Nicks and Nicks up to 1/32 inch in depth
3. INSPECTIONOF TURBINE SECTION. Proceed as Dents are acceptable. Small smooth
follows: dents are acceptable if blade is
not distorted
A. Inspect seal (Refer to 72-00-00, 39, figure 7) as
follows: NOTE
(1) Inspect for mutilation and distortion. If No repairs are allowed in the blade
damage is evident, replace seal. critical area which extends 1/4 inch up
from the platform area. Smooth dents,
(2) Inspect for cracks visually. If cracks are not exceeding 1/64 inch in depth, are
evident, replace seal. acceptable.
(3) Inspect surface finish for wear and/or frett- Burning Burning, with loss of material
ing. Wear and fretting are not allowed. Replace seal. is not allowed. Replace gas
generator turbine rotor assembly
(4) Inspect lands for heavy damage or mutila-
tion. If damage or mutilation is evident, replace seal. Tip Rub Light tip rubs are acceptable
B. Inspect gas generator turbine rotor assembly (40) Erosion Light erosion is acceptable, pro-
as follows: vided rounding off of blade tip
corners has not occurred
CAUTION
(4) Visually inspect for cracks. If cracks are
GAS GENERATOR TURBINE ROTOR evident, replace gas generator turbine rotor assembly.
ASSEMBLY (40) CONSISTS OF A
DISC, BLADES, SEALING PLATE, (5) Inspect sealing plate for warpage and bowing.
RING, AND SPACER. DO NOT DIS- If warpage or bowing is evident, replace gas generator
ASSEMBLE. IF DAMAGE EXCEEDS turbine rotor assembly.
LIMITS ON ANY PART, ENTIRE
ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED. (6) Inspect sealing plate for minor nicks and
dents. Minor nicks and dents are acceptable with blend
NOTE repair (Refer to 72-50-00, paragraph 4).
Conduct visual inspection of gas gen- (7) Inspect for rubs on forward face of plate.
erator turbine rotor assembly, using Rubs are not allowed. Replace gas generator turbine
7-power magnifying glass. rotor assembly.
(1) Visually inspect disc for cracks. If cracks (8) Visually inspect spacer for cracks. If cracks
are evident replace rotor assembly. are evident, replace gas generator turbine rotor assembly.
(2) Inspect disc for rubs on aft face. If rubs (9) Inspect spacer for minor nicks, burrs, and
exceed 0.005 inch in depth, replace gas generator scratches. Blend-repair as outlined in 72-50-00, para-
turbine rotor assembly, graph 4.
(3) Visually inspect blades for conditions given (10) Inspect spacer air holes for obstructions.
in 72-50-00, table 1. If limits are exceeded, replace gas Clean obstructed air holes.
generator rotor assembly.
72-50-00
3
JAVCO LYCOMING OtVISION
C. Inspect seals. (Refer to 72-00-00, 43, figure 7) as Table 2. Gas Generator Nozzle Inspection Limits -
follows: Continued
.
(1) Inspect fiber metal seals for damage and mu- Figure
tilation. Replace if these conditions exist. Defects Reference Inspection Limits
(2) Inspect for rubs on fiber metal seal. Light VANE TRAILING EDGES
rubs are acceptable, provided assembly clearances can be
maintained. NOTE
(3) Inspect fiber metal seal brazed joints for Some vane trailing edges of nozzles may
separation. Separation is not allowed. have been blend-repaired. Blends are ac-
complished to preclude sharp edges in
(4) Inspect ring portion of seal for cracks. If the rework area and the nozzle coating
cracks are evident, replace seal is applied after blending. Up to three
blend areas on any one vane may be
(5) Inspect threaded holes for damaged threads. evident. The following inspection limits
Repair as outlined in 72-50-00, paragraph 4. shall be applied only to those defects
caused by engine operation. The follow-
D. Inspect seal ring (Refer to 72-00-00, 45, figure 7) ing crack length limits shall be measured,
as follows: using the vane trailing edge as a reference
point.
(1) Visually inspect expander springs (44) for
evidence of collapse, cracks, and wear. Not acceptable, Distortion Bulging and distortion
replace springs. of vane portion and
trailing edge aft areas
(2) Visually inspect for nicks and burrs. Repair is acceptable, provided
as outlined in 72-50-00, paragraph 4. all other inspection
criteria is met
(3) Visually inspect for cracks. Cracks are not
aÚowed,
replace seal ring. Cracks 1 1. Any number of cracks
up to 1/8 inch in
E. Visually inspect gas generator nozzle (Refer to length are acceptable.
72-00-00, 46, figure 7) for conditions given in 72-50-00, Two cracks per vane,
table 2. up to 1/4 inch in
length, are acceptable
Table 2. Gas Generator Nozzle Inspection Limits
2. Multiple diagonal
Figure trailing edge cracks
Defects Reference Inspection Limits which traverse to
inner and outer
VANE AIRFOIL SURFACES shroud areas are ac-
ceptable on all vanes
Nicks and Minor nicks and dents
Dents are allowed on all vanes. 3. Converging cracks
Remove sharp projec- which create a possi-
tions as outlined in bility of material
72-50-00, paragraph 4 fallout are not ac-
ceptable. Replace
Loss of Coating Acceptable, provided nozzle
and Sulfidation other inspection criteria
is met 4. If limits are exceeded,
replace nozzle
Mutilation Not acceptable. Replace
nozzle
72-50-00
APAVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
STRATFORO, CONN,
DATE Aday 7/82
NO. 4 Rev 3

This MCN supersedes MCN No. 4 Rev 2 dated Dec 22/81. Please remove and discard
MCN No. 4 Rev 2.
On page 4, paragraph 3, step C. (6) is added as follows:
(6) Dimensionally inspect ID of seal in three equally spaced

locations. Replace seal if ID exceeds 4.235 inches.
Step Cl. is added as follows:
C1. Visually inspect nut (Ref. 72-00-00, 36, figure 7) for damaged
threads. If damage is evident, replace nut.
Also, Table 2. Gas Generator Nozzle Inspection Limits is revised as follows:
Figure
Defects Reference Inspection Limits
VANE AIRFOIL SURFACES
Nicks and Dents Minor nicks and dents are allowed

on all vanes. Remove sharp
projections as outlined in
72-50-00, paragraph 4
Loss of Coating Slight loss of coating and sulfida-

and Sulfidation tion is acceptable provided all
other inspection criteria are met.
If limit is exceeded, repair as
outlined in paragraph 4.
Mutilation Not acceptable. Replace nozzle
1518?ER STATION
JUL 1 5 82
TELKu NE /
The technical aspects of this MCN were approved by FAA per Avco L omú¾ LDERO
Page 1 of 2
DATE Níay 7/82
50. 4 Rev 3
Figure
VANE TRAILING EDGES
NOTE
Some vane trailing edges of nozzles may have been blend-repaired. Blends
are accomplished to preclude sharp edges in the rework area and the nozzle
coating is applied after blending. Up to three blend areas on any one vane
may be evident. The following inspection limits shall be applied only to
those defects caused by engine operation. The following crack length
limits shall be measured, using the vane trailing edge as a reference
point.
Distortion Bulging and distortion of vane

portion and trailing edge aft
areas is acceptable, provided all
other inspection criteria is met
Cracks 1 1. Any number of cracks

up to
3/16 inch are ac-
in length
ceptable. Two cracks per vane
up to 7/16 inch in length are
acceptable.
2. Multiple diagonal trailing

edge cracks which traverse to
inner and outer shroud areas
are acceptable on all vanes
3. Converging cracks which create

a possibility of material
fa11-out are not acceptable;
however, it is permissible to
remove such "fallout material"
provided limits stated for
burned areas are not exceeded
after blend repair.
4. If limits are exceeded,

replace nozzle
Sheet 2 of 2
APAVCO LYCOIVIING DIVISION DATE Dec 22/81
STRATFORD, CONN,
NO. 107

On page 5, Table 2. Gas Generator Nozzle Inspection Limits is revised as fol-

lows:
Figure
VANE TRAILING EDGES
Burned Areas 1. A burned area 1/2 inch radial

length by 5/16 inch axial length
is acceptable on a maximum of
six vanes.
2. Any number of vanes may have a

burned area 3/8 inch radial
length by 5/16 inch axial length.
VANE LEADING EDGE
Cracks 1. Leading edge cracks at the vane

to shroud areas (corners) are
acceptable
2. Radial cracking is acceptable
3. Any number of axial cracks up to

1/4 inch in length are
acceptable.
4. If limits are exceeded, replace

nozzle
Sulfidated Loss coating

of with greenish tint
Areas is allowed provided all other in-
spection criteria is met. If limit
is exceeded, repair as outlined in
paragraph 4.
Burning Slight loss of associated

material
with sulfidation allowed is pro-
vided inspection
all other cri-
teria is met. If limit is exceeded,
repair as outlined in paragraph 4.
Any other melting, puddling or loss
of material is unacceptable.
Sheet 1 of 3
DATE Dec 22/81
, NO. 107
Figure
GUTER SHROUD
Cracks 1. Non-converging axial cracks from

trailing edge of shroud are al-
lowed up to 7/8 inch in length.
2. Circumferential cracking is not

acceptable. If circumferential
cracking is noted, replace nozzle
INNER SHROUD
Circumferential 2 Rubs up to 360 degrees are accept-

Rubs On Inner able, provided depth or rub does
Shroud Adjacent not exceed 0.030 inch or undercut
to Support Area vane trailing edge. If limits are
exceeded, replace nozzle
Cracks 1. Any number of axial cracks in

the AFT edge area of shroud are
allowed up to 3/8 inch. Twelve
(12) axial cracks up to 3/4" in
length are allowed to progress
from trailing edge.
2. Five (5) axial cracks up to 3/4"

are allowed to progress from
leading edge of shroud. Any num-
ber of axial cracks allowed up
to 3/8".
3. Cracks which originate at trail-

ing edge of inner shroud may
traverse into vane airfoil(s)
provided:
a. Only (6) vanes

six may have
such cracks and only one (1)
crack per vane is allowed.
b. If extended, cracks would

not converge with vane lead-
ing or trailing edge.
c. Cracks shall be tight to

0.005 inch open.
Sheet 2 of 3
DATE Dec 22/81
NO. 107
Figure
Defects Reference InspectionLimits
d. Cracks shall not extend

radially more than one half
the distance from inner to
outer shrouds.
4. Circumferential cracks not al-

lowed. Replace nozzle.
CURL
Wear Caused by Minor wear is acceptable. If wear-

Combustion through exists, replace nozzle
Chamber Liner
Sheet 3 of 3
4
Table 2. Gas Generator Nozzle Inspection Limits --

Figure
Continued Defects Reference Inspection Limits
Figure Cracks 2. Circumferential crack-

Defects Reference Inspection Limits (Cont) ing is not acceptable.
If circumferential
Burned A burned area, 1/4 inch cracking is noted, re-
Areas radial length by 3/16- place nozzle
inch axial length, is
acceptable on a maxi- INNER SHROUD
mum of three vanes
Circumfer- 2 Rubs up to 360 degrees
VANE LEADING EDGE tial Rubs are acceptable, provided
On Inner depth of rub does not
Cracks 1. Leading edge cracks Shroud exceed 0.030 inch or
at the vane to Adjacent to undercut vane trailing
shroud areas (cor- Support Area edge. If limits are ex-
ers) are acceptable ceeded, replace nozzle
2. Radial cracking is Cracks 1. Any number of axial

acceptable cracks in the aft edge
area of shroud are
3. Any number of allowed up to 1/4
axial cracks up to inch. Ten axial cracks
1/8 inch in length up to 5/8 inch in
are acceptable length are allowed to
progress from trailing
4. If limits are ex- edge.
ceeded, replace -
nozzle 2. Five axial cracks up
to 5/8 inch are al-
Sulfidated Loss of coating with lowed to progress
Areas greenish tint is allowed from leading edge of
provided all other in- shroud. Any number
spection criteria is met of axial cracks allowed
up to 1/4 inch
Burning Slight loss of material
associated with sulfida- 3, Circumferential
tion is allowed. Any cracking is not ac-
other melting, puddling ceptable. If cracking
or loss of material is is noted, replace
unacceptable nozzle
OUTER SHROUD CURL
Cracks 1. Nonconverging axial Cracks Not acceptable. Replace

cracks from trailing nozzle
edge of shroud are
allowed up to 5/8 Wear Caused Mmor wear is accept-
inch in length by Combus- able. If wear-through
tion Chamber exists, replace nozzle
Liner
72-50-00
5
JAVCO LYCOMING OlV1SION
Table 2. Gas Generator Nozzle Inspection Limits -

G. Inspect No. 3 bearing seal (Refer to 72-00-00, 35,
Continued figure 14) as follows:
Figuæ (1) Inspect for obvious damage that would cause

Defects Reference Inspection Limits leakage such as coking and chipping. (Refer to 70-00-00,
paragraph 12.) Replace defective seals.
Nicks, Dents, Minor nicks, dents, and
Rubs, and scratches are acceptable. H. Inspect power turbine nozzle (Refer to 72-00-00,
Scratches Blend, as required, to 36, figure 14) as follows:
in Outer remove protrusions. (Re-
Surface fer to 70-00-00, para- (1) Visually inspect for conditions specified in
graph 23) 72-50-00, table 3.
SEAL RING (2) Inspect (Refer to figure 4) in cylinder area

for out-of-roundness and distortion; this condition is
Carbon Acceptable Clean
-
not allowed; if proper tip clearance cannot be maintained,
Buildup grooves (Refer to 70- replace.
and Con- 00-00, paragraph 15)
tamination (3) Inspect threaded holes for damaged threads.
in Grooves Repair as outlined in paragraph 4.
VANES I. Inspect seal housing (Refer to 72-00-00, 39, figure

14) as follows:
Erosion Light erosion allowed.
Heavy erosion is unac- (1) Visually inspect for cracks. If cracks are
ceptable. Replace nozzle noted, replace housing.
(2) Inspect for damaged threads. Repair as out-

F. Inspect curl (Refer to 72-00-00, 47, figure 7) as lined in 72-50-00, paragraph 4.
follows:
(3) Inspect antirotation pins for looseness and
(1) Visually inspect for severe damage or mutila- wear. Replace pins as outlined in paragraph 4.
tion. Damage or mutilation is cause for curl replacement.
(4) Inspect aft portion of housing for rubs. Light
(2) Inspect for cracks visually. Repair tight- rubs or scuffing is allowed.
lipped cracks as outlined in 72-50-00, paragraph. Re-
place curl if cracks are wide and associated with burn- (5) Inspect for warpage, mutilation, and distor-
ing. Cracks at ID between holes are acceptable up to tion. If discrepancies are noted, replace housing.
180 degrees of circumference without repair.
(6) Inspect for nicks and burrs. Minor nicks and
(3) Inspect for warpage. If warpage is evident, burrs are acceptable with blend repair. (Refer to para-
replace curl. graph 4.)
(4) Visually inspect for wear. Replace curl if J. Inspect power turbine rotor assembly (Refer to
wear is excessive. 72-00-00, 40, figure 14) as follows:
(5) Visually inspect curl surfaces for metal (1) Visually inspect for cracks. If cracks are
particles and other contamination. Remove contaminants noted, replace rotor.
(2) Inspect blade areas for nicks, dents, burns,
(6) Inspect doubler portion of joint (Refer to and tip rubs. Limits are as follows:
figure 3) for separation. If separation is noted, replace
-
(a) No repairs are allowed in blade critical

curl area extending 1/4 inch up from platform area. Replace
power turbine rotor assembly. Smooth dents, not exceed-
ing 1/32 inch in depth, are acceptable without repair.
72-50-00

6
APAVCD LYCOIVIING 01VISION
STRATFORD, CONN,
DATE Dec 22/81
NO. 39 Rev 4
THIS CHANGE APPLIES TO: UTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual

LNSERT TBIS PAGE Facing page 6, 72-50-00
On page 6, Table 2. Gas Generator Nozzle Inspection Limits is revised as fol-

lows:
Figure
CURL
Nicks, Dents, Minor nicks, dents, and scratdhes

Rubs, and are acceptable. Blend, as re-
Scratches in quired, to remove protrusions.
Outer Surface (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph
23)
F.O.D. One hole up to 3/16 inch diameter

with associated loss of adjacent -
metal is acceptable in the outer

sheet metal portion of the nozzle
curl, provided no more than oñë
nozzle/ curl spot weld is af-
fected (broken). Replace nozzle
assembly if limit is ex¢eeded.
SEAL RING
Carbon Buildup and Contamination Acceptable. Clean grooves with

in Grooves fiber brush moistened wiàh dry
cleaning solvent
VANES
Erosion Light erosion allowed. Heavy

erosion is unacceptable. Replace
nozzle
The technical aspects of this MUN were approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Dec 22/81
NO. 39 Rev 4
Paragraph 3, step F. (3) is revised and step F. (7) is added as follows:
(3) Visually inspect 6.50 inch diameter inner flange (Refer to

figure 2A) for warpage. flange
Repair
warped as outlined in paragraph 4.
Visually inspect all other areas of curl for warpage. If warpage prevents
proper mating with liner and nozzle, replace curl.
(7) Visually inspect for holes (punctures or burns) in the curl

surface. Repair small defects up to 1/8 inch in diameter with associated
loss of material as outlined in 72-50-00, paragraþh 4. Replace curl if
limit is exceeded.
Also, step J. (1A) is added as follows:
(1A) Using fluorescent-penetrant method (refer to 70-00-00,

paragraph 19A), inspect blades for cracks. Check trailing edge root radius
areas in particular. Limits are as follows:
(a) Any crack or linear indication in, or just above, the

root blade platform radius is cause for replacement. (Refer to figure 2B.)
(b) Cracking in other blade areas not allowed, except that

small linear indications (hot tears) along trailing edge in area shown in
figure 28. are allowed to be blend-repaired (refer to 70-00-00, paragraph
23) provided depth after repair does not exceed existing F.O.D. limits.
(c) Reinspect by fluorescent-penetrant method. No cracks

allowed. Replace rotors if limits are exceeded.
Sheet 2 of 2
ACCEPTABLE VANE TO
SHROUD AREA CRACKS
ACCEPTABLE DIAGONAL
VANE TO SHROUD CRACKS
VANE TRAILING EDGE TO SHROUD CRACKS
I
1/8-INCHMAXIMUM i
(ANY NUMBER)
1/4 INCH MAXIMUM

(2 PER VANE)
VANE TRAILING EDGE CRACKS
×A-1046-142
Figure 1. Gas Generator Nozzle Crack Limits
72-50-00
7
AVCO LYCOlvtlNG OlVISION
CURL
OUTER
SHROUD
VANE (TRAILING EDGE)
NNER SHROUD
I
· ' RUB AREAS
0.030 INCH MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE

DEPTH OF RUB OR FLUSH TO
TRAfLING EDGE OF VANE
X A-1045-149
Figure 2. Gas Generator Nozzle Rub Limits
(b) Nicks and dents in leading and trailing (f) Light rubs on labyrinth seal area are
edges and in airfoil surfaces up to 1/16 inch in depth acceptable
are acceptable after blend repair. (Refer to 72-50-00,
paragraph 4.)
(3) Inspect splined area for defects and wear.
If spline defects or wear is evident, replace rotor.
(c) Cracks and burning with loss of material
is not allowed. Replace rotor.
(4) Inspect chrome-plated areas of rotor for fret-
(d) Light tip rubs are acceptable provided ting and loss of chrome. Replace rotor,
tip clearances are within limits.
(5) Inspect for damaged threads. Repair as out-
(e) Rubs are not allowed on disc face. lined in paragraph 4.
72-50-00
A7AVCO LYCOMING DIVISION DATE Nov 30/79
STRATFCAO, CONNECTICUT
NO. 3

On page 8, Figure 2A. is added as shown below:
6.50 IN. DIA
X A-1045-187
Figure 2A. Curl Inner Flange Inspection
Sheet 1 of 1
r
APAVCO LYCOMING DIVISION DATE Jan 6/82
STRATFORD, CONN,
NO . 9 lR ev 1

No. 91.
On page 9, Figure 2B. is added as shown:
BLEND SMALL TEARS ALONG

TilAILING EOGE IN THIS AREA
0.25 IN.
CHACKING
NOT ALLOWED
MA1142-105
Figure 2B. Power Turbine Rotor Assembly Inspection
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Jan 6/82
NO. 91 Rev 1
Also, Table 3, NOTE is revised as-follows:
NOTE
Some vane trailing edges of nozzles may have been

blend-repaired. Blends are accomplished to pre-
clude sharp edges in the rework area and the noz-
zle coating is applied after blending. Up to
three blend areas on any one vane may be evident.
/ The following inspection limits shall be applied
/ only to those
The following
sured, using
defects
crack
caused
length
the vane trailing
by engine
limits shall
operation.
be mea-
edge as a refer-
ence point. Any vane defects that can be removed
by blending to the limits specified in paragraph
4 are acceptable.
Sheet 2 of 2
AVCC3 LYCOMING OIVIS10N
Table 3. Power Turbine Nozzle Inspection Limits -
Continued
Defect Inspection Limits

DOUBLER -
JOINT
Nicks and 1. A maximum of two nicks or
Dents dents are allowed on vane edge,
provided that after blend repair
depth of any defect does not
exceed 3/32 inch and length
does not exceed 3/16 inch
2. Nicks and dents on vane airfoil

surfaces are allowable after blend
repair. (Refer to 72-50-00, para-
graph 4)
Burns 2. Burns in vanes are not allowed.

Replace nozzle
XA-1012 230
INNER SHROUD
Figuæ 3. Curl Doubler Joint Location
Rubs 1. Light rubs up to 0.010 inch ac-
Table 3. Power Turbine Nozzle Inspection Limits ceptable on inner shroud aft
portion. If limit is exceeded, re-
Defect Inspection Limits place nozzle
LEADINGAND TRAILING EDGES AND

2. Light rubs are acceptable on
AIRFOIL SURFACESOF VANES cylinder area, provided wall
thickness is not less than 0.060
NOTE inch and assembly tip clearances
can be met. If limit is exceeded,
Some vane trailing edges of nozzles
replace nozzle
may have been blend-repaired. Blends
are accomplished to preclude sharp INNER AND OUTER SHROUD
edges in the rework area and the
nozzle coating is applied after blend~ Circumferen- Not allowed. Replace nozzle
ing. Up to three blend areas on any
tial Cracking
one vane may be evident. The fol-
lowing inspection limits shall be ap- INNER SHROUD TO SHIELD BRAZE JOINT
plied only to those defects caused
by engine operation. The following Voids and Dis- Minor voids and discontinuities are
crack length limits shall be measured,
continuities allowed up to 0.050 inch. If limit
using the vane trailing edge as a is exceeded, replace nozzle
reference point.
Cracks Circumferential brazement cracks
Cracks 1. Any number of 1/8-inch cracks
are acceptable, provided individual
are allowed on vane trailing edge crack length does not exceed one
inch and cumulative length does
2. Any number of 1/16-inch cracks not exceed 3 inches
are allowed on vane leading edge
72-50-00
9
OUTER SHROUD
CYLINDER AREA
VANE
INNER
SD
N ER
SH I ELD
XA-1045-125
Figure 4. Power Turbine Nozzle Inspection Areas
(6) Inspect plug (Refer to 72-00-00, 41, figure CAUTION

14,) as follows:
GAS GENERATOR TURBINE ROTOR
CAUTION ASSEMBLY (40) CONSISTS OF DISC,
BLADES, SEALING PLATE, RING,
DO NOT REMOVE PLUG FROM AND SPACER. DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.
POWER TURBINE ROTOR. IF DAMAGE EXCEEDS LIMITS ON
ANY PART OTHER THAN THOSE
(a) Inspect visible portion of plug for heavy AREAS CALLED OUT FOR REPAIR,
damage, cracks, or mutilation. This damage is not allow- ENTIRE ASSEMBLYMUST BE
ed. Replace rotor. REPLACED.
(b) Inspect for surface nicks. Surface nicks (1) Blend-repair minor nicks, burrs, and scratches
are acceptable with blend repair. (Refer to 72-50-00, on turbine rotor and disc. (Refer to 70-00-00, para-
paragraph 4.) graph 23.)
4. REPAIR OF TURBINE SECTION. Proceed as follows: (2) Repair spacer as follows:
A. Repair gas generator turbine rotor assembly (Refer (a) Clean obstructed air holes as required.
72-50-00

L
7,
ARAVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
6/82 STRATFORD, CONN,
DATE Jan
NO. 44 Rev 2
THIS CHENGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
On page 11/12, paragraph 4, steps E. (3) and (4) are added as follows:
(3) Repair warped 6.50 inch diameter inner flange (Refer to

figure 2A) as follows:
(a) Place curl in lathe and using suitable roller fixture

turn curl and reshape flange back to 6.50 inch diameter.
(b) Inspect for cracks visually. If cracks are noted,

replace curl.
(4) Repair holes up to 1/8 inch diameter as follows:
(a) Clean curl assembly by dry-cleaning solvent method.

(Ref. 70-00-00, paragraph 15.)
(b) Repair holes and associated damage using welding wire

(Ref. 72-00-00, table 15, item 35) by fusion weld (TIG) method. (Ref.
70-00-00, paragraph 24.) Blend weld smooth with surrounding parent .metal.
(c) Inspect for cracks using dye-penetrant method. (Ref.

70-00-00, paragraph 19.) No cracks allowed.
Also, step F. (3) is added as follows:

'
(3) Repaired defects on the vane trailing edge up to 0.250 inch
deep are acceptable provided that no more than three vanes per nozzle are
repaired to this limit. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.)
Sheet 1 of 1
(b) Blend-repair minor nicks, burrs, and (2) Blend-repair all minor nicks and burrs. (Refer
scratches. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.) to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.)
(c) Repair sealing plate by blend-repair (3) Replace worn or loose pins, P/N 4-141-046-
method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.) 02, as required. Maintain pin height as shown in 72-50-
00, figure 5.
B. Repair damaged threads on seals (72-00-00, 43,
figure 7). (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 26.) H. Repair power turbine rotor assembly (Refer to 72-
C. Blend-repair nicks and burrs on metal seal ring
(Refer to 72-00-00, 45, figure 7). (Refer to 70-00-00, (1) Blend-repair nicks and dents on rotor blades.
paragraph 23.) (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.)
D. Repair gas generator nozzle (Refer to 72-00-00, (2) Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00,
46, figure 7). Blend-repair nicks and dents. (Refer to paragraph 26.)
70-00-00, paragraph 23.) Repair shall be limited to
removal of sharp projections. I. Repair plug. (Refer to 72-00-00, 41, figure 14).
Blend-repair minor surface nicks. (Refer to 70-00-00,
E. Repair combustion chamber curl. (Refer to 72- paragraph 23.)
CAUTION
(1) Repair tight-lipped cracks in parent metal,
using welding wire (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item DO NOT REMOVE PLUG FROM
35), by fusion-weld repair method. (Refer to 70-00-00, POWER TURBINE ROTOR
paragraph 24.)
(2) Remove contamination from curl surface(s)

using No. 320, sandpaper (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, 0.120 IN. -+
-
item 28). MAINTAIN THIS HEIGHT - -
F. Repair power turbine nozzle (Refer to 72-00-00,

36, figure 14).
(1) Blend-repair nicks and dents on vane airfoil

surfaces. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.)

paragraph 26.)
G. Repair seal housing (Refer to 72-00-00, 39, figure

14) as follows: -/ XA-1045-126
(1) Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00, Figure 5. Seal Housing Pin Replacement Repair
paragraph 26.)
72-50-00

ACCESSORY DRIVES/REDUCTION GEAR SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
1. Accessory/Reduction Gearbox Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

72-60-00 3
2. Cleaning of Accessory/Reduction Gearbox Module . . . . . . . . . .
72-60-00 3
3. Inspection of Accessory/Reduction Gearbox Module . . . . . . . . .
72-60-00 3
4. Repair of Accessory/Reduction Gearbox Module . . . . . . . . . .
72-60-00 6
Chapter/Section
Figure Subject Page
1. Checking Gap Between Upper and Lower Fire Shields . . . . . . . . .

72-60-00 3
2. BumperScoringArea .............................
72-60-00 4
3. Power Train Gear Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-60-00 5
4. DiscInspection ................................
72-60-00 6
5. RepairofAnchorNuts ............................
72-60-00 7
6. RepairofTubesandPlug ..........................
72-60-00 7
7. Gearbox Cover Assembly Stud Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-60-00 9
8. Gearbox Case Assembly Stud Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-60-00 10
9. Repair of 0.5625-12NC-3 Threaded Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72-60-00 11
72-60-00
1/2
JAVCC LYCOMING OMet0N
1. ACCESSORY/REDUCTIONGEARBOX MODULE.
2. CLEANING OF ACCESSORY/REDUCTIONGEAR-
BOX MODULE. Clean all parts using dry cleaning UPPER FIRESHIELD
solvent method (Refer to 72-00-00, paragraph 15).
3. INSPECTION OF ACCESSORY/REDUCTIONGEAR- -e-
BOX MODULE. Proceed as follows:

place if damage is evident. Replace all cracked parts 0.000 TO 0.020 INCHAGAP
unless otherwise directed. REQUlRED (BOTH SIDES)
B. Visually inspect threaded parts for damaged

threads. Repair parts with minor thread damage as out- 9
lined in 72-60-00, paragraph 4.
C. Visually inspect gearbox seals for evidence of -
leakage. If leakage from any seal exceeds 4 cc/hr, re-

place seal.
LOWER FlRESHIELD
D. Inspect fire shield assembly (Refer to 72-00-00,

14, figure 2) as follows: XAGO48484
(1) Visually for cracks. Repair as outlined in

Figure 1. Checking Gap Between Upper and
Lower Fire Shields
(2) Inspect for damaged anchor nuts. Replace

damaged anchor nuts as outlined in paragraph 4. (3) Visually for wear or damage to splines. (Re-
fer to 70-00-00, paragraph 21.) Replace if defective.
(3) Inspect for damaged tubes and plug on upper
fire shield. Replace damaged tubes and plug as outlined (4) Visually for wear or damage to gear teeth.
in paragraph 4- (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 21.) Replace if limits
are exceeded.
(4) At reassembly dimensionally
and reinstallation,
inspect for a 0.000 to 0.020 inch gap between upper (5) Visually inspect gears for clogged oil
fire shield and lower fire shield given in 72-60-00, passages. Clean as required.
figure 1. Repair as outlined in paragraph 4.
(6) Visually inspect for leakage or looseness of
E. Inspect all gears, splined parts, shafts, bearing and
plugs in gears and shafts. Replace plugs as outlined in
seal journals as follows: 72-60-00, paragraph 4.
(1) Visually inspect for cracks. Replace if de- (7) Visually for damaged threads. Repair as out-
fective· lined in paragraph 4.
(2) Visually for scoring on bearing and seal

(8) Visually for loose or bent pins. Replace as
journals. If scoring is noted, replace defective parts required.
72-60-00
3
(9) Visually for damaged surface finish. Repair (2) Visually for bent or stripped studs. Repair
as outlined in paragraph 4. as outlined in paragraph 4.
F. Visually inspect fire shield plate (Refer to 72-00- (3) Visually for damaged threads. Repair as out-
00, 15, figure 2) for cracks. Repair as outlined in 72- lined in paragraph 4.
60-00, paragraph 4.
(4) Visually for damaged surface finish. Repair
G. Inspect retainer (Refer to 72-00-00, 36, figure 2) as outlined in paragraph 4.
as follows:
L. Inspect oil transfer tube (Refer to 72-00-00, 59,
(1) Visually for cracks. Replace if defective. figure 2) as follows:
(2) Visually for scoring. Repair as outlined in (1) Visually for cracks. Replace if defective.
(2) Visually for minor burrs and nicks. Repair
H. Inspect seal housing (Refer to 72-00-00, 41, figure as outlined in 72-60-00, paragraph 4.
2) as follows:
(3) Visually for clogging and contamination of
(1) Visually for cracks. Replace if defective. internal passage. Repair as outlined in paragraph 4.
(2) Visually inspect drain tube for clogging. Re- M.Inspect carrier assembly (Refer to 72-00-00, 61,
pair as outlined in 72-60-00, paragraph 4. figure 2) as follows:
(1) Visually for cracks. Replace if defective.
I. Inspect shaft assembly (Refer to 72-00-00, 43, fig-
ure 2) as follows: (2) Visually for damaged threads. Repair as out-
hed in paragraph 4.
(1) Inspect for rubs or scoring. Replace shaft if
defects are greater than 0.003 inch in depth. N. Inspect bumper (Refer to 72-00-00, 67, figure 2)
for scoring in area given in 72-60-00, figure 2. Replace
(2) Inspect for loose or scored dowel pins. Re- bumper if scoring depth exceeds 0.010 inch.
place, if defective, as outlined in paragraph 4.
(3) Inspect for nicks and burrs on propeller

mounting flange. Repair as outlined in paragraph 4' SCORING
ALLOWED ON
J. Inspect bumper sleeve (Refer to 72-00-00, 47, THIS AREA
figure 2) as follows: ONLY
(2) Visually for excessive scoring. Replace if de-

fective.
(3) Visually for damaged surface finish. Repair

as outlined in 72-60-00, paragraph 4. 7
(4) Visually for clogged oil transfer hole. Repair /

K. Inspect gearbox cover assembly (Refer to 72-00-

X A-1048-199
(1) Visually for cracks. Replace if defective. Figure 2. Bumper Scoring Area
72-60-00
APAVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
STRATFORD, CONN,
DATE Dec 22/81
NO. 75 Rev 1

This MCN supersedes MCN No. 75 dated Nov 10/80. Please remove and discard MCN
No. 75.
On page 4, paragraph 3, step R.(3) is added as follows:
(3) Visually inspect tube for dents, cracks and crushing. Shallow
dents are acceptable provided cross-section of tube (ID) is not reduced by
greater than 30% of original width. Crushing and cracks are not allowed.
NOTE following step K. is added as follows:
NOTE
Whenever the gearbox cover has been replaced, the module

and torque data must be transferred to the new data plates
attached to the replacement housing. The serial number of
the module must not be changed regardless of which or how
many components have been replaced.
Also, steps K. (5) and (6) are added as follows:
(5) Inspect accessory/reduction gearbox module identification

plate (Refer to 72-00-00, 180, figure 2) or torque calibration plate
(Refer to 72-00-00, 180A, figure 2) for damage and security. Repair as
(6) Inspect engine data plate (Refer to 72-00-00, 2, figure 1)

on case assembly for damage and security. Repair as outlined in 72-00-00,
paragraph 18.
Sheet 1 of 1
JAVCCI LYCOMING DIVISION
ermATFamo. coNNacTscur
DATE J un 12 |8 1
NO- ËRev

INSERT TRIS PAGE Preceding page 5, 72-60-00
This MCN supersedes MCN 76 dated Nov 10/80. Please remove and discard MON No.
76.
On page 5, paragraph 3, NOTE following step S. is revised as follows:
NOTE
Gearbox case assembly (113) and support assembly (114)

are a matched set and shall not be replaced separately.
Record part number and serial number of gearbox case
assembly and support assembly in engine log.
Also, step S. (5) is revised and steps (5) (a), (5) (b) and Figure 3A are
added as follows:
(5) Inspect support assembly (Refer to 72-00-00, 114, figure 2) for

oil leakage and/or oil seal ring separation from support housing
as follows:
(a) Visually inspect bond lines (two places 180° apart)

between the oil seal ring and support housing for oil
leakage and/or loss of epoxy bond. (Refer to 72-60-00,
figure 3A.) Repair support assembly as outlined in
(b) Pressure test support assembly if support assembly passes

' visual inspection. Pressure test at 300 psi, using test
fixture LTCT7217 and calibrating fluid (MIL-C-7024). Repair
support assembly if leakage is observed as outlined in
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Jun 12 /8 1
NO• 76 R ev 1
4-083-044-01
OIL SEAL RING
HOUSING
INSPECT EPOXY BOND LINE
0,2188 IN. DIA

3 OR MORE HOLES REQUIRED ONLY I
FOR REMOVAL OF OfL SEAL RING
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
4-083-10041
4-083444-01 SP-1
OtL SEAL RING
4-083-109-01 INSPECT EPOXY BOND LINE
INSPECT EPOXY BOND LINE
OIL SEAL AING
HOUSING
HOUSING -
5.355 IN. DIA 5.355 IN. DIA

BOLT CIRCLE BOLT CIRCLE
0.2188 IN. OiA 0.2188 IN. DIA

3 OR MORE HOLES REQUIRED ONLY 3 OR MORE HOLES AEQUIRED ONLY
FOR AEMOVAL OF OIL SEAL RING FOR AEMOVAL OF OIL SEAL RING
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

4-083-10041 PAP C-1430 4483-10043
XA-1142-128
Figure 3A. Support Assembly and Oil Seal Ring Inspection
Sheet 2 of 2
O. Inspect power train gear (Refer to 72-00-00, 76, S. Inspect gearbox case assembly (Refer to 72-00-00,
figure 2) as follows: 113, figure 2) and support assembly (132) as follows:
(1) Visually inspect the 1.4745 to 1.4750 inch NOTE

diameter bearing journals as shown in 72-60-00, figure 3 Gearbox case assembly (113) and support
for scratches, cracks, wear, nicking, corrosion, or minor assembly (114) are a matched set and
pitting. Minor discrepancies are acceptable. Minor shall not be separated. Record part number
amounts of rust or light scratches may be removed as . and serial number of gearbox case assem-
outlined in 72-60-00, paragraph 4 bly and support assembly in engine log.
P. Inspect power pinion cover (Refer to 72-00-00, (1) Visually for cracks. Replace if defective.
(2) Visually for bent or stripped studs. Repair
(1) Visually for cracks. Replace if defective as outlined in 72-60-00, paragraph 4.
(2) Visually for clogged or contaminated internal (3) Visually for damaged threads. Repair as out-
passages. Repair as outlined in 72-60-00, paragraph 4 lined in paragraph 4.
(3) Visually for damaged surface finish. Repair (4) Visually for damaged surface finish. Repair
as outlined in paragraph 4- as outlined in paragraph 4.
Q.Inspect power pinion bumper (Refer to 72-00-00, (5) Inspect accessory/reduction gearbox module
97, figure 2) for scoring. Replace power pinion bumper identification plate. (Refer to 72-00-00, 180, figure 2)
if scoring depth exceeds 0.010 inch· on case assembly (113) for damage and security. Repair
R. Inspect torquemeter valve assembly (104).
(1) Inspect for clogged passage and leakage. T. Inspect torquemeter piston (Ref. 72-00-00, 120,
Clean as required. ·
figure 2).
(2) Visually for damaged threads. Repair as out- (1) Visually for cracks. Replace if defective.
U. Inspect oil baffle screen (Refer to 72-00-00, 82,
INTERNAL
1.4750 IN.
1.4745 DIA
1.4750 IN.
N DIA
XA-1053-126
Figure 3. Power Train Gear Inspection
72-60-00
5
(1) Visually for deformation, tears or punctures.

Replace if defective.
(2) Visually for cracks. Replace if defective. 7
(3) Visually for minor depressions. Repair as - -

7
V. Inspect oil transfer tube assembly (Refer to 72-00-

(2) Visually for clogged internal passages. Repair

W.Inspect disc (Refer to 72-00-00, 143, figure 2) as

follows:
(1) Visually for cracks. Replace if defective
(2) Visually for damaged surface coating. Repair

(3) Inspect for scoring on area shown in 72-60-

00, figure 4. Light scoring is acceptable. Replace disc if
heavy scoring is evident.
SCORING ALLOWED
X. Visually inspect bearings (Refer to 72-00-00, 37, IN THIS AREA ONLY
38, 66, 73, 100, 108, and 121, figure 2), using a 3-
power halo glass. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 22.) XA-1053-113
Replace bearings having defects that can be felt with a

0.040 inch radius probe. Figure 4. Dise Inspection
Y. Inspect bearings (Refer to 83, 125, 130, 137,

141, 149, 156, 161, 164, 171, and 173, figure 2) as A. Repair fire shield assembly (Refer to 72-00-00, 14,
follows: figure 2) as follows:
NOTE (1) Repair cracks by TIG welding (Refer to

70-00-00, paragraph 24), using welding wire (Refer to
Straw-colored, tan, or light brown bear 72-00-00, table 15, item 33).
ings are not overheated and may be
continued in service. Red-purple, purple, (2) Replace damaged anchor nuts by TIG weld-
or blue bearings shall be replaced. ing (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 24), using welding
wire (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 33). (Refer to
(1) Visually for obvious defects without the aid 72-60-00, figure 5.)
of a magnifying glass. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 22.)
Replace if defective. (3) Replace damaged tubes and/or plug by TIG
welding (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 24), using welding
(2) Hand-feel for rough rotation. Replace if wire (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 33). (Refer to
rough rotation is noted.
72-60-00, figure 6.)
4. REPAIR OF ACCESSORY/REDUCTION GEARBOX (4) Repair oversize gap between upper and lower
MODULE. Proceed as follows: fire shields by reforming to obtain a 0.000 to 0.020
inch gap. Use of weld-buildup is acceptable to close gap.
72-60-00

sTRATFemo, cCNNECTicuT DATE- Oct 30/80
NO.

On page 6, paragraph 3. step Z. is added as follows:
Z. Inspect nut (Refer to 72-00-00, 71, figure 2) for sharp -edges

or
burrs alotig slot. If sharp edges or burrs exist, blend-repair as outlined
in paragraph 4.
Sheet 1 of 1
"
i
i
> 0.098
+1.00
IN.
+1.00+
IN.
PLUG
TUBE
IN 0.03 0.96
TYP 2 PLACES
+ • • 2.80
TUBE •
/ 2.43
0.04 0.12
IN. IN. ANCHOR NUT
TYP 2 PLACES (2 REQ'D) 0.03
×A-1048-222 1.015 *
DIA
Figure 5. Repair of Anchor Nuts REF ALL DIMENSIONS
xA-1048-223 ARE IN INCHES =
B. Repair cmcks on fire shield plate (Refer to 72-00- Figure 6. Repair of Tubes and Plug
00, 15, figure 2) by TIG welding (Refer to 70-00-00,
paragraph 24), using welding wire (Refer to 72-00-00,
table 15, item 33).
F. Repair bumper sleeve (Refer to 72-00-00, 47, fig-
ure 2) as follows:
C. Repair scoring on retainer (Refer to 72-00-00, 36,
figure 2) by grinding to a minimum thickness of 0.130
(1) Blend all raised metal smooth.
inch.
(2) Repair damaged surface finish, using black
D. Repair seal housing (41). Repair clogged drain
oxide coating. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 31.)
,
tubes by reaming with a 0.12 inch maximum drill blank.

(3) Repair clogged oil transfer hole by reaming
E. Repair shaft assembly (Refer to 72-00-00, 43, fig-
.
with a 0.12 mch drill blank.

.
ure 2) as follows:
G. Repair gearbox cover assembly (Refer to 724)0-00 '

(1) Repair damaged threads (Refer to 70-00-00, 52, figure 2) as follows:
paragraph 26.)
(1) Repair damage:10.3125-24 UNF-3B threaded
(2) Repair damaged surface fimsh, using black
holes as follows:
oxide coating. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 31.)
(a) Using a 0.4459 to 0.4537 flat bottom
(3) Repair clogged internal passages by reaming
drill, drill damaged 0.3125-24 thread hole to a depth
with a 0.050 inch drill blank. of 0.62 inch.
(4) Repair scored or broken dowel pins as fol¯ (b) Using a 0.500-20 UNF-3B tap, tap hole
lows: to a depth of 0.58 inch.
(a) Remove dowel pin. (c) Fabricate aluminum plug 0.0002 to

0.0005 inch tight on threads.
(b) Apply locktite (Refer to 72-00-00, table
15, item 20) to new dowel pin and install pin into
(d) Apply loctite (Refer to 72-00-00, table
shaft. Maintain pin at a height of 0.340 to 0.380 inch 15, item 20) to threads of hole and of plug. Install plug
above shaft flange surface· into hole.
(5) Blend-repair nicks and burrs. (Refer to 70- Machine plug flush to surface and stake
(e)
00-00, paragraph 23.) securely in two places.
72-60-00
7
(f) Touch up area, using alodine (Refer to (a) Transfer data to new identification
72-00-00, table 15, item 2). (Refer to 70-00-00, para- plate.
graph 32.)
(b) Using an edged tool, remove plate from
(2) Replace bent or stripped studs. (Refer to case assembly.
paragraph 27.) (Refer to 72-60-00, figure 7 for stud
locations.) (c) Clean new plate and attachment area
with methyl-ethyl-ketone. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15,
(3) Repair damaged surface finish, using alodine item 26) and attach plate with adhesive (Refer to 72-
coating procedure. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 32.) 00-00, table 15, item 1). Allow cement to cure com-
pletely in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
paragraph 26.) (2) Replace bent or stripped studs (Refer to 70-
00-00, paragraph 27.) (Refer to 72-60-00, figure 8.)
H. Repair oil transfer tube (Refer to 72-00-00, 59,
figure 2) as follows: (3) Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00,
paragraph 26.)
(1) Blend-repair minor burrs and nicks. (Refer
to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.) (4) Repair damaged surface finish, using alodine
coating procedure. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 32.)
(2) Clean clogged or contaminated internal pas-
sage by dry cleaning solvent method. (Refer to 70-00- (5) Repair damaged 0.5625-12 NC-3 threaded
00, paragraph 15.) Ensure no contaminant remains. holes as follows: (Refer to 72-60-00, figure 9 while
performing the following repair.)
L Remove minor amounts of rust or light scratches
on the 1.4745 to 1.4750 inch diameter bearing journals (a) Using a 0.5649 to 0.5730 inch drill,
(72-60-00, figure 3) on power train gear (Refer to drill 0.5625-12NC-3 threaded hole to a depth of 1.100
72-00-00, 76, figure 2) with crocus cloth (Refer to inch.
72-00-00, table 15, item 12).
(b) Using a 0.625-18 UNF-3B tap, tap
J. Repair power pinion cover (Refer to 72-00-00, hole to a depth of 1.070 inch.
(c) Counterbore tapped hole to a 0.630
(1) Clean clogged or contaminated internal inch diameter to a depth of 0.465 inch.
passages by dry cleaning solvent method. (Refer to
70-00-00, paragraph 15). Ensure no contaminant remains. (d) Fabricate an aluminum plug as given
in figure 9. The "A" diameter shall be 0.0002 to 0.0005
(2) Repair defective surface finish, using alodine inch tight fit with the 0.630 inch counterbore obtained
coating procedure. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 32.) in preceding step (c).
K. Repair damaged threads on torquemeter valve as- (e) Install plug.

sembly (Refer to 72-00-00, 104, figure 2). (Refer to
70-00-00, paragraph 26.) (f) Machine plug flush to surface.
L. Repair gearbox case assembly (Refer to 72-00-00, (g) Drill a 0.1232 to 0.1242 inch diameter
113, figure 2) and support assembly (114) as follows: hole to a depth of 0.21 inch to accomodate a lockpin.
(1) Replace accessory/reduction gearbox module (h) Apply zine chromate primer (Refer to
identification plate. (Refer to 72-00-00, 180, figure 2) 72-00-00, table 15, item 36) to lockpin, P/N MS9105-
as follows: 52). Install lockpin and stake securely.
72-60-00

ofmATwomo, CONNBCT1CUT
DATE Nov 10/ 80
NO.

On page 8, paragraph 3, step G. (5) is added as follows:
(5) Replace accessory/reduction gearbox module identification

plate. (Refer to 72-00-00, 180, figure 2) or torque calibration plate
(Refer to 72-00-00, 180A, figure 2) as follows:
NOTE
The serial number of the module must not be changed re-

gardless of which or how many components have been re-
placed.
(a) Transfer data to new identification plate.
(b) Using an edged tool, remove plate from cover assembly

(52).
(c) Fasten data plate to gearbox cover assembly by bonding

method as follows:
WARNING
PERFORM IN WELL VENTILATED AREA. AVOID PROLONGED IN-

RALATION OF FUMES.
1 Abrade both surfaces to be bonded using 180

emery cloth (Carborundum Co., Niagara Falls, NY). If surface is p ted,
lightly abrade surface until gloss has been removed. ,
BL
NOTE
FES9
All residue from original adhesive must be removed.
2 Wipe surfaces to be bonded with a clean s t wggi

methyl-ethyl-ketone SHO
soaked in (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item or
acetone (Federal Specificlation OrfAac5es tunt lorourfalcyesaiaredicylean.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE ffov 10/80
NO. 77
4 Prepare adhesive (Scotch-weld 1838 B/A, 3M Co.

Adhesives, Coatings Sealers Div., Saint Paul, MN) by mixing 5 parts by
volume part A to 4 parts by volume part B. Thoroughly mix the two
components together.
NOTE
The pot life of the mixed adhesive is approximately 60

minutes.
5 Apply the adhesive in a thin even film to the back

of the data plate.
6 Position data plate on the gearbox cover assembly.
7 Apply contact pressure by the use of clamps or dead

weight to hold the data plate in position.
8 Remove excess adhesive from along edges of the data

plate with a clean soft wiper wet with methyl-ethyl-ketone (Refer to
72-00-00, table 15, item 26) or acetone (Federal Specification 0-A-51).
9 Cure adhesive before removing clamps or dead weight

by one of the following methods:
a For 24 hours at room temperature,
b For 2 hours at 200°F (93°C).
c For 4 hours using a 200 watt reflector heat lamp

2 to 4 inches from the data plate. The surface temperature must reach
120oF (49°C).
Also, step L. (1) and substeps (a), (b) and (c) are deleted.
Sheet 2 of 2
6
X A-1048-225
1. Lockring 3. Stud 5. Stud
2. Stud 4. Stud 6. Stud
Figure 7. Gearbox Cover Assembly Stud Locations
72-60-00
9
XA-1048-226
1. Stud (2.86 Inches Above Surface) 2. Lockring 3. Stud (1.425 Inches Above Surface) 4. Lockring
Figure 8. Gearbox Case Assembly Stud Locations
(i) Touch up area. (Refer to 70-00-00, N. Repair clogged internal passages in oil transfer
paragraph 32.) tube assembly (91) by dry cleaning solvent method. (Re-
fer to 70-00-00, paragraph 15.)
(j) Install helicoil insert, P/N 3591-6CN
0750. O. Repair torquemeter gear (Refer to 72-00-00, 123,
M. Repair minor depressions on oil baffle screen
(Refer to 72-00-00, 82, figure 2) by reworking to origi- (1) Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00,
nal contour. paragraphs 26 and 30.)
72-60-00

DATE Tun 12/81
NO. $$
On page 10, paragraph 4, step L (6) is added as follows:
(6) Repair support assembly (Refer to 72-00-00, 114, figure 2) that

has oil leakage and/or shows separation of oil seal ring from
support housing as follows:
CAUTION
IN FOLLOWING STEP, WHEN REMOVING OIL SEAL RING USE

CARE NOT TO DAMAGE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY.
(a) Drill three or more 0.2188 inch diameter holes equally

spaced circumferentially within + 0.125 inch. Locate holes
on the 5.355 inch diameter bolt Tircle within + 0.010 inch
to prevent drilling into the support assembly (Refer to
-
72-60-00, figure 3A).
(b) Insert needle nose pliers (or equivalent) and/or screw

driver into each hole to pry loose oil seal ring from
support housing.
(c) If unable to remove oil seal ring using method in previous

steps (a) (b), remove ring by machining.
and Use the 3.3464
to 3.3475 inch diameter of case and support assembly as a
reference point (Refer to figure 10 or 11). If necessary,
machining may extend into parent metal, however, do not
exceed dimensions shown.
(d) After removal of oil seal ring, scrape epoxy residue from
housing. Use aluminum oxide cloth No. 120 (Carborundum Co.,
Niagara Falls, N.Y.), if necessary, to remove remaining
.
epoxy to ensure clean surfaces for bonding.
(e) Visually and by dye penetrant method, inspect support

housing for cracks. Replace case and support assembly if
defective.
(f) Flush support housing to ensure it is free of contaminants

and passages are clear.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Jun 12/81
NO. 98
(g) Inspect to dimensions given in figure 10 or 11. Replace

case and support assembly if limits are exceeded.
NOTE
If repair is being accomplished on support assembly

4-083-100-01 or 4-083-100-01 PRP C-1430, fabricate a
new oil seal ring 4-083-044-01 SP-1 as shown in figure
10.
(h) Vapor degrease support housing and oil seal ring.
(i) Mask areas adjacent to surfaces to be abraded.
(j) Dry abrasive blast bonding surfaces of support housing and

oil seal ring with 220 grit aluminum oxide (MIL-R-10825) or
.
No. 103 zirconite grit (National Lead Co. Boston, Mass.).
(Refer to figure 10 or 11.)
NOTE
If following step (k) is not accomplished within 2

hours, repeat previous steps (h) through (j).
(k) Apply epoxy adhesive (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 33A) to
surfaces shown. (Refer to 72-60-00, figure 10 or 11.)
NOTE
During curing time in following step (1) ensure support

is positioned with oil seal ring facing downward.
(1) Install new oil seal ring into housing. Use fixture,
LTCT11441, to apply pressure to bond line during cure.
(m) Pressure test support assembly at 300 psi, using test

fixture, LTCT7217, and calibrating fluid (MIL-C-7024). Any
leakage is cause for rejection. Support assembly may be
reworked a second time.
(n) If repair was accomplished on support assembly

4-083-100-01, re-identify reworked support assembly as P/N
4-083-100-01 PRP 0-1430.
Sheet 2 of 2
DATE Jun 12 / 81
NO.

INSERT THIS PAGE Preceding page 11/12, 72-60-00
On page 11/12, Figures 10 and 11 are added as follows:
Sheet 1 of 3
DATE Jun 12 /8 1
NO. 99 GRIT BLAST
0. OX 45 (TYP)
5.89 DIA -
5.744
.......... D IA
5.740
45°
0.030 X (TYP) - 0.020 R MAX (TYP}
GRIT BLAST
4.81 DIA
DIA
4.960 1
.....- 0.075
---•
0.15 +---
FABRICATION OF OIL SEAL RING MATERIAL -

AMS 4082 (AL)
4-083-044-01 SP-1 HARDNESS -
RC 47 MIN
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
0.19
•-•..... I
*
O.16
5.758
- DIA
5.750
EPOXY THESE SURFACES. PRIOR TO
† / / / r EPOXY, ABRAD6 MATING SURFACES AND
RAISE MATERIAL ("PRICK PUNCH") (N
CLEARANCE THIS AREA. (I.D., O.D. AND MATING FACE)
0.003 TYPICAL (REF) OF OIL SEAL RING TYPICAL 3 PLACES
PER SURFACE EQUALLY SPACED TO
OBTAIN A CLEARANCE OF 0.003 TO 0.007
INCH BETWEEN BONDING SURFACES (OF
OIL SEAL RING AND SUPPORT ASSEMBLY)
FOR PROPER BONDING.
DIA R TYP)
3S4E L4RISNP 1
4-083-100-01
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
3.3475
3.3464 DIAMETER OF CASE AND SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL RING

T XA-1142-129
Figure 10. Repair of Support Assembly 4-083-100-01 or 4-083-100-01 PRP C-1430
Sheet 2 of 3
DATE ,Tun 12 /81
NO. 99
0.007 CLEARANCE
0.003 TYPICAL (REF) EPOXY THESE SURFACES. PRIOR TO
EPOXY, ABRADE MATING SURFACES AND
RAISE MATERIAL ("PRICK PUNCH") IN
THIS AREA. (l.D., O.D. AND MATING FACE)
OF 01L SEAL RING TYPICAL 3 PLACES
PER SURFACE EQUALLY SPACED TO
OBTAIN A CLEARANCE OF 0.003 TO 0.007
INCH BETWEEN BONDING SURFACES (OF
OIL SEAL RING AND SUPPORT ASSEMBLY)
5.738 FOR PAOPER BONDING.
..--- D IA
5.730
5.104
OlA 4-083-109-01
5.096
SEAL RING
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
3.3475
DIAMETER OF CASE AND SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
3.3464

XA-1142-130
Figure 11. Repair of Support Assembly 4-083-100-03
Sheet 3 of 3
P. Repair leading or loose plug in accessory gears

LOCK PIN A+
0.630 DIA (Refer to 72-00-00, 176, 126, and 160, figure 2).
C'BORE
(1) Using a suitable drift and soft-faced mallet,

tap damaged plug from shaft.
A
.4--
(2) Coat seating area of new plug with gasket
compound (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 18) before
pressing into shaft.
1.070
THREAD DEPTH
(3) Using a suitable driver and arbor press, press
0.465 MAX C'BORE plug into shaft until it bottoms.
DEPTH
Q.Repair loose plug in starter gear (Refer to 72-00-

(1) Using a suitable drift and soft-faced mallet,

tap damaged plug from gear.
SECTION A-A
compound (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 18) before
pressing into gear.
0.70 0.595 i
MIN
* +0.03 X 45° (3) Using a suitable driver and arbor press, press
THREAD SIZE
0.625-18 UNF-38 plug into gear until it bottoms.
R. Repair loose plug in accessory spur gear (Refer to

"A" DIA 72-00-00, 172, figure 11).

(1) Using a suitable drift and soft-faced mallet '
tap damaged plug from gearshaft.
XA-1048-227

Figum 9. Repair of 0.5625-12NC-3 Threaded Holes compound (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 18) before
pressing into gearshaft.
(2) Clean clogged oil passages by dry cleaning (3) Using suitable driver and arbor press, press
solvent method. (Refer to paragraph 15.) plug into gear until it bottoms.
S. Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00, para-

graphs 26 and 30.)
72-60-00

AVCO LYCOMING DIVîSION
FUEL SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
1. TubeAssemblies ...................................
73-10-01 3
2. RemovalofTube Assemblies.......................... 73-10-01 3
3. Cleaning of Tube Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-01 3
4. Inspection of Tube Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-01 3
5. RepairofTubeAssemblies........................... 73-10-01 3
6. Installation of Tube Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-01 3
1. Temperature Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-02 7
2. Removal of Temperature Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-02 7
3. Disassembly of Temperature Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-02 7
4. Cleaning of Temperature Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-02 7
5. Inspection of Temperature Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-02 7
6. Repair of Temperature Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-02 7
7. Assembly of Temperature Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-02 7
8. Installation of Temperature Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-02 7
1. Drain-Valve Assembly ......... .......................

73-10-03 9
2. Removal of Drain Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-03 9
3. Disassembly of Drain Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-03 9
4. Cleaning of Drain Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-03 9
5. Inspection of Drain Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-03 9
6. Repair of Drain Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-03 9
7. Reassembly of Drain Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-03 9
8. Installation of Drain Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-03 9
1. Fuel Nozzles and Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

73-10-04 10
2. Removal of Fuel Nozzle and Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-04 10
3. Cleaning of Fuel Nozzle and Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-04 10
4. Inspection of Fuel Nozzle and Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-04 10
5. Repair of Fuel Nozzle and Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-04 11
6. Installation of Fuel Nozzle and Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-04 11
1. Starting Assist Fuel Solenoid Valve (If Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

73-10-05 13
2, Removal of Starting Assist Fuel Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-05 13
3. Cleaning of Starting Assist Fuel Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-05 13
4. Inspection of Starting Assist Fuel Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-05 13
5. Repair of 3tarting Assist Fuel Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-05 13
6. Installation of Starting Assist Fuel Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-05 13
. 1. Fuel Control and Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

73-20-01 15
2. Removal of Fuel Control and Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-20-01 15
3. Disassembly of Fuel Control and Pump Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-20-01 15
4. Cleaning of Fuel Control and Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-20-01 16
5. Inspection of Fuel Control and Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-20-01 16
73-00-00
1
FUEL SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Chapter/Section
Paragraph kitle Subject Page
6. Repair of Fuel Control and Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

73-20-01 17
7. Reassembly of Fuel Control and Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-20-01 17
8. Installation of Fuel Control and Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-20-01 17
9. Adjust/Test of Fuel Control and Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-20-01 17
Chapter/Section
1. Fuel System...................................... 73-10-01 4.
1. Temperature Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73-10-02 8
1. DrainValveAssembly ...............................
73-10-03 9
1. FuelNozzleInspection ............ . ................

73-10-04 10
1. Fuel Control and Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

73-20-01 15
2. FuelControlandPump ..............................
73-20-01 16
3. FuelControlAdjustments .............................
73-20-01 18
73-00-00

DATE Feb 12 81 sTRATwemo, coNNecticur
NO. $
On page 3, paragraph 7. is added as follows:
7. PNEUMATIC LEAK CHECK. Proceed as follows:
A. Disconnect tube assembly (Refer to 73-10-01, 1, figure 1) at the

temperature compensator.
B. Apply 50 to 80 psi filtered (10-micron) air to temperature

carpensator port.
C. Using liquid soap Military Specification, (MIL-C-25567), check

all pneumatic lines and fittings for leakage. None allowed.
D. Clean soap from lines and fittings and reconnect tube assembly
(1). Tighten connections as required.
Sheet i of 1
FUEL SYSTEM
1. TUBE ASSEMBLIES. B. Visually for damaged threads. Repair as outlined

in 73-10-01, paragraph 5.
2. REMOVAL OF TUBE ASSEMBLIES.(Refer to 73-
10-01, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 17, 18, and 19, figuæ 1). C. Visually for cracks and dents. Replace if cracks or
Proceed as follows: dents are evident.
NOTE D. By pressure flushing for clogging or contamination.

Repair as outlined in paragraph 5.
with clean caps or plugs to prevent
E. Visually for light surface nicks and burrs. Repair
contamination.
A. Disconnect or remove fuel system tube assemblies
and electrical connectors as required. Tag each discon. 5. REPAIR OF TUBE ASSEMBLIES.Proceed as follows:
nected or removed tube assembly and electrical connec-
tors and identify as to nomenclature and location. A. Repair stripped, crossed, or damaged threads. (Re-
fer to 70-00-00, paragraph 26.)
brackets to ensure their reinstallation in correct posi- B. Unclog contaminated tube assemblies by pressure
tion· flushing with trichloroethane. (Refer to 72-00-00, table
15, item 30).
3. CLEANING OF TUBE ASSEMBLIES.Proceed as
follows
C. Blend-repair light surface nicks and burrs. (Refer
A. Clean tube assemblies by pressure flushing with to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.)

trichloroethane (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 30)
or by dry cleaning solvent method (Refer to 70-00-00, 6. INSTALLATIONOF TUBE ASSEMBLIES. Connect
paragraph 15). tube assemblies to proper parts/connectors observing
tags installed at removal. Tighten all fittings as required.
B. Clean all other parts by dry cleaning solvent
method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 15.)
4. INSPECTION OF TUBE ASSEMBLIES. Proceed as

follows:
A. Visually all parts for severe damage. Replace if

defective.
73-10-01
3
16
7
6
15
4
ENGINES WITHOUT
STARTING ASSIST
FUEL SYSTEM --
X•1Œi3114
Figuæ 1. Fuel System (Sheet 1 of 2)
73-10-01
4
" -
17
ENGINES WITH
// STARTING ASSIST
FUEL SYSTEM
X-105 115
Figure 1. Fuel System (Sheet 2 of 2)
73-10-01
5
Key to Figure 1.
1. Tube Assembly 15. Bolt

2. Tube Assembly 16. Temperature Compensator
3. Tube Assembly *17. Tube Assembly
*18.
4. Tube Assembly Tube Assembly
*19.
5. Tube Assembly Tube Assembly
*20.
6. Chafing Sleeve Elbow
*21.
7. Nipple Packing
8. Tube Assembly *22.
Bolt
*23.
9. Tube Assembly Fuel Solenoid Valve
*24.
10. Chafing Sleeve Tee
11. Chafing Sleeve *25. Bracket
12. Gasket *26. Nut
13. Drain Valve Body *27.
Bolt
*28.
14. Washer Nut
*For Engines With Starting Assist Fuel System
73-10-01

ermAwomo, coNNactic DATE Jul. 17|81
NO• R ev Î
This McN supersedes MCN 95 dated Feb 12/81. Please remove and discard MCN No.
95.
On page 7, paragraph 4, step D. is added as follows:
D. If it is suspected that contaminants are in acceleration bellows

pressure (Px) circuit, proceed as follows:
(1) Remove lockwire from plug and discard.
(2) Remove plug and install hose fitting in its place.
(3) Install plugs in both Px ports finger tight.
WARNING
FREON VAPOR IS REAVIER THAN AIR AND REDUCES OXYGEN

AVAILABLE FOR BREATHING. AVOID PROLONGED BREATHING
OF VAPOR. PROVIDE ADEQUATE VENTILATION FOR STORAGE,
HANDLING AND USE, ESPECIALLY IN ENCLOSED SPACES
(TANKS, PITS, SUMPS, CLOSED ROOMS). KEEP CONTAINER
CLOSED AFTER FLUSHING OPERATIONS. EXCESSIVE INHALA-
TION OF FREON VAPORS CAN BE FATAL,
ROTE c
Before attaching hose from Freon container to

fitting, flush hose with liquid Freon first
and then gas. This will ensure that contam-
inants in hose are not being introduced in Px
circuit.
(4) Connect hose from Freon (Refer to 72-00-00, Table 15, item
17A) container to fitting and flush as follows:
(a) Hold temperature compensator in position as shown in

figure 2.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE .Tul 17/81
50. 95 Rev 1
(b) Invert Freon container so that outlet valve is down;

open valve allowing liquid Freon to flow through Px circuit. When liquid
Freon is seen coming from both open Pc ports, close valve on Freon con-
tainer.
(c) Stand Freon container up so that outlet valve is up;

open valve so that gaseous Freon flows through Px circuit. A burst of two
seconds with gaseous Freon is normally sufficient to complete drying of
liquid Freon; close valve on Freon container.
(d) Inspect flushed area with a flashlight to ensure

cleanliness of area. No particles of any kind should be seen. Repeat steps
(a), (b) and (c) if area is not completely clean.
(e) The bimetal disk group is spring loaded. Check to make

sure that spring returns bimetal disk group to original position freely
and without binding. Repeat steps (a), (b) and (c) if the movement of
spring loaded bimetal disk group is binding.
(f) Remove Freon container hose from fitting.
(5) Remove hose fitting from temperature compensator.
(6) Reinstall plug (Bendix P/N 2529048) removed in step (2).

Tighten plug to of 20 to 25 pound-inches torque.
(7) Using 0.015 inch diameter stainless steel wire (Refer to

72-00-00, table 15, item 29A), lockwire plug to body of temperature com-
pensator.
(8) Remove both plugs from Px ports.
(9) Visually inspect temperature compensator to ensure all re-

moved lines and lockwire have been reinstalled.
Also, paragraph 8, step C. is added as follows:
C. Perform pneumatic leak check. (Refer to 73-10-01, paragraph 7.)
Sheet 2 of 2
AVCO LYCOMING OtVISION
FUEL SYSTEM
1. TEMPERATURE COMPENSATOR. . 5. INSPECTION OF TEMPERATURE COMPENSATOR.

Proceed as follows:
2. REMOVALOF TEMPERATURE COMPENSATOR.*

A. Visually inspect all parts for severe damage. Replace
Proceed as follows:
if defective.
NOTE B. Visually for damaged threads. Repair as outlined

Tag all connections to ensure correct
reinstallation- C. Visually for light surface nicks and burrs. Repair
A. Disconnect tube assemblies (Refer to 73-10-01, 1,
2, 3, and 4, figure 1). (Refer also to 73-10-01, para- 6. REPAIR OF TEMPERATURE COMPENSATOR.Pro-
graph 2.) ceed as follows:
B. Remove bolts (73-10-02, 3, and 4, figure 1) se- A. Repair damaged threads (Refer to 70-00-00, para-
curing temperature compensator (7). (Remove tem- graph 26).
perature compensator.
B. Blend-repair light surface nicks and burrs. (Refer
3. DISASSEMBLYOF TEMPERATURE COMPENSA- to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.)
TOR. Proceed as follows:
C. For all other repairs, return temperature compen-
A. Remove plug (73-10-02, 8, figure 1)- sator to vendor approved overhaul facility.
B. Remove nipple (2). 7. ASSEMBLYOF TEMPERATURE CO¥PENSATOR.

Proceed as follows:
C. Remove elbows (5 and 6).
A. Install packings (Refer to 73-10-02, 1, figure 1).
D. Remove packings (1).
B. Install elbows (5 and 6).
4. CLEANING OF TEMPERATURE COMPENSATOR.
Proceed as follows: C. Install nipple (2).
A. Clean temperature compensator (Refer to 73-10-02, D. Install plug (8).

7, figure 1) by wiping with a clean cloth dampened
with dry cleaning solvent (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, 8. INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE COMPENSA-
item 13). TOR. Proceed as follows:
B. After cleaning, wipe temperature compensator with A. Install temperature compensator (Refer to 73-10-02,
a clean dry cloth to remove all residual solvent. Allow 7, figure 1) onto fire shield assembly and secure with
to air-dry. bolts (3 and 4). Tighten bolts as required.
C. Clean all other parts by dry cleaning solvent B. Connect tube assemblies (1, 2, 3, and 4, figure 1).
method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 15.) Tighten all connections as required.
73-10-02
JAVCO LYCOMING Olvis10N
2
/
XA-1053-116
Key to Figure 1.
1. Packing 5. Elbow
2. Nipple 6. Elbow
3. Bolt 7. Temperature Compensator
4. Bolt 8. Plug
Figure 1. Temperature Compensator
73-10-02
AMWCO LYCOMING DIVISION
synATwomo. CONNECTicut DATE Tyl 1 /81
NO.

On page 8, Figure 2. is added as follows:
INSTALL PLUGS IN 12) P PORTS REMOVE PLUG AND INSTALL FITTING;

TO INTRODUCE FREON HERE
WATCH FOR LIQUID FREON HERE •
DO NOT TURN OR ADJUST
XA•1142-126
Figure 2. Temperature Compensator Cleaning
Sheet 1 of 1
LTP101 Maintenance .Manual
FUEL SYSTEM
I. DRAIN VALVE ASSEMBLY· 7. REASSEMBLYOF DRAIN VALVE ASSEMBLY.Pro-

ceed as follows:
2. REMOVALOF DRAIN VALVE ASSEMBLY. Pro-
ceed as follows: A. Install spring (Refer to 73-10-03, 3, figure 1) and
plate (2) in drain valve body (4).
A. Remove bolts (Refer to 73-10-01, 15, figure 1) and
washers (14) securing drain valve assembly (73-10-03, 1, B. Depress plate (2) and install pins (5), stake both
figure 1), ends of pins.
B. Remove drain valve assembly and gasket (Refer to 8. INSTALLATION OF DRAIN VALVE ASSEMBLY.
Proceed as follows:
73-10-01, 12, figure 1).
3. DISASSEMBLYOF DRAIN VALVE ASSEMBLY. A. Coat threads of bolts (Refer to 73-10-01, 15, figure
Remove pins (Refer to 73-10-03, 5, figure 1), plate (2), 1) with antiseize compound (Refer to 72-00-00, table
and spring (3) from drain valve body (4). 15, item 5).
4. CLEANING OF DRAIN VALVE ASSEMBLY.Clean B. Install new gasket (Refer to 73-10-01, 12, figure 1)
all parts by dry cleaning solvent method. (Refer to 70- and drain valve assembly onto combustor and bearing sup-
00-00, paragraph 15.) port housing.
5. INSPECTION OF DRAIN VALVE ASSEMBLY.Pro- C. Secure drain valve assembly with washers (14) and
ceed as follows: bolts (15). Tighten bolts as required.

place if defective.
B. Visually inspect for damaged threads. Repair as

-1
C. Visually inspect drain valve body (Refer to 73-10-

(1) For cracks. Replace if cracks are evident. a
(2) For worn seat. Replace if seat is worn.
(3) For nicks, burrs, and scratches. Repair as

6. REPAIR OF DRAIN VALVE ASSEMBLY.Proceed

as follows:
xA-lo12-a49
A. Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00, para-
graph 26.) 1. Drain Valve Assembly 4. Drain Valve Body
2. Plate 5. Pin
B. Blend-repair nicks, burrs, and scratches on drain 3. Spring
valve body (Refer to 73-10-03, 4, figure 1) (Refer to
70-00-00, paragraph 23.) Figure 1. Drain Valve Assembly
73-10-03
9/10
FUEL SYSTEM
L FUEL NOZZLE AND MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY. Clean fuel nozzle and manifold assembly. (Refer to 72-
00-00, 25, figure 14), by dry cleaning solvent method.
i REMOVAL OF FUEL NOZZLE AND MANIFOLD (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 15.)
ASSEMBLY.Proceed as follows:
4. INSPECTION OF FUEL NOZZLE AND MANIFOLD
A. Disconnect tube assembly (Refer to 73-10-01, 8, ASSEMBLY.Proceed as follows:
figure 1).
B. Remove bolts (Refer to 72-00-00, 27, figure 14), place if defective.
and lockwashers (26) securing fuel nozzle and manifold
assembly (25) to housing (12). B. Visually inspect fuel nozzle and manifold assem-
bly (Refer to 72-00-00, 25, figure 14) as follows:
C. Remove fuel nozzle and manifold assembly and
seals (24). (1) For bending, clogging, and cracking. Replace
if bending, clogging, or cracking is evident.
3. CLEANINGOF FUEL NOZZLE AND MANIFOLD
ASSEMBLY.Proceed as follows: (2) Fuel nozzle air shroud OD area for chafing,
rub damage, coking, and tip burnout. (Refer to 73-10-
CAUTION 04, figure 1).
PRIOR TO CLEANING, CAP OR (a) Minor chafing or rub damage is accept-

PLUG ALL OPENINGS AND PORTS able provided air shroud is not broken through. Care-
TO PREVENT ENTRY OF FOREIGN fully clean air shroud OD area with a soft brush to fa-
OBJECTS. CLEAN ONLY EXTERIOR cilitate inspection. Replace fuel nozzle and manifold as-
SURFACE OF FUEL NOZZLE AND sembly if air shroud is broken through.
MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY.
AIR INLET HOLES

ENCE OF COKE
BUILDUP HERE UNACCEPTABLE
AIR SHROUD
MINOR CHAFING
ACCEPTABLE
HSROECDF RBURNOUT
NSPECT FOR CRUSHING HERE;

COKING ACCEPTABLE HERE
NOT ACCEPTABLE
PROVIDED 1T DOES NOT
EXTEND INTO SHROUO
XA-1012-243
Figure 1. Fuel Nozzle Inspection
73-10-04
11
(b) Air shroud tip burnout is acceptable, 6. INSTALLATION OF FUEL NOZZLE AND MANI-
provided radial length of damage does not exceed 1/16 FOLD ASSEMBLY.Proceed as follows:
inch. Evidence of crushing at the air inlet holes is un-
acceptable. If either condition is evident, replace fuel A. Lubricate threads of bolts (Refer to 72-00-00, 27,
nozzle and manifold assembly. figure 14) with Ease-Off 990 (Refer to 72-00-00, table
15, item 14).
(c) Evidence of heavy coking within the
shroud at the nozzle fuel orifice outlet or at the air B. Install seals (Refer to 72-00.00, 24, figure 14) onto
inlet holes is unacceptable. If evident, replace fuel noz- fuel nozzle and manifold assembly (25) and install fuel noz-
zle and manifold assembly. zle and manifold assembly onto support housing (12).
Secure with lockwashers (26) and bolts (27). Tighten
(d) Coke buildup on the face of the air bolts as required.
shroud is acceptable, provided it does not extend into
the shroud. If coke buildup extends into the shroud, C. Connect end of tube assembly (Refer to 73-10-01,
replace fuel nozzle and manifold assembly· 8, figure 1) to fuel nozzle and manifold assembly. Tight-
en tube assembly as required.
(3) For damaged threads, repair as outlined in
5. REPAIR OF FUEL NOZZLE AND MANIFOLD AS-

SEMBLY.Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00,
paragraph 26.)
73-10-04
12
JAVCO LYCOMING DIVISICIV
CONNECMCUT
DATE ov 10 /8 0 BYRAWCAD.
NO.
MANUAL CHANGE NOTKE

On page 13/14, paragraph 6, CAUTION is added preceding step B. as follows:
CAUTION
ENSURE ELBOW (20) HAS 0.018 INCH ORIFICE. INSTALLA-

TION OF WRONG ELBOW MAY RESULT IN HIGH MGT DURING
START.
Sheet 1 of 1
AVCO LYCOMING DIVISION -
FUEL SYSTEM
1. STARTING ASSIST FUEL SOLENOID VALVE (IF C. Visually inspect for nicks, burrs, and scratches on
INSTALLED. solenoid valve. Repair as outlined in paragraph 5,
2, REMOVAL OF STARTING ASSIST FUEL SOLE- 5. REPAIR OF STARTING ASSIST FUEL SOLENOID
NOID VALVE. Proceed as follows: VALVE. Proceed as follows:
WARNING A. Repair minor thread damage. (Refer to 70-00-00,

paragraph 26.)
ENSURE THAT ALL ELECTRICAL
POWERIS DISCONNECTED.
B. Blend-repair all minor nicks, burrs, and scratches.
A. Disconnect electrical plug from solenoid valve. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.)
(Refer to 73-10-01, 23, figure 1).
B. Disconnect tube assemblies (17 and 19) from tee 6. INSTALLATION OF STARTING ASSIST FUEL
(24). Disconnect tube assembly (18) from elbow (20). SOLENOID VALVE. Proceed as follows:
C. Support solenoid valve and remove bolts (22) and

nuts (28) securing solenoid valve to bracket (25). A. Position solenoid valve (Refer to 73-10-01, 23, fig-
ure 1) on mounting bracket (25). Secure solenoid valve
D. Remove solenoid valve with attached tee (24) and with bolts (22) and nuts (28). Tighten as required.
elbow (20).
B. Install packing (21) on elbow (20); then install el-
E. Remove tee (24), elbow (20) with packing (21), bow (20) and tee (24) on solenoid valve.
from solenoid valve.
C. Connect tube assemblies (17 and 19) to tee (24)
3. CLEANING OF STARTING ASSIST FUEL SOLE- and tube assembly (18) to elbow (20). Tighten all fit-
NOID VALVE. Clean outer surface of solenoid valve tings as required.
with cloth dampened with dry cleaning solvent (Refer
to 72-00-00, table 15, item 13). WARNING
4. INSPECTIONOF STARTING ASSIST FUEL SOLE- ENSURE THAT ALL ELECTRICAL

NOID VALVE. Proceed as follows: POWER IS DISCONNECTED.
A. Visually inspect solenoid valve (Refer to 73-10-01, D. Connect electrical plug to connector.
23, figure 1) and bracket (25) for cracks. Replace cracked
parts.
B. Visually inspect threads on electrical connector of

solenoid valve. Repair thread damage as outlined in 73-
10-05, paragraph 5.
73-10-05
© 1978,. Avco Lycoming Division 13/14
9 9
9 '
?
DATE Nov 15/79 ..dAVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
STRATFOMO, CONNECTICUT
NO

ENSERT THIS PAGE Facing page 15, 73-20-01
On page 15, paragraph 3., NOTE preceding step A. is revised as follows:
NOTE
Do not remove calibrated orifice tee or cover except

for cleaning when contamination is evident. Take care
not to enlarge or deform orifice. Calibrated orifice
must remain with fuel control.
The technical aspects of this MCR vere approved by FAA per Avco Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of 1
FUEL SYSTEM
1. FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEMBLY- NOTE
Fuel control and pump assembly is a

2. REMOVAL OF FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP AS-
SEMBLY. Proceed as follows: calibrated unit and must be retained
together.
A. For engines without starting fuel solenoid valve
(Refer to 73-10-01, 23, figure 1), disconnect tube as- Do not remove calibrated orifice tee
semblies (2, 3, 4, and 5). For engines with starting or cover except for cleaning when
fuel solenoid valve (23), disconnect tube assemblies (2, contamination is evident. Take care
3, 4, 17, and 18). (Refer to 73-10-01, paragraph 2.) not to enlarge or deform orifice. Ca-
librated orifice must remain with fuel
NOTE control.
To remove fuel control only, refer to A. Remove nipples (73-20-01, 11 and 12, figure 2).
disassembly, 73-20-01, paragraph 3.
B. Remove elbow (8).
B. Remove nuts (73-20-01, 2, figure 1) and washers
(3) securing fuel control and pump assembly (1). C. Remove packings (2, 3, and 7).
3. DISASSEMBLYOF FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP D. Disconnect and remove tube assembly (5).
ASSEMBLY.Proceed as follows:
FOR ENGINES WITH

STARTING ASSIST FUEL SYSTEM
CALIBRATED ORIFICE
MUST BE RETAINED
WITH FUEL CONTROL
1
XA-1053-117
1. Fuel Control and 2. Nut

Pump Assembly 3. Washer
Figure I. Fuel Control and Pump Assembly
73-20-01
15
A7AVCD L.YCOMING OlVISION
FOR ENGINES WITH

STARTING ASSIST FUEL SYSTEM
XA 1053-118
1. Fuel Control 4. Coupling 7. Packing 10. Nut

2. Packing 5. Tube Assembly 8. Elbow 11. Nipple
3. Packing 6. Fuel Pump 9. Packing 12. Nipple
Figure 2. Fuel Control and Pump
E. Remove nuts (10) securing fuel control (1) to fuel (3) After cleaning, wipe fuel control and pump
pump (6). Remove fuel control (1), packing (9), and with a clean dry cloth to remove all residual solvent.
coupling (4). Allow to air-dry.
4. CLEANING OF FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP AS- B. Clean all other parts by dry cleaning solvent meth-
SEMBLY.Proceed as follows: od. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 15.)
A. Clean fuel control (Refer to 73.20-01, 1, figure 2) 5. INSPECTIONOF FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP AS-
and pump (6) as follows: SEMBLY.Proceed as follows:
(1) Plug or cap all ports to prevent entry of A. Visually inspect all parts for severe damage. Re-
foreign objects. place if defective.
(2) Clean fuel control and pump by wiping with B. Visually inspect fuel control (Refer to 73-20-01, 1,
a clean cloth dampened with dry cleaning solvent (Refer figure 2) and pump (6) for cracks. Replace if cracks are
to 72-00-00, table 15, item 13). evident.
73-20-01

J£AVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
STRATFORO, CONN,
DATE Dec 16/81
NO. 56 R ev 1

This MCN supercedes MCNNo. 56 dated Mar 3/80. Please remove and discard MCN
p5a6ge
16, Figure 2. is revised as follows•
FOR ENGINESWITH
STARTING ASSIST FUEL SYST
11
2
1 12
o
10
XA•t052•t18A
Figure 2. Fuel Control and Pump
The technical aspec ts of this MCN were approved by FAA per Aveo Lycoming DER.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Dec 16/81
NO. 56 Rev 1
Paragraph 3, step F. and Figure 2A. are added as follows:
F. pump (4-301-103)
On fuel carefully pull pump drive coupling
(Refer to 73-20-01, 1, figure 2A) off shaft. Remove and discard retaining
ring (2).
o e DRIVE SHAFT
C EXTERNAL
SPLINE
XA-1142-103
1. Pump Drive Coupling

2. Retaining Ring
Figure 2A. Power Driven Rotor Pump
Also, paragraph 4, step C. is added as follows:
C. On fuel pump (4-301-103) clean drive shaft external spline and

pump drive coupling external and internal splines with dry cleaning
solvent (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 13) and a small, stiff-bristle,
non-metallic brush.
Sheet jg of ][
A WCO LYCOMING DIVISION
STWATFONO, CONNECTICUT
DATE Jun 5/81
NO. 57aev3
INSERT TKIS PAGE Preceding page 17, 73-20-01
On page 17, paragraph 5, steps Dl. and G. are added as follows:
Bl. Visually inspect interior surfaces (threads included) of ports

for corrosion. If any evidence of corrosion exists, replace fuel control
and pump assembly.
G. On fuel pump (4-301-103) inspect drive shaft external spline and

pump drive coupling external and internal splines for chipping, surface
damage, and wear. If spline tooth face wear exceeds 0.004 inch, or is deep
enough to catch a sharp object or fingernail as it is run along spline
tooth face, replace worn part.
Paragraph 7, CAUTION preceding step B. is added as follows:
CAUTION
EXCESSIVE BEARING PRELOAD CAN OCCUR IF COUPLING IS

IMPROPERLY INSTALLED. SPLINED COUPLING (4) MUST BE
INSTALLED WITH OPEN (RECESSED SPLINE) END TOWARD
FUEL CONTROL.
NOTE and CAUTION preceding step F. and steps F., G., and H. are added as
follows:
NOTE
Steps F., G., and H. apply to fuel pump (4-301-103).
CAUTION
IN FOLLOWING STEP, RETAINING RING IS INSTALLED INTO

THE COUPLING CLOSED END FIRST TO PREVENT DISTORTION
AND LOSS OF RETENTION ABILITY.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Jun 5/81
NO. 57 Rev 3
F. Install new retaining ring (Refer to 73-20-01, 2, figure 2A)

into drive coupling.
G. Apply a generous amount (0.5 cubic centimeter minimum) of

anti-fretting compound (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 4A) to the drive
shaft external spline and drive coupling internal spline.
H. Carefully push drive coupling (Refer to 73-20-01, 1, figure 2A)

over drive shaft until retaining ring seats in drive shaft groove.
Also, paragraph 8, step C1. is added as follows:
Cl. Perform pneumatic leak check. (Refer to 73-10-01, paragraph 7.)
Sheet 2 of 2
C. Visually inspect pump drive shaft for shearing. If 8. INSTALLATION OF FUEL CONTROLAND PUMP
shearing is evident, replace pump. ASSEMBLY.Proceed as follows:
D. Inspect pump drive shaft for binding or seizing NOTE

by manually rotating shaft. If binding or seizing is evi- .
dent, replace pump. To install fuel control only, refer to

E. Visually inspect for dimaged threads. Repair as
A. Lubricate splines of fuel control and pump (Refer
F. Visually inspect coupling (4) for wear and damage. to 73-20-01, 1, figure 1) with spline lubricant (Refer
Replace worn or damaged coupling. to 72-00-00, table 15, item 29).
6. REPAIR OF FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP ASSEM-

BLY. Proceed as follows: B. Install fuel control and pump (Refer to 73-20-01,
1, figure 1) onto accessory/reduction gearbox module
A. Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00, para- and secure with washers (3) and nuts (2). Tighten nuts
graph 26.) as required.
B. For all other repairs, return fuel control (Refer C. For engines without starting assist fuel solenoid
to 73-20-01, 1, figure 2) and pump (6) to a vendor valve (Refer to 73-10-01, 23, figure 1), reconnect tube
approved overhaul facility. assemblies (2, 3, 4, and 5). For engines with fuel
solenoid valve, reconnect tube assemblies (2, 3, 4, 17,
7. REASSEMBLYOF FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP and 18). Tighten as required. (Refer to 73-10-01, para-
ASSEMBLY.Proceed as follows: graph 6.)
A. Install new packing (Refer to 73-20-01, 9, figure D. Connect power-lever linkage and check rigging. (Re-
2) into fuel control (1). fer to airframe maintenance manual). Both power-lever
stops must be contacted when cockpit power lever is
CAUTION moved through full range.
IN FOLLOWINGSTEP, ENSURE E. Adjust propeller linkage. (Refer to airframe main-

THAT BOTH INTERNAL FUEL tenance manuals.)
BYPASS PORTS ARE PROPER-
LY ALIGNED. F. If fuel control was replaced, accomplish power
trim check. Refer to airframe flight and maintenance
B. Align coupling (4) and carefully install fuel con- manuals.
trol (1) onto fuel pump (6). Secure with nuts (10).
Tighten nuts as required.
9. ADJUST/TEST OF FUEL CONTROL AND PUMP
C. Connect tube assembly (5) to fuel pump (6), and ASSEMBLY.Proceed as follows:
to fuel control (1).
Adjustment of Maximum Ng, if required. (Refer to 73-
D. Apply light coat of corrosion.inhibitor (Refer to 20-01, figure 3.)
72-00-00, table 15, item 11) to elbows (Refer to 73-20-
01, 8, figure 2), and nipples (11 and 12) and into fuel
control ports.
E. Install packings (2, 3, and 7), elbow (8), and nipples

(11 and 12) in fuel control ports.
73-20-01
17
AVCO LYCOMING OIVIS10N
ADJUSTING SCREW
O
LOCKNUT
XA-992-122
Figure 3. Fuel Contml Adjustments
NOTE B. Turn setscrew counterclockwise to increase Ng;

clockwise to decrease Ng. (One-half turn will change
Make adjustments in small increments· maximum speed by approximately one percent.)
Do not adjust fuel control until pro-
per adjustment of power-lever linkage C. Tighten locknut 15 to 20 inch-pounds torque
is verified.
and lockwire. Run engine to verify adjustment.
A. Cut lockwire and loosen locknut while holding
setscrew with sockethead screw key.
73-20-01
IGNITION SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
1, IgnitionUnit ...................................
74-10-00 3
2. Removal of Ignition Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-10-00 3
3. CleaningofIgnitionUnit ..........................
74-10-00 3
4. Inspection of Ignition Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-10-00 3
5. RepairofIgnitionUnit ...........................
74-10-00 3
6. Installation of Ignition Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-10-00 4
1. ElectricalHarness ................................
74-20-01 5
2. Removal of Electrical Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-01 5
3. Cleaning of Electrical Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-01 5
4. Inspection of Electrical Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-01 5
5. Repair of Electrical Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-01 5
6. Installation of Electrical Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-01 7
1. Igniterlaads ...................................
74-20-02 9
2. Removal of Igniter Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-02 9
3. CleaningofIgniterIsads ..........................
74-20-02 9
4. Inspection of Igniter Izads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-02 9
5. Repair of Igniter Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-02 9
6. TestingofIgniterlaads ...........................
74-20-02 9
7. Installation of Igniter Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-02 9
1. IgniterPlugs.................................... 74-20-03 11
2. Removal of Igniter Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-03 11
3. Cleaning of Igniter Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-03 11
4. Inspection of Igniter Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-03 11
5. Installation of Igniter Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74-20-03 11
Chapter/Section
1. IgnitionUnitandLeads........................... 74-10-00 4
1. ElectricalHarness ..............................
74-20-01 6
1. Igniter Plug Inspection Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

74-20-03 11
LIST OF TABLES
Chapter/Section
Table Title Subject Page
1. Chafing Sleeve Sizes .............................
74-20-02 9
74-00-00
1/2
IGNITION SYSTEM
1. IGNITION UNIT. (2) Inspect for loss of protective finish. Repair

2. REMOVAL OF IGNITION UNIT. Proceed as follows:
D. Visually inspect loop clamp -assembly (4) for cracks.
A. Disconnect igniter leads (Refer to 74-10-00, 1, fig- Replace if defective.
ure 1) from ignition unit (3).
E. Visually inspect for damaged threads. Repair as
B. Remove screws (5), nuts (6), and loop clamp outlined in paragraph 5.
assemblies (4) securing ignition unit to mounting
bracket (7). 5. REPAIR OF IGNITION UNIT. Proceed as follows:
C. Remove ignition unit. A. Repair ignition unit (Refer to 74-10-00, 3, figure

1) as follows:
3. CLEANING OF IGNITION UNIT. Proceed as fol-
lows: (1) Repair protective finish. Prime with zinc-
chromate primer (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 36),
A. Clean ignition unit (Refer to 74-10-00, 3, figure and paint with enamel (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15,
1) by wiping with a clean cloth dampened with dry item 16).
cleaning solvent (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 13).
(2) Remove rust from casing of ignition unit by
B. After cleaning, wipe ignition unit with a clean, one of the two following methods:
dry cloth to remove all residual solvent. Allow to air-
dry. CAUTION
C. Clean remaining items by dry cleaning solvent WHEN COMPLYING WITH FOLLOW-
tilethod. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 15.) ING STEP, PROTECT CONNECTOR
HOLES FROM CONTAMINATION.
4. INSPECTION OF IGNITION UNIT. Proceed as fol-
lows: (a) Remove rust by wire-brushing.
A. Visually inspect all parts for severe damage. Re- (b) Remove rust by abrasive-blasting as fol-
place if defective. lows:
B. Inspect ignition unit (Refer to 74-10-00, 3, figure 1_ Mask all fittings and decals.
1) as follows:
2_ Abrasive-blast with 320-grit alum-
(1) Visually for cracks, punctures, bent or bro- inum oxide powder. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item
ken pins, or damaged insulation. Replace if defective. 3).
(2) Visually for loss of protective finish. Repair 3_ Remove masking.

(c) After rust removal, prime with zinc-
(3) Inspect for rust on casing. Repair rust areas chromate primer (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 36),
as outlined in paragraph 5. and paint with enamel (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15,
item 16).
C. Visually inspect mounting bracket (7) as follows:
B. Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00, para-
(1) Inspect for cracks. Replace if cracks are evi- graph 26.)
dent.
74-10-00
3
X-1053-119
1. Igniter Leads 5. Screw

2. Chafing Sleeve 6. Nut
3. Ignition Unit 7. Mounting Bracket
4. Clamp 8. Cable Ties
Figure 1. Ignition Unit and Leads
6. INSTALLATION OF IGNITION UNIT. Proceed as loop clamp assemblies (4), and nuts (6). Tighten screws
follows: as required.
A. Install ignition unit (Refer to 74-10-00, 3, figure B. Connect igniter leads (1) to ignition unit. Tighten
1) onto mounting bracket (7). Secure with screws (5), igniter leads to 40 to 50 inch-pounds torque.
74-10-00

IGNITION SYSTEM
l. ELECTRICAL HARNESS. (2) Electrical connectors for damaged threads.

loose, bent, or broken pins, and phenolic insulation for
2. REMOVAL OF ELECTRICAL HARNESS. Proceed cracks. Replace if defective,
as follows:
(3) Electrical connectors for corrosion. Repair
WARNING
IN FOLLOWING STEP, ENSURE (4) Pins and pin sockets for corrosion. Repair
THAT ALL ELECTRICAL POWER as outlined in following paragraph 5.
IS DISCONNECTED.
(5) Electrical harness for scuffs and cuts. Repair
A. Disconnect each connector of electrical harness
(Refer to 74-20-01, 4, figure 1) from its respective
components.
C. Visually inspect for damaged threads. Repair as
outlined in following paragraph 5.
B. Remove screws (1), washers (2), and nuts (3), se-

D. Perform continuity test between pins on electrical
curing electrical harness main electrical connector to
harness using Simpson test instrument, Model 260 or
mounting bracket (5).
equivalent. (Refer to 71-00-00, figure 8.)
C. Remove nuts (9) and clamps (10), securing elec-

5. REPAIR OF ELECTRICAL HARNESS. Proceed as
trical harness to radial inlet assembly.
follows:
D. Remove cable ties (7) securing electrical leads and
A. Repair electrical harness (Refer to 74-20-01, 4,
remove electrical harness.
3. CLEANING OF ELECTRICAL HARNESS. Proceed (1) Remove corrosion from electrical connectors
as follows: by lightly rubbing corroded areas with a wire brush or
crocus cloth. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 12).
A. Clean electrical harness (Refer to 74-20-01, 4, fig-
ure 1) by wiping with a clean cloth dampened with dry
(2) Remove corrosion from pins and pin sockets
cleaning solvent (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 13).
of electrical connectors by scrubbing with a soft bristle
.
brush, dipped in dry cleaning solvent (Refer to 72-00-

B. After cleaning, wipe electrical harness with a clean
00, table 15, item 13). Dry electrical connectors using
.
dry cloth to remove all residual solvent. Dry pins and

clean dry compressed air.
pin sockets using clean, dry compressed air.
(3) Repair scuffs and cuts in electrical harness

C. Clean remaining items by dry cleaning solvent
as follows:
4. INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL HARNESS. Proceed

(a) Remove dirt and loose particles from
as follows:
damaged area using clean, dry compressed air or a soft,
clean brush.
Re-
A. Visually inspect all parts for severe damage. (b) Clean damaged area using a clean cloth
place if defective· dampened with methyl-ethyl-ketone (MEK) (Refer to
72-00-00, table 15, item 26). Allow to air-dry for 10
B. Visually inspect electrical harness (Refer to 74-
to 15 minutes.
(c) Cover damaged area with electrical

(1) Cables for burned insulation, broken wires,
tape. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 15).
or loose connections. Replace if defective.
74-20-01
5
10
11
1. Screw
2. Washer
3. Nut
4. Electrical Harness
5. Mounting Bracket
6. Bolt
7. Cable Tie
8. Chafing Sleeve
9. Nut
10. Clamp ,7
/
11. Bracket Assembly X 1053-120
Figure 1. Electrical Harness
74-20-01

NOTE A. Attach electrical harness (Refer to 74-20-01, 4, fig-

ure 1) to mounting bracket (5) with screws (1), washers
Start electrical tape approximately (2) and nuts (3). Tighten screws as required.
one inch from damaged area and
wrap two turns with 100 percent B. Insert one lead of electrical harness through tube
overlap. Proceed to wrap at an an- (Refer to 75-10-03, 5, figure 1), and secure this lead to
gle, with a 50 percent overlap, to radial inlet assembly with clamps (Refer to 74-20-01, 10,
approximately one inch beyond figure 1) and nuts (9). Tighten nuts as required.
damaged area; then terminate tape
by wrapping two tums with 100 WARNING
percent overlap.
IN FOLLOWING STEP, ENSURE THAT
(d) Using a small brush, coat entire wrap- ALL ELECTRICAL POWER IS DIS-
ped area with compound (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, CONNECTED.
item 10). Bake electrical harness in an oven for one hour
66°C (150°F)
at to remove moisture from compound. C. Connect each connector of electrical harness to its
Cure compound by baking electrical harness for 15 respective component.
121°C (250°F).
hours at
D. Secure electrical harness with cable ties (7) as re-
B. Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00, para- quired.
graph 26.)
6. INSTALLATIONOF ELECTRICAL HARNESS. Pro-

ceed as follows:
74-20-01

JAVCO LYCOM1NG OlVISt0N
IGNITION SYSTEM
1. IGNITER LEADS· Table 1. Chafing Sleeve Sizes
2. REMOVAL OF IGNITER LEADS. Disconnect and Hose Spiral Chafing Sleeve

remove igniter leads (Refer to 74-10-00, 1, figure 1) Size Constant Part No.
from ignition unit (3) and igniter plugs.
-3
1.2 94835-1
3. CLEANING OF IGNITER LEADS. Clean igniter
leads (Refer to 74-10-00, 1, figure 1) with a lint-free -4
1.5
cloth moistened in dry cleaning solvent. (Refer to 72-
00-00, table 15, item 13). -5
1.8
4. INSPECTION OF IGNITER LEADS. Proceed as -6
2.1
follows:
-8
1.7 94835-2
A. Visually inspect igniter leads (Refer to 74-10-00,
figure 1) for severe damage. Replace if defective. -10
2.0
B. Visually inspect leads for major chafing, fraying -12
2.4
or braiding, and kinks. Replace if major chafing, fray-
ing, or kinks are evident. -16
2.4 94835-3
C. Visually inspect leads for minor chafing or fraying -20
2.9
of braiding in localized areas. Repair as outlined in 74-
20-02, paragraph 5. .
-24
3.6
5. REPAIR OF IGNITER LEADS. Repair minor chaf-

ing or fraying of braiding in localized areas by wrap- example:
ping affected area with teflon chafing sleeve (Titeflex
Co., Inc.). (Refer to 74-20-02, table 1.) To determine the proper length of spiral sleeve required
to cover a 6-inch length of hose, multiply the hose
-5
6. TESTING OF IGNITER LEADS. Proceed as follows: length (6 inches) by the spiral constant (1.8). The
approximate sleeve length is the product of these two
A. Test igniter leads (Refer to 74-10-00, 1, figure 1) (6 x 1.8 = 10.8 inches). Use the P/N 94835-1 sleeve.
as follows:
(1) Perform an insulation resistance check by ap- B. If test requirements cannot be met, replace igniter
plying 6 kilovolts de between input connector and ground leads.
for 5 to 10 seconds. Leakage shall not exceed 100 micro-
amperes. 7. INSTALLATION OF IGNITER LEADS. Connect ig-
niter leads (Refer to 74-10-00, 1, figure 1) to ignition
(2) Perform a continuity check between input unit (6) and igniter plugs. Tighten each end of igniter
connector and igniter plug connector. Ohmmeter shall leads to 40 to 50 inch-pounds torque.
indicate zero ohms.
74-20-02
JAVCO L.YCOMING OIVISION
IGNITION SYSTEM
1. IGNITER PLUGS. 5. INSTALLATION OF IGNITER PLUGS. Proceed as

follows:
2. REMOVALOF IGNITER PLUGS Proceed as follows:
.
A. Install igniter plugs (Refer to. 72-00-00, 18, figure

A. Disconnect and remove igniter leads. (Refer to 14) into support housing (12). Tighten plugs to 40 to
74-10-00, 1, figure 1.) 50 inch-pounds torque.
B. Remove igniter plugs (Refer to 72-00-00, 18, fig- B. Connect igniter leads (Refer to 74-10-00, 1, figure
ure 14) from combustor and bearing support housing 1) to igniter plugs. Tighten leads to 40 to 50 inch-
(12). pounds torque.
3. CLEANING OF IGNITER PLUGS. Clean igniter plugs

using dry cleaning method. (Refer to 70-00-00, para-
graph 15.)
4. INSPECTION OF IGNITER PLUGS. Proceed as fol-

lows:
A. Visually inspect igniter plugs (Refer to 72-00-00,

TYP CAL CHAFING AREA
(1) Inspect igniter plugs for severe damage. Re-

place if defective.
(2) Inspect igniter plugs for damaged threads on

housing. Replace if thread damage is evident.
(3) Inspect igniter plugs for worn center elec-

trode and cracked or damaged insulator. Replace if
wear or cracks are evident. ALLOWABLE WEAR AREA
xA-io12-192
B. Using standard inspection equipment, inspect ig_
niter plugs for chafing or grooving on housing. Replace
if depth of chafing or grooving exceeds 0.020 inch. Figure 1. Igniter Plug Inspection Areas
74-20-03
AIR SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
1. Anti-Ice Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

75-10-01 3
2. Removal of Anti-Ice Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-01 3
3. Cleaning of Anti-Ice Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-01 3
4. Inspection of Anti-Ice Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-01 3
5. Repair of Anti-Ice Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-01 3
6. Installation of Anti-Ice Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-01 3
1. Anti-IcingValve .............. . . ..............

75-10-02 5
2. Removal of Anti-Icing Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-02 5
3. Cleaning of Anti-Icing Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-02 5
4. Inspection of Anti-Icing Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-02 5
5. RepairofAnti-IcingValve .........................
75-10-02 5
6. Installation of Anti-Icing Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-02 5
1. Fire Shield Jumper Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

75-10-03 7
2. Removal of Fire Shield Jumper Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-03 7
3. Cleaning of Fire Shield Jumper Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-03 7
4. Inspection of Fire Shield Jumper Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-03 7
5. Repair of Fire Shield Jumper Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-03 7
6. Installation of Fire Shield Jumper Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-10-03 7
1. Airflow Modulator Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

75-30-01 9
2. Removal of Airflow Modulator Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-30-01 9
3. Cleaning of Airflow Modulator Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-30-01 9
4. Inspection of Airflow Modulator Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-30-01 9
5. Repair of Airflow Modulator Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-30-01 9
6. Installation of Airflow Modulator Tube Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
75-30-01 9
1. Airflow Modulator Actuator and Adjustable Linkage Assembly . . . . .

75-30-02 11
2. Removal of Airflow Modulator Actuator and Adjustable Link-
ageAssembly .................. ..............
75-30-02 11
3. Cleaning of Airflow Modulator Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-30-02 12
4. Inspection of Airflow Modulator Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7530-02 12
5. Repair of Airflow Modulator Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-30-02 12
6. Installation of Airflow Modulator Actuator and Adjustable
LinkageAssembly ........... . ..............
75-30-02 12
75-00-00
1
AIR SYSTEM
Chapter/Section
Figure Subject Page
1. Anti-IceValveand Tubing ........................... 75-10-01 4
1. Fire Shield Jumper Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

75-10-03 8
1. Airflow Modulator Actuator and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

75-30-01 10
1. Airflow Modulator Actuator Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

75-30-02 11
2. Measuring Linkage Arm Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-30-02 13
3. Airflow Modulator Actuator Adjustment Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75-30-02 14
4. Ng Speed Range at Which Modulator Ring Begins to Open vs.
Ambient Temperature ............ .................
75-30-02 15
75-00-00 © 1978, Avco Lycoming Division
2
AVC© LYCOMING OIVISION
AIR SYSTEM
l. ANTI-ICE TUBE ASSEMBLY. D. Visually for cracks in flared end fittings. Replace
if cracks are evident.
2. REMOVAL OF ANTI-ICE TUBE ASSEMBLY. (Re-
fer to 75-10-01, figure 1.) E. By pressure-flushing for clogging. Repair as out-
NOTE
5. REPAIR OF ANTI-ICE TUBE ASSEMBLY. Proceed
Protect all lines, fittings, and parts with as follows:
clean caps or plugs to prevent contam-
ination. A. Pressure-flush clogged passages of tube assembly
with dry cleaning solvent (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15,
A. Disconnect or remove tube assembly and electrical item 13).
connector as required. Tag disconnected or removed
tube assembly and electrical connector and identify as B. Repair cracked braze joints on tube assembly as
to nomenclature and location. follows:
B. Retain mounting hardware for future reinstallation. (1) Heat and separate old joints and remove af-
fected tubing. Remove excess braze from fittings and
3. CLEANING OF ANTI-ICE TUBE ASSEMBLY. Clean tube ends with Enstrip A (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15,
tube assembly (Refer to 75-10-01, 1, figure 1) and at- item 17).
taching hardware, using dry cleaning solvent. (Refer to
72-00-00, table 15, item 13.) (2) Reinstall tubing and, using a suitable brazing
fixture, hold tube in alignment; then torch braze joints
4. INSPECTION OF ANTI-ICE TUBE ASSEMBLY. Pro- using silver brazing alloy (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15,
deed as follows: item 6). (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 33.)
A. Visually for severe damage, cracks, dents, or evi- C. Repair all damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00,
dence of damage that could cause leaks. Replace if dam- paragraph 26.)
age is cause for leaks.
6. INSTALLATION OF ANTI-ICE TUBE ASSEMBLY.
B. Visually for cracks in braze joints. If cracks are (Refer to 75-10-01, figure 1). Install and connect wiring
evident, repair as outlined in 75-10-01, paragraph 5. and tubing using mounting hardware removed. Connect
tube assembly to proper parts/connections observing tags
C. Visually for damaged threads. Repair if damage is installed at removal. Install new gaskets, if necessary.
evident as outlined in paragraph 5. Tighten all fittings as required.
75-10-01
3
2
4
'
oo
12
13
X-1053-121
1. Tube Assembly 8. Nut

2. Bolt 9. Washer
3. Washer 10. Anti-Icing Valve
4. Gasket 11. Gasket
5. Spacer 12. Fitting
6. Washer 13. Cap
7. Bolt 14. Bolt
Figure L Anti-Ice Valve and Tubing
75-10-01 © 1978, Avco Lycoming Division

A
AIR SYSTEM
1. ANTI-ICING VALVE. 4. INSPECTION OF ANTI-ICING VALVE. Proceed as

follows:
2. REMOVAL OF ANTI-ICING VALVE. Proceed as
follows: A. Inspect anti-icing valve (Refer to 75-10-01, 10, fig-
ure 1) for cracks. Replace if cracks are evident.
A. Disconnect electrical connector from anti-icing B. Inspect electrical connector for damaged threads.
valve (Refer to 75-10-01, 10, figure 1). Repair as outlined in paragraph 5.
B. Remove bolts (14), washers (9) and nuts (8) se- 5. REPAIR OF ANTI-ICING VALVE. Repair all damaged
curing anti-icing valve to fitting (12). Remove gasket threads (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 26).
(11).
6. INSTALLATION OF ANTI-ICING VALVE. Proceed
C. Remove bolts (7) and washers (6) securing anti- as follows:
icing valve to spacer (5). Remove anti-icing valve and
gasket (4). A. Install anti-icing valve (Refer to 75-10-01, 10, fig-
ure 1) and gasket (4) onto spacer (5) and secure with
3. CLEANING OF ANTI-ICING VALVE. Clean anti- bolts (7) and washers (6). Tighten bolts as required.
icing valve (Refer to 75-10-01, 10, figure 1) by wiping
exterior of valve with dry cleaning solvent (Refer to B. Secure anti-icing valve and gasket (11) onto fitting
72-00-00, table 15, item 13). (12). Secure with bolts (14), washers (9), and nuts (8).
Tighten bolts as required.
C. Connect electrical connector to anti-icing valve.
© 1978, Avco Lycoming Division 75-10-02
5/6
AIR SYSTEM
L FIRE SHIELD JUMPER TUBES . B. Visually inspect tubes (Refer to 73-10-03, 1 and
9, figure 1) for cracks or dents. Replace if cracks or
2. REMOVAL OF FIRE SHIELD JUMPER TURES. dents are evident.
Proceed as follows:
C. Visually inspect for nicks, burrs, or scratches. Re-
NOTE pair as outlined in 75-10-03, paragraph 5.
Protect all lines, fittings, and parts with D. Visually inspect for damaged threads. Repair as
clean caps or plugs to prevent contam- outlined in paragraph 5.
ination.
5. REPAIR OF FIRE SHIELD JUMPER TUBES. Pro-
A. Disconnect or remove fuel system and lubrication ceed as follows:
system tube assemblies and electrical connectors, as re-
quired. Remove all fuel and lubrication tube assemblies A. Blend-repair nicks, burrs, or scratches. (Refer to
from jumper tubes (Refer to 75-10-03, 5 and 7, figure 70-00-00, paragraph 23.)
1). Remove electrical cables from jumper tubes. Tag
each disconnected or removed tube assembly and elec- B. Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00, para-
trical connectors and identify as to nomenclature and graph 26.)
location.
6. INSTALLATION OF FIRE SHIELD JUMPER TUBES.
B. Tag and note location of all seals and retainers to Proceed as follows:
ensure their reinstanation in correct position.
A. Install seal (Refer to 75-10-03, 3, figure 1) onto
C. Remove eight bolts (1), eight nuts (4), four seals upper jumper tube (5). Install one end of tube through
(3 and 6), and two retainers (2 and 8). hole in gearbox fire shield and other end of tube
through bracket in radial inlet assembly. Install seal (3)
D. Remove jumper tubes (5 and 7). and retainer (2). Secure tube (5) with bolts (1) and
nuts (4). Tighten bolts securely.
3. CLEANING OF FIRE SHIELD JUMPER TUBES.
Proceed as follows: B. Instan seal (6) onto lower jumper tube (7). Install
one end of tube through hole in gearbox fire shield and
A. Clean tubes (Refer to 73-10-03, 1 and 9, figure 1) other end of tube through bracket in radial inlet assem-
using dry cleaning solvent (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, bly. Install seal (6) and retainer (8). Secure tube (7)
item 13). with bolts (1) and nuts (4). Tighten bolts securely.
B. Clean all other parts using dry cleaning solvent C. Install required fuel and lubrication tube assem-
(Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 13). blies through jumper tubes (5 and 7). Install electrical
cables through jumper tubes as required. Connect all
4. INSPECTION OF FIRE SHIELD JUMPER TUBES. tube assemblies and electrical plugs to proper parts/
Proceed as follows: connections observing tags installed at removal. Tighten
all fittings as required.
place if defective.
75-10-03
7
RADIAL
INLET GEARBOX
FIRESHIELD
4
,'
I
1 8
XA-1053-122
1. Bolt 5. Upper Fire Shield Jumper Tube

2. Retainer 6. Seal
3. Seal 7. Lower Fire Shield Jumper Tube
4. Nut 8. Retainer
Figure 1. Fire Shield Jumper Tubes
75-10-03

JAVCO LYCOlv11NG OIVISION
AIR SYSTEM
1. AIRFLOW MODULATOR TUBE ASSEMBLY. C. By pressure-flushing for clogging. Repair as out-

2. REMOVAL OF AIRFLOW MODULATOR TUBE AS-
SEMBLY. Proceed as follows: D. Visually for cracks in flared end fittings. Replace
if cracks are evident.
A. Remove one end of tube assembly (Refer to 75-
30-01, 1, figure 1) from airflow modulator (8). 5. REPAIR OF AIRFLOW MODULATOR TUBE AS-
SEMBLY. Proceed as follows:
B. Remove other end of tube assembly (1) from air-
flow modulatorfitting on air diffuser. A. Unclog tube assembly (Refer to 75-30-01, 1, fig-
ure 1) using air pressure and trichloroethylene (Refer
3. CLEANING OF AIRFLOW MODULATOR TUBE AS- to 72-00-00, table 15, item 31).
SEMBLY. Clean tube assembly (Refer to 75-30-01, 1,
figure 1) using dry cleaning solvent. (Refer to 72-00-00, B. Repair all damaged threads (Refer to 70-00-00,
table 15, item 13.) paragraph 26).
4. INSPECTION OF AIRFLOW MODULATOR TUBE 6. INSTALLATION OF AIRFLOW MODULATORTUBE

ASSEMBLY. Proceed as follows: ASSEMBLY Proceed as follows:
A. Visually for cracks, dents, or evidence of damage A. Connect one end of tube assembly (Refer to 75-
that could cause leaks. Replace if damage is cause for 30-01, 1, figure 1) to elbow (5) and other end to air-
leakage. flow modulator fitting on air diffuser.
B. Visually for damaged threads. Repair if damage is B. Tighten both ends of tube assembly (1) as required.
evident.
75-30-01
9
JAVCO LYCOIVIING OIVISION
10
9
XA-1053-123
1. Tube Assembly 6. Jamb Nut

2. Pin 7. Packing
3. Washer 8. Air Flow Modulator Actuator
4. Cotter Pin 9. Bolt
5. Elbow 10. Washer
Figure 1. Airflow Modulator Actuator and Tubing
75-30-01

APAVCO LYCOMING OIVISION
AIR SYSTEM
L AIRFLOW MODULATOR ACTUATOR AND AD- D. Remove cotter pin (4), washer (3), and pin (2)
JUSTABLE LINKAGE ASSEMBLY. that secures adjustable link (Refer to 75-30-02, 3, fig-
ure 1) to actuator (Refer to 75-30-01, 8, figure 1).
2. REMOVAL OF AIRFLOW MODULATOR ACTUA-
TOR AND ADJUSTABLE LINKAGE ASSEMBLY. Pro- E. Remove bolts (9) and lockwashers (10) that se-
ceed as follows: cure actuator; then remove actuator.
A. Tag connections to ensure proper reinstallation F. If adjustable linkage assembly (Refer to 75-30-02,
and install clean caps and plugs to prevent contamina- 7, figure 1) is to be removed, proceed as follows:
tion.
(1) Remove cotter pin (1), washer (6), and pin
B. Disconnect tube assembly (Refer to 75-30-01, 1, (5) that secure adjustable linkage assembly (7) to modu-
figure 1) from actuator (8). lator ring lever; then remove adjustable linkage assembly
(7).
C. Remove upper and lower inlet panels (Refer to
72-20-00, 1 and 4, figure 1). Refer to 72-00-00, para-
graph 19 for removal procedure.
MODRULATOR
SHAFT
MODULATOR
RING
INLET HOUSING LEVER
SCRIBE LlNES
XA-1053-137
1. Cotter Pin 4. Adjustable Link (Female End) 6. Washer

2. Nut 5. Pin 7. Adjustable Linkage Assembly
3. Adjustable Link (Male End)
Figure 1. Airflow Modulator Actuator Linkage
75-30-02
11
(2) Measure length of removed adjustable link- (b) With linkage arm depressed, measure
age assembly (7) and adjust replacement linkage assem- from center of feedback rod pin to face of feedback
bly to the same measurement. rod centering bushing (Dimension B). Record dimension.
3. CLEANING OF AIRFLOW MODULATOR ACTUA- (c) Subtract Dimension B from Dimension A.

TOR. Clean airflow modulator actuator (Refer to 75- Record results as Dimension C.
30-01, 8, figure 1) by wiping exterior of actuator with
dry cleaning solvent. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item (d) Determine difference between Dimen-
13.) sion C of defective actuator and Dimension C of re-
placement actuator. If difference exists, adjust high
4. INSPECTION OF AIRFLOW MODULATOR ACTUA- (open) stop screw as shown in figure 3.
TOR. Proceed as follows:
NOTE
A. Visually inspect airflow modulator actuator (Refer
to 75-30-01, 8, figure 1) for cracks. Replace if cracks In following step, install pin with head
are evident. on aft side.
B. Inspect actuator for freedom of movement. If lev- (3) Connect adjustable link (3, figure 1) to ac-
er binds or actuator shaft is bent, replace actuator. tuator linkage arm and secure with pin (Refer to 75-
30-01, 2, figure 1), washer (3) and cotter pin (4).
5. REPAIR OF AIRFLOW MODULATOR ACTUATOR.
For all repairs, return airflow modulator actuator (Re- B. Install airflow modulator actuator as follows:
fer to 75-30-01, 8, figure 1) to vendor approved over-
haul facility. (1) Position actuator (Refer to 75-30-01, 8, fig-
ure 1) and secure with bolts (9) and lockwashers (10).
6. INSTALLATION OF AIRFLOW MODULATOR AC-
TUATOR AND ADJUSTABLE LINKAGE ASSEMBLY. (2) Check alignment of scribe lines on shaft (Re-
Proceed as follows: fer to 75-30-02, figure 1) with "O" and "C" marks on
inlet housing as follows:
.
A. Install adjustable link assembly (Refer to 75-30-
02, 7, figure 1) as follows: (a)Using a 7/16-inch open-end wrench (en-
gaged with flats of linkage arm), manually move linkage
NOTE arm up until actuator is fully closed. Bottom scribe line
on shaft (figure 1) will align with C mark on inlet hous-
In following step, install pin (5) with ing. If no adjustment is required, proceed to following
head on aft side. step.
(1) Position linkage assembly (7) on modulator (b) If adjustment is required, disconnect ad-
ring lever and secure with pin (5), washer (6), and cot- justable link (3, figure 1) from actuator, hold adjustable
ter pin (1). link assembly (7) with suitable wrench, and adjust link
(3) as required. Reconnect linkage to actuator and re-
(2) If actuator is being replaced, set linkage arm check.
travel between high (open) and low (closed) stops by
measuring travel of linkage arm ori both the defective NOTE
actuator and replacement actuator as follows: (Refer to
figure 2). Pin shall be installed with head on
the aft side.
(a) With linkage arm in relaxed position,
measure from center of feedback rod pin to face of
feedback rod centering bushing (Dimension A). Record
dimension.
75-30-02
12 © 1978. Aven I venmim, Ana-

STRATFORD, CONN,
DATE Dec 23/81
NO, 34 Rev 1

This MCN supersedes MCN No. 34 dated Aug 31/79. Please remove and discard MCN
No. 34.
On page 12, paragraph 2, step F. (2) is revised as follows:
(2) If adjustable linkage assembly (7) is to be replaced,

measure length of removed adjustable linkage assembly and adjust
replacement linkage assembly to the same measurement.
Paragraph 6, steps A. (2), (2) (a), (2) (b), (2) (c), and (2) (d) are deleted
and step A. (3) is revised as follows:
(3) If actuator is installed, connect adjustable link (3,

figure 1) to actuator linkage arm and secure with pin (Refer to 75-30-01,
-
2, figure 1), washer (3) and cotter pin (4).
Step B. (1A) is added as follows:
(1A) Temporarily connect adjustable link to actuator lever with

pin (2).
Steps B. (2) and (2) (a) are revised and CAUTION following step B.(2) is added
as follows:
(2) Check alignment of scribe line «>n shaft (Refer to 75-30-02,

figure 1) with "C" mark on inlet housing as follows:
CAUTION
Do not adjust high (open) or low (closed) stop screws.

Actuator travel may be impaired.
Using a 7/16-inch
(a) open-end wrench (engaged with flats
of linkage arm), manually move linkage arm up until actuator is fully
closed. Bottom scribe line on shaft (figure 1) will align with "C" mark on
inlet housing. If no adjustment is required, proceed to following step
(2A).
Also, NOTE following step B. (2) (b) is deleted.
Sheet 1 of 1
APAVCO LYCOMING OlVISION
STRATFORO, CONN,
DATE Dec 23/81
NO. I Rev2
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 1 Rev 1 dated Aug 31/79. Please remove and discard
MCN No. 1 Rev 1.
On page 13, Figure 2. and step B. (2) (c) are deleted.
Steps B. (2A), (2B), (2C), (2D), (2E), (2F), (2G), (2H) and CAUTION following
step (2A) are added as follows.
(2A) Check alignment of scribe line on shaft. (Refer to

75-30-02, figure 1) with "O" mark on inlet housing as follows:
CAUTION
DO NOT ADJUST HIGH (OPEN) OR LOW (CLOSED) STOP SCREWS.

ACTUATOR PISTON TRAVEL MAY BE ADVERSELY AFFECTED.
(a) a 7/16-inch
Using open-end wrench (engaged with flats
of linkage arm) manually move linkage arm down until actuator is fully
open. Top scribe line on shaft (figure 1) will align with "O" mark on
inlet housing. If no adjustment is required, proceed to following step (3).
(b) If, when open stop in actuator is contacted, the

scribed line on shaft (figure 1) is past "O" mark on inlet housing,
disconnect adjustable linkage assembly (7) from modulator ring lever
(Refer to 72-00-00, 62, figure 7) and lengthen lever by unscrewing from
the shaft.
(c) If, when open stop in actuator is contacted, the -

scribed line on shaft (Refer to 75-30-02, figure 1) is short of "O" mark
on inlet housing, disconnect adjustable linkage assembly (7) from
modulator ring lever (Refer to 72-00-00, 62, figure 7) and shorten lever
by threading into shaft.
Sheet 1 of 2
DATE Dec 23/81
NO. 1 Rev 2
(23) If adjustment was made for "O" mark in step (2A) repeat
check for alignment with "C" mark in step (2), adjust as required.
(2C) If re-adjustment was required for "C" mark, repeat check

for alignment with "O" mark in step (2A) and adjust if shaft line is short
of "O" mark. Slight overtravel in the full open position is acceptable.
(2D) Disconnect adjustable linkage assembly (Refer to 75-30-02,

7, figure 1) from actuator lever. Remove bolts and washers that secure
actuator, Remove actuator.
(2E) Ensure nut (Refer to 72-00-00, 61, figure 7) is secure

against spacer (60) without changing length of lever (62).
Ensure (2F)
adjustable linkage assembly (Refer to 75-30-02, 7,
figure 1) is secure to ring lever with pin (5), washer (6) and cotter pin
(1). Pin shall be installed with head on aft side.
(2G) Reposition actuator on air diffuser and secure with bolts

and washers.
(2H) Ensure nut is tightened on linkage assembly (7) without

changing length of adjustable link (3). Connect adjustable link to
actuator lever and secure with pin (Refer to 75-30-01, 2, figure 1) washer
(3) and cotter pin (4), Pin shall be installed with head on aft side.
Step B. (3) is revised as follows:
(3) Remove protective caps and

plugs and reconnect tube
assembly (Refer to 75-30-01, 1, figure 1) to actuator (8) and, if actuator
was replaced or adjustment made, perform operational check as outlined in
paragraph 7.
NOTE following step B. (3) and step (3) (a) are deleted.
Sheet 2 of 2
DIMENSION
DIME SION
XA-992 124
Figure 2. Measuring Linkage Arm Travel
(c) Using a 7/16-inch open-end wrench (en- NOTE

gaged with flats of linkage arm), manually move linkage
arm down until actuator is fully open. Top scribe line Operational check of the actuator must
on shaft (figure 1) will align with O mark on inlet hous- be performed by a minimum of two
ing. If no adjustment is required, proceed to following persons; one to observe and record Ng
step. If adjustment is required, remove actuator (do not speed, the other to observe actuator
disconnect linkage) and adjust High Stop (open) screw linkage arm movement. Linkage arm
as shown in figure 3. Lockwire adjust nut with 0.020 movement can be noted with a suit-
inch diameter wire. Reinstall actuator and recheck. able length of lockwire; one end con-
nected to the actuator linkage arm
(3) Reconnect tube assembly (Refer to 75-30-01, and the other end held in the hand.
1, figure 1) to actuator (8) and, if actuator was replaced
or adjustment made, perform operational check as fol- (a) Note and record ambient temperature
lows: (°C).
75-30-02
13
ADJUSTING NUT
BELLOWS
POSITIONING
SCREW
(DO NOT TURN)
LOCKNUT
HIGH (OPEN) STOP SCREW.

TURN CLOCKWISE TO
SHORTEN TRAVEL -
TURN COUNTERCLOCKWISE
TO LENGTHEN TRAVEL.
ONE TURN EQUALS
0.030 INCH TRAVEL.
LOW (CLOSED) STOP SCREW.

DO NOT ADJUST.
LOW STOP ADJUSTMENT
IS MADE BY ADJUSTING
THE LINKAGE ONLY ×A-992-125
Figure 3. Airflow Modulator Actuator Adjustment Points
(b) Perform prestart checks and start en- CAUTION

gine (Refer to airframe flight manual).
DO NOT TURN BELLOWS POSITION-
(c) Increase engine speed and record Ng ING SCREW. DAMAGE TO BELLOWS
speed at which actuator linkage arm begins to move ASSEMBLY WILL RESULT IF SCREW
(modulator ring begins to open). Shut down engine. IS TURNED.
(d) Refer to 75-30-02, figure 4 for correct (a) Hold bellows positioning screw with al-
Ng speed that the modulator ring must begin to open. len wrench and adjusting nut with a suitable wrench:
Use the temperature recorded in preceding step (a). If loosen locknut. Do not turn positioning screw.
Ng speed recorded in step (c) does not fall within range
of figure 4, adjust actuator as outlined in following step. (b) While holding positioning screw with al-
len wrench, turn adjusting nut clockwise to raise the
(4) If modulator ring does not begin to open start-to-open point, and counterclockwise to lower the
within range of figure 4, adjust actuator as follows: start-to-open point. One full turn of adjusting nut is
(Refer to figure 3). equal to 2 percent Ng.
75-30-02
AMWCOLYCOMING DIVISt0N
STRATPOND, CONNECTICUT
DATE Aug 31/79
NO. R ev i
This MCN supersedes MCN No. 2 dated Oct 31/78. Please remove and discard MCN
No. 2
On page 14, Figure 3. and steps B. (3) (b), (3) (c), (3) (d), (4), (4) (a)
and (4) (b) are deleted.
Sheet 1 of 1
4
e
AVCD LYCOMING DIVISION
STRATFORD, CONN,
DATE Dec 23/81
"
THIS CHANGE APPLIES TO: LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual -'
LMSERT THIS PAGE Preceding page 15/16, 75-30-02
This MON supersedes MONNo. 3 Rev 3 dated Aug 20/80. Please remove and discard
MCN No. 3 Rev 3.
On page 15/16, steps B. (4) (c), (4) (d), and (4) (e) are deleted. Paragraph
7. is added as follows:
7. OPERATIONAL CHECK OF AIRFLOW MODULATORACTUATOR. Proceed as follows:
CAUTION
DO NOT ADJUST HIGE (OPEN) OR LOW (CLOSED) STOP SCREWS.

ACTUATOR PISTON TRAVEL MAY BE ADVERSELY AFFECTED.
NOTE
Operational check of the actuator must be performed

by a minimum of two persons; one to observe and re-
cord torque pressure, the other to observe actuator
linkage arm movement. Linkage arm movement can be
noted with a suitable length of lockwire; one end con-
nected to the actuator linkage arm and the other end
held in the hand, or by using flow fence actuator
indicator (LTCT5892).
A. If flow fence actuator indicator (LTCT5892) is available,

install as follows:
(1) Secure indicator (LTCT5892) to engine using two existing

combustor turbine to air diffuser bolts between actuator mounting legs at
6-o'clock position (Ref. 72-00-00, 7, figure 6). Lubricate threads of
bolts with Ease-Off 990 (Ref. 72-00-00, table 15, item 14) and tighten to
110 to 120 inch-pounds torque.
NOTE
In following step, if pin (Ref. 75-30-01, 2, figure 1)

does not allow clip to seat fully, replace with longer
pin, MS9463-10.
Sheet 1 of 4
DATE Dec 23/81
NO. 3 Rev 4
(2) Attach free arm of indicator to air flow modulator actuator

arm by siiding clip under head of pin.
(3) Route cable to suitable location and connect to multimeter.
(4) Measure and record resistance when the flow fence is held
in the fully closed position.
(5) Manually position actuator to fully opened position. Mea-

sure and record resistance.
B. Note and record ambient temperature (°C).
C. Perform prestart checks and start engine (Refer to airframe

flight manual).
D.Increase engine speed and record torque pressure at which actua-

tor linkage arm stops (modulator ring fully open) as indicated.by wire
movement or multimeter reading. Shut down engine.
E. Disconnect and remove indicator or lockwire.
F. Refer to 75-30-02, figure 4 for correct torque pressure at which

the modulator ring must be fully open. Use the temperature recorded in
step B. If torque pressure recorded in step C. does not fall within limit
of figure 4, adjust actuator as outlined in following step G.
G. If modulator ring is not fully opened within limit of figure 4,

adjust actuator as follows: (Refer to figure 4A.)
CAUTION
DO NOT TURN BELLOWS POSITIONING SCREW. DAMAGE TO BELLOWS

ASSEMBLY WILL RESULT IF SCREW IS TURNED.
H. Hold bellows positioning screw with allen wrench and adjusting

nut with a suitable wrench: loosen locknut. Do not turn positioning screw.
7 I. While positioning
holding screw with allen wrench, turn adjust-
ing nutclockwise to raise the fully open point, and counterclockwise to
lower the fully open point. One full turn of adjusting nut is equal to
approximately 5 psig.
I
J. Recheck to verify proper adjustment.
K. final adjustment
When is made, hold bellows positioning screw
with allen wrench and adjusting nut with a suitable wrench; tighten lock-
nut to 10 to 15 inch-pounds torgue. Do not turn positioning screw.
L. Lockwire positioning screw, locknut and adjusting nut.
Sheet 2 of 4
DATE Dec 23/81
NO. 3 R ev 4
Figure 4. and title are revised as shown:
----•50
MDDULATOR RING MUST BE

FULLY OPEN * 1 PSIG
es
no
36
E so
I
25
20
C -
40 - -
20 -
10 10 20 30 40 E)
I
'F ,
-
40 -
30 -
20 -
10 0 20 40 00 .30 100 120
AMBIENTTEMPERATURE
xAeos m
Figure 4. Torque -
PSIC at Which Modulator Ring is Fully Open
vs Ambient Temperature
Sheet _3 of
DATE Dec 23/81
NO. 3 Rev 4
Figure 4A. is added as shown:
ADJUSTING NUT
BELLOWS
POSITIONING
SCREW
IDO NOT TURN)
LOCKNUT
HIGH (OPEN) STOP SCREW.

0 DO NOT ADJUST. HIGH
STOP ADJUSTMENT IS
MADE BY ADJUSTING
THE RING LEVER ONLY
LOW (CLOSED) STOP SCREW.

DO NOT ADJUST.
LOW STOP AOJUSTMENT
IS MADE BY ADJUSTING
THE LINKAGE ONLY. XA-992-125A
Figure 4A. Airflow Modulator Actuator Adjustment Points
Sheet 4 of 4
JAVCD L.YCOMING OiVISION
90-
80-
75--
C -63
40 -20 0 20 40 49
°F
-76 -60 -40 --20
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
X A-904-183
Figure 4. Ng Speed Range at Which Modulator Ring Begins to Open vs Ambient Temperature
(c) Recheck to verify proper adjustment. (e) Lockwire positioning screw, locknut and
adjusting nut.
(d) When final adjustment is made, hold
bellows positioning screw with allen wrench and adjust- C. Install upper and lower radial inlet panels (Refer
ing nut with suitable wrench; tighten locknut. Do not to 72-20-00, 1 and 4, figure 1). Refer to 72-00-00, para-
turn positioning screw. graph 22 for installation procedure.
75-30-02
15/16
INDICATING SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
1. NGSpeedPickup ................................
77-10-01 3
2. Removal of NG Speed Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-10-01 3
3. CleaningofNGSpeedPickup .......................
77-10-01 3
4. Inspection of NG Speed Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-10-01 3
5. RepairofNGSpeedPickup ........................
77-10-01 3
6. Installation of NG Speed Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-10-01 3
1. NP Speed Pickup................................. 77-10-02 5

2. RemovalofNPSpeedPickup .......................
77-10-02 5
3. CleaningofNPSpeedPickup .......................
77-10-02 5
4. Inspection of NP Speed Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-10-02 5
5. RepairofNPSpeedPickup ........................
77-10-02 5
6. Installation of NP Speed Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-10-02 5
1. Thermocouple Junction Box (and Bracket) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

77-20-01 7
2. Removal of Thermocouple Junction Box (and Bracket) . . . . . . . .
77-20-01 7
3. Cleaning of Thermocouple Junction Box (and Bracket) . . . . . . .
77-20-01 7
4. Inspection of Thermocouple Junction Box (and Bracket) . . . . . .
77-20-01 7
5. Repair of Thermocouple Junction Box (and Bracket) . . . . . . . . .
77-20-01 7
6. Installation of Thermocouple Junction Box (and Bracket) . . . . . .
77-20-01 7
1. Thermocouple Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-20-02 9
2. Removal of Thermocouple Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-20-02 9
3. Cleaning of Thermocouple Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-20-02 9
4. Inspection of Thermocouple Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-20-02 9
5. Repair of Thermocouple Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-20-02 9
6. Installation of Thermocouple Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-20-02 9
7. Resistance Check of Thermocouple Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-20-02 11
1. Gearbox and Scavelige Chip Detector Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . .

77-30-01 13
2. Removal of Gearbox Chip Detector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-30-01 13
3. Removal of Scavenge Chip Detector Assembly (If Installed) . . . . .
77-30-01 13
4. Disassembly of Gearbox Chip Detector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
77-30-01 13
5. Disassembly of Scavenge Chip Detector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
77-30-01 13
6. Cleaning of Gearbox and Scavenge Chip Detector Assemblies . . .
77-30-01 13
7. Inspection of Gearbox and ScavengeChip Detector Assemblies . . . .
77-30-01 13
8. Repair of Gearbox and Scavenge Chip Detector Assemblies . . . . .
77-30-01 13
9. Reassembly of Gearbox Chip Detector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
77-30-01 13
10. Reassembly of Scavenge Chip Detector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
77-30-01 13
11. Installation of Gearbox Chip Detector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . ,
77-30-01 13
12. Installation of Scavenge Chip Detector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-30-01 13
77-00-00
1
AVCO L.YCOMING OIVISION
INDICATING SYSTEM
Chapter/Section
Figure Subject Page
1. Thermocouple Junction Box and Izads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

77-20-02 10
. 1. Gearbox Chip Detector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

77-30-01 14
2. Scavenge Chip Detector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77-30-01 14
77-00-00
2
INDICATING SYSTEM
1. NG SPEED PICKUP. 5. REPAIR OF NG SPEED PICKUP. Repair damaged

threads. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 26.)
2. REMOVAL OF NG SPEED PICKUP. Proceed as fol-
lows: 6. INSTALLATION OF NG SPEED PICKUP. Proceed
as follows:
A. Disconnect electrical connector.
A. Install key washer (Refer to 72-00-00, 11, figure
B. Remove Ng speed pickup (Refer to 72-00-00, 10, 2) onto Ng speed pickup (10).
figure 2),key washer (11), and packing (12), from gear-
box cover assembly (52).
B. Coat packing (12) with shortening (Refer to
C. Remove packing (12) and key washer (11) from 72-00-00, table 15, item 19), and install on Ng speed
Ng pickup. pickup.
3. CLEANING OF NG SPEED PICKUP. Clean Ng speed

pickup (Refer to 72-00-00, 2, figure 4) using dry clean- NOTE
ing solvent method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 15.)
In following step, ensure single tang of
4. INSPECTION OF NG SPEED PICKUP. Proceed as key washer (Refer to 72-00-00, 11,
follow: figure 2) engages lock hole.
A. Visually inspect Ng speed pickup (Refer to 72-00-

00, 10, figure 2) for severe damage. Replace if severely C. Install Ng speed pickup, key washer, and packing
damaged. into gearbox cover assembly (52). Tighten Ng speed pickup
145 to 160 inch-pounds torque.
B. Visually inspect pickup for damaged threads. Re-
pair as outlined in 77-10-01, paragraph 5.
D. Bend tangs of key washer securely around Ng speed
C, Using Simpson test instrument Model 250, or pickup.
equivalent, test for continuity between pins of connec-
tor. (Refer to 71-00-00, figure 8.) E. Install electrical connector.
77-10-01
3/4
INDICATING SYSTEM
1. NP SPEED PICKUP. C. Using Simpson test instrument, Model 260, or

equivalent, test for continuity between pin of connector.
2. REMOVALOF NP SPEED PICKUP. Proceed as (Refer to 71-00-00, figure 8).
follows:
5. REPAIR OF NP SPEED PICKUP. Repair damaged
A. Disconnect electrical connector. threads. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 26.)
B. Remove Np speed pickup (Refer to 72-00-00, 17, 6. INSTALLATION OF NP SPEED PICKUP. Proceed
figure 2) key washer (18), and packing (19) from gear- as follows:
box cover assembly (52).
A. Install key washer (Refer to 72-00-00, 18, figure
C. Remove packing and key washer from Np speed 2) onto Np speed pickup (17).
pickup.
B. Coat packing (19) with shortening (Refer to 72-
3. CLEANINGOF NP SPEED PICKUP Clean Np speed
. 00-00, table 15, item 19); then install on Np speed
pickup (Refer to 72-00-00, 17, figure 2) using dry clean- pickup (Refer to 72-00-00, 17, figure 2).
ing solvent method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 15.)
NOTE
4. INSPECTIONOF NP SPEED PICKUP. Proceed as
follows: In following step, ensure single tang of
key washer engages lock hole.
A. Visually inspect Np speed pickup (Refer to 72-
00-00, 17, figure 2) for severe damage. Replace if C. Install Np speed pickup and key washer and packing
severely damaged. . into gearbox cover assembly (52). Tighten Np speed pick-
up 160 to 175 inch-pounds torque.
B. Visually inspect pickup for damaged threads. Re-
pair as outlined in 77-10-02, paragraph 5. D. Bend tangs of key washer securely around Np
speed pickup.
E. Install electrical connector.
77-10-02
5/6
© 1978, Avco Lycomine Division
d7AVCO LYCOMING OIVISION
INDICATING SYSTEM
1. THERMOCOUPLEJUNCTION BOX (AND BRACKET) C, Check for loose or missing screws. Repair as out-
2. REMOVAL OF THERMOCOUPLE JUNCTION BOX
(AND BRACKET). Proceed as follows: D. Visually inspect for damaged threads. Repair as
A. Tag and disconnect thermocouple leads from
junction box. (Refer to 77-20-02, 5, figure 1.) E. Visually inspect bracket (Refer to 77-20-02, 4,
figure 1) for nicks, burrs, or scratches. Repair as out-
B. Remove bolts (1) and washers (2) securing mount- lined in paragraph 77-20-01, paragraph 5.
ing bracket (4). Remove mounting bracket with attach-
ed junction box, from radial inlet assembly. Remove 5. REPAIR OF THERMOCOUPLEJUNCTION BOX
thermocouple junction box. (AND BRACKET). Proceed as follows:
C. Remove nuts (3) and bolts (6) securing thermo- A. Tighten loose screws, and replace missing screws.
couple junction box to mounting bracket. Remove
thermocouple junction box. B. Repair all damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00,
paragraph 26.)
3. CLEANING OF THERMOCOUPLEJUNCTION BOX
(AND BRACKET) Proceed as follows:
. C. Repair corrosion or rust, using crocus cloth (Refer
to 72-00-00, table 15, item 12) and dry cleaning sol-
A. Clean junction box (Refer to 77-20-02, 5, figure vent. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 13).
1) by wiping with a clean lint-free cloth slightly damp-
ened with dry cleaning solvent (Refer to 72-00-00, table 6. INSTALLATION OF THERMOCOUPLE JUNCTION
15, item 13). After cleaning, wipe with a clean, dry, BOX (AND BRACKET). Proceed as follows:
lint-free cloth to remove residual solvent.
A. Install thermocouple junction box mounting
B. Clean bracket (Refer to 77-20-02, 4, figure 1), bracket (Refer to 77-20-02, 4, figure 1) onto flange
using dry cleaning solvent method. (Refer to 70-00-00, of radial inlet assembly and secure with three washers
paragraph 15.) (2) and bolts (1). Tighten as required.
4. INSPECTION OF THERMOCOUPLE JUNCTION BOX B. Install thermocouple junction box (5) onto mount-
(AND BRACKET). Proceed as follows: ing bracket (4), and secure with two nuts (3) and
bolts (6). Tighten nuts securely.
A. Visually inspect junction box (Refer to 77-20-02,
5, figure 1) for severe damage. Replace if severely dam- C. Connect thermocouple assembly (Refer to 72-00-
aged· 00, 5, figure 14) leads to therniocouple junction box.
B. Visually inspect for corrosion or rust. Repair as

77-20-01
7/8
INDICATING SYSTEM
L THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY. 4. INSPECTION OF THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY.

Proceed as follows:
2. REMOVAL OF THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY. Pro-
ceed as follows: CAUTION
A. Remove combustor turbine module, (Refer to EXTREME CAUTION SHALL BE TAKEN

72-00-00, paragraph 23.) WHEN HANDLING THE THERMOCOUPLE
ASSEMBLY. EXCESSIVE FLEXING OF
B. Remove igniter plugs (Refer to 72-00-00, 18, THE ASSEMBLY, SPECIFICALLY AT
figure 14) from combustor and bearing support hous- PROBE LOCATIONS, CAN LEAD TO IN-
ing (12). TERNAL BREAKAGE AND SHORTING.
NEVER USE PLIERS OR SHARP OB-
C. Remove combustion chamber liner assembly (1). JECTS ON PROBES OR ADJACENT
Bend tabs of lockwashers (15). Remove four bolts (16) HARNESS.
and lockwashers (15) securing liner assembly to housing
(12). Carefully remove liner to avoid damage to fuel A. Inspect all parts for severe damage. Replace severe-
nozzles. ly damaged parts.
D. Unlock key washers (6 and 9). Remove bolts (7 B. Inspect thermocouple assembly (Refer to 72-00-
and 8) and key washers securing thermocouple assem- 00, 5, figure 14) as follows:
blies (5). Remove thermocouple assemblies, gaskets (10).
and thermocouple mounting plates (4). (1) Inspect for cracks, chafing, and fraying, or
dents in probes or cables. Replace if damage is evident.
E. Remove screws (Refer to 77-20-02, 14, figure 1)
screws (7 and 10), clamps (8, 9, and 13), brackets (2) Inspect for broken pins or cracks in insula-
(12) and nuts (11) securing leads of thermocouple tor. Replace if damage is evident.
assemblies (Refer to 72-00-00, 5, figure 14) to com -
bustor and bearing support housing (12) . (3) Inspect all parts for damaged threads. Repair
F. Carefully remove thermocouples. Bend only as
necessary during removal. (4) Inspect for minor nicks, burrs, or scratches.
Repair.as outlined in paragraph 5.
3. CLEANING OF THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY.
Proceed as follows: 5. REPAIR OF THERMOCOUPLEASSEMBLY. Proceed
as follows:
CAUTION
A. Repair all parts having damaged threads. (Refer to
DO NOT IMMERSE THERMOCOUPLE 70-00-00, paragraph 26.)
ASSEMBLY IN SOLVENT. SOLVENT
MAY CAUSE MALFUNCTION OF B. Blend-repair all minor nicks, burrs, or scratches.
THERMOCOUPLE PROBES AND DE- (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 23.)
TERIORATION OF INTERNAL
WIRING INSULATION. 6. INSTALLATION OF THERMOCOUPLEASSEMBLY.
Proceed as follows:
A. Clean thermocouple assembly (Refer to 72-00-00,
5, figure 14) by wiping with clean lint-free cloth slight- A. Secure leads of four thermocouple assemblies (Re-
ly dampened with dry cleaning solvent (Refer to 72-00- fer to 72-00-00, 5, figure 14) to combustor and bearing
00, table 15, item 13). After cleaning, wipe with dry, support housing (12) with screws (Refer to 77-20-02,
lint-free cloth to remove residual solvent. 14, figure 1), screws (7 and 10), clamps (8, 9, and 13)
brackets (12), and nuts (11).
B. Remove corrosion, using crocus cloth (Refer to
72-00-00, table 15, item 12) and dry cleaning solvent
(Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 13).
77-20-02
9
ZuAVCD LYCOMING OlVISiON
4 5
AFT VIEW
XA-1053-124
Figure 1. Thermocouple Junction Box and Leads
77-20-02

DATE Mar 24/81 A WOO LYCOMING DIVIS1QN
STRATPORO, CONNECTICUT
NO. Ë

On page 11/12, paragraph 7. and step B. are revised as follows: (Step C. is

deleted.)
7. CONTINUITY CHECK OF THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY. Proceed as follows:
B. Separately check continuity between each of green wires and

white wire. Replace assembly if continuity does not exist.
Sheet 1 of 1
Key to Figuæ 1.
1. Bolt 6. Bolt 11. Nut

2. Washer 7. Screw 12. Bracket
3. Nut 8. Clamp 13. Clamp
4. Mounting Bracket 9. Clamp 14. . Screw
5. Thermocouple Junction Box 10. Screw
B. Coat threads of bolts (Refer to 72-00-00, 7 and D. Install igniter plugs (18) into support housing (12).
8, figure 14), with Ease-off 990 (Refer to 72-00-00, Tighten plugs 40 to 50 inch-pounds torque.
table 15, item 14). Install new gasket (Refer to 72-00-
00, 10, figure 14) on each thermocouple assembly. E. Install combustor turbine module (Refer to 72-00-
Install thermocouple assemblies (5) into support hous- 00, paragraph 26).
ing (12) and secure with thermocouple mounting
plates (4), key washers (6 and 9) and secure with bolts 7. RESISTANCE CHECK OF THERMOCOUPLEAS-
(7 and 8). Tighten bolts as required. Bend tabs of SEMBLY.Proceed as follows:
key washers into bolt heads.
A. Tag and disconnect white wire and two green
C. Install liner assembly (1). Lubricate threads of wires from each side of junction box (Refer to 77-20-02,
bolts (16) with Ease-Off 990 (Refer to 72-00-00, table 5, figure 1).
15, item 14). Install liner assembly (Refer to 72-00-00,
1, figure 14) into support housing (12) and secure with B. Separately check resistance between each of green
lockwashers (15) and bolts (16). Tighten bolts as re- wires and white wire.
quired. Bend tabs of lockwashers into bolt heads.
C. Resistance shall be 2.45 to 2.65 ohms at 21°C
(70°F).
77-20-02

INDICATING SYSTEM
1. GEARBOX AND SCAVENGECHIP DETECTOR 6. CLEANING OF GEARBOX AND SCAVENGE CHIP

ASSEMBLIES. DETECTOR ASSEMBLIES.Clean all parts using dry
cleaning solvent method. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph
2. REMOVAL OF GEARBOX CHIP DETECTOR AS- 15.)
SEMBLY. Remove chip detector (Refer to 72-00-00,
6, figure 2) and packing (5). 7. INSPECTIONOF GEARBOX AND SCAVENGE
CHIP DETECTOR ASSEMBLIES.Proceed as follows:
3. REMOVAL OF SCAVENGECHIP DETECTOR AS-
SEMBLY(IF INSTALLED). A. Visually inspect all parts for severe damage. Re-
place if defective.
NOTE
B. Visually inspect for damaged threads. Repair if
The scavenge chip detector is aircraft damage is evident as outlined in 77-30-01, paragraph 8.
mounted. (Refer to 71-00-00, figure
6). If removal of the scavenge chip 8. REPAIR OF GEARBOX AND SCAVENGECHIP
detector is required, refer to aircraft DETECTOR ASSEMBLIES.Repair damaged threads.
maintenance manual for instructions. (Refer to 70-00-00, paragraph 26).
4. DISASSEMBLYOF GEARBOX CHIP DETECTOR 9. REASSEMBLYOF GEARBOX CHIP DETECTOR AS-

ASSEMBLY. SEMBLY.Proceed as follows:
NOTE A. Install packing (Refer to 77-30-01, 2, figure 1) on

gearbox chip detector element (3).
In following step, if excessive amount
of chips are evident upon removal of B. Install element into chip detector body (1). Tighten
element, perform lubrication system eleinent 30 to 40 inch-pounds torque.
contamination troubleshooting. (Refer
to 72-00-00, paragraph 13). 10. REASSEMBLYOF SCAVENGECHIP DETECTOR
ASSEMBLY. The scavenge chip detector element in-
A. Remove chip detector element (Refer to 77-30-01, corporates a quick-disconnect mechanism for ease of
3, figure 1). installation. If the scavenge chip detector housing was
not removed from the system and only the element re-
B. Remove packing (2). moved, check for leakage. None allowed. Install packing
on element and install element in scavenge chip detector
5. DISASSEMBLYOF SCAVENGECHIP DETECTOR housing.
ASSEMBLY.
11. INSTALLATION OF GEARBOX CHIP DETECTOR
NOTE ASSEMBLY.Proceed as follows:
The element is contained in the scavenge A. Coat new packing (Refer to 72-00-00, 5, figure 2)
chip detector housing and incorporates with shortening (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 19)
a quick-disconnect mechanism for ease of and install on chip detector (Refer to 72-00-00, 6, fig-
removal. ure 2).
In following step, if excessive amount of

B. Install chip detector in gearbox case assembly (113).
chips are evident upon removal of element '
Tighten chip detector 80 to 100 inch-pounds torque.
perform lubrication system contamination
troubleshooting. (Refer to 72-00-00, para" 12. INSTALLATION OF SCAVENGE CHIP DETECTOR
graph 13). ASSEMBLY. Refer to aircraft maintenance manual for
A. Remove element from the scavenge chip detector scavenge chip detector installation instructions. Check
housing. for leakage. None allowed.
B, Remove packing from the element.
77-30-01
13
JAVCO LYCOMING OlVISlON
LEGEND
TORLQUE
XA-1053125
1. Chip Detector Body 3. Chip Detector Element

2. Packing 4. Chip Detector Assembly
Figure 1. Gaarbox Chip Detector Assembly
(To Be Supplied At Later Date.)
Figure 2. Scavenge Chip Detector Assembly
77-30-01

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Section
Paragraph Subject - Page
1. TubeAssemblies ...............................
79-20-01 3
2. Removal of Tube Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-01 3
3. Cleaning of Tube Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-01 3
4. Inspection of Tube Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-01 3
5. Repair of Tube Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-01 3
6. Installation of Tube Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-01 5
1. CheckValves ..................................
79-20-02 7
2. Removalof Check Valves......................... 79-20-02 7
3. Cleaning of Check Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-02 7
4. Inspection of Check Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-02 7
5. RepairofCheckValves ..........................
79-20-02 7
6. Installation of Check Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-02 7
1. Oil Pump and Filter Assembly . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

79-20-03 9
2. Removal of Oil Pump and Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-03 9
3. Disassembly of Oil Pump and Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20.03 9
4. Cleaning of Oil Pump and Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-03 9
5. Inspection of Oil Pump and Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-03 9
6. Repair of Oil Pump and Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-03 9
7. Reassembly of Oil Pump and Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-03 9
8. Installation of Oil Pump and Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-03 11
9. Adjustment of Oil Pump and Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-03 11
1. Oil Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

79-30-00 13
2. Removal of Oil Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-30-00 13
3. Cleaning of Oil Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-30-00 13
4. Inspection of Oil Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-30-00 13
5. Installation of Oil Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-30-00 13
Chapter/Section
1. LubricationSystem ..............................
79-20-01 4
2. Repair of Tube Assembly Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79-20-01 5
1. Oil Pump and Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

79-20-03 10
79-00-00
1/2
LUBIIICATION SYSTEM
I. TUBE ASSEMBLIES. C. Pressure-flush for clogging. Repair as outlined in

paragraph 5.
2. REMOVAL OF TUBE ASSEMBLIES. Proceed as
follows: D. Inspect flange of tube asseinbly (19) for damage.
Repair or replace as outlined in paragraph 5.
Protect all lines, fittings and parts with clean caps or
plugs to prevent contamination. E. Inspect flanges or fittings on tube assemblies (1,
18, and 21) for damage. Replace as outlined in para-
A. Disconnect or remove tube assemblies and electri- graph 5.
cal connectors as required. Tag each disconnected or
removed tube assembly and electrical connectors and F. Inspect sleeves on tube assemblies (7, 9, and 19)
identify as to nomenclature and location. Retain all for damage. Replace as outlined in paragraph 5.
mounting hardware for future reinstallation.
B. Tag and note location of all clamps, ties, and 5. REPAIR OF TUBE ASSEMBLIES. Proceed as fol-
brackets to ensure their reinstallation in correct posi- lows:
tion.
A. Pressure-flush clogged passages of tube assemblies
3. CLEANING OF TUBE ASSEMBLIES. Clean tube (Refer to 79-20-01, 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 18, 19, and 21,
assemblies (Refer to 79-20-01, 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 18, figure 1) with dry cleaning solvent (Ref. 72-00-00,
19 and 21, figure 1) by dry cleaning solvent method. table 15, item 13).
B. Repair damaged flange of tube assembly (Refer
4. INSPECTION OF TUBE ASSEMBLIES.Proceed as to 79-20-01, 19, figure 1) as follows:
follow.:
(1) Machine mating surface of flange flat to re-
A. Visually for severe damage, cracks, dents, or move up to 0.010 inch material for cleanup; a minimum
evidence of damage that could cause leaks. Replace flange thickness of 0.250 inch must be maintained.
if damage is evident. (Refer to 79-20-01, figure 2).
B. Visually for damaged threads. Repair as outlined

79-20-01
3
JAVCD LYCOMING OlVISiON
21
20
16
'
19
2 e
17 9
'
18 23
ll
X-1053-132
Figure 1. Lubrication System
79-20-01
4
© 1978. Avco Lvcomina Division
Key to Figure 1.
1. Tube Assembly 13. Lockwasher

2. Tube Assembly 14. Bolt
3. Tee 15. Metal Gasket
4. Tube Assembly 16. Chafing Sleeve
5. Tee 17. Oil Feed Check Valve
6. Tube Assembly 18. Tube Assembly
7. Tube Assembly 19. Tube Assembly
8. Tube Assembly 20. Nipple
9. TubeAssembly 21. Tube Assembly
10. Bolt 22. Stop Check Valve
11. Gasket
Metal 23. Cable Tie
12. Metal Gasket
D. Replace damaged sleeves on tube assemblies (7, 9,

IN. DIA
and 19) as follows:
0.385
32
(1) Soften braze, as required, and remove dam-
i 0.015 IN· 0.025
R. MAX
IN. aged sleeve.
(2) Using Enstrip A (Refer to 72-00-00, table

5 IN. MIN
15, item 17), strip all remaining braze residue from
tube assembly.
I
XA-1012 227
(3) IRStall new sleeve on end of tube assembly
and braze in place by induction or torch-braze procedure
Figure 2. Repair of Tube Assembly Flange (Refer to 72-00-00, paragraph 33) using brazing material
(72-00-00, table 15, item 7).
(2) Ensure a counterbore depth of 0.022 to E. Repair all damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00,
0.025 inch is maintained. Counterbore, as required, to paragraph 26).
maintain proper depth.
(3) Flush tube assembly with dry cleaning sol- 6. INSTALLATION OF TUBE ASSEMBLIES. Con-
vent (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 13) to remove nect tube assemblies to proper parts/connectors ob-
all chips
serving tags installed at removal. Tighten all fittings
C. Replace damaged flanges or fittings on tube assem- as required.
blies (Refer to 79-20-01, 1, 18, 19, and 21, figure 1)
as follows:
(1)Soften braze, as required, and remove dam-

aged flange or fitting from tube assembly end, using
Enstrip A (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item 17).
(2) Strip all remaining braze residue from tube

assembly.
(3) Properly position new flange or fitting on

end of tube assembly and braze in place by induction
or torch-braze procedure (Ref. 70-00-00, paragraph 33)
using braze material (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, item
7).
79-20-01
DATE Apr 26/79
n AWWCO LYCOMING DIVISION
NO. STRATFORD.CONNGCTICUT

THIS CHANGE APPLIESTOL LTP 101-2 Maintenance Manual
1NSERTTHIS PAGE Facing Page 7/8, 79-20-02
On page 7/8, paragraph 6. , steps A. and C. are revised as follows:
A. Install oil feed check valve. (Refer to 79-20-01, 17, figure 1)

with flow arrow toward rear of engine into tube assembly (9). Hand-tighten.
C. Install stop check valve (22) with flow arrow toward front of en-
gine into tube assembly (8). Hand-tighten.
BLURPRTNT \
MAsŒER STATION
\
JUN
1 . 1
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
1. CHECK VALVES.
NOTE
2. REMOVAL OF CHECK VALVES. (Refer to 79-20-

01, 17 and 22, figure 1). Proceed as follows: Surface shall be a smooth uniform
conical surface free from burrs, tool
A. Disconnect tube assemblies (9 and 19) from oil marks, and visible flat spots, except
feed check valve (17). annular tool marks will be allowed
up to 100 micro-inches maximum.
B. Remove check valve (17).
B. Repair nicks, burrs, and dents of check valve
C. Disconnect tube assemblies (8 and 18) from (Refer to 79-20-01, 22, figure 1) by cleaning conical
stop check valve (22). surface, using a tool cutter set at a 37-degree angle
of a lathe.
D. Remove check valve (22)
6. INSTALLATION OF CHECK VALVES. Proceed as
follows'
3. CLEANING OF CHECK VALVES. Clean outside
surface of check valves (Refer to 79-20-01, 17 and
CAUTION
22, figure 1) with dry cleaning solvent (Refer to
72-00-00, table 15, item 13)
IF CHECK VALVES ARE INSTALLED
WITH ARROW POINTING IN THE
4. INSPECTION OF CHECK VALVES. Proceed as fol- WRONG DIRECTION, OIL STARVATION
lows: OF BEARINGS MAY OCCUR.
A. Visually for cracks. If cracks are evident, replace A. Install oil feed check valve. (Refer to 79-20-01,
check valve. (Refer to 79-20-01, 17 and 22, figure 17, figure 1) with flow arrow toward front of engine
1)· into tube assembly (9). Hand-tighten.
B. Visually for damaged threads. Repair as outlined B. Connect tubr assembly (19) to check valve (17).
in 79-20-01, paragraph 5· Tighten as required.
C. Visually inspect check valve (22) for nicks, burrs, C. Install stop check valve (22) with flow arrow
and dents. Repair as outlined in paragraph 5.
toward rear of engine into tube assembly (8). Hand-
tighten.
5. REPAIR OF CHECK VALVES. Proceed as follows:
D. Connect tube assembly (18) to check valve (22).
A. Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00,
Tighten as required.
paragraph 26).
79-20-02

«dAVCO LYCOMING DIVISION
DATE Oct 31/79 STRATFORD. CONNECTICUT
NO.

On page 9, paragraph 3., step F. is revised as follows:
F. Remove retaining ring (8) from oil pump bore. Remove element
guide (7) and packing (6).
Steps G. (1) and G. (2) are revised as follows:
(1) Remove two cap screws (10) that secure impending bypass
indicator (11).
(2) Remove indicator (11) from bowl (14). Remove packing (12).
Also, paragraph 7., steps A. (1) and A. (2) are revised as follows:
(1) Install packing (12) on impending bypass indicator (11).
(2)Install impending bypass indicator (11) in bowl (14) and

secure with two cap screws (10). Tighten cap screws to 17 to 19 inch-
pounds torque and lockwire.
Sheet 1 of 1
AVCD LYCOMING OlVISJON
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
1. OIL PUMP AND FILTER ASSEMBLY. A. Clean external surface of oil pump assembly (Re-
fer to 79-20-03, 22, figure 1) by wiping with a clean
2. REMOVAL OF OIL PUMP AND FILTER ASSEMBLY. cloth dampened with dry cleaning solvent (Refer to
Proceed as follows: 72-00-00, table 15, item 13).
NOTE B. Clean all other parts using dry cleaning solvent

Tag connections to ensure correct re-
installation and install clean caps and 5. INSPECTION OF OIL PUMP AND FILTER ASSEM-
plugs, to prevent. contamination. BLY. Proceed as follows:
A. Disconnect tube assemblies (Refer to 79-20-01, A. Visually inspect oil pump assembly (Refer to
6, 8, and 9, figure 1.) 79-20-03, 22, figure 1) for cracks, thread damage,
and sheared drive shaft. If damage is evident, replace
B. Remove nuts (Refer to 79-20-03, 24, figure 1) oil pump.
and washers (23), securing oil pump and filter assem-
bly (22). Remove oil pump and filter assembly and B. Manually rotate oil pump drive shaft and check
packings (20 and 21). for seizing. If seized, replace oil pump.
3. DISASSEMBLYOF OIL PUMP AND FILTER AS- C. Inspect all other parts for cracks, dents, and
SEMBLY. Proceed as follows: thread damage. If cracks or dents are evident, replace
parts. Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 79-20-03,
A. Remove tee (Refer to 79-20-03, 17, figure 1), paragraph 6.)
nipple (18), and packing (19).
D. Test/check oil pump and filter assembly as out-
B. Remove elbow (1), nipple 15, check valve (2) lined in paragraph 9.)
and packings (3 and 6).
6. REPAIR OF OIL PUMP AND FILTER ASSEMBLY.
C. Remove oil temperature transmitter (5) and pack- Proceed as follow:
ing (4).
A. Repair damaged threads. (Refer to 70-00-00,
D. Remove bowl (14) and packing (13). paragraph 26.)
E. Remove filter element (9). B. For all other repairs, return oil pump and filter
assembly to a vendor-approved overhaul facility.
F. Remove retaining ring (8) from oil pump bore.
Remove valve assembly (7) and packing (6). 7. REASSEMBLY OF OIL PUMP AND FILTER AS-
SEMBLY. Proceed as follows:
G. If required, remove impending bypass indicator
(11) as follows: A. If required, install impending bypass indicator
(1) Remove retaining ring (10) that secures im-
pending bypass indicator. (1) Coat packing (12) with shortening (Refer
to 72-00-00, table 15, item 19) and install in bowl.
(2) Apply sufficient pressure to remove indi- (Refer to 79-20-03, 14, figure 1).
cator. Remove packing (12).
(2) Position impending bypass indicator in hous-
4. CLEANING OF OIL PUMP AND FILTER ASSEM- ing. Install retaining ring (10) in bowl (14) to secure
BLY. Proceed as follows: indicator.
79-20-03
9
24
22
21
17
16
15
25
14
X-1053-138
Figure L Oil Pump and Filter Assembly
79-20-03

JAVCO LYCOMING DIVISION DATE Oct 31/79
STRATPORD, CONNECT1CtJT
NO.
MANUAL CHANGE NOTKE

X.10E3.115A
Figure 1. Oil Pump and Filter Assembly
Sheet 1 of 1
^
4
e
Oct 31/79
AMWCO LYCOMING DIVISION
DATE BTRATPOND, CONNECTICUT
NO. I Rev
This MCN supersedes IK:N No. 7 Rev 1 dated Apr 9/79. Please remove and discard
MCN No. 7 Rev 1.
On page 11/12, Key to Figure 1., items 7. and 10. are revised as follows:
7. Element Guide
10. Cap Screw
Paragraph 7., step E. is revised as follows:
B. Install packing (6) on element guide (7). Install element guide

into oil pump (22) and secure with retaining ring (8).
Step C. is revised and CAUTION following step C. is added as follows:
C. Install new filter element (9) in bowl (14).
CAUTION
IF OIL PUMP WAS REPLACED, ENSURE THAT ELEMENT GUIDE

(7) WAS INSTALLED IN REPLACEMENTPUMP PRIOR TO IN-
STALLATION OF BOWL (14).
Paragraph 8., CAUTION prior to step A. is added as follows:
CAUTION
IF OIL PUMP WAS REPLACED, ENSURE THAT ELEMENT GUIDE

(7) WAS INSTALLED IN REPLACEMENT PUMP PRIOR TO IN-
STALLATION OF BOWL (14).
Also, CAUTION following step B. is added as follows:
CAUTION
ENSURE THAT OIL LINES AND FITTINGS ARE SECURE AND EE

FROM DAMAGE THAT COULD CAUSE LEAKAGE (SUCH AS CHAFI
CRACKS, DENTS, BURRS, OR SCRATCHES) PARTICULARLY ON
OIL-IN (SUCTION) SIDE OF THE OIL SYSTEM. LEAKS IN THE
SUCTION SIDE OF THE OIL SYSTEM ARE DIFFICULT TO DETECT,
,
SINCE THERE MAY BE NO VISIBLE OIL LEAKAGE, AND CAN RESULT
IN AIR LEAKING INTO THE OIL PUMP CAUSING A REDUCTION OR
LOSS OF OIL PRESSURE.
Sheet 1 of 1
Key to Figure 1.
1. Elbow Ì3. Packing

2. Check Valve 14. Bowl
3. Packing 15. Nippler
4. Packing 16. Packing
5. Oil Temperature Transmitter 10. Tee
6. Packing 18. Nipple
7. Valve Assembly 19. Packing
8. Retaining Ring 20. Paoking
9. Filter Element 21. Packing
10. Retaining Ring 22. Oil Pump and Filter Assembly
11. Impending-Bypass Indicator 23. Washer
12. Packing 24. Nut
25. Filter Assembly
B. Install packing (6) on valve assembly (7). Install NOTE .
element guide into oil pump (22) and secure with retain-
ing spring (8). If airframe oil tank is below level of oil
pump inlet, þumpmust be printed as in-
C. Install new filter element (9) into oil pump. dicated in following step B. If oil tank
is above:oil pump irlet, disregard step B.
D. Install packing (13) on bowl (14); then install bowl. and proceed to step C.
Tighten to 50 inch-pounds torque.
B. Attach source of approved engine lubricating oil
E. Install packings (3, 16, and 19), check valve (2), to oil pump inlet and motor engine until oil pressure is
nipples (15 and 18), elbow (1) and tee (17) in oil pump indicated on cockpit gage.
and filter assembly (22).
C. Reconnect tube assembly (Refer to 79-20-01, 6,
F. Install packing (4) and oil temperature transmitter figure 1), to elbow (Refer to 79-20-03, 1, figure 1) and
(5) into oil pump and filter assembly. tighten as required. Reconnect tube assembly (Refer to
79-20-01, 9, figure 1) to tee;(R,efer to]9-2()-03, 17, figure
8. INSTALLATIONOF OIL PUMP AND FILTER AS- 1) and tighten as required. Reconnect tube assembly (Re-
SEMBLY.Proceed as follows: fer to 79-20-01, 8, figure 1) to nipple (Refer to 79-20-03,
15, figure 1) and tighten as required.
A. Lubricate packings (Refer to 79-20-03, 20 and 21,
figure 1) with shortening (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, 9. ADJUSTMENT OF OIL PUMP AND FILTER AS-
item 19). Install two packings and oil pump and filter SEMBLY.Ïf'oilpressure oil adjustment is required, pro-
assembly (Refer to 79-20-03, 22, figure 1) onto acces- ceed as follows:
sory/reduction gearbox module. Secure with washers .
A. Remove lockwire from slbtted adjustment slug on

(23) and nuts (24). Tighten nuts as required
right side of oil pump and filter housing (Refer to 79-
20-03, 22, figure 1).
B. Turn clockwise to increase pressure; counter-clock-
wise to decrease. Run erigine to verify proper adjustment
and lockwire.
79-20-03
AVCD LYCOMING OiVISJON
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
1. OIL TEMPERATURETRANSMITTER. B. Visually for damaged threads. Replace if damage is

evident.
2. REMOVALOF OIL TEMPERATURETRANSMITTER.
Remove electrical connector and remove oil temperature C. Visually for bent, broken, or loose pins on receptacle.
transmitter (Refer to 79-20-03, 5, figure 1) and packing Replace if damage is evident.
(4).
D. Visually for cracked or bent probe. Replace if dam-
3. CLEANING OF OIL TEMPERATURETRANSMITTER. age is evident.
Clean oil temperature transmitter (Refer to 79-20-03, 5,
figure 1) by wiping surfaces with a clean cloth dampened 5. INSTALLATIONOF OIL TEMPERATURE TRANS-
with dry cleaning solvent. (Refer to 72-00-00, table 15, MITTER. Proceed as followa:
item 13).
A. Install new packings (Refer to 79-20-03, 4, figure 1)
4. INSPECTIONOF OIL TEMPERATURE TRANSMIT- and oil temperature transmitter (5) into oil pump and fil-
TER. Proceed as follows: ter housing (22).
A. Visually for damage. Replace if damage is evident. .

B. Connect electrical connector.
79.30-00

Lycoming LTP EMM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lycoming LTP EMM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DATE Jap 22/81

GAS TURBINE ENGINE

All rights reserved. No part of this work may be repro-

THIS PUBLICATION SUPERSEDES LYCOMING NO. 76-9 DATED 1 FEBRUARY

AVCD LYCOMlNG DIVISION

GAS TURBINE ENGINE

All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reprà

APAVCD LYOOMING OIVISION

LTP101 Maintenance Manual

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

List of Effective Pages 1 thru 4 Aug 1/78

Contents 1 thru 2 Aug 1/78

1-00-00 1 thru 4 Aug 1/78

70-00-00 1 thru 62 Aug 1/78

71-00-00 1 thru 32 Aug 1/78

72-00-00 1 thru 62 Aug 1/78

72-20-00 1 thru 6 Aug 1/78

72-30-00 1 thru 12 Aug 1/78

72-40-00 1 thru 8 Aug 1/78

72-50-00 1 thru 12 Aug 1/78

72-60-00 1 thru 12 Aug 1/78

73-00-00 1 thru 18 Aug 1/78

74-00-00 1 thru 12 Aug 1/78

75-00-00 1 thru 16 Aug 1/78

77-00-00 1 thru 14 Aug 1/78

79-00-00 1 thru 14 Aug 1/78

RECORD OF MANUAL REVISIONS

REV ISSUE DATE REV ISSUE DATE REV ISSUE DATE

2 © 1978, Avco Lycorning Division

TŒCOltD OF MANUAL CIIANCE NOTICES

DATE DATE DATE INCOllPORATED IN' O

1RECORD OF MANUAL CHANCE NOTICES

MCN DATE DATE DATE INCORPORATED INTO

fŒCORD OF MANUAL CIIANCE NOTICES

MCN DATE DATE DATE INCORPORATED INTO

DATE DATE DATE INCORPORATED INTO

INSERT THIS PAGE Facing page 3/4

On page 3/4, List of Service Bulletins paragraph is revised as follows:

LIST OF SERVICE BULLETINS. Following is a numerical list of service bul-

Service Bulletin Manual Revision

101A-72-0001 Revision No. 2 30 Sept, 80 No Effect

101A-72-0002 Revision No. 2 9 Jul, 80 No Effect

101A-72-0003 31 Aug, 78 No Effect

101A-75-0005 Revision No. 1 30 Apr, 80 No Effect

101A-73-0006 15 May, 80 No Effect

101A-79-0007 Revision No. 1 15 Jun, 79 No Effect

101A-72-0009 30 Nov, 79 No Effect

101A-72-0012 Revision No. 1 29 Aug, 80 No Effect

101A-72-0013 15 Oct, 79 No Effect

101A-72-0014 21 Dec, 79 No Effect

LTP101 Maintenance Manual

Service Bulletin Manual Revision

101A-72-0001 15 Nov., 77 No Effect

101A-72-0002 15 Dec., 77 No Effect

© 1978, Avco Lycoming Division 3/4

LTP101 Maintenance Manual

70-00-00 Standard Practices, Time and Cycle Coding

71-00-00 Power Plant

72-00-00 Engine, Consumable Materials

72-20-00 Air Inlet Section

72-30-00 Compressor Section

72-40-00 Combustion Section

72-50-00 Turbine Section

72-60-00 Accessory Drives/Reduction Gear Section